2018 Nissan Altima Sedan | Owner's Manual And Maintenance Information USA Owner

User Manual: Pdf 2018 Nissan Altima Owners Manual PDF | SERVICE MANUAL OWNERS

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 467 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

2018 Nissan Altima Sedan Owner's Manual and Maintenance Information
OM18EA 0L33U1
Table of Contents
Owner's Manual Supplement

2018 ALTIMA SEDAN

OWNER’S MANUAL

and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION

For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.

Owner’s Manual Supplement

The information contained within this supplement updates the following

information in the 2017 NISSAN Sentra, 2017 NISSAN Altima, 2018 NISSAN

Sentra and 2018 NISSAN Altima Owner’s Manual.

• “NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System (front seats)” section of the Owner’s

Manual.

Read carefully and keep in vehicle.

Printing: November 2017

Publication No.: SU18EA 0OCSU0

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

(front seats)

WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the pas-

senger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-

tem, please observe the following

items.

∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rear

seat to push or pull on the seatback

pocket.

∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than

9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head

restraint/headrest or in the seatback

pocket.

∙ Make sure that there is nothing press-

ing against the rear of the seatback,

such as a child restraint installed in

the rear seat or an object stored on

the floor.

∙ Make sure that there is no object

placed under the front passenger

seat.

∙ Make sure that there is no object

placed between the seat cushion and

center console or between the seat

cushion and the door.

∙ If a forward facing child restraint is

installed in the front passenger seat,

do not position the front passenger

seat so the child restraint contacts the

instrument panel. If the child restraint

does contact the instrument panel,

the system may determine the seat is

occupied and the passenger air bag

may deploy in a collision. Also the

front passenger air bag status light

may not illuminate. For additional in-

formation about installing and using

child restraints, refer to "Child re-

straints" in this section.

∙ Confirm the operating condition with

the front passenger air bag status

light.

∙ If you notice that the front passenger

air bag status light is not operating as

described in this section, get the oc-

cupant classification system checked.

It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ Until you have confirmed with a

dealer that your passenger seat occu-

pant classification system is working

properly, position the occupants in

the rear seating positions.

∙ Do not position the front passenger

seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the

front seat does contact the rear seat,

the air bag system may determine a

sensor malfunction has occurred and

the front passenger air bag status

light may illuminate and the supple-

mental air bag warning light may

flash.

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN

Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and

front passenger seats. This system is de-

signed to meet certification requirements

under U.S.regulations.It is also permitted in

Canada. However, all of the information,

cautions and warnings in this manual

still apply and must be followed.

The driver supplemental front-impact air

bag is located in the center of the steering

wheel. The front passenger supplemental

front-impact air bag is mounted in the

dashboard above the glove box. The front

air bags are designed to inflate in higher

severity frontal collisions, although they

may inflate if the forces in another type of

collision are similar to those of a higher

severity frontal impact. They may not in-

flate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle

damage (or lack of it) is not always an indi-

cation of proper front air bag system op-

eration.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

monitors information from the crash zone

sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat

belt buckle sensors and occupant classifi-

cation sensor (weight sensor). Inflator op-

eration is based on the severity of a colli-

sion and seat belt usage for the driver. For

the front passenger, the occupant classifi-

cation sensor is also monitored. Based on

information from the sensor, only one front

air bag may inflate in a crash,depending on

the crash severity and whether the front

occupants are belted or unbelted. Addi-

tionally, the front passenger air bag may be

automatically turned off under some con-

ditions, depending on the weight detected

on the front passenger seat and how the

seat belt is used. If the front passenger air

bag is OFF, the front passenger air bag sta-

tus light will be illuminated. For additional

information, refer to “Front passenger air

bag and status light” in this section. One

front air bag inflating does not indicate im-

proper performance of the system.

If you have any questions about your air

bag system, it is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer to obtain information

about the system. If you are considering

modification of your vehicle due to a dis-

ability, you may also contact NISSAN. Con-

tact information is contained in the front of

this Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud

noise may be heard, followed by the re-

lease of smoke. This smoke is not harmful

and does not indicate a fire. Care should be

taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irrita-

tion and choking. Those with a history of a

breathing condition should get fresh air

promptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat

belts, help to cushion the impact force on

the face and chest of the front occupants.

They can help save lives and reduce seri-

ous injuries. However, an inflating front air

bag may cause facial abrasions or other

injuries. Front air bags do not provide re-

straint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat

belts should be correctly worn and the

driver and front passenger seated upright

as far as practical away from the steering

wheel or instrument panel. The front air

bags inflate quickly in order to help protect

the front occupants. Because of this, the

force of the front air bag inflating can in-

crease the risk of injury if the occupant is

too close to, or is against, the front air bag

module during inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a

collision.

The front air bags operate only when the

ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-

tion.

After placing the ignition switch in the

ON position, the supplemental air bag

warning light illuminates. The supple-

mental air bag warning light will turn off

after about 7 seconds if the system is

operational.

Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed

to automatically turn OFF under some

conditions. Read this section carefully

to learn how it operates. Proper use of

the seat, seat belt and child restraints is

necessary for most effective protec-

tion. Failure to follow all instructions in

this manual concerning the use of

seats, seat belts and child restraints can

increase the risk or severity of injury in

an accident.

Status light

The front passenger seat is equipped with

an occupant classification sensor (weight

sensor) that turns the front passenger air

bag on or off depending on the weight ap-

plied to the front passenger seat. The sta-

tus of the front passenger air bag (ON or

OFF) is indicated by the front passenger air

bag status light which is located on

the instrument panel.

After the ignition switch is placed in the

"ON" position, the front passenger air bag

status light on the instrument panel illumi-

nates for about 7 seconds and then turns

off or remains illuminated depending on

the front passenger seat occupied status.

The light operates as follows:

CONDITION DESCRIPTION PASSENGER AIR BAG STA-

TUS LIGHT ( )FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG STATUS

Empty Empty front passenger seat ON (illuminated) INHIBITED

Nobody/Somebody Bag or Child or Child Restraint or

Small Adult in front passenger seat ON (illuminated) INHIBITED

Adult Adult in the front passenger seat OFF (dark) ACTIVATED

In addition to the above, certain objects

placed on the front passenger seat may

also cause the light to operate as de-

scribed above depending on their weight.

For additional information related to the

normal operation and troubleshooting of

this occupant classification sensor system,

please refer to “Normal operation” and

“Troubleshooting” in this section.

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed to

automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is

operated under some conditions as de-

scribed below in accordance with U.S. regu-

WRS0475

lations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF,

it will not inflate in a crash.The driver air bag

and other air bags in your vehicle are not

part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help

reduce the risk of injury or death from an

inflating air bag to certain front passenger

seat occupants, such as children, by requir-

ing the air bag to be automatically turned

OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the

requirements.

The occupant classification sensor in this

vehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to

detect an occupant and objects on the

seat by weight. For example, if a child is in

the front passenger seat, the NISSAN Ad-

vanced Air Bag System is designed to turn

the front passenger air bag OFF in accor-

dance with the regulations. Also, if a child

restraint of the type specified in the regula-

tions is on the seat, its weight and the

child’s weight can be detected and cause

the air bag to turn OFF.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who

are properly seated and using the seat belt

as outlined in this manual should not

cause the front passenger air bag to be

automatically turned OFF. For small adults

it may be turned OFF, however if the occu-

pant takes his/her weight off the seat

cushion (for example, by not sitting upright,

by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by

otherwise being out of position), this could

cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF.

Always be sure to be seated and wearing

the seat belt properly for the most effective

protection by the seat belt and supple-

mental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and

children be properly restrained in a rear

seat. NISSAN also recommends that ap-

propriate child restraints and booster

seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If

this is not possible, the occupant classifica-

tion sensor is designed to operate as de-

scribed above to turn the front passenger

air bag OFF for specified child restraints as

required by the regulations. Failing to prop-

erly secure child restraints and to use the

ALR mode may allow the restraint to tip or

move in a collision or sudden stop. This can

also result in the passenger air bag inflat-

ing in a crash instead of being OFF. For

additional information about proper use

and installation, refer to “Child restraints” in

this section.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied,

the front passenger air bag is designed not

to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects

placed on the seat could result in air bag

inflation, because of the object’s weight de-

tected by the occupant classification sen-

sor. Other conditions could also result in air

bag inflation, such as if a child is standing

on the seat, or if two children are on the

seat, contrary to the instructions in this

manual. Always be sure that you and all

vehicle occupants are seated and re-

strained properly.

Using the front passenger air bag status

light, you can monitor when the front pas-

senger air bag is automatically turned OFF.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the

front passenger air bag status light is illu-

minated (indicating that the air bag is OFF),

it could be that the person is a small adult,

or is not sitting on the seat properly or not

using the seat belt properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front

seat, the front passenger air bag status

light may or may not be illuminated, de-

pending on the size of the child and the

type of child restraint being used. If the air

bag status light is not illuminated (indicat-

ing that the air bag might inflate in a crash),

it could be that the child restraint or seat

belt is not being used properly. Make sure

that the child restraint is installed properly,

the seat belt is used properly and the occu-

pant is positioned properly. If the air bag

status light is still not illuminated, reposi-

tion the occupant or child restraint in a rear

seat.

If the front passenger air bag status light

will not illuminate even though you believe

that the child restraint, the seat belts and

the occupant are properly positioned, it is

recommended that you take your vehicle

to a NISSAN dealer. A NISSAN dealer can

check system status by using a special

tool. However, until you have confirmed

with a dealer that your air bag is working

properly, reposition the occupant or child

restraint in a rear seat.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and

front passenger air bag status light will

take a few seconds to register a change in

the front passenger seat status.This is nor-

mal system operation and does not indi-

cate a malfunction.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passen-

ger air bag system, the supplemental air

bag warning light , located in the me-

ter and gauges area of the instrument

panel, will be illuminated (blinking or

steadily lit). Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Normal operation

In order for the occupant classification

sensor system to classify the front passen-

ger based on weight, please follow the pre-

cautions and steps outlined below:

Precautions

∙ Make sure that there are no objects

weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on

the seat or placed in the seatback

pocket.

∙ Make sure that a child restraint or other

object is not pressing against the rear

of the seatback.

∙ Make sure that a rear passenger is not

pushing or pulling on the back of the

front passenger seat.

∙ Make sure that the front passenger

seat or seatback is not forced back

against an object on the seat or floor

behind it.

∙ Make sure that there is no object placed

under the front passenger seat.

Steps

1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats”

section of this manual. Sit upright, lean-

ing against the seatback, and centered

on the seat cushion with your feet com-

fortably extended to the floor.

2. Make sure there are no objects on your

lap.

3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the

“Seat belts” section of this manual.

Front passenger seat belt buckle sta-

tus is monitored by the occupant clas-

sification system, and is used as an in-

put to determine occupancy status. So,

it is highly recommended that the front

passenger fasten their seat belt.

4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds

allowing the system to classify the

front passenger before the vehicle is

put into motion.

5. Ensure proper classification by check-

ing the front passenger air bag status

light.

NOTE:

This vehicle’s occupant classification

sensor system generally keeps the clas-

sification locked during driving, so it is

important that you confirm that the

front passenger is properly classified

prior to driving. However, the occupant

classification sensor may recalculate the

weight of the occupant under some con-

ditions (both while driving and when

stopped), so front passenger seat occu-

pants should continue to remain seated

as outlined above.

Troubleshooting

If you think the front passenger air bag

status light is incorrect:

1. If the light is ON with an adult occupying

the front passenger seat:

∙ Occupant is a small adult — the air bag

light is functioning as intended. The

front passenger air bag is suppressed.

However, if the occupant is not a small

adult, then this may be due to the following

conditions that may be interfering with the

weight sensors:

∙ Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning

against the seatback, and centered on

the seat cushion with his/her feet com-

fortably extended to the floor.

∙ A child restraint or other object pressing

against the rear of the seatback.

∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on

the back of the front passenger seat.

∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback

against an object on the seat or floor

behind it.

∙ An object placed under the front pas-

senger seat.

∙ An object placed between the seat

cushion and center console or between

the seat cushion and the door.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a

stop when it is safe to do so. Check and

correct any of the above conditions. Re-

start the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed during

which the front passenger air bag status

light will remain lit for about 7 seconds

initially.

If the light is still ON after this, the person

should be advised not to ride in the front

passenger seat and the vehicle should be

checked as soon as possible. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

2. If the light is OFF with a small adult,

child or child restraint occupying the

front passenger seat.

This may be due to the following con-

ditions that may be interfering with the

weight sensors:

∙ Small adult or child is not sitting upright,

leaning against the seatback, and cen-

tered on the seat cushion with his/her

feet comfortably extended to the floor.

∙ The child restraint is not properly in-

stalled, as outlined in the “Child re-

straints” section of this manual.

∙ An object weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg)

hanging on the seat or placed in the

seatback pocket.

∙ A child restraint or other object pressing

against the rear of the seatback.

∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on

the back of the front passenger seat.

∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback

against an object on the seat or floor

behind it.

∙ An object placed under the front pas-

senger seat.

∙ An object placed between the seat

cushion and center console.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a

stop when it is safe to do so. Check and

correct any of the above conditions. Re-

start the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed during

which the front passenger air bag status

light will remain lit for about 7 seconds

initially.

If the light is still OFF after this, the small

adult, child or child restraint should be re-

positioned in the rear seat and the vehicle

should be checked as soon as possible. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

3. If the light is OFF with no front passen-

ger and no objects on the front pas-

senger seat, the vehicle should be

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer as soon as pos-

sible.

Other supplemental front-impact air

bag precautions

WARNING

∙ Do not place any objects on the steer-

ing wheel pad or on the instrument

panel. Also, do not place any objects

between any occupant and the steer-

ing wheel or instrument panel. Such

objects may become dangerous pro-

jectiles and cause injury if the front air

bags inflate.

∙ Immediately after inflation, several

front air bag system components will

be hot. Do not touch them; you may

severely burn yourself.

∙ No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the supplemental air bag system. This

is to prevent accidental inflation of

the supplemental air bag or damage

to the supplemental air bag system.

∙ Do not make unauthorized changes

to your vehicle’s electrical system,

suspension system or front end struc-

ture. This could affect proper opera-

tion of the front air bag system.

∙ Tampering with the front air bag sys-

tem may result in serious personal in-

jury. Tampering includes changes to

the steering wheel and the instru-

ment panel assembly by placing ma-

terial over the steering wheel pad and

above the instrument panel or by in-

stalling additional trim material

around the air bag system.

∙ Removing or modifying the front pas-

senger seat may affect the function of

the air bag system and result in seri-

ous personal injury.

∙ Modifying or tampering with the front

passenger seat may result in serious

personal injury. For example, do not

change the front seats by placing ma-

terial on the seat cushion or by install-

ing additional trim material, such as

seat covers, on the seat that are not

specifically designed to assure proper

air bag operation. Additionally, do not

stow any objects under the front pas-

senger seat or the seat cushion and

seatback. Such objects may interfere

with the proper operation of the occu-

pant classification sensor (weight

sensor).

∙ No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the seat belt system. This may affect

the front air bag system. Tampering

with the seat belt system may result

in serious personal injury.

∙ It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work on and around

the front air bag system. It is also rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for installation of electrical

equipment. The Supplemental Re-

straint System (SRS) wiring har-

nesses* should not be modified or dis-

connected. Unauthorized electrical

test equipment and probing devices

should not be used on the air bag

system.

∙ A cracked windshield should be re-

placed immediately by a qualified re-

pair facility. A cracked windshield

could affect the function of the

supplemental air bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identifica-

tion.

When selling your vehicle, we request that

you inform the buyer about the front air

bag system and guide the buyer to the

appropriate sections in this Owner’s

Manual.

This manual was prepared to help you un-

derstand the operation and maintenance

of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many

miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure.

Please read through this manual before

operating your vehicle.

A separate Warranty Information Book-

let explains details about the warranties

covering your vehicle. The “Maintenance

and schedules” section of this manual

explains details about maintaining and

servicing your vehicle. Additionally, a

separate Customer Care/Lemon Law

Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to re-

solve any concerns you may have with

your vehicle, and clarify your rights un-

der your state’s lemon law.

When you require any service or have any

questions, a NISSAN dealer will be glad to

assist you with the extensive resources

available to them.

In addition to factory-installed options,

your vehicle may also be equipped with

additional accessories installed prior to de-

livery. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for details concerning the

particular accessories with which your ve-

hicle is equipped. It is important that you

familiarize yourself with all disclosures,

warnings, cautions and instructions con-

cerning proper use of such accessories

prior to operating the vehicle and/or ac-

cessory. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for details concerning the

particular accessories with which your ve-

hicle is equipped.

Before driving your vehicle, please read this

Owner’s Manual carefully. This will ensure

familiarity with controls and maintenance

requirements assisting you in the safe op-

eration of your vehicle.

WARNING

IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION

REMINDERS!

Follow these important driving rules to

help ensure a safe and comfortable trip

for you and your passengers!

∙ NEVER drive under the influence of al-

cohol or drugs.

∙ ALWAYS observe posted speed limits

and never drive too fast for

conditions.

∙ ALWAYS give your full attention to

driving and avoid using vehicle fea-

tures or taking other actions that

could distract you.

∙ ALWAYS use your seat belts and ap-

propriate child restraint systems. Pre-

teen children should be seated in the

rear seat.

FOREWORD READ FIRST—THEN DRIVE SAFELY

∙ ALWAYS provide information about

the proper use of vehicle safety fea-

tures to all occupants of the vehicle.

∙ ALWAYS review this Owner’s Manual

for important safety information.

MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE

This vehicle should not be modified.

Modification could affect its

performance, safety, emissions or du-

rability and may even violate govern-

mental regulations. In addition, dam-

age or performance problems

resulting from modifications may not

be covered under NISSAN warranties.

WARNING

Installing an aftermarket On-Board Di-

agnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses

the port during normal driving, for ex-

ample remote insurance company

monitoring, remote vehicle diagnostics,

telematics or engine reprogramming,

may cause interference or damage to

vehicle systems. We do not recommend

or endorse the use of any aftermarket

OBD plug-in devices, unless specifically

approved by NISSAN. The vehicle war-

ranty may not cover damage caused by

any aftermarket plug-in device.

This manual includes information for all fea-

tures and equipment available on this model.

Features and equipment in your vehicle may

vary depending on model, trim level, options

selected, order, date of production, region or

availability. Therefore, you may find informa-

tion about features or equipment that are

not included or installed on your vehicle.

All information, specifications and illustra-

tions in this manual are those in effect at the

time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to

change specifications, performance, design

or component suppliers without notice and

without obligation. From time to time,

NISSAN may update or revise this manual to

provide Owners with the most accurate in-

formation currently available. Please care-

fully read and retain with this manual all re-

vision updates sent to you by NISSAN to

ensure you have access to accurate and up-

to-date information regarding your vehicle.

Current versions of vehicle Owner’s Manuals

and any updates can also be found in the

Owner section of the NISSAN website at

https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/

navigation/manualsGuide. If you have

questions concerning any information in

your Owner’s Manual, contact NISSAN Con-

sumer Affairs. For contact information, refer

to the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

page in this Owner’s Manual.

WHEN READING THE MANUAL

IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT

THIS MANUAL

You will see various symbols in this manual.

They are used in the following ways:

WARNING

This is used to indicate the presence of

a hazard that could cause death or seri-

ous personal injury. To avoid or reduce

the risk, the procedures must be fol-

lowed precisely.

CAUTION

This is used to indicate the presence of

a hazard that could cause minor or

moderate personal injury or damage to

your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk,

the procedures must be followed

carefully.

If you see this symbol, it means “Do not do

this” or “Do not let this happen.”

If you see a symbol similar to these in an

illustration, it means the arrow points to

the front of the vehicle.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to

these indicate movement or action.

Arrows in an illustration that are similar to

these call attention to an item in the illus-

tration.

CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65

WARNING

Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-

ents, and certain vehicle components

contain or emit chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer and

birth defects or other reproductive

harm. In addition, certain fluids con-

tained in vehicles and certain products

of component wear contain or emit

chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth de-

fects or other reproductive harm.

APD1005

Operating, servicing and maintaining a

passenger vehicle or off-road vehicle

can expose you to chemicals including

engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,

phthalates, and lead, which are known

to the State of California to cause can-

cer and birth defects or other reproduc-

tive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid

breathing exhaust, do not idle the en-

gine except as necessary, service your

vehicle in a well-ventilated area and

wear gloves or wash your hands fre-

quently when servicing your vehicle.

For more information go to

www.P65Warnings.ca.gov.

CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE

ADVISORY

Some vehicle parts, such as lithium bat-

teries, may contain perchlorate material.

The following advisory is provided: “Per-

chlorate Material – special handling may

apply. For additional information, refer to

www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/

perchlorate/”.

BLUETOOTH® is a

trademark owned

by Bluetooth SIG,

Inc. and licensed

to Visteon.

SiriusXM® services

require a

subscription after

trial period and are

sold separately or

as a package. The

satellite service is

available only in

the 48 contiguous

USA and DC.

SiriusXM® satellite

service is also

available in

Canada; see

www.siriusxm.ca.

Manual may be reproduced or stored in a

retrieval system, or transmitted in any

form, or by any means, electronic, me-

chanical, photocopying, recording or oth-

erwise, without the prior written permis-

sion of Nissan North America, Inc.

NISSAN CARES . . .

Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your

NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service

needs.

However, if there is something that your

NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or

you would like to provide NISSAN directly

with comments or questions, please con-

tact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Depart-

ment using our toll-free number:

For U.S. customers

1-800-NISSAN-1

(1-800-647-7261)

For Canadian customers

1-800-387-0122

The Consumer Affairs Department will ask

for the following information:

– Your name, address, and telephone

number

– Vehicle identification number (attached

to the top of the instrument panel on the

driver’s side)

– Date of purchase

– Current odometer reading

– Your NISSAN dealer’s name

– Your comments or questions

You can write to NISSAN with the informa-

tion at:

For U.S. customers

Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

or via e-mail at:

nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.com

For Canadian customers

Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5

or via e-mail at:

information.centre@nissancanada.com

If you prefer, visit us at:

www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers)

www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)

We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.

NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM

Table of

Contents

Illustrated table of contents

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Instruments and controls

Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Starting and driving

In case of emergency

Appearance and care

Do-it-yourself

Maintenance and schedules

Technical and consumer information

Index

0 Illustrated table of contents

Air bags, seat belts and child restraints ..........0-2

Exterior front ....................................0-3

Exterior rear .....................................0-4

Passenger compartment........................0-5

Instrument panel................................0-6

Engine compartment check locations...........0-8

Warning and indicator lights....................0-10

1. Top tether strap anchor (P. 1-23)

2. Rear seat belts (P. 1-12)

3. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

and rollover supplemental air bag

(P. 1-44)

4. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag (P. 1-44)

5. Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-8)

6. Front seat belt with pretensioner(s)

and shoulder height adjuster

(P. 1-12, 1-44)

7. Side-impact pressure sensor

(driver’s side shown; passenger’s

side similar) (P. 1-44)

8. Supplemental air bags (P. 1-44)

9. Front seats (P. 1-2)

10. Occupant classification sensor

(weight sensor) (P. 1-44)

11. Rear seats (P. 1-2)

12. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers

for CHildren) system (P. 1-23)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

LIC3922

AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD

RESTRAINTS

0-2 Illustrated table of contents

1. Power windows (P. 2-49)

2. Windshield (P. 8-19)

3. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-34)

4. Engine hood (P. 3-23)

5. Fog light switch (if so equipped)

(P. 2-35)

Daytime running light system

(Type A) (if so equipped) (P. 2-35)

6. Headlight and turn signal switch

(P. 2-35)

Daytime running light system

(Type B) (if so equipped) (P. 2-35)

Replacing bulbs (P. 8-26)

7. Tire pressure (P. 8-31)

Flat tire (P. 6-3)

Tire chains (P. 8-31)

8. Mirrors (P. 3-30)

9. Door locks (P. 3-4)

NISSAN Intelligent Key® (P. 3-7)

Keys (P. 3-2)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

LII2378

EXTERIOR FRONT

Illustrated table of contents 0-3

1. Rear window and outside mirror

(if so equipped) defroster switch

(P. 2-35)

2. Trunk lid (P. 3-24)

3. Rearview camera (if so equipped)

(P. 4-3)

4. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-26)

5. Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-26)

Fuel recommendation (P. 10-2)

Fuel-filler door (P. 3-26)

6. Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-4)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

LII2379

EXTERIOR REAR

0-4 Illustrated table of contents

1. Power moonroof (if so equipped)

(P. 2-52)

2. Sun visors (P. 3-29)

3. Interior lights (P. 2-54)

4. HomeLink® Universal Transceiver

(if so equipped) (P. 2-56)

Rearview mirror (P. 3-30)

5. Glove box (P. 2-45)

6. Cup holders (P. 2-45)

Console box (P. 2-45)

7. Rear armrest (P. 1-2)

Cup holders (P. 2-45)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

LII2380

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

Illustrated table of contents 0-5

1. Instrument brightness control

(P. 2-35)

Trip computer reset switch (P. 2-3)

2. Vents (P. 4-11)

3. Headlight/fog light (if so

equipped)/turn signal switch

(P. 2-35)

4. Driver supplemental air bag

(P. 1-44)

Horn (P. 2-40)

5. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)

Warning and indicator lights

(P. 2-10)

Vehicle information display (P. 2-18)

6. Paddle shifters (if so equipped)

(P. 5-14)

7. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-34)

8. Hazard warning flasher switch

(P. 6-2)

9. Front passenger air bag status

light (P. 1-44)

10. Navigation system*

(if so equipped)

11. Front passenger supplemental air

bag (P. 1-44)

12. Glove box (P. 2-45)

13. Power outlet (P. 2-43)

14. Heater and air conditioner (P. 4-13)

LIC3763

INSTRUMENT PANEL

0-6 Illustrated table of contents

15. Shift lever (P. 5-14)

16. USB connection port

(if so equipped) (P. 4-24)

Aux jack (P. 4-24)

17. Push-button ignition switch

(P. 5-9)

18. Cruise control main/set switches

(if so equipped) (P. 5-41)

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-43)

Bluetooth® Hands-free Phone

System (P. 4-2, 4-54)

19. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel

controls (P. 3-28)

20. Vehicle information display

controls (P. 2-18)

Steering wheel switch for audio

control (P. 4-48)

21. Hood release (P. 3-23)

22. Trunk opener (P. 3-24)

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

switch (P. 2-42)

Heated steering wheel switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-42)

*: For additional information, refer to the

separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

Illustrated table of contents 0-7

QR25DE engine

1. Power steering fluid reservoir

(P. 8-11)

2. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-5)

3. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-7)

4. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-12)

5. Air cleaner (P. 8-18)

6. Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-21)

7. Battery (P. 8-14)

8. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-7)

9. Radiator cap (P. 8-5)

10. Drive belt location (P. 8-16)

11. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-13)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

LDI2111

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

0-8 Illustrated table of contents

VQ35DE engine

1. Power steering fluid reservoir

(P. 8-11)

2. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-5)

3. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-7)

4. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-12)

5. Air cleaner (P. 8-18)

6. Fuse/Fusible link box (P. 8-21)

7. Battery (P. 8-14)

8. Engine oil dipstick (P. 8-7)

9. Radiator cap (P. 8-5)

10. Drive belt location (P. 8-16)

11. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

(P. 8-13)

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

LDI2112

Illustrated table of contents 0-9

Warning

light

Name Page

Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS)

warning light

2-11

Automatic Emer-

gency Braking

(AEB) system

warning light

2-11

Brake warning

light

2-11

Charge warning

light

2-12

Low tire pressure

warning light

2-12

Master warning

light

2-14

Warning

light

Name Page

Power steering

warning light

2-14

Seat belt warning

light and chime

2-15

Supplemental air

bag warning light

2-15

Indicator

light

Name Page

Front fog light in-

dicator light (if so

equipped)

2-15

Front passenger

air bag status

light

2-15

High beam indi-

cator light (blue)

2-16

Malfunction Indi-

cator Light (MIL)

2-16

Indicator

light

Name Page

Overdrive OFF

indicator light (if

so equipped)

2-17

Security indicator

light

2-17

Side light and

headlight indica-

tor light (green)

2-17

Slip indicator light 2-17

Turn signal/

hazard indicator

lights

2-17

Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) OFF

indicator light

2-17

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

0-10 Illustrated table of contents

1 Safety—Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system

Seats............................................ 1-2

Front manual seat adjustment

(if so equipped) ................................1-3

Front power seat adjustment

(if so equipped) ............................... 1-4

Folding rear seat ............................. 1-6

Center armrest ................................1-7

Head restraints/headrests ......................1-8

Adjustable head restraint/headrest

components .................................1-9

Non-adjustable head restraint/

headrest components........................ 1-9

Remove......................................1-9

Install.........................................1-10

Adjust ........................................1-10

Seatbelts.......................................1-12

Precautions on seat belt usage...............1-12

Seat belt warning light........................1-14

Pregnant women.............................1-15

Injured persons...............................1-15

Three-point type seat belt with

retractor .....................................1-15

Seat belt extenders...........................1-19

Seat belt maintenance .......................1-19

Child safety.....................................1-20

Infants .......................................1-21

Small children ................................1-21

Larger children ...............................1-21

Child restraints .................................1-23

Precautions on child restraints ..............1-23

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system ............................1-25

Rear-facing child restraint installation

using LATCH.................................1-27

Rear-facing child restraint installation

using the seat belts .........................1-29

Forward-facing child restraint

installation using LATCH .....................1-32

Forward-facing child restraint

installation using the seat belts..............1-36

Booster seats ...............................1-40

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)...........1-44

Precautions on SRS..........................1-44

Supplemental air bag warning labels .........1-61

Supplemental air bag warning light..........1-62

WARNING

∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and re-

ceive neck or other serious injuries.

You could also slide under the lap belt

and receive serious internal injuries.

∙ For the most effective protection

when the vehicle is in motion, the seat

should be upright. Always sit well

back and upright in the seat with both

feet on the floor and adjust the seat

properly. For additional information,

refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-

age” in this section.

∙ After adjustment, gently rock in the

seat to make sure it is securely locked.

∙ Do not leave children unattended in-

side the vehicle. They could unknow-

ingly activate switches or controls or

make the vehicle move. Unattended

children could become involved in se-

rious accidents.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, do not

leave children, people who require the

assistance of others or pets unat-

tended in your vehicle. Additionally,

the temperature inside a closed ve-

hicle on a warm day can quickly be-

come high enough to cause a signifi-

cant risk of injury or death to people

and pets.

∙ Do not adjust the driver’s seat while

driving so full attention may be given

to vehicle operation. The seat may

move suddenly and could cause loss

of control of the vehicle.

∙ The seatback should not be reclined

any more than needed for comfort.

Seat belts are most effective when the

passenger sits well back and straight

up in the seat. If the seatback is re-

clined, the risk of sliding under the lap

belt and being injured is increased.

ARS1152

SEATS

1-2 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

CAUTION

When adjusting the seat positions, be

sure not to contact any moving parts to

avoid possible injuries and/or damage.

FRONT MANUAL SEAT

ADJUSTMENT (if so equipped)

Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manu-

ally. For additional information about ad-

justing the seats, refer to the steps outlined

in this section.

Forward and backward

Pull the center of the bar up and hold it

while you slide the seat forward or back-

ward to the desired position. Release the

bar to lock the seat in position.

Reclining

To recline the seatback, pull the lever up

and lean back. To bring the seatback for-

ward, pull the lever up and lean your body

forward. Release the lever to lock the seat-

back in position.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of

the seatback for occupants of different

sizes for added comfort and to help obtain

proper seat belt fit. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-

age” in this section. Also, the seatback can

be reclined to allow occupants to rest

when the vehicle is stopped and the shift

lever is in the P (Park) position.

LRS2571 LRS2572

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3

Seat lifter (driver’s seat)

Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to

adjust the seat height until the desired po-

sition is achieved.

FRONT POWER SEAT ADJUSTMENT

(if so equipped)

Operating tips

WARNING

Before driving the vehicle, return the

seatback to an upright seating position

after manually releasing it. Also, make

sure the seat is locked in place. Failure

to do so may cause the seat to move in a

collision or sudden stop.This may result

in damage to the seat or personal

injury.

∙ The power seat motor has an auto-

reset overload protection circuit. If the

motor stops during operation, wait

30 seconds then reactivate the switch.

∙ Do not operate the power seat switch

for a long period of time when the en-

gine is off. This will discharge the bat-

tery.

Forward and backward

Moving the switch as shown will slide the

seat forward or backward to the desired

position.

LRS2573 LRS2662

1-4 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Reclining

Move the recline switch as shown until the

desired angle is obtained.

The reclining feature allows adjustment of

the seatback for occupants of different

sizes for added comfort and to help obtain

proper seat belt fit. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Precautions on seat belt us-

age” in this section. Also, the seatback can

be reclined to allow occupants to rest

when the vehicle is stopped and the shift

lever is in the P (Park) position.

Seat lifter (driver’s seat)

Move the switch as shown to adjust the

angle (if so equipped) and height of the

seat cushion.

Type A (if so equipped)

LRS2636

Type B (if so equipped)

LRS2784

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5

Lumbar support (if so equipped

for driver’s seat)

The lumbar support feature provides ad-

justable lower back support to the driver.

Push the switch as shown to adjust the

seat lumbar area.

FOLDING REAR SEAT

Interior trunk access

The trunk can be accessed from the driver

side and passenger side of the rear seat for

loading and unloading, as shown.

1. Move the front passenger seat to the

most forward position.

2. Open the access cover on the rear par-

cel shelf.

3. Push down on the button 䊊

1on the

rear parcel shelf.

4. Fold down the passenger’s side seat-

back 䊊

WARNING

∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the

cargo area or on the rear seat when it

is in the fold-down position. Use of

these areas by passengers without

proper restraints could result in seri-

ous injury or death in an accident or

sudden stop.

∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding

or shifting. Do not place cargo higher

than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop

or collision, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

LRS2270

WRS0166

1-6 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ When returning the seatbacks to the

upright position, be certain they are

completely secured in the latched po-

sition. If they are not completely se-

cured, passengers may be injured in

an accident or sudden stop.

∙ Closely supervise children when they

are around cars to prevent them from

playing and becoming locked in the

trunk where they could be seriously

injured. Keep the car locked, with the

rear seatback and trunk lid securely

latched when not in use, and prevent

children’s access to car keys.

To fold down the driver’s side of the rear

seat, open the trunk and pull on the strap

䊊

CENTER ARMREST

Pull the armrest down as shown.

LRS2168 WRS0167

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7

WARNING

Head restraints/headrests supplement

the other vehicle safety systems. They

may provide additional protection

against injury in certain rear end colli-

sions. Adjustable head

restraints/headrests must be adjusted

properly, as specified in this section.

Check the adjustment after someone

else uses the seat. Do not attach any-

thing to the head restraint/headrest

stalks or remove the head

restraint/headrest. Do not use the seat

if the head restraint/headrest has been

removed. If the head restraint/headrest

was removed, reinstall and properly ad-

just the head restraint/headrest before

an occupant uses the seating position.

Failure to follow these instructions can

reduce the effectiveness of the head

restraints/headrests. This may in-

crease the risk of serious injury or death

in a collision.

The illustration shows the seating posi-

tions equipped with head

restraints/headrests.

䉱Indicates the seating position is

equipped with a head restraint.

䡲Indicates the seating position is equipped

with a headrest.

+ Indicates the seating position is not

equipped with a head restraint or headrest

(if applicable).

∙ Your vehicle is equipped with a head

restraint/headrest that may be inte-

grated, adjustable or non-adjustable.

∙ Adjustable head restraints/headrests

have multiple notches along the stalk(s)

to lock them in a desired adjustment

position.

∙ The non-adjustable head restraints/

headrests have a single locking notch

to secure them to the seat frame.

∙ Proper Adjustment:

– For the adjustable type, align the

head restraint/headrest so the cen-

ter of your ear is approximately level

with the center of the head

restraint/headrest.

– If your ear position is still higher than

the recommended alignment, place

the head restraint/headrest at the

highest position.

∙ If the head restraint/headrest has been

removed, ensure that it is reinstalled

and locked in place before riding in that

designated seating position.

LRS2695

HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS

1-8 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/

HEADREST COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Multiple notches

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD

RESTRAINT/HEADREST

COMPONENTS

1. Removable head restraint/headrest

2. Single notch

3. Lock knob

4. Stalks

REMOVE

Use the following procedure to remove the

head restraint/headrest:

1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to

the highest position.

2. Push and hold the lock knob.

3. Remove the head restraint/headrest

from the seat.

4. Store the head restraint/headrest

properly in a secure place so it is not

loose in the vehicle.

LRS2300 LRS2299 LRS2302

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9

5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head

restraint/headrest before an occupant

uses the seating position.

INSTALL

1. Align the head restraint/headrest

stalks with the holes in the seat. Make

sure that the head restraint/headrest is

facing the correct direction. The stalk

with the notch (notches) 䊊

1must be

installed in the hole with the lock knob

䊊

2. Push and hold the lock knob and push

the head restraint/headrest down.

3. Properly adjust the head restraint/

headrest before an occupant uses the

seating position.

ADJUST

For adjustable head restraint/headrest

Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the

center is level with the center of your ears. If

your ear position is still higher than the

recommended alignment, place the head

restraint/headrest at the highest position.

LRS2303 WRS0134

1-10 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

For non-adjustable head restraint/headrest

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is

positioned so the lock knob is engaged in

the notch before riding in that designated

seating position.

Raise

To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it

up.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is

positioned so the lock knob is engaged in

the notch before riding in that designated

seating position.

Lower

To lower, push and hold the lock knob and

push the head restraint/headrest down.

Make sure the head restraint/headrest is

positioned so the lock knob is engaged in

the notch before riding in that designated

seating position.

LRS2351 LRS2305 LRS2306

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11

PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT

USAGE

If you are wearing your seat belt properly

adjusted and you are sitting upright and

well back in your seat with both feet on the

floor, your chances of being injured or killed

in a collision and/or the severity of injury

may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly

encourages you and all of your passengers

to buckle up every time you drive, even if

your seating position includes a supple-

mental air bag.

Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces

or territories specify that seat belts be

worn at all times when a vehicle is being

driven.

WARNING

∙ Every person who drives or rides in

this vehicle should use a seat belt at

all times. Children should be in the

rear seats and in an appropriate

restraint.

SSS0136 SSS0016

SEAT BELTS

1-12 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

∙ The seat belt should be properly ad-

justed to a snug fit. Failure to do so

may reduce the effectiveness of the

entire restraint system and increase

the chance or severity of injury in an

accident. Serious injury or death can

occur if the seat belt is not worn

properly.

WARNING

∙ Always route the shoulder belt over

your shoulder and across your chest.

Never put the belt behind your back,

under your arm or across your neck.

The belt should be away from your

face and neck, but not falling off your

shoulder.

∙ Position the lap belt as low and snug

as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT

THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high

could increase the risk of internal inju-

ries in an accident.

SSS0134 SSS0014

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13

∙ Be sure the seat belt tongue is se-

curely fastened to the proper buckle.

∙ Do not wear the seat belt inside out or

twisted. Doing so may reduce its

effectiveness.

∙ Do not allow more than one person to

use the same seat belt.

∙ Never carry more people in the vehicle

than there are seat belts.

∙ If the seat belt warning light glows

continuously while the ignition is

turned ON with all doors closed and all

seat belts fastened, it may indicate a

malfunction in the system. Have the

system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

∙ No changes should be made to the

seat belt system. For example, do not

modify the seat belt, add material, or

install devices that may change the

seat belt routing or tension. Doing so

may affect the operation of the seat

belt system. Modifying or tampering

with the seat belt system may result

in serious personal injury.

∙ Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have

activated, they cannot be reused and

must be replaced together with the

retractor. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ All seat belt assemblies, including re-

tractors and attaching hardware,

should be inspected after any colli-

sion. It is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service.

NISSAN recommends that all seat belt

assemblies in use during a collision be

replaced unless the collision was mi-

nor and the belts show no damage

and continue to operate properly.

Seat belt assemblies not in use during

a collision should also be inspected

and replaced if either damage or im-

proper operation is noted.

∙ All child restraints and attaching

hardware should be inspected after

any collision. Always follow the re-

straint manufacturer’s inspection in-

structions and replacement recom-

mendations. The child restraints

should be replaced if they are

damaged.

SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT

Both the driver’s and passenger’s front

seats are equipped with a seat belt warn-

ing light. The warning light, located on the

instrument panel, will show the status of

the driver and passenger seat belt.

NOTE:

The front passenger seat belt warning

light will not light up if the seat is not

occupied.

LRS0786

1-14 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

For additional information, refer to “Warn-

ing lights, indicator lights and audible re-

minders” in the “Instruments and controls”

section of this manual.

PREGNANT WOMEN

NISSAN recommends that pregnant

women use seat belts. The seat belt should

be worn snug and always position the lap

belt as low as possible around the hips, not

the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your

shoulder and across your chest. Never run

the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal

area. Contact your doctor for specific rec-

ommendations.

INJURED PERSONS

NISSAN recommends that injured persons

use seat belts. Check with your doctor for

specific recommendations.

THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT

WITH RETRACTOR

WARNING

∙ Every person who drives or rides in

this vehicle should use a seat belt at

all times. Children should be in the

rear seats and in an appropriate

restraint.

∙ Do not ride in a moving vehicle when

the seatback is reclined. This can be

dangerous. The shoulder belt will not

be against your body. In an accident,

you could be thrown into it and re-

ceive neck or other serious injuries.

You could also slide under the lap belt

and receive serious internal injuries.

∙ For the most effective protection

when the vehicle is in motion, the seat

should be upright. Always sit well

back and upright in the seat with both

feet on the floor and adjust the seat

belt properly.

∙ Do not allow children to play with the

seat belts. Most seating positions are

equipped with Automatic Locking Re-

tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the

seat belt becomes wrapped around a

child’s neck with the ALR mode acti-

vated, the child can be seriously in-

jured or killed if the seat belt retracts

and becomes tight. This can occur

even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle

the seat belt to release the child. If the

seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is

already unbuckled, release the child

by cutting the seat belt with a suitable

tool (such as a knife or scissors) to

release the seat belt.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15

Fastening the seat belts

1. Adjust the seat. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Seats” in this section.

Manual front seat shown (if so equipped)

LRS2571

Power front seat shown (if so equipped)

LRS2662

1-16 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the re-

tractor and insert the tongue into the

buckle 䊊

Auntil you hear and feel the

latch engage.

∙The retractor is designed to lock

during a sudden stop or on impact.

A slow pulling motion permits the

seat belt to move and allows you

some freedom of movement in the

seat.

∙If the seat belt cannot be pulled

from its fully retracted position,

firmly pull the belt and release it.

Then smoothly pull the belt out of

the retractor.

3. Position the lap belt portion low and

snug on the hips 䊊

Bas shown.

4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward

the retractor to take up extra slack 䊊

Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over

your shoulder and across your chest.

The front passenger seat and the rear

seating positions’ three-point seat belts

have two modes of operation:

∙ Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)

∙ Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

The ELR mode allows the seat belt to ex-

tend and retract to allow the driver and

passengers some freedom of movement

in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt

when the vehicle slows down rapidly or

during certain impacts.

The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks

the seat belt for child restraint installation.

When the ALR mode is activated, the seat

belt cannot be extended again until the

seat belt tongue is detached from the

buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt re-

turns to the ELR mode after the seat belt

fully retracts. For additional information, re-

fer to “Child restraints” in this section.

The ALR mode should be used only for

child restraint installation. During nor-

mal seat belt use by an occupant,the ALR

mode should not be activated. If it is ac-

tivated, it may cause uncomfortable seat

belt tension. It can also change the op-

eration of the front passenger air bag.

For additional information, refer to

“Front passenger air bag and status

light” in this section.

LRS2674 LRS2675

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17

WARNING

When fastening the seat belts, be cer-

tain that the seatbacks are completely

secured in the latched position. If they

are not completely secured, passengers

may be injured in an accident or sudden

stop.

Unfastening the seat belts

To unfasten the seat belt, press the button

on the buckle 䊊

1. The seat belt automati-

cally retracts.

Checking seat belt operation

Seat belt retractors are designed to lock

seat belt movement by two separate

methods:

∙ When the seat belt is pulled quickly from

the retractor

∙ When the vehicle slows down rapidly

To increase your confidence in the seat

belts, check the operation as follows:

∙ Grasp the shoulder belt and pull for-

ward quickly. The retractor should lock

and restrict further belt movement.

If the retractor does not lock during this

check, get the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service or to learn more about seat belt

operation.

WRS0139

1-18 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Shoulder belt height adjustment

(front seats)

The shoulder belt anchor height should be

adjusted to the position best for you. For

additional information, refer to “Precau-

tions on seat belt usage” in this section. To

adjust, pull out the adjustment button 䊊

and move the shoulder belt anchor to the

desired position 䊊

2, so the belt passes over

the center of the shoulder. The belt should

be away from your face and neck, but not

falling off your shoulder. Release the ad-

justment button to lock the shoulder belt

anchor into position.

WARNING

∙ After adjustment, release the adjust-

ment button and try to move the

shoulder belt anchor up and down to

make sure it is securely fixed in

position.

∙ The shoulder belt anchor height

should be adjusted to the position

best for you. Failure to do so may re-

duce the effectiveness of the entire

restraint system and increase the

chance or severity of injury in an

accident.

SEAT BELT EXTENDERS

If, because of body size or driving position, it

is not possible to properly fit the

lap/shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender

that is compatible with the installed seat

belts is available for purchase. The ex-

tender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm)

of length and may be used for either the

driver or front passenger seating position.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for assistance with purchasing an

extender if an extender is required.

WARNING

∙ Only NISSAN seat belt extenders,

made by the same company which

made the original equipment seat

belts, should be used with NISSAN

seat belts.

∙ Adults and children who can use the

standard seat belt should not use an

extender. Such unnecessary use

could result in serious personal injury

in the event of an accident.

∙ Never use seat belt extenders to in-

stall child restraints. If the child re-

straint is not secured properly, the

child could be seriously injured or

killed in a collision or a sudden stop.

SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE

∙To clean the seat belt webbing, apply

a mild soap solution or any solution rec-

ommended for cleaning upholstery or

carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow

the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not

allow the seat belts to retract until they

are completely dry.

LRS0242

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19

∙If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt

guide of the seat belt anchors, the

seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the

shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry

cloth.

∙Periodically check to see that the seat

belt and the metal components, such

as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible

wires and anchors, work properly. If

loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other

damage on the webbing is found, the

entire seat belt assembly should be re-

placed.

WARNING

Do not allow children to play with the

seat belts. Most seating positions are

equipped with Automatic Locking Re-

tractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat

belt becomes wrapped around a child’s

neck with the ALR mode activated, the

child can be seriously injured or killed if

the seat belt retracts and becomes

tight. This can occur even if the vehicle

is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to re-

lease the child. If the seat belt cannot be

unbuckled or is already unbuckled, re-

lease the child by cutting the seat belt

with a suitable tool (such as a knife or

scissors) to release the seat belt.

Children need adults to help protect

them. They need to be properly re-

strained.

In addition to the general information in

this manual, child safety information is

available from many other sources, includ-

ing doctors, teachers, government traffic

safety offices, and community organiza-

tions. Every child is different, so be sure to

learn the best way to transport your child.

There are three basic types of child re-

straint systems:

∙ Rear-facing child restraints

∙ Forward-facing child restraints

∙ Booster seats

The proper restraint depends on the child’s

size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year

and less than 20 lbs. (9 kg) should be placed

in rear-facing child restraints. Forward-

facing child restraints are available for chil-

dren who outgrow rear-facing child re-

straints and are at least 1 year old. Booster

seats are used to help position a vehicle

lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no

longer use a forward-facing child restraint.

WARNING

Infants and children need special pro-

tection. The vehicle’s seat belts may not

fit them properly.The shoulder belt may

come too close to the face or neck. The

lap belt may not fit over their small hip

bones. In an accident, an improperly fit-

ting seat belt could cause serious or fa-

tal injury. Always use appropriate child

restraints.

CHILD SAFETY

1-20 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require the use of approved child

restraints for infants and small children. For

additional information, refer to “Child re-

straints” in this section.

A child restraint may be secured in the ve-

hicle by using either the LATCH (Lower An-

chors and Tethers for CHildren) system or

with the vehicle seat belt. For additional

information, refer to “Child restraints” in this

section.

NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens

and children be restrained in the rear

seat. Studies show that children are

safer when properly restrained in the

rear seat than in the front seat.

This is especially important because

your vehicle has a supplemental re-

straint system (air bag system) for the

front passenger. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Supplemental Restraint

System (SRS)” in this section.

INFANTS

Infants up to at least 1 year old should be

placed in a rear-facing child restraint.

NISSAN recommends that infants be

placed in child restraints that comply with

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

You should choose a child restraint that fits

your vehicle and always follow the manu-

facturer’s instructions for installation and

use.

SMALL CHILDREN

Children that are over 1 year old and weigh

at least 20 lbs. (9 kg) should remain in a

rear-facing child restraint as long as pos-

sible up to the height or weight limit of the

child restraint. Children who outgrow the

height or weight limit of the rear-facing

child restraint and are at least 1 year old

should be secured in a forward-facing child

restraint with a harness. Refer to the manu-

facturer’s instructions for minimum and

maximum weight and height recommen-

dations. NISSAN recommends that small

children be placed in child restraints that

comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety

Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle

Safety Standards. You should choose a

child restraint that fits your vehicle and al-

ways follow the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for installation and use.

LARGER CHILDREN

Children should remain in a forward-facing

child restraint with a harness until they

reach the maximum height or weight limit

allowed by the child restraint manufac-

turer.

Once a child outgrows the height or weight

limit of the harness-equipped forward-

facing child restraint, NISSAN recommends

that the child be placed in a commercially

available booster seat to obtain proper

seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, the

booster seat should raise the child so that

the shoulder belt is properly positioned

across the chest and the top, middle por-

tion of the shoulder. The shoulder belt

should not cross the neck or face and

should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt

should lie snugly across the lower hips or

upper thighs, not the abdomen. A booster

seat can only be used in seating positions

that have a three-point type seat belt. The

booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and

have a label certifying that it complies with

Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21

A booster seat should be used until the

child can pass the seat belt fit test below:

∙ Are the child’s back and hips against the

vehicle seatback?

∙ Is the child able to sit without slouch-

ing?

∙ Do the child’s knees bend easily over

the front edge of the seat with feet flat

on the floor?

∙ Can the child safely wear the seat belt

(lap belt low and snug across the hips

and shoulder belt across mid-chest

and shoulder)?

∙ Is the child able to use the properly ad-

justed head restraint/headrest?

∙ Will the child be able to stay in position

for the entire ride?

If you answered no to any of these ques-

tions, the child should remain in a booster

seat using a three-point type seat belt.

NOTE:

Laws in some communities may follow

different guidelines. Check local and

state regulations to confirm your child is

using the correct restraint system before

traveling.

WARNING

Never let a child stand or kneel on any

seat and do not allow a child in the

cargo area. The child could be seriously

injured or killed in a sudden stop or

collision.

LRS2690

1-22 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD

RESTRAINTS

WARNING

∙ Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use and installa-

tion of child restraints could result in

serious injury or death of a child or

other passengers in a sudden stop or

collision:

– The child restraint must be used

and installed properly. Always fol-

low all of the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions for installa-

tion and use.

– Infants and children should never

be held on anyone’s lap. Even the

strongest adult cannot resist the

forces of a collision.

– Do not put a seat belt around both

a child and another passenger.

– NISSAN recommends that all child

restraints be installed in the rear

seat. Studies show that children

are safer when properly restrained

in the rear seat than in the front

seat. If you must install a forward-

facing child restraint in the front

seat, refer to “Forward-facing child

restraint installation using the seat

belts” in this section.

– Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-

facing child restraint in the front

seat. An inflating air bag could se-

riously injure or kill a child. A rear-

facing child restraint must only be

used in the rear seat.

– Be sure to purchase a child re-

straint that will fit the child and ve-

hicle. Some child restraints may

not fit properly in your vehicle.

ARS1098 WRS0256

CHILD RESTRAINTS

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23

– Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those

loads imposed by correctly fitted

child restraints. Under no circum-

stances are they to be used to at-

tach adult seat belts, or other items

or equipment to the vehicle. Doing

so could damage the child re-

straint anchorages. The child re-

straint will not be properly in-

stalled using the damaged

anchorage,and a child could be se-

riously injured or killed in a

collision.

– Never use the anchor points for

adult seat belts, or other items.

– A child restraint with a top tether

strap should not be used in the

front passenger seat.

– Keep seatbacks as upright as pos-

sible after fitting the child

restraint.

– Infants and children should always

be placed in an appropriate child

restraint while in the vehicle.

∙ When the child restraint is not in use,

keep it secured with the LATCH system

or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or col-

lision, loose objects can injure occu-

pants or damage the vehicle.

CAUTION

A child restraint in a closed vehicle can

become very hot. Check the seating

surface and buckles before placing a

child in the child restraint.

This vehicle is equipped with a universal

child restraint anchor system, referred to

as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers

for CHildren) system. Some child restraints

include rigid or webbing-mounted attach-

ments that can be connected to these an-

chors. For additional information, refer to

“LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system” in this section.

If you do not have a LATCH compatible

child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be

used.

Several manufacturers offer child re-

straints for infants and children of various

sizes. When selecting any child restraint,

keep the following points in mind:

∙ Choose only a restraint with a label cer-

tifying that it complies with Federal Mo-

tor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Cana-

dian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

∙ Check the child restraint in your vehicle

to be sure it is compatible with the vehi-

cle’s seat and seat belt system.

∙ If the child restraint is compatible with

your vehicle, place your child in the child

restraint and check the various adjust-

ments to be sure the child restraint is

compatible with your child. Choose a

child restraint that is designed for your

child’s height and weight. Always follow

all recommended procedures.

∙ If the combined weight of the child and

child restraint is less than 65 lbs.

(29.5 kg), you may use either the LATCH

anchors or the seat belt to install the

child restraint (not both at the same

time).

∙ If the combined weight of the child and

child restraint is greater than 65 lbs.

(29.5 kg), use the vehicle’s seat belt (not

the lower anchors) to install the child

restraint.

1-24 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ Be sure to follow the child restraint

manufacturer’s instructions for installa-

tion.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved

child restraint at all times while the ve-

hicle is being operated. Canadian law re-

quires the top tether strap on forward-

facing child restraints be secured to the

designated anchor point on the vehicle.

LATCH (Lower Anchors and

Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with special an-

chor points that are used with LATCH sys-

tem compatible child restraints. This sys-

tem may also be referred to as the ISOFIX

or ISOFIX compatible system. With this sys-

tem, you do not have to use a vehicle seat

belt to secure the child restraint unless the

combined weight of the child and child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and child restraint

is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the ve-

hicle’s seat belt (not the lower anchors) to

install the child restraint. Be sure to follow

the child restraint manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for installation.

The LATCH anchor points are provided to

install child restraints in the rear outboard

seating positions only. Do not attempt to

install a child restraint in the center position

using the LATCH anchors.

LATCH lower anchor

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use and installa-

tion of child restraints could result in

serious injury or death of a child or

other passengers in a sudden stop or

collision:

– Attach LATCH system compatible

child restraints only at the loca-

tions shown in the illustration.

– Do not secure a child restraint in

the center rear seating position us-

ing the LATCH lower anchors. The

child restraint will not be secured

properly.

LATCH system anchor locations

LRS2165

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25

– Inspect the lower anchors by in-

serting your fingers into the lower

anchor area. Feel to make sure

there are no obstructions over the

anchors such as seat belt webbing

or seat cushion material. The child

restraint will not be secured prop-

erly if the lower anchors are

obstructed.

Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage the

child restraint anchorages. The child re-

straint will not be properly installed us-

ing the damaged anchorage, and a

child could be seriously injured or killed

in a collision.

LATCH lower anchor location

The LATCH anchors are located as shown.

A label is attached to the seatback to help

you locate the LATCH lower anchors.

Installing child restraint LATCH

lower anchor attachments

LATCH compatible child restraints include

two rigid or webbing-mounted attach-

ments that can be connected to two an-

chors located at certain seating positions

in your vehicle. With this system, you do not

have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the

child restraint. Check your child restraint for

a label stating that it is compatible with

LATCH. This information may also be in the

instructions provided by the child restraint

manufacturer.

LATCH lower anchor location

WRS0796

LATCH webbing-mounted attachment

LRS0661

1-26 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

When installing a child restraint, carefully

read and follow the instructions in this

manual and those supplied with the child

restraint.

Top tether anchor point locations

The child restraint top tether strap must be

used when installing the child restraint with

the LATCH lower anchor attachments or

seat belts. For additional information, refer

to “Installing top tether strap” in this sec-

tion.

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage the

child restraint anchorages. The child re-

straint will not be properly installed us-

ing the damaged anchorage, and a

child could be seriously injured or killed

in a collision.

If you have any questions when install-

ing a top tether strap, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

Anchor points 䊊

1are located on the rear

parcel shelf.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING LATCH

For additional information, refer to allWarn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and

“Child restraints” sections of this manual

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-

bined weight of the child and the child re-

LATCH rigid-mounted attachment

LRS0662 WRS0797

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and the child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure

to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing

child restraint using the LATCH system:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions.

2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-

tachments to the LATCH lower an-

chors. Check to make sure the LATCH

attachment is properly attached to the

lower anchors.

Rear-facing webbing-mounted – step 2

WRS0801

Rear-facing rigid-mounted – step 2

WRS0802

1-28 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

3. For child restraints that are equipped

with webbing-mounted attachments,

remove any additional slack from the

anchor attachments. Press downward

and rearward firmly in the center of the

child restraint with your hand to com-

press the vehicle seat cushion and

seatback while tightening the webbing

of the anchor attachments.

4. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the LATCH attachment

path. The child restraint should not

move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from

side to side. Try to tug it forward and

check to see if the LATCH attachment

holds the restraint in place. If the re-

straint is not secure, tighten the LATCH

attachment as necessary, or put the

restraint in another seat and test it

again. You may need to try a different

child restraint or try installing by using

the vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not

all child restraints fit in all types of ve-

hicles.

5. Check to make sure the child restraint

is properly secured prior to each use. If

the child restraint is loose, repeat

steps 1 through 4.

REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT

INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT

BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be

used when installing a child restraint.

Failure to use the ALR mode will result in

the child restraint not being properly

secured. The restraint could tip over or

be loose and cause injury to a child in a

sudden stop or collision.

For additional information, refer to allWarn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and

“Child restraints” sections of this manual

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-

bined weight of the child and the child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and the child

Rear-facing – step 3

LRS0673

Rear-facing – step 4

LRS0674

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29

restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure

to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a rear-facing

child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in

the rear seats:

1. Child restraints for infants must be

used in the rear-facing direction and

therefore must not be used in the

front seat. Position the child restraint

on the seat. Always follow the child re-

straint manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Route the seat belt tongue through the

child restraint and insert it into the

buckle until you hear and feel the latch

engage. Be sure to follow the child re-

straint manufacturer’s instructions for

belt routing.

Rear-facing – step 1

WRS0256

Rear-facing – step 2

WRS0761

1-30 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is

fully extended. At this time, the seat belt

retractor is in the ALR mode (child re-

straint mode). It reverts to the ELR

mode when the seat belt is fully re-

tracted.

4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on

the shoulder belt to remove any slack

in the belt.

5. Remove any additional slack from the

seat belt; press downward and rear-

ward firmly in the center of the child

restraint to compress the vehicle seat

cushion and seatback while pulling up

on the seat belt.

Rear-facing – step 3

LRS2395

Rear-facing – step 4

LRS2396

Rear-facing – step 5

WRS0762

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31

6. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the seat belt path. The

child restraint should not move more

than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.

Try to tug it forward and check to see if

the belt holds the restraint in place. If

the restraint is not secure, tighten the

seat belt as necessary, or put the re-

straint in another seat and test it again.

You may need to try a different child

restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all

types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure that the child re-

straint is properly secured prior to each

use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat

steps 3 through 6.

After the child restraint is removed and the

seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode

(child restraint mode) is canceled.

FORWARD-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING

LATCH

For additional information, refer to allWarn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and

“Child restraints” sections of this manual

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-

bined weight of the child and the child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and the child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure

to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a forward-

facing child restraint using the LATCH sys-

tem:

1. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions.

Rear-facing – step 6

LRS2397

1-32 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

2. Secure the child restraint anchor at-

tachments to the LATCH lower an-

chors. Check to make sure the LATCH

attachment is properly attached to the

lower anchors.

If the child restraint is equipped with a

top tether strap, route the top tether

strap and secure the tether strap to

the tether anchor point. For additional

information, refer to “Installing top

tether strap” in this section.

Do not install child restraints that re-

quire the use of a top tether strap in

seating positions that do not have a

top tether anchor.

3. The back of the child restraint should

be secured against the vehicle seat-

back.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest (if so equipped) to

obtain the correct child restraint fit. If

the head restraint/headrest is re-

moved, store it in a secure place. Be

sure to reinstall the head

restraint/headrest (if so equipped)

when the child restraint is removed.

For additional information about head

restraint/headrest adjustment (if so

equipped), refer to "Head

restraints/headrests" in this section.

If the seating position does not have

an adjustable head restraint/headrest

and it is interfering with the proper

child restraint fit, try another seating

position or a different child restraint.

Forward-facing webbing-mounted –

step 2

WRS0799

Forward-facing rigid-mounted – step 2

WRS0800

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33

4. For child restraints that are equipped

with webbing-mounted attachments,

remove any additional slack from the

anchor attachments. Press downward

and rearward firmly in the center of the

child restraint with your knee to com-

press the vehicle seat cushion and

seatback while tightening the webbing

of the anchor attachments.

5. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

6. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the LATCH attachment

path. The child restraint should not

move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from

side to side. Try to tug it forward and

check to see if the LATCH attachment

holds the restraint in place. If the re-

straint is not secure, tighten the LATCH

attachment as necessary, or put the

restraint in another seat and test it

again. You may need to try a different

child restraint. Not all child restraints fit

in all types of vehicles.

7. Check to make sure the child restraint

is properly secured prior to each use. If

the child restraint is loose, repeat

steps 1 through 6.

Forward-facing – step 4

LRS0671

Forward-facing – step 6

WRS0697

1-34 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

䊊

1Top tether strap

䊊

2Anchor point

Installing top tether strap

The child restraint top tether strap must be

used when installing the child restraint with

the LATCH lower anchor attachments.

First, secure the child restraint with the

LATCH lower anchors (rear outboard posi-

tions only).

Rear bench seat

OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS

1. Remove the head restraint/headrest (if

so equipped) and store it in a secure

place. Be sure to reinstall the head

restraint/headrest (if so equipped)

when the child restraint is removed. For

additional information about head

restraint/headrest (if so equipped) ad-

justment, removal and installation, refer

to "Head restraints/headrests" in this

section.

2. Position the top tether strap 䊊

1over

the seatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether

anchor point 䊊

2as shown.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

If you have any questions when install-

ing a top tether strap, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage the

child restraint anchorages. The child re-

straint will not be properly installed us-

ing the damaged anchorage, and a

child could be seriously injured or killed

in a collision.

Rear bench seat

LRS2627

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35

FORWARD-FACING CHILD

RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING

THE SEAT BELTS

WARNING

The three-point seat belt with Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be

used when installing a child restraint.

Failure to use the ALR mode will result in

the child restraint not being properly

secured. The restraint could tip over or

be loose and cause injury to a child in a

sudden stop or collision. Also, it can

change the operation of the front pas-

senger air bag. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Front passenger air bag

and status light” in this section. For additional information, refer to allWarn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety” and

“Child restraints” sections of this manual

before installing a child restraint.

Do not use the lower anchors if the com-

bined weight of the child and the child re-

straint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the com-

bined weight of the child and the child

restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use

the vehicle’s seat belt (not the lower an-

chors) to install the child restraint. Be sure

to follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions for installation.

Follow these steps to install a forward-

facing child restraint using the vehicle seat

belt in the rear seats or in the front passen-

ger seat:

1. If you must install a child restraint in

the front seat, it should be placed in a

forward-facing direction only. Move

the seat to the rearmost position.

Child restraints for infants must be

used in the rear-facing direction and,

therefore, must not be used in the

front seat.

2. Position the child restraint on the seat.

Always follow the child restraint manu-

facturer’s instructions.

The back of the child restraint should

be secured against the vehicle seat-

back.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest to obtain the cor-

rect child restraint fit. If the head

restraint/headrest (if so equipped) is

removed, store it in a secure place. Be

sure to reinstall the head

restraint/headrest (if so equipped)

when the child restraint is removed.

For additional information about head

restraint/headrest (if so equipped) ad-

justment, removal and installation, re-

Forward-facing (front passenger seat) –

step 1

WRS0699

1-36 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

fer to “Head restraints/headrests” in

this section.

If the seating position does not have

an adjustable head restraint/headrest

(if so equipped) and it is interfering with

the proper child restraint fit, try an-

other seating position or a different

child restraint.

3. Route the seat belt tongue through the

child restraint and insert it into the

buckle until you hear and feel the latch

engage. Be sure to follow the child re-

straint manufacturer’s instructions for

belt routing.

If the child restraint is equipped with a

top tether strap, route the top tether

strap and secure the tether strap to

the tether anchor point (rear seat in-

stallation only). For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Installing top tether strap”

in this section.

Do not install child restraints that re-

quire the use of a top tether strap in

seating positions that do not have a

top tether anchor.

Forward-facing – step 3

WRS0680

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37

4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is

fully extended. At this time, the seat belt

retractor is in the ALR mode (child re-

straint mode). It reverts to ELR mode

when the seat belt is fully retracted.

5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on

the shoulder belt to remove any slack

in the belt.

6. Remove any additional slack from the

seat belt; press downward and rear-

ward firmly in the center of the child

restraint with your knee to compress

the vehicle seat cushion and seatback

while pulling up on the seat belt.

7. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

Forward-facing – step 4

LRS0667

Forward-facing – step 5

LRS0668

Forward-facing – step 6

WRS0681

1-38 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

8. After attaching the child restraint, test

it before you place the child in it. Push it

from side to side while holding the child

restraint near the seat belt path. The

child restraint should not move more

than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side.

Try to tug it forward and check to see if

the belt holds the restraint in place. If

the restraint is not secure, tighten the

seat belt as necessary, or put the re-

straint in another seat and test it again.

You may need to try a different child

restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all

types of vehicles.

9. Check to make sure the child restraint

is properly secured prior to each use. If

the seat belt is not locked, repeat

steps 4 through 8.

10. If the child restraint is installed in the

front passenger seat, place the ignition

switch in the ON position. The front

passenger air bag status light

should illuminate. If this light is not illu-

minated, refer to “Front passenger air

bag and status light” in this section.

Move the child restraint to another

seating position. Have the system

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

After the child restraint is removed and the

seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode

(child restraint mode) is canceled.

Forward-facing – step 8

WRS0698

Forward-facing – step 10

WRS0475

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39

䊊

1Top tether strap

䊊

2Anchor point

Installing top tether strap

The child restraint top tether strap must be

used when installing the child restraint with

seat belts.

First, secure the child restraint with the seat

belt.

Rear bench seat

OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS

1. Remove the head restraint/headrest (if

so equipped) and store it in a secure

place. Be sure to reinstall the head

restraint/headrest (if so equipped)

when the child restraint is removed. For

additional information about head

restraint/headrest (if so equipped) ad-

justment, removal and installation, refer

to "Head restraints/headrests" in this

section.

2. Position the top tether strap 䊊

1over

the seatback.

3. Secure the tether strap to the tether

anchor point 䊊

2as shown.

4. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

CENTER SEATING POSITION

1. Position the top tether strap 䊊

1over the

seatback.

2. Secure the tether strap to the tether

anchor point 䊊

2as shown.

3. Tighten the tether strap according to

the manufacturer’s instructions to re-

move any slack.

If you have any questions when install-

ing a top tether strap, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

WARNING

Child restraint anchorages are de-

signed to withstand only those loads

imposed by correctly fitted child re-

straints. Under no circumstances are

they to be used to attach adult seat

belts, or other items or equipment to

the vehicle. Doing so could damage the

child restraint anchorages. The child re-

straint will not be properly installed us-

ing the damaged anchorage, and a

child could be seriously injured or killed

in a collision.

BOOSTER SEATS

For additional information on installing a

booster seat in your vehicle, follow the in-

structions outlined in this section.

Rear bench seat

LRS2627

1-40 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Precautions on booster seats

WARNING

If a booster seat and seat belt are not

used properly, the risk of a child being

injured or killed in a sudden stop or col-

lision greatly increases:

– Make sure the shoulder portion of

the belt is away from the child’s

face and neck and the lap portion

of the belt does not cross the

stomach.

– Make sure the shoulder belt is not

behind the child or under the

child’s arm.

– A booster seat must only be in-

stalled in a seating position that

has a lap/shoulder belt.

A. Low back booster seat

B. High back booster seat

Booster seats of various sizes are offered

by several manufacturers. When selecting

any booster seat, keep the following points

in mind:

∙ Choose only a booster seat with a label

certifying that it complies with Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or

Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dard 213.

∙ Check the booster seat in your vehicle

to be sure it is compatible with the vehi-

cle’s seat and seat belt system.

LRS2479 LRS0453

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41

∙ Make sure the child’s head will be prop-

erly supported by the booster seat or

vehicle seat. The seatback must be at

or above the center of the child’s ears.

For example, if a low back booster seat

is chosen, the vehicle seatback must be

at or above the center of the child’s ears.

If the seatback is lower than the center

of the child’s ears, a high back booster

seat should be used.

∙ If the booster seat is compatible with

your vehicle, place the child in the

booster seat and check the various ad-

justments to be sure the booster seat is

compatible with the child. Always follow

all recommended procedures.

All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or

territories require that infants and small

children be restrained in an approved

child restraint at all times while the ve-

hicle is being operated.

The instructions in this section apply to

booster seat installation in the rear seats

or the front passenger seat.

Booster seat installation

WARNING

To avoid injury to child, do not use the

lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic

Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when us-

ing a booster seat with the seat belts.

For additional information, refer to allWarn-

ings and Cautions in the “Child safety”,

“Child restraints” and “Booster seats” sec-

tions of this manual before installing a child

restraint.

Follow these steps to install a booster seat

in the rear seat or in the front passenger

seat:

LRS0464

1-42 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

1. If you must install a booster seat in

the front seat, move the seat to the

rearmost position.

2. Position the booster seat on the seat.

Only place it in a front-facing direction.

Always follow the booster seat manu-

facturer’s instructions.

3. The booster seat should be positioned

on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.

If necessary, adjust or remove the head

restraint/headrest (if so equipped) to

obtain the correct booster seat fit. If

the head restraint/headrest (if so

equipped) is removed, store it in a se-

cure place. Be sure to reinstall the

head restraint/headrest (if so

equipped) when the booster seat is

removed. For additional information

about head restraint/headrest (if so

equipped) adjustment, removal and in-

stallation, refer to "Head

restraints/headrests" in this section.

If the seating position does not have

an adjustable head restraint/headrest

and it is interfering with the proper

booster seat fit, try another seating

position or a different booster seat.

4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt

low and snug on the child’s hips. Be

sure to follow the booster seat manu-

facturer’s instructions for adjusting the

seat belt routing.

5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the

seat belt toward the retractor to take

up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder

belt is positioned across the top,

middle portion of the child’s shoulder.

Be sure to follow the booster seat

manufacturer’s instructions for adjust-

ing the seat belt routing.

6. Follow the warnings, cautions and in-

structions for properly fastening a seat

belt shown in “Three-point type seat

belt with retractor” in this section.

WRS0699

Front passenger position

LRS0454

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43

7. If the booster seat is installed in the

front passenger seat, place the ignition

switch in the ON position. The front pas-

senger air bag status light may or

may not illuminate, depending on the

size of the child and the type of booster

seat being used. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Front passenger air

bag and status light” in this section.

PRECAUTIONS ON SRS

This SRS section contains important infor-

mation concerning the following systems:

∙ Driver and front passenger supplemen-

tal front-impact air bag (NISSAN Ad-

vanced Air Bag System)

∙ Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag

∙ Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag

∙ Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front

seats)

Supplemental front-impact air bag sys-

tem

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can

help cushion the impact force to the head

and chest of the driver and front passenger

in certain frontal collisions.

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact

force to the chest area of the driver and

front passenger in certain side-impact col-

lisions. The side air bags are designed to

inflate on the side where the vehicle is im-

pacted.

Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and

rollover supplemental air bag system

This system can help cushion the impact

force to the head of occupants in front and

rear outboard seating positions in certain

side-impact collisions. The curtain air bags

are designed to inflate on the side where

the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, the

curtain air bags are designed to inflate and

remain inflated for a short time.

The SRS is designed to supplement the

crash protection provided by the driver and

front passenger seat belts and is not a

substitute for them. Seat belts should al-

ways be correctly worn and the occupant

seated a suitable distance away from the

steering wheel, instrument panel and door

finishers. For additional information, refer

to “Seat belts” in this section.

The supplemental air bags operate only

when the ignition switch is placed in the

ON position.

After placing the ignition switch in the

ON position, the supplemental air bag

warning light illuminates. The supple-

mental air bag warning light will turn off

after about 7 seconds if the system is

operational.

WRS0475

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM

(SRS)

1-44 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

∙ The front air bags ordinarily will not

inflate in the event of a side impact,

rear impact, rollover, or lower severity

frontal collision. Always wear your

seat belts to help reduce the risk or

severity of injury in various kinds of

accidents

∙ The front passenger air bag will not

inflate if the passenger air bag status

light is lit. For additional information,

refer to “Front passenger air bag and

status light” in this section.

∙ The seat belts and the front air bags

are most effective when you are sit-

ting well back and upright in the seat.

The front air bags inflate with great

force. Even with the NISSAN Advanced

Air Bag System, if you are unre-

strained, leaning forward, sitting side-

ways or out of position in any way, you

are at greater risk of injury or death in

a crash. You may also receive serious

or fatal injuries from the front air bag

if you are up against it when it inflates.

Always sit back against the seatback

and as far away as practical from the

steering wheel or instrument panel.

Always properly use the seat belts.

∙ The driver and front passenger seat

belt buckles are equipped with sen-

sors that detect if the seat belts are

fastened. The NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System monitors the severity of a

collision and seat belt usage, then in-

flates the air bags as needed. Failure

to properly wear seat belts can in-

crease the risk or severity of injury in

an accident.

∙ The front passenger seat is equipped

with an occupant classification sen-

sor (weight sensor) that turns the

front passenger air bag OFF under

some conditions. This sensor is only

used in this seat. Failure to be properly

seated and wearing the seat belt can

increase the risk or severity of injury in

an accident. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Front passenger air bag

and status light” in this section.

∙ Keep hands on the outside of the

steering wheel. Placing them inside

the steering wheel rim could increase

the risk that they are injured when the

front air bag inflates.

WRS0031

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45

WARNING

∙ Never let children ride unrestrained or

extend their hands or face out of the

window. Do not attempt to hold them

in your lap or arms. Some examples of

dangerous riding positions are shown

in the illustrations.

ARS1133 ARS1041

1-46 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

∙ Children may be severely injured or

killed when the front air bags, side air

bags or curtain air bags inflate if they

are not properly restrained. Pre-teens

and children should be properly re-

strained in the rear seat, if possible.

ARS1042 ARS1043 ARS1044

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47

WARNING

∙ Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air

Bag System, never install a rear-

facing child restraint in the front seat.

An inflating front air bag could seri-

ously injure or kill your child. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Child re-

straints” in this section.

WARNING

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bags and roof-

mounted curtain side-impact and roll-

over supplemental air bags:

∙ The side air bags and curtain air bags

ordinarily will not inflate in the event

of a frontal impact, rear impact, or

lower severity side collision. Always

wear your seat belts to help reduce

the risk or severity of injury in various

kinds of accidents.

ARS1045 ARS1046 WRS0431

1-48 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

∙ The seat belts, the side air bags and

curtain air bags are most effective

when you are sitting well back and

upright in the seat with both feet on

the floor. The side air bag and curtain

air bag inflate with great force. Do not

allow anyone to place their hand, leg

or face near the side air bag on the

side of the seatback of the front seat

or near the side roof rails. Do not allow

anyone sitting in the front seats or

rear outboard seats to extend their

hand out of the window or lean

against the door. Some examples of

dangerous riding positions are shown

in the previous illustrations.

WARNING

∙ When sitting in the rear seat, do not

hold onto the seatback of the front

seat. If the side air bag inflates, you

may be seriously injured. Be espe-

cially careful with children, who

should always be properly restrained.

Some examples of dangerous riding

positions are shown in the

illustrations.

∙ Do not use seat covers on the front

seatbacks. They may interfere with

side air bag inflation.

WRS0032 SSS0162

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49

SSS0159

LII2184

1-50 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

(front seats)

1. Top tether strap anchor

2. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

and rollover supplemental air bag infla-

tors

3. Rear seat belts

4. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact

and rollover supplemental air bag

5. Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag

6. Head restraints/headrests

7. Front seat belts

8. Side-impact pressure sensor (driver’s

side shown; front passenger’s side

similar)

9. Supplemental front-impact air bags

10. Seats

11. Occupant classification sensor (weight

sensor)

12. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front

seats)

13. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren) system

WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the pas-

senger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag Sys-

tem, please observe the following

items.

∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rear

seat to push or pull on the seatback

pocket.

∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than

9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head

restraint/headrest or in the seatback

pocket.

∙ Make sure that there is nothing press-

ing against the rear of the seatback,

such as a child restraint installed in

the rear seat or an object stored on

the floor.

∙ Make sure that there is no object

placed under the front passenger

seat.

∙ Make sure that there is no object

placed between the seat cushion and

center console or between the seat

cushion and the door.

∙ If a forward facing child restraint is

installed in the front passenger seat,

do not position the front passenger

seat so the child restraint contacts the

instrument panel. If the child restraint

does contact the instrument panel,

the system may determine the seat is

occupied and the passenger air bag

may deploy in a collision. Also the

front passenger air bag status light

may not illuminate. For additional in-

formation about installing and using

child restraints, refer to "Child re-

straints" in this section.

∙ Confirm the operating condition with

the front passenger air bag status

light.

∙ If you notice that the front passenger

air bag status light is not operating as

described in this section, get the oc-

cupant classification system checked.

It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ Until you have confirmed with a

dealer that your passenger seat occu-

pant classification system is working

properly, position the occupants in

the rear seating positions.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51

∙ Do not position the front passenger

seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the

front seat does contact the rear seat,

the air bag system may determine a

sensor malfunction has occurred and

the front passenger air bag status

light may illuminate and the supple-

mental air bag warning light may

flash.

This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN

Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and

front passenger seats. This system is de-

signed to meet certification requirements

under U.S.regulations.It is also permitted in

Canada. However, all of the information,

cautions and warnings in this manual

still apply and must be followed.

The driver supplemental front-impact air

bag is located in the center of the steering

wheel. The front passenger supplemental

front-impact air bag is mounted in the

dashboard above the glove box. The front

air bags are designed to inflate in higher

severity frontal collisions, although they

may inflate if the forces in another type of

collision are similar to those of a higher

severity frontal impact. They may not in-

flate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle

damage (or lack of it) is not always an indi-

cation of proper front air bag system op-

eration.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System

monitors information from the crash zone

sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat

belt buckle sensors and occupant classifi-

cation sensor (weight sensor). Inflator op-

eration is based on the severity of a colli-

sion and seat belt usage for the driver. For

the front passenger, the occupant classifi-

cation sensor is also monitored. Based on

information from the sensor, only one front

air bag may inflate in a crash,depending on

the crash severity and whether the front

occupants are belted or unbelted. Addi-

tionally, the front passenger air bag may be

automatically turned off under some con-

ditions, depending on the weight detected

on the front passenger seat and how the

seat belt is used. If the front passenger air

bag is OFF, the front passenger air bag sta-

tus light will be illuminated. For additional

information, refer to “Front passenger air

bag and status light” in this section. One

front air bag inflating does not indicate im-

proper performance of the system.

If you have any questions about your air

bag system, it is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer to obtain information

about the system. If you are considering

modification of your vehicle due to a dis-

ability, you may also contact NISSAN. Con-

tact information is contained in the front of

this Owner’s Manual.

When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud

noise may be heard, followed by the re-

lease of smoke. This smoke is not harmful

and does not indicate a fire. Care should be

taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irrita-

tion and choking. Those with a history of a

breathing condition should get fresh air

promptly.

Front air bags, along with the use of seat

belts, help to cushion the impact force on

the face and chest of the front occupants.

They can help save lives and reduce seri-

ous injuries. However, an inflating front air

bag may cause facial abrasions or other

injuries. Front air bags do not provide re-

straint to the lower body.

Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat

belts should be correctly worn and the

driver and front passenger seated upright

as far as practical away from the steering

wheel or instrument panel. The front air

bags inflate quickly in order to help protect

the front occupants. Because of this, the

force of the front air bag inflating can in-

1-52 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

crease the risk of injury if the occupant is

too close to, or is against, the front air bag

module during inflation.

The front air bags deflate quickly after a

collision.

The front air bags operate only when the

ignition switch is placed in the ON posi-

tion.

After placing the ignition switch in the

ON position, the supplemental air bag

warning light illuminates. The supple-

mental air bag warning light will turn off

after about 7 seconds if the system is

operational. Front passenger air bag and status light

WARNING

The front passenger air bag is designed

to automatically turn OFF under some

conditions. Read this section carefully

to learn how it operates. Proper use of

the seat, seat belt and child restraints is

necessary for most effective protec-

tion. Failure to follow all instructions in

this manual concerning the use of

seats, seat belts and child restraints can

increase the risk or severity of injury in

an accident.

Status light

The front passenger seat is equipped with

an occupant classification sensor (weight

sensor) that turns the front passenger air

bag on or off depending on the weight ap-

plied to the front passenger seat. The sta-

tus of the front passenger air bag (ON or

OFF) is indicated by the front passenger air

bag status light which is located on

the instrument panel.

WRS0475

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53

After the ignition switch is placed in the

"ON" position, the front passenger air bag

status light on the instrument panel illumi-

nates for about 7 seconds and then turns

off or remains illuminated depending on

the front passenger seat occupied status.

The light operates as follows:

CONDITION DESCRIPTION PASSENGER AIR BAG INDI-

CATOR LIGHT ( )FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG STATUS

Empty Empty front passenger seat ON (illuminated) INHIBITED

Nobody/Somebody Bag or Child or Child Restraint or

Small Adult in front passenger seat ON (illuminated) INHIBITED

Adult Adult in the front passenger seat OFF (dark) ACTIVATED

In addition to the above, certain objects

placed on the front passenger seat may

also cause the light to operate as de-

scribed above depending on their weight.

For additional information, refer to “Normal

operation” and “Troubleshooting” in this

section.

Front passenger air bag

The front passenger air bag is designed to

automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is

operated under some conditions as de-

scribed below in accordance with U.S. regu-

lations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF,

it will not inflate in a crash.The driver air bag

and other air bags in your vehicle are not

part of this system.

The purpose of the regulation is to help

reduce the risk of injury or death from an

inflating air bag to certain front passenger

seat occupants, such as children, by requir-

ing the air bag to be automatically turned

OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the

requirements.

The occupant classification sensor in this

vehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to

detect an occupant and objects on the

seat by weight. For example, if a child is in

the front passenger seat, the NISSAN Ad-

vanced Air Bag System is designed to turn

the front passenger air bag OFF in accor-

dance with the regulations. Also, if a child

restraint of the type specified in the regula-

tions is on the seat, its weight and the

child’s weight can be detected and cause

the air bag to turn OFF.

Front passenger seat adult occupants who

are properly seated and using the seat belt

as outlined in this manual should not

cause the front passenger air bag to be

automatically turned OFF. For small adults

it may be turned OFF, however if the occu-

pant takes his/her weight off the seat

cushion (for example, by not sitting upright,

by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by

otherwise being out of position), this could

cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF.

Always be sure to be seated and wearing

the seat belt properly for the most effective

protection by the seat belt and supple-

mental air bag.

NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and

children be properly restrained in a rear

seat. NISSAN also recommends that ap-

propriate child restraints and booster

seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If

this is not possible, the occupant classifica-

tion sensor is designed to operate as de-

scribed above to turn the front passenger

1-54 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

air bag OFF for specified child restraints as

required by the regulations. Failing to prop-

erly secure child restraints and to use the

ALR mode may allow the restraint to tip or

move in a collision or sudden stop. This can

also result in the passenger air bag inflat-

ing in a crash instead of being OFF. For

additional information about proper use

and installation, refer to “Child restraints” in

this section.

If the front passenger seat is not occupied,

the front passenger air bag is designed not

to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects

placed on the seat could result in air bag

inflation, because of the object’s weight de-

tected by the occupant classification sen-

sor. Other conditions could also result in air

bag inflation, such as if a child is standing

on the seat, or if two children are on the

seat, contrary to the instructions in this

manual. Always be sure that you and all

vehicle occupants are seated and re-

strained properly.

Using the front passenger air bag status

light, you can monitor when the front pas-

senger air bag is automatically turned OFF.

If an adult occupant is in the seat but the

front passenger air bag status light is illu-

minated (indicating that the air bag is OFF),

it could be that the person is a small adult,

or is not sitting on the seat properly or not

using the seat belt properly.

If a child restraint must be used in the front

seat, the front passenger air bag status

light may or may not be illuminated, de-

pending on the size of the child and the

type of child restraint being used. If the air

bag status light is not illuminated (indicat-

ing that the air bag might inflate in a crash),

it could be that the child restraint or seat

belt is not being used properly. Make sure

that the child restraint is installed properly,

the seat belt is used properly and the occu-

pant is positioned properly. If the air bag

status light is still not illuminated, reposi-

tion the occupant or child restraint in a rear

seat.

If the front passenger air bag status light

will not illuminate even though you believe

that the child restraint, the seat belts and

the occupant are properly positioned, it is

recommended that you take your vehicle

to a NISSAN dealer. A NISSAN dealer can

check system status by using a special

tool. However, until you have confirmed

with a dealer that your air bag is working

properly, reposition the occupant or child

restraint in a rear seat.

The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and

front passenger air bag status light will

take a few seconds to register a change in

the front passenger seat status. This is nor-

mal system operation and does not indi-

cate a malfunction.

If a malfunction occurs in the front passen-

ger air bag system, the supplemental air

bag warning light , located in the me-

ter and gauges area of the instrument

panel, will be illuminated (blinking or

steadily lit). Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Normal operation

In order for the occupant classification

sensor system to classify the front passen-

ger based on weight, please follow the pre-

cautions and steps outlined below:

Precautions

∙ Make sure that there are no objects

weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on

the seat or placed in the seatback

pocket.

∙ Make sure that a child restraint or other

object is not pressing against the rear

of the seatback.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55

∙ Make sure that a rear passenger is not

pushing or pulling on the back of the

front passenger seat.

∙ Make sure that the front passenger

seat or seatback is not forced back

against an object on the seat or floor

behind it.

∙ Make sure that there is no object placed

under the front passenger seat.

Steps

1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the “Seats”

section of this manual. Sit upright, lean-

ing against the seatback, and centered

on the seat cushion with your feet com-

fortably extended to the floor.

2. Make sure there are no objects on your

lap.

3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the

“Seat belts” section of this manual.

Front passenger seat belt buckle sta-

tus is monitored by the occupant clas-

sification system, and is used as an in-

put to determine occupancy status. So,

it is highly recommended that the front

passenger fasten their seat belt.

4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds

allowing the system to classify the

front passenger before the vehicle is

put into motion.

5. Ensure proper classification by check-

ing the front passenger air bag status

light.

NOTE:

This vehicle’s occupant classification

sensor system generally keeps the clas-

sification locked during driving, so it is

important that you confirm that the

front passenger is properly classified

prior to driving. However, the occupant

classification sensor may recalculate the

weight of the occupant under some con-

ditions (both while driving and when

stopped), so front passenger seat occu-

pants should continue to remain seated

as outlined above.

Troubleshooting

If you think the front passenger air bag

status light is incorrect:

1. If the light is ON with an adult occupying

the front passenger seat:

∙ Occupant is a small adult — the air bag

light is functioning as intended. The

front passenger air bag is suppressed.

However, if the occupant is not a small

adult, then this may be due to the following

conditions that may be interfering with the

weight sensors:

∙ Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning

against the seatback, and centered on

the seat cushion with his/her feet com-

fortably extended to the floor.

∙ A child restraint or other object pressing

against the rear of the seatback.

∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on

the back of the front passenger seat.

∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback

against an object on the seat or floor

behind it.

∙ An object placed under the front pas-

senger seat.

∙ An object placed between the seat

cushion and center console or between

the seat cushion and the door.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a

stop when it is safe to do so. Check and

correct any of the above conditions. Re-

start the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

1-56 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

NOTE:

A system check will be performed during

which the front passenger air bag status

light will remain lit for about 7 seconds

initially.

If the light is still ON after this, the person

should be advised not to ride in the front

passenger seat and the vehicle should be

checked as soon as possible. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

2. If the light is OFF with a small adult,

child or child restraint occupying the

front passenger seat.

This may be due to the following con-

ditions that may be interfering with the

weight sensors:

∙ Small adult or child is not sitting upright,

leaning against the seatback, and cen-

tered on the seat cushion with his/her

feet comfortably extended to the floor.

∙ The child restraint is not properly in-

stalled, as outlined in the “Child re-

straints” section of this manual.

∙ An object weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg)

hanging on the seat or placed in the

seatback pocket.

∙ A child restraint or other object pressing

against the rear of the seatback.

∙ A rear passenger pushing or pulling on

the back of the front passenger seat.

∙ Forcing the front seat or seatback

against an object on the seat or floor

behind it.

∙ An object placed under the front pas-

senger seat.

∙ An object placed between the seat

cushion and center console.

If the vehicle is moving, please come to a

stop when it is safe to do so. Check and

correct any of the above conditions. Re-

start the vehicle and wait 1 minute.

NOTE:

A system check will be performed during

which the front passenger air bag status

light will remain lit for about 7 seconds

initially.

If the light is still OFF after this, the small

adult, child or child restraint should be re-

positioned in the rear seat and the vehicle

should be checked as soon as possible. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

3. If the light is OFF with no front passen-

ger and no objects on the front pas-

senger seat, the vehicle should be

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer as soon as pos-

sible.

Other supplemental front-impact air

bag precautions

WARNING

∙ Do not place any objects on the steer-

ing wheel pad or on the instrument

panel. Also, do not place any objects

between any occupant and the steer-

ing wheel or instrument panel. Such

objects may become dangerous pro-

jectiles and cause injury if the front air

bags inflate.

∙ Immediately after inflation, several

front air bag system components will

be hot. Do not touch them; you may

severely burn yourself.

∙ No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the supplemental air bag system. This

is to prevent accidental inflation of

the supplemental air bag or damage

to the supplemental air bag system.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57

∙ Do not make unauthorized changes

to your vehicle’s electrical system,

suspension system or front end struc-

ture. This could affect proper opera-

tion of the front air bag system.

∙ Tampering with the front air bag sys-

tem may result in serious personal in-

jury. Tampering includes changes to

the steering wheel and the instru-

ment panel assembly by placing ma-

terial over the steering wheel pad and

above the instrument panel or by in-

stalling additional trim material

around the air bag system.

∙ Removing or modifying the front pas-

senger seat may affect the function of

the air bag system and result in seri-

ous personal injury.

∙ Modifying or tampering with the front

passenger seat may result in serious

personal injury. For example, do not

change the front seats by placing ma-

terial on the seat cushion or by install-

ing additional trim material, such as

seat covers, on the seat that are not

specifically designed to assure proper

air bag operation. Additionally, do not

stow any objects under the front pas-

senger seat or the seat cushion and

seatback. Such objects may interfere

with the proper operation of the occu-

pant classification sensor (weight

sensor).

∙ No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the seat belt system. This may affect

the front air bag system. Tampering

with the seat belt system may result

in serious personal injury.

∙ It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work on and around

the front air bag system. It is also rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for installation of electrical

equipment. The Supplemental Re-

straint System (SRS) wiring har-

nesses* should not be modified or dis-

connected. Unauthorized electrical

test equipment and probing devices

should not be used on the air bag

system.

∙ A cracked windshield should be re-

placed immediately by a qualified re-

pair facility. A cracked windshield

could affect the function of the

supplemental air bag system.

*The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identifica-

tion.

When selling your vehicle, we request that

you inform the buyer about the front air

bag system and guide the buyer to the

appropriate sections in this Owner’s

Manual.

1-58 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

Front seat-mounted side-impact

supplemental air bag and

roof-mounted curtain side-

impact and rollover supplemental

air bag systems

The side air bags are located in the outside

of the seatback of the front seats. The cur-

tain air bags are located in the side roof

rails. All of the information, cautions and

warnings in this manual must be fol-

lowed. The side air bags and curtain air

bags are designed to inflate in higher se-

verity side collisions, although they may in-

flate if the forces in another type of collision

are similar to those of a higher severity

impact. They are designed to inflate on the

side where the vehicle is impacted. They

may not inflate in certain side collisions.

Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate

in certain types of rollover collisions or near

rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle move-

ments (for example, during severe off-

roading) may cause the curtain air bags to

inflate.

Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always

an indication of proper side air bag and

curtain air bag operation.

When the side air bags and curtain air bags

inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard,

followed by the release of smoke. This

smoke is not harmful and does not indi-

cate a fire. Care should be taken not to

inhale it, as it may cause irritation and

choking. Those with a history of a breath-

ing condition should get fresh air promptly.

Side air bags, along with the use of seat

belts, help to cushion the impact force on

the chest and pelvic area of the front occu-

pants. Curtain air bags help to cushion the

impact force to the head of occupants in

the front and rear outboard seating posi-

tions. They can help save lives and reduce

serious injuries. However, an inflating side

air bag and curtain air bag may cause

abrasions or other injuries. Side air bags

and curtain air bags do not provide re-

straint to the lower body.

The seat belts should be correctly worn

and the driver and front passenger seated

upright as far as practical away from the

side air bag. Rear seat passengers should

be seated as far away as practical from the

door finishers and side roof rails. The side

air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly

in order to help protect the occupants. Be-

cause of this, the force of the side air bag

and curtain air bag inflating can increase

the risk of injury if the occupant is too close

to, or is against, these air bag modules dur-

ing inflation. The side air bag will deflate

quickly after the collision is over.

The curtain air bag will remain inflated for a

short time.

The side air bags and curtain air bags

operate only when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position.

After placing the ignition switch in the

ON position, the supplemental air bag

warning light illuminates. The supple-

mental air bag warning light will turn off

after about 7 seconds if the system is

operational.

LRS0259

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59

WARNING

∙ Do not place any objects near the

seatback of the front seats. Also, do

not place any objects (an umbrella,

bag, etc.) between the front door fin-

isher and the front seat. Such objects

may become dangerous projectiles

and cause injury if a side air bag

inflates.

∙ Right after inflation, several side air

bag and curtain air bag system com-

ponents will be hot. Do not touch

them; you may severely burn yourself.

∙ No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the side air bag and curtain air bag

systems. This is to prevent damage to

or accidental inflation of the side air

bag and curtain air bag or damage to

the side air bag and curtain air bag

systems.

∙ Do not make unauthorized changes

to your vehicle’s electrical system,

suspension system or side panel. This

could affect proper operation of the

side air bag and curtain air bag

systems.

∙ Tampering with the side air bag sys-

tem may result in serious personal in-

jury. For example, do not change the

front seats by placing material near

the seatbacks or by installing addi-

tional trim material, such as seat cov-

ers, around the side air bag.

∙ It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work on and around

the side air bag and curtain air bag. It

is also recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for installation of elec-

trical equipment. The SRS wiring har-

nesses* should not be modified or dis-

connected. Unauthorized electrical

test equipment and probing devices

should not be used on the side air bag

or curtain air bag system.

* The SRS wiring harness connectors are

yellow and orange for easy identifica-

tion.

When selling your vehicle, we request that

you inform the buyer about the side air bag

and curtain air bag systems and guide the

buyer to the appropriate sections in this

Owner’s Manual.

Seat belt with pretensioner(s)

(front seats)

WARNING

∙ The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused

after activation. They must be re-

placed together with the retractor

and buckle as a unit.

∙ If the vehicle becomes involved in a

collision but pretensioner(s) are not

activated, be sure to have the preten-

sioner system checked and, if neces-

sary, replaced. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

∙ No unauthorized changes should be

made to any components or wiring of

the pretensioner system. This is to

prevent damage to or accidental acti-

vation of the pretensioner(s). Tamper-

ing with the pretensioner system may

result in serious personal injury.

1-60 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

∙ It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for work on and around

the pretensioner system. It is also rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for installation of electrical

equipment. Unauthorized electrical

test equipment and probing devices

should not be used on the preten-

sioner system.

∙ If you need to dispose of the preten-

sioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. Incorrect dis-

posal procedures could cause per-

sonal injury.

The pretensioner system may activate

with the supplemental air bag system in

certain types of collisions. Working with the

seat belt retractor, the pretensioner(s) help

tighten the seat belt when the vehicle be-

comes involved in certain types of colli-

sions, helping to restrain front seat occu-

pants.

The pretensioner(s) are encased within the

seat belt retractor and to the seat belt an-

chor affixed to the floor of the vehicle.

These seat belts are used the same way as

conventional seat belts.

When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is re-

leased and a loud noise may be heard. This

smoke is not harmful and does not indi-

cate a fire. Care should be taken not to

inhale it, as it may cause irritation and

choking. Those with a history of a breath-

ing condition should get fresh air promptly.

After the pretensioner(s’) activation, load

limiters allow the seat belt to release web-

bing (if necessary) to reduce forces against

the chest.

The supplemental air bag warning

light is used to indicate malfunctions

in the pretensioner system. For additional

information, refer to "Supplemental air bag

warning light" in this section. If the opera-

tion of the supplemental air bag warning

light indicates there is a malfunction, have

the system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice.

When selling your vehicle, we request that

you inform the buyer about the preten-

sioner system and guide the buyer to the

appropriate sections in this Owner’s

Manual.

1. SRS air bag warning labels (located

on the sun visors)

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING

LABELS

Warning labels about the supplemental

front-impact air bag system are placed in

the vehicle as shown in the illustration.

WARNING

Do not use a rear-facing child restraint

on a seat protected by an air bag in

front of it. If the air bag deploys, it may

cause serious injury or death.

LRS2163

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61

SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING

LIGHT

The supplemental air bag warning light,

displaying in the instrument panel,

monitors the circuits for the air bag sys-

tems, pretensioner(s) and all related wiring.

When the ignition is placed in the ON or

START position, the supplemental air bag

warning light illuminates for about 7 sec-

onds and then turns off. This means the

system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the

front air bag, side air bag and curtain air

bag and pretensioner systems need ser-

vicing:

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

remains on after approximately 7 sec-

onds.

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

does not come on at all.

Under these conditions, the front air bag,

side air bag and curtain air bag or preten-

sioner systems may not operate properly.

They must be checked and repaired. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning

light is on, it could mean that the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag

and/or pretensioner systems will not

operate in an accident. To help avoid

injury to yourself or others, have your

vehicle checked as soon as possible.It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Repair and replacement

procedure

The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air

bags and pretensioner(s) are designed to

inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a re-

minder, unless it is damaged, the supple-

mental air bag warning light remains illu-

minated after inflation has occurred.These

systems should be repaired and/or re-

placed as soon as possible. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

When maintenance work is required on the

vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags,

curtain air bags, pretensioner(s) and re-

lated parts should be pointed out to the

person performing the maintenance. The

ignition switch should always be placed in

the LOCK position when working under the

hood or inside the vehicle.

LRS0100

1-62 Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system

WARNING

∙ Once a front air bag, side air bag, or

curtain air bag has inflated, the air

bag module will not function again

and must be replaced. Additionally,

the activated pretensioner(s) must

also be replaced. The air bag module

and pretensioner(s) should be re-

placed. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

However, the air bag module and pre-

tensioner(s) cannot be repaired.

∙ The front air bag, side air bag, curtain

air bag systems and the pretensioner

system should be inspected if there is

any damage to the front end or side

portion of the vehicle. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

∙ If you need to dispose of the supple-

mental air bag or pretensioner sys-

tems or scrap the vehicle, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures

could cause personal injury.

∙ If there is an impact to your vehicle

from any direction, your Occupant

Classification Sensor (OCS) should be

checked to verify it is still functioning

correctly. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

The OCS should be checked even if no

air bags deploy as a result of the im-

pact. Failure to verify proper OCS

function may result in an improper air

bag deployment resulting in injury or

death.

Safety—Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63

2 Instruments and controls

Instrument panel................................2-2

Meters and gauges..............................2-3

Speedometer and odometer .................2-4

Tachometer ..................................2-5

Engine coolant temperature gauge ..........2-5

Fuel gauge ...................................2-6

Compass (if so equipped) .......................2-7

Compass display .............................2-7

Warning lights, indicator lights and audible

reminders ......................................2-10

Checking lights..............................2-10

Warning lights ................................2-11

Indicator lights ..............................2-15

Audible reminders ........................... 2-17

Vehicle information display .....................2-18

How to use the vehicle information

display ......................................2-19

Startup display ..............................2-19

Resetting the trip computer .................2-19

Settings .....................................2-19

Vehicle information display warnings

and indicators...............................2-27

Security systems ...............................2-31

Vehicle security system .....................2-31

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System .........2-32

Wiper and washer switch .......................2-34

Switch operation ............................2-34

Rear window and outside mirror

(if so equipped) defroster switch................2-35

Headlight and turn signal switch ...............2-35

Headlight control switch.....................2-35

Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system

(Type A) (if so equipped) .....................2-38

LED Daytime Running Lights (DRL)

system (Type B) (if so equipped) .............2-38

Instrument brightness control...............2-39

Turn signal switch ...........................2-39

Fog light switch (if so equipped) .............2-40

Horn ...........................................2-40

Heated seat switches (if so equipped) ..........2-41

Heated steering wheel switch (if so equipped) . . 2-42

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch......2-42

E-call (SOS) switch (if so equipped)..............2-43

Power outlets ..................................2-43

Extended storage switch .......................2-44

Storage ........................................2-45

Front-door pockets..........................2-45

Seatback pockets ...........................2-46

Glovebox....................................2-46

Console box .................................2-47

Overhead sunglasses storage ...............2-47

Cup holders .................................2-48

Windows .......................................2-49

Power windows .............................2-49

Moonroof (if so equipped) ......................2-52

Power moonroof ............................2-52

Interior lights ...................................2-54

Console light (if so equipped) ................2-54

Map lights ...................................2-55

Personal lights ..............................2-55

Trunk light......................................2-55

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver

(if so equipped) .................................2-56

Programming HomeLink® ...................2-56

Programming HomeLink® for Canadian

customers and gate openers................2-58

Operating the HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver ..................................2-58

Programming trouble-diagnosis ............2-59

Clearing the programmed information ......2-59

Reprogramming a single HomeLink®

button.......................................2-59

If your vehicle is stolen.......................2-59

1. Instrument brightness control

(P. 2-35)

Trip computer reset switch (P. 2-3)

2. Vents (P. 4-11)

3. Headlight/fog light (if so

equipped)/turn signal switch

(P. 2-35)

4. Driver supplemental air bag

(P. 1-44)

Horn (P. 2-40)

5. Meters and gauges (P. 2-3)

Warning and indicator lights

(P. 2-10)

Vehicle information display (P. 2-18)

6. Paddle shifters (if so equipped)

(P. 5-14)

7. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-34)

8. Hazard warning flasher switch

(P. 6-2)

9. Front passenger air bag status

light (P. 1-44)

10. Navigation system*

(if so equipped)

11. Front passenger supplemental air

bag (P. 1-44)

12. Glove box (P. 2-45)

13. Power outlet (P. 2-43)

14. Heater and air conditioner (P. 4-13)

LIC3763

INSTRUMENT PANEL

2-2 Instruments and controls

15. Shift lever (P. 5-14)

16. USB connection port

(if so equipped) (P. 4-24)

Aux jack (P. 4-24)

17. Push-button ignition switch

(P. 5-9)

18. Cruise control main/set switches

(if so equipped) (P. 5-41)

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)

switches (if so equipped) (P. 5-43)

Bluetooth® Hands-free Phone

System (P. 4-2, 4-54)

19. Tilt/telescopic steering wheel

controls (P. 3-28)

20. Vehicle information display

controls (P. 2-18)

Steering wheel switch for audio

control (P. 4-48)

21. Hood release (P. 3-23)

22. Trunk opener (P. 3-24)

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

switch (P. 2-42)

Heated steering wheel switch

(if so equipped) (P. 2-42)

*: For additional information, refer to the

separate NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual.

Refer to the page number indicated in

parentheses for operating details.

1. Tachometer

2. Warning and indicator lights

3. Vehicle information display

Odometer

Twin trip odometer

4. Speedometer

5. Fuel gauge

6. Engine coolant temperature gauge

LIC3459

METERS AND GAUGES

Instruments and controls 2-3

SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER

This vehicle is equipped with a speedom-

eter and odometer. The speedometer is

located on the right side of the meter clus-

ter. The odometer is located within the ve-

hicle information display.

Speedometer

The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.

Odometer/Twin trip odometer

The odometer and the twin trip odometer

䊊

1are displayed in the vehicle information

display when the ignition switch is placed

in the ON position.

The odometer records the total distance

the vehicle has been driven.

The twin trip odometer records the dis-

tance of individual trips.

LIC2218 LIC2921

2-4 Instruments and controls

Changing the display

Push the TRIP RESET switch 䊊

2on the left

side of the instrument panel to change the

display as follows:

Trip →Trip →Odometer Mile-

age →Trip

Resetting the trip odometer

Pushing the TRIP RESET switch 䊊

2for more

than 1 second resets the currently dis-

played trip odometer to zero.

TACHOMETER

The tachometer indicates engine speed in

revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev

engine into the red zone 䊊

CAUTION

When engine speed approaches the red

zone, reduce engine speed. Operating

the engine in the red zone may cause

serious engine damage.

ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE

GAUGE

The gauge indicates the engine coolant

temperature. The engine coolant tempera-

ture is within the normal range 䊊

1when

the gauge needle points within the zone

shown in the illustration.

The engine coolant temperature varies

with the outside air temperature and driv-

ing conditions.

LIC2219 LIC2220

Instruments and controls 2-5

CAUTION

If the gauge indicates coolant tempera-

ture near the hot (H) end of the normal

range,reduce vehicle speed to decrease

temperature. If the gauge is over the

normal range, stop the vehicle as soon

as safely possible. If the engine is over-

heated, continued operation of the ve-

hicle may seriously damage the engine.

For additional information, refer to “If

your vehicle overheats” in the “In case

of emergency” section of this manual

for immediate action required.

FUEL GAUGE

The gauge indicates the approximate fuel

level in the tank.

The gauge may move slightly during brak-

ing, turning, acceleration, or going up or

down hills.

The gauge needle returns to 0 (Empty) af-

ter the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position.

The low fuel warning message shows in

the vehicle information display when the

amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.

Refill the fuel tank before the gauge reg-

isters 0 (Empty).

The indicates that the fuel-filler

door is located on the driver’s side of the

vehicle.

CAUTION

∙ If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may

come on. Refuel as soon as possible.

After a few driving trips, the light

should turn off. If the light remains on

after a few driving trips, have the ve-

hicle inspected. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

∙ For additional information, refer to

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in

this section.

LIC2222

2-6 Instruments and controls

This unit measures terrestrial magnetism

and indicates the direction of the vehicle’s

heading.

With the ignition switch placed in the ON

position, press the button as de-

scribed in the chart below to activate vari-

ous features of the automatic anti-glare

rearview mirror.

Press and hold

the

button for

about:

Feature:

(Press button again for about

1 second to change settings)

1 second Compass display toggles on/off

5 seconds

Compass zone can be changed

to correct false compass read-

ings

9 seconds Compass enters calibration

mode

For information about the automatic anti-

glare feature, refer to “Automatic anti-glare

rearview mirror” in the “Pre-driving checks

and adjustments” section of this manual.

Press the button for about 1 second

when the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position to toggle the compass display 䊊

on or off. The display will indicate the direc-

tion of the vehicle’s heading.

N: North

E: East

S: South

W: West

If the display reads “C”, calibrate the com-

pass by driving the vehicle in three com-

plete circles at less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

You can also calibrate the compass by driv-

ing your vehicle on your everyday route.

The compass will be calibrated once it has

tracked three complete circles.

COMPASS DISPLAY

Press the button when the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position. The

direction will be displayed.

Zone variation change procedure

The difference between magnetic north

and geographical north is known as vari-

ance. In some areas, this difference can

sometimes be great enough to cause false

compass readings. Follow these instruc-

tions to set the variance for your particular

location if this happens:

1. Establish your location on the zone

map. Refer to the illustration. Record

your zone number.

2. Place the ignition switch in the ON po-

sition.

3. Press the button in for 5 seconds

until the current zone entry number is

displayed.

4. Press the button repeatedly until

the desired zone entry number is dis-

played.

LIC1487

COMPASS (if so equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-7

Once the desired zone number is dis-

played, stop pressing the button and

the display will show compass direction

within a few seconds.

NOTE:

Use zone number 5 for Hawaii.

WIC0355

2-8 Instruments and controls

∙If a magnet is located near the com-

pass or the vehicle is driven where the

terrestrial magnetism is disturbed,

the compass display may not indi-

cate the correct direction.

∙In places where the terrestrial mag-

netism is disturbed, the correction of

the direction starts automatically.

Inaccurate compass direction

The compass display is equipped with au-

tomatic correction function. If the correct

direction is not shown, follow this proce-

dure.

1. With the display turned on, press and

hold the button for about 9 sec-

onds. The display will read “C.”

2. Calibrate the compass by driving the

vehicle in three complete circles at a

maximum speed of 5 mph (8 km/h).

3. After completing the circles the display

should return to normal.

∙ If the compass deviates from the cor-

rect indication soon after repeated ad-

justment, have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

∙ The compass may not indicate the cor-

rect compass point in tunnels or while

driving up or down a steep hill. (The

compass returns to the correct com-

pass point when the vehicle moves to

an area where the geomagnetism is

stabilized.)

CAUTION

∙ Do not install a ski rack, antenna, etc.,

which are attached to the vehicle by

means of a magnet. They affect the

operation of the compass.

∙ When cleaning the mirror, use a paper

towel or similar material dampened

with glass cleaner. Do not spray glass

cleaner directly on the mirror as it

may cause the liquid cleaner to enter

the mirror housing.

Instruments and controls 2-9

or Anti-lock Braking System

(ABS) warning light

Seat belt warning light and chime Security indicator light

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) sys-

tem warning light

Supplemental air bag warning light Side light and headlight indicator light

(green)

or Brake warning light Front fog light indicator light (if so

equipped)

Slip indicator light

Charge warning light Front passenger air bag status light Turn signal/hazard indicator lights

Low tire pressure warning light High beam indicator light (blue) Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indi-

cator light

Master warning light Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Power steering warning light Overdrive OFF indicator light (if so

equipped)

CHECKING LIGHTS

With all doors closed, apply the parking

brake, fasten the seat belts and place the

ignition switch in the ON position without

starting the engine. The following lights (if

so equipped) will come on:

, or , ,

The following lights (if so equipped) will

come on briefly and then go off:

or , , , , ,

If any light does not come on or operate in

a way other than described, it may indicate

a burned-out bulb and/or a system mal-

function. Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Some indicators and warnings are also dis-

played on the vehicle information display

between the speedometer and tachom-

WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS

AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS

2-10 Instruments and controls

eter. For additional information, refer to “Ve-

hicle information display” in this section.

WARNING LIGHTS

For additional information on warnings

and indicators, refer to “Vehicle information

display” in this section.

or Anti-lock Braking

System (ABS)

warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the ABS warning light illuminates

and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is

operational.

If the ABS warning light illuminates while

the engine is running or while driving, it

may indicate the ABS is not functioning

properly. Have the system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock

function is turned off. The brake system

then operates normally but without anti-

lock assistance. For additional information,

refer to “Brake system” in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

Automatic Emergency

Braking (AEB) system

warning light

This light comes on when the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position. It illumi-

nates briefly and then turns off.

This light illuminates when the AEB system

is set to OFF on the meter display.

If the light illuminates when the AEB sys-

tem is on, it may indicate that the system is

unavailable. For additional information, re-

fer to “Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)”

in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

or Brake warning

light

This light functions for both the parking

brake and the foot brake systems.

Parking brake indicator

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the light comes on when the park-

ing brake is applied.

Low brake fluid warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, the light warns of a low brake fluid

level. If the light comes on while the engine

is running with the parking brake not ap-

plied, stop the vehicle and perform the fol-

lowing:

1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake

fluid as necessary. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Brake fluid” in the “Do-

it-yourself” section of this manual.

2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have

the warning system checked. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

WARNING

∙ Your brake system may not be work-

ing properly if the warning light is on.

Driving could be dangerous. If you

judge it to be safe, drive carefully to

the nearest service station for repairs.

Otherwise, have your vehicle towed

because driving it could be

dangerous.

∙ Pressing the brake pedal with the en-

gine stopped and/or a low brake fluid

level may increase your stopping dis-

tance and braking will require greater

pedal effort as well as pedal travel.

Instruments and controls 2-11

∙ If the brake fluid level is below the

MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake

fluid reservoir, do not drive until the

brake system has been checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning

indicator

When the parking brake is released and the

brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the

brake warning light and the ABS warning

light illuminate, it may indicate the ABS is

not functioning properly. Have the brake

system checked and, if necessary, repaired.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. Avoid high-speed

driving and abrupt braking. For additional

information, refer to “Anti-lock Braking Sys-

tem (ABS) warning light” in this section.

Charge warning light

If this light comes on while the engine is

running, it may indicate the charging sys-

tem is not functioning properly. Turn the

engine off and check the generator belt. If

the belt is loose, broken, missing, or if the

light remains on, have the system checked.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

CAUTION

∙ Do not ground electrical accessories

directly to the battery terminal. Doing

so will bypass the variable voltage

control system and the vehicle bat-

tery may not charge completely. For

additional information, refer to “Vari-

able voltage control system” in the

“Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

∙ Do not continue driving if the genera-

tor belt is loose, broken or missing.

Low tire pressure warning

light

Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pres-

sure Monitoring System (TPMS) that moni-

tors the tire pressure of all tires except the

spare.

The low tire pressure warning light warns

of low tire pressure or indicates that the

TPMS is not functioning properly.

After the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, this light illuminates for about

1 second and turns off.

Low tire pressure warning

If the vehicle is being driven with low tire

pressure, the warning light will illumi-

nate. A “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air”

warning also appears in the vehicle in-

formation display.

When the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates, you should stop and adjust

the tire pressure of all four tires to the

recommended COLD tire pressure shown

on the Tire and Loading Information la-

bel located in the driver’s door opening.

The low tire pressure warning light does

not automatically turn off when the tire

pressure is adjusted. After the tire is in-

flated to the recommended pressure,

the vehicle must be driven at speeds

above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the

TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure

warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge

to check the tire pressure.

The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning

appears each time the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position as long as the low

tire pressure warning light remains illumi-

nated.

2-12 Instruments and controls

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle

information display” in this section, “Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the

“Starting and driving” and “In case of emer-

gency” sections of this manual.

TPMS malfunction

If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the

low tire pressure warning light will flash for

approximately 1 minute when the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position. The

light will remain on after 1 minute. Have the

system checked. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

The "Tire Pressure Low — Add Air" warning

does not appear if the low tire pressure

warning light illuminates to indicate a

TPMS malfunction.

For additional information, refer to “Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in the

“Starting and driving” section and “Tire

pressure” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of

this manual.

WARNING

∙ Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should contact

the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

∙

If the light does not illuminate with the

ignition switch placed in the ON posi-

tion, have the vehicle checked as soon

as possible. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ If the light illuminates while driving,

avoid sudden steering maneuvers or

abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed,

pull off the road to a safe location and

stop the vehicle as soon as possible.

Driving with under-inflated tires may

permanently damage the tires and in-

crease the likelihood of tire failure. Se-

rious vehicle damage could occur and

may lead to an accident and could re-

sult in serious personal injury or

death. Check the tire pressure for all

four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to

the recommended COLD tire pressure

show on the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label located in the driver’s

door opening to turn the low tire pres-

sure warning light off. If the light still

illuminates while driving after adjust-

ing the tire pressure, a tire may be flat

or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If

you have a flat tire, replace it with a

spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire

is flat and all tires are properly in-

flated, have the vehicle checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-13

∙ When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS

will not function and the low tire pres-

sure warning light will flash for ap-

proximately 1 minute. The light will re-

main on after 1 minute. Have your

tires replaced and/or TPMS system

reset as soon as possible. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for these services.

∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could affect

the proper operation of the TPMS.

CAUTION

∙ The TPMS is not a substitute for the

regular tire pressure check. Be sure to

check the tire pressure regularly.

∙ If the vehicle is being driven at speeds

of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), the

TPMS may not operate correctly.

∙ Be sure to install the specified size of

tires to the four wheels correctly.

Master warning light

When the ignition is in the ON position, the

master warning light illuminates if any of

the following are displayed on the vehicle

information display.

∙ No key warning

∙ Low fuel warning

∙ Low windshield-washer fluid warning

∙ Parking brake release warning

∙ Door/trunk open warning

∙ Loose fuel cap

∙ Check tire pressure warning

Power steering warning

light

WARNING

∙ If the engine is not running or is

turned off while driving, the power as-

sist for the steering will not work.

Steering will be harder to operate.

∙ When the power steering warning

light illuminates with the engine run-

ning, there will be no power assist for

the steering. You will still have control

of the vehicle, but the steering will be

much harder to operate. Have the

power steering system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

When the ignition switch is in the ON posi-

tion, the power steering warning light illu-

minates. After starting the engine, the

power steering warning light turns off. This

indicates that the electric power steering

system is operational. If the power steering

warning light illuminates while the engine

is running, it may indicate the power steer-

ing system is not functioning properly and

may need servicing. Have the hydraulic

pump electric power steering system

checked.It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Power steering”

in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

2-14 Instruments and controls

Seat belt warning light and

chime

The light and chime remind you to fasten

your seat belts. The light illuminates when-

ever the ignition switch is placed in the ON

or START position and remains illuminated

until the driver’s seat belt is fastened. At the

same time, the chime sounds for about

6 seconds unless the driver’s seat belt is

securely fastened.

The seat belt warning light may also illumi-

nate if the front passenger’s seat belt is not

fastened when the front passenger’s seat

is occupied. For 7 seconds after the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position, the sys-

tem does not activate the warning light for

the front passenger.

For additional information, refer to “Seat

belts” in the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and

supplemental restraint system” section of

this manual.

Supplemental air bag

warning light

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

or START position, the supplemental air

bag warning light illuminates for about

7 seconds and then turns off. This means

the system is operational.

If any of the following conditions occur, the

front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag,

and pretensioner systems need servicing

and your vehicle must be taken to a NISSAN

dealer:

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

remains on after approximately 7 sec-

onds.

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

flashes intermittently.

∙ The supplemental air bag warning light

does not come on at all.

Unless checked and repaired, the supple-

mental restraint system (air bag system)

and/or the pretensioners may not function

properly. For additional details, refer to

“Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)” in

the “Safety—Seats, seat belts and supple-

mental restraint system” section of this

manual.

WARNING

If the supplemental air bag warning

light is on, it could mean that the front

air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag sys-

tems and/or pretensioner systems will

not operate in an accident. To help

avoid injury to yourself or others, have

your vehicle checked as soon as pos-

sible. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

INDICATOR LIGHTS

For additional information, refer to “Vehicle

information display” in this section.

Front fog light indicator

light (if so equipped)

The front fog light indicator light illumi-

nates when the front fog lights are on. For

additional information, refer to “Fog light

switch” in this section.

Front passenger air bag

status light

The front passenger air bag status

light will be lit and the passenger front

air bag will be off depending on how the

front passenger seat is being used.

Instruments and controls 2-15

For additional information, refer to “Front

passenger air bag and status light” in the

“Safety — Seats, seat belts and supplemen-

tal restraint system” section of this manual.

High beam indicator light

(blue)

This blue light comes on when the head-

light high beams are on and goes out when

the low beams are selected.

The high beam indicator light also comes

on when the passing signal is activated.

Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL)

If this indicator light comes on steady or

blinks while the engine is running, it may

indicate a potential emission control mal-

function.

The MIL may also come on steady if the

fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the

vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure

the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed

tightly, and that the vehicle has at least

3 gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.

After a few driving trips, the light

should turn off if no other potential emis-

sion control system malfunction exists.

If this indicator light comes on steady for

20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds

when the engine is not running, it indicates

that the vehicle is not ready for an emission

control system inspection/maintenance

test. For additional information, refer to

“Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance

(I/M) test” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

Operation

The MIL will come on in one of two ways:

∙ MIL on steady — An emission control

system malfunction has been de-

tected. Check the fuel-filler cap if the

Loose Fuel Cap warning appears in the

vehicle information display. If the fuel-

filler cap is loose or missing, tighten or

install the cap and continue to drive the

vehicle. The light should turn off

after a few driving trips. If the light

does not turn off after a few driving

trips, have the vehicle inspected. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. You do not need

to have your vehicle towed to the

dealer.

∙ MIL blinking — An engine misfire has

been detected which may damage the

emission control system. To reduce or

avoid emission control system dam-

age:

– do not drive at speeds above

45 mph (72 km/h).

– avoid hard acceleration or decelera-

tion.

– avoid steep uphill grades.

– if possible, reduce the amount of

cargo being hauled or towed.

The MIL may stop blinking and come on

steady. Have the vehicle inspected. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service. You do not need to have

your vehicle towed to the dealer.

CAUTION

Continued vehicle operation without

having the emission control system

checked and repaired as necessary

could lead to poor driveability, reduced

fuel economy, and possible damage to

the emission control system.

2-16 Instruments and controls

Overdrive OFF indicator

light (if so equipped)

QR25DE:

This light illuminates and then turns off

when the ignition switch in placed to the

ON position, and when the overdrive OFF

mode is selected.

VQ35DE:

This light illuminates and then turns off

when the ignition switch is placed to the

ON position.

QR25DE and VQ35DE:

For additional information, refer to “Con-

tinuously Variable Transmission (CVT)” in

the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

Security indicator light

This light blinks when the ignition switch is

placed in the OFF, LOCK or ACC position.

The blinking security indicator light indi-

cates that the security systems equipped

on the vehicle are operational.

For additional information, refer to “Security

systems” in this section.

Side light and headlight

indicator light (green)

The side light and headlight indicator light

illuminates when the side light or headlight

position is selected. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Headlight and turn signal

switch” in this section.

Slip indicator light

This indicator will blink when the Vehicle

Dynamic Control (VDC) system is operat-

ing, thus alerting that the vehicle is nearing

its traction limits. The road surface may be

slippery.

Turn signal/hazard

indicator lights

The appropriate light flashes when the turn

signal switch is activated.

Both lights flash when the hazard switch is

turned on.

Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) OFF indicator light

This indicator light comes on when the

VDC OFF switch is pushed to off. This indi-

cates the VDC system has been turned off.

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart

the engine and the system will operate

normally. For additional information, refer

to “Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system”

in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

The VDC indicator light also comes on

when you place the ignition switch in the

ON position. The light will turn off after

about 2 seconds if the system is opera-

tional. If the light stays on or comes on

along with the indicator light while

you are driving, have the VDC system

checked.It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

While the VDC system is operating, you

might feel a slight vibration or hear the sys-

tem working when starting the vehicle or

accelerating, but this is normal.

AUDIBLE REMINDERS

Brake pad wear warning

The disc brake pads have audible wear

warnings. When a disc brake pad requires

replacement, it makes a high pitched

scraping sound when the vehicle is in mo-

tion, whether or not the brake pedal is de-

pressed. Have the brakes checked as soon

as possible if the warning sound is heard.

Instruments and controls 2-17

Light reminder chime

With the ignition switch placed in the OFF

position, a chime sounds when the driver’s

door is opened if the headlights or parking

lights are on.

Turn the headlight control switch off before

leaving the vehicle.

NISSAN Intelligent Key® door

buzzer

The Intelligent Key door buzzer sounds if

the Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle

when locking the doors. When the buzzer

sounds, be sure to check both the vehicle

and the Intelligent Key. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key®” in

the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments”

section of this manual.

The vehicle information display is located

to the left of the speedometer. It displays

such items as:

∙ Vehicle settings

∙ Trip computer information

∙ Drive system warnings and settings (if

so equipped)

∙ Cruise control system information (if so

equipped)

∙ NISSAN Intelligent Key® operation infor-

mation

∙ Indicators and warning

∙ Tire pressure information

∙ Audio information

∙ Navigation information (if so equipped)

LIC2205

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

2-18 Instruments and controls

HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE

INFORMATION DISPLAY

The vehicle information display can be

changed using the , , ENTER

and switches located on the steering

wheel.

䊊

1— navigate through the items in

the vehicle information display

ENTER — change or select an item in

the vehicle information display

䊊

2— go back to the previous menu

䊊

3— select/enter the vehicle infor-

mation display menu items or to

change from one display screen to the

next (i.e. trip, Fuel economy)

The ENTER and buttons also control

audio and control panel functions. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Steering

wheel switch for audio control” in the “Moni-

tor, climate, audio, phone and voice recog-

nition systems” section of this manual.

STARTUP DISPLAY

When the vehicle in placed in the ON or ACC

position the screens that display in the ve-

hicle information include:

∙ Active system status

∙ Tire pressures

∙ Trip computer

∙ Audio

∙ Navigation (if so equipped)

∙ Driver Assistance (if so equipped)

∙ Fuel economy

∙ Warnings

Warnings will only display if there are any

present. For additional information, refer to

“Vehicle information display warnings and

indicators” in this section.

To control what items display in the vehicle

information display, refer to “How to use the

vehicle information display” in this section.

RESETTING THE TRIP COMPUTER

1. Press the button until you reach

the trip computer mode.

2. Press the button again for more

than 1.5 seconds to reset average fuel

consumption, average speed, distance

to empty, and journey time.

SETTINGS

The setting mode allows you to change the

information displayed in the vehicle infor-

mation display:

∙ Driver Assistance (if so equipped)

∙ Vehicle Settings

∙ Main Menu Selection

∙ Body Color

∙ Maintenance

∙ Alarms

∙ Language

∙ Unit

∙ Welcome Effects

∙ Factory Reset

LIC2322

Instruments and controls 2-19

Driver Assistance

The driver assistance menu allows the user

to change the settings for driving, parking,

and braking aids.

Menu item Result

Driving Aids (if so equipped) Displays available driving aids.

Blind Spot Allows user to turn Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) systems on or off. For additional

information, refer to “Blind Spot Warning (BSW)” and “Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving”

section of this manual.

Parking Aids (if so equipped) Displays available parking aids.

Sensor Allows user to turn the parking sensors on, off, or have only the front sensors on. For additional information, refer

to “Front and rear sonar system” in the “Starting and driving” section of this manual.

Display Allows user to turn the parking aids display on or off.

Volume Allows user to set the parking sensor chime volume to Low/Med./High.

Range Allows the user to set the parking sensor range to Near/Mid/Far.

Emergency Braking Displays available emergency braking options.

System Allows user to turn the emergency braking system on or off. For additional information, refer to “Automatic Emer-

gency Braking (AEB)” and “Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)” in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

2-20 Instruments and controls

Vehicle Settings

The vehicle settings allow the user to

change the settings for lights, wipers, lock-

ing, keys, and other vehicle settings.

Menu item Result

Auto Room Lamp Allows user to turn the auto room lamp on or off.

Light Sensitivity Allows user to change when the lights illuminate based on the brightness outside the vehicle.

Light Off Delay Allows user to change the duration of time that the automatic headlights stay on after the vehicle is shut off.

Welcome Light (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the welcome light on or off.

Wiper with Speed Allows user to turn wiper with speed on or off.

I-Key Door Lock Allows user to turn I-Key door lock on or off. When turned on, the request switch on the door is activated.

Selective Unlock Allows user to turn selective unlock on or off. When turned on, only the driver’s door is unlocked after the

door unlock operation. When the door handle request switch on the driver’s or front passenger’s side door is

pushed to be unlocked, only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked if the

door unlock operation is performed again within 1 minute. When this item is turned off, all the doors will be

unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once.

Auto Door Unlock Displays available options for the auto door unlock.

Off Doors will have to be manually unlocked.

IGN Off Doors will unlock when the ignition is turned off.

Shift into P Doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).

Answer Back Horn Allows user to turn answer back horn on or off. When turned on, the horn will chirp and the hazard indicators

will flash once when locking the vehicle with the Intelligent Key.

Remote Start (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the Remote Engine Start on or off. When turned on, the engine can be restarted remotely.

For additional information, refer to “Remote Engine Start” in the “Pre-driving checks and adjustments” section

of this manual.

Battery Saver Allows user to turn the battery saver on or off. When turned on, the battery saver automatically turns off the

ignition after a period of time when the ignition switch is left in the ACC or ON position.

Instruments and controls 2-21

Main Menu Selection

The main menu selection menu allows the

user to customize the information that ap-

pears in the vehicle information display.

Menu item Result

Tire Pressures Allows user to turn the tire pressures display on or off.

Trip Computer Allows user to turn the trip computer display on or off.

Audio Allows user to turn the audio display on or off.

Navigation (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the navigation display on or off.

Driver Assistance (if so equipped) Allows user turn the driver assistance display on or off.

Fuel Economy Allows user to turn the fuel economy display on or off.

Body Color

The body color menu allows the user to

customize the information that appears in

the vehicle information display.

Menu item Result

Body Color Allows user to select the color of the vehicle that appears in the vehicle information display.

2-22 Instruments and controls

Maintenance

The maintenance menu allows the user to

set reminders for various vehicle mainte-

nance items.

WARNING

The tire replacement indicator is not a

substitute for regular tire checks, in-

cluding tire pressure checks. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Changing

wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual. Many factors in-

cluding tire inflation, alignment, driving

habits and road conditions affect tire

wear and when tires should be re-

placed. Setting the tire replacement in-

dicator for a certain driving distance

does not mean your tires will last that

long. Use the tire replacement indicator

as a guide only and always perform

regular tire checks. Failure to perform

regular tire checks, including tire pres-

sure checks could result in tire failure.

Serious vehicle damage could occur

and may lead to a collision, which could

result in serious personal injury or

death.

Menu item Result

Service This indicator appears when the customer set distance is reached for checking or replacing maintenance items

other than the engine oil, oil filter and tires. Other maintenance items can include such things as air filter or tire

rotation. You can set or reset the distance for checking or replacing the items. You can set or reset the distance

for service type items.

For scheduled maintenance items and intervals, refer to the “Maintenance and schedules” section of this manual.

Tire This indicator appears when the customer set distance is reached for replacing tires. You can set or reset the dis-

tance for replacing tires.

Other This indicator appears when the customer set distance is reached for checking or replacing maintenance items

other than the engine oil, oil filter and tires. Other maintenance items can include such things as air filter or tire

rotation. The distance for checking or replacing the items can be set or reset.

Instruments and controls 2-23

Alarms

The alarms menu allows the user to set

various alerts.

Menu item Result

Outside Temp. Allows user to turn the outside temp. alarm on or off.

Timer Alert Allows user to set the timer alert for a specific interval.

Navigation (if so equipped) Allows user to turn the navigation alarm on or off.

Language

The language menu allows the user to

change the languages displayed in the ve-

hicle information display.

Menu item Result

Language Allows user to select a language in which the vehicle information display will be shown.

Unit

The Unit menu allows the user to change

the units shown in the vehicle information

display.

Menu item Result

Mileage Allows user to select different mileage display units.

Tire Pressures Allows user to select different pressure display units.

Temperature Allows user to select different temperature display units.

2-24 Instruments and controls

Welcome Effect

The welcome effect menu allows the user

to control the welcome effect feature.

Menu item Result

Welcome Effect Allows user to turn the welcome effect feature on or off.

Factory Reset

The factory reset menu allows the user to

restore the vehicle information display set-

tings to factory status.

Menu item Result

Factory Reset Allows user to reset the vehicle information display settings to the original factory settings. Once selected,

the user can confirm or deny the reset.

Instruments and controls 2-25

LIC3757

2-26 Instruments and controls

VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY

WARNINGS AND INDICATORS

1. No Key Detected

2. Key ID Incorrect

3. Key Battery Low

4. I-Key System Error: See Owner’s

Manual

5. Key Registration Complete

6. Shift to Park

7. Push ignition to OFF

8. Push brake and start switch to drive

9. Engine start operation for Intelligent

Key system (if I-Key battery level is low)

10. Release Parking Brake

11. Low Fuel

12. Loose Fuel Cap

13. Low Oil Pressure: See Owner’s Manual

14. Low Washer Fluid

15. Tire Pressure Low - Add Air

16. TPMS Error: See Owner’s Manual

17. Door Open

18. Trunk Open

19. Timer Alert – Have a break?

20. Low Outside Temperature

21. Power will turn off to save the battery

22. Power turned off to save the battery

23. Reminder: Turn OFF headlights

24. Headlight System Error: See Owner’s

Manual (if so equipped)

25. Parking Sensor Error: See Owner’s

Manual (if so equipped)

26. Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Rear

Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) indicator (if so

equipped)

27. Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual (if so

equipped)

28. Side Radar Obstruction (if so equipped)

29. Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction (if

so equipped)

30. Cruise control indicator (if so equipped)

31. Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) indicator

(if so equipped)

32. Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse

33. Transmission Shift Position indicator

34. CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual

No Key Detected

This warning appears when the Intelligent

Key is left outside the vehicle with the igni-

tion switch in the ON position. Make sure

the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN

Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks

and adjustments” section of this manual.

Key ID Incorrect

This warning appears when the ignition

switch is placed from the OFF position and

the Intelligent Key is not recognized by the

system. You cannot start the engine with

an unregistered key.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN

Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks

and adjustments” section of this manual.

Key Battery Low

This indicator illuminates when the Intelli-

gent Key battery is running out of power.

If this indicator illuminates, replace the bat-

tery with a new one. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Battery replacement” in

the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

Instruments and controls 2-27

I-Key System Error: See Owner’s Manual

After the ignition switch is pushed to the

ON position, this light comes on for a period

of time and then turns off.

The I-Key System Error message warns of

a malfunction with the Intelligent Key sys-

tem. If the light comes on while the engine

is stopped, it may be impossible to start

the engine.

If the light comes on while the engine is

running, you can drive the vehicle. However,

in these cases, have the system checked. It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Key Registration Complete

This appears when a new Intelligent Key is

registered to the vehicle.

Shift to Park

This warning illuminates when the ignition

switch is in the ACC or OFF position and the

shift lever is not in the P (Park) position. Also,

a chime sounds when the ignition switch is

in the ACC or OFF position.

If this warning illuminates, move the shift

lever to the P (Park) position and start the

engine.

Push ignition to OFF

After the Push ignition to OFF warning illu-

minates, the warning will illuminate if the

ignition switch is placed in the ACC position

when the shift lever is moved to the P (Park)

position.

To turn off the Push warning, place the ig-

nition switch in the ON position and then in

the LOCK position.

Push brake and start switch to drive

This indicator appears when the shift lever

is in the P (Park) position.

This indicator also appears when the ve-

hicle has been started using the Remote

Engine Start (if so equipped) function.

This indicator means that the engine will

start by pushing the ignition switch with

the brake pedal depressed. You can start

the engine from any position of the ignition

switch.

Engine start operation for Intelligent

Key system (if I-Key battery level is low)

This indicator appears when the battery of

the Intelligent Key is low and when the In-

telligent Key system and the vehicle are not

communicating normally.

If this appears, touch the ignition switch

with the Intelligent Key while depressing

the brake pedal. For additional information,

refer to “NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery dis-

charge” in the “Starting and driving” section

of this manual.

Release Parking Brake

This warning illuminates in the message

area of the vehicle information display

when the parking brake is set and the ve-

hicle is driven.

Low Fuel

This warning illuminates when the fuel level

in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as

soon as it is convenient, preferably before

the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There

will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank

when the fuel gauge needle reaches 0

(Empty).

Loose Fuel Cap

This warning appears when the fuel-filler

cap is not tightened correctly after the ve-

hicle has been refueled. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Fuel-filler cap” in the

“Pre-driving checks and adjustments” sec-

tion of this manual.

2-28 Instruments and controls

Low Oil Pressure: See Owner’s Manual

This warning appears in the message area

of the vehicle information display if low oil

pressure is detected. This gauge is not de-

signed to indicate low oil level. The low oil

pressure warning is not designed to indi-

cate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to

check the oil level. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Engine oil” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

Low Washer Fluid

This warning illuminates when the

windshield-washer fluid is at a low level.

Add windshield-washer fluid as necessary.

For additional information, refer to

“Windshield-washer fluid” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

Tire Pressure Low - Add Air

This warning appears when the low tire

pressure warning light in the meter illumi-

nates and low tire pressure is detected. The

warning appears each time the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position as long as

the low tire pressure warning light remains

illuminated. If this warning appears, stop the

vehicle and adjust the tire pressures of all

four tires to the recommended COLD tire

pressure shown on the Tire and Loading In-

formation label. For additional information,

refer to “Low tire pressure warning light” in

this section and “Tire Pressure Monitoring

System (TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving”

section of this manual.

TPMS Error: See Owner’s Manual

This warning appears when there is an er-

ror with your TPMS. If this warning comes

on, have the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Door Open

This warning illuminates when a door has

been opened.

Trunk Open

This warning illuminates when the trunk

has been opened.

Timer Alert — Have a break?

This indicator appears when the set time is

reached. The time can be set up to six

hours. For additional information, refer to

“Settings” in this section.

Low Outside Temperature

This warning appears if the outside tem-

perature is below 37°F (3°C). The tempera-

ture can be changed to display in Celsius or

Fahrenheit. For additional information, re-

fer to “Settings” in this section.

Power will turn off to save the battery

This message appears in the vehicle infor-

mation display after a period of time if the

ignition switch is in the ACC or the ON posi-

tion and if the vehicle is in P (Park). For addi-

tional information, refer to “Push-button igni-

tion switch positions” in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

Power turned off to save the battery

This message appears after the ignition

switch is automatically turned off. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Push-button ig-

nition switch positions” in the “Starting and

driving” section of this manual.

Reminder: Turn OFF headlights

This warning appears when the headlights

are left in the ON position when exiting the

vehicle. Place the headlight switch in the

OFF or AUTO position. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Headlight and turn signal

switch” in this section.

Headlight System Error: See Owner’s

Manual (if so equipped)

This warning illuminates when there is an

error with the system. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Headlight and turn signal

switch” in this section.

Instruments and controls 2-29

Parking Sensor Error: See Owner’s

Manual (if so equipped)

This warning illuminates when there is an

error with the system. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Front and rear sonar sys-

tem” in the “Starting and driving” section of

this manual.

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) and Rear

Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) indicator (if so

equipped)

This indicator shows when the BSW and

RCTA systems are engaged.

For additional information, refer to “Blind

Spot Warning (BSW)” and “Rear Cross Traffic

Alert (RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving”

section of this manual.

Malfunction: See Owner’s Manual (if so

equipped)

This warning appears when one or more of

the following systems (if so equipped) is

not functioning properly:

∙ Blind Spot Warning (BSW)

∙ Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)

If one or more of these warning appears,

have the system checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Side Radar Obstruction (if so equipped)

This message appears when the Blind

Spot Warning (BSW) or Rear Cross Traffic

Alert (RCTA) systems become unavailable

because a radar blockage is detected. For

additional information, refer to “Blind Spot

Warning (BSW)” or “Rear Cross Traffic Alert

(RCTA)” in the “Starting and driving” section

of this manual.

Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction (if

so equipped)

This message appears when the Intelligent

Cruise Control (ICC), Automatic Emergency

Braking (AEB), or Intelligent Forward Colli-

sion Warning (I-FCW) systems become un-

available because the front radar is ob-

structed. For additional information, refer

to “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)”, “Auto-

matic Emergency Braking (AEB)”, or “Intelli-

gent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)” in

the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

Cruise control indicator (if so equipped)

This indicator shows the cruise control sys-

tem status.

When cruise control is activated, a green

circle will illuminate to indicate it is set. The

vehicle information display will also display

the speed the cruise control was set at. If

you accelerate past the set speed, the

speed will blink until you either cancel

cruise control or go back to the set speed. If

cruise control is on and canceled, the

speed will be displayed to show the speed

the vehicle will return to if the resume but-

ton is activated.

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) indicator

(if so equipped)

This indicator shows the Intelligent Cruise

Control (ICC) system status. The status is

shown by the color. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC)”

in the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

2-30 Instruments and controls

Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse

This warning may appear if the extended

storage switch is not pushed in. When this

warning appears, push in the extended

storage switch to turn off the warning. For

additional information, refer to “Extended

storage switch” in this section.

Transmission Shift Position indicator

This indicator shows the transmission shift

position.

CVT Error: See Owner’s Manual

This warning illuminates when there is a

problem with the CVT system. If this warn-

ing comes on, have the system checked. It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Your vehicle may have two types of security

systems:

∙ Vehicle security system

∙ NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM

The vehicle security system provides visual

and audible alarm signals if someone

opens the doors or trunk when the system

is armed. It is not, however, a motion detec-

tion type system that activates when a ve-

hicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.

The system helps deter vehicle theft but

cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the

theft of interior or exterior vehicle compo-

nents in all situations. Always secure your

vehicle even if parking for a brief period.

Never leave your keys in the vehicle, and

always lock the vehicle when unattended.

Be aware of your surroundings, and park in

secure, well-lit areas whenever possible.

Many devices offering additional protec-

tion, such as component locks, identifica-

tion markers, and tracking systems, are

available at auto supply stores and spe-

cialty shops. A NISSAN dealer may also offer

such equipment. Check with your insur-

ance company to see if you may be eligible

for discounts for various theft protection

features.

How to arm the vehicle security

system

1. Close all windows. (The system can be

armed even if the windows are open.)

2. Remove the Intelligent Key from the ve-

hicle.

3. Close all doors. Lock all doors. The

doors can be locked with the Intelligent

Key, door handle request switch,or me-

chanical key.

LIC0301

SECURITY SYSTEMS

Instruments and controls 2-31

4. Confirm that the security indica-

tor light stays on for about 30 seconds.

The vehicle security system is now pre-

armed. The vehicle security system will

automatically shift into the armed

phase. The security light begins

to flash once every three seconds. If

during the pre-armed phase one of the

following occurs, the system will not

arm:

∙ Any door is unlocked with the mechani-

cal key, the Intelligent Key or door re-

quest switch.

∙ Ignition switch is placed in ACC or ON

position.

∙If the key is turned slowly when lock-

ing the door, the system may not arm.

Furthermore, if the key is turned be-

yond the vertical position toward the

unlock position to remove the key,

the system may be disarmed when

the key is removed. If the indicator

light fails to glow for a period of time,

unlock the door once and lock it

again.

∙Even when the driver and/or passen-

gers are in the vehicle, the system will

activate with all the doors closed and

locked with the ignition switch placed

in the LOCK position. When placing

the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position, the system will be released.

Vehicle security system activation

The vehicle security system will give the

following alarm:

∙ The headlights blink and the horn

sounds intermittently.

∙ The alarm automatically turns off after

a period of time. However, the alarm

reactivates if the vehicle is tampered

with again. The alarm can be shut off by

unlocking the driver’s door or trunk lid

with the key, or by pressing the

button on the Intelligent Key.

The alarm is activated by:

∙ opening the door or trunk lid without

using the key or Intelligent Key (even if

the door is unlocked by releasing the

door inside lock switch).

How to stop an activated alarm

The alarm stops only by unlocking a door

or the trunk with the mechanical key, push-

ing the button on the Intelligent Key,

or pushing the request switch on the driv-

er’s or passenger’s door with the Intelligent

Key in range of the door handle.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

will not allow the engine to start without

the use of a registered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered

key (for example, when interference is

caused by another registered key, an auto-

mated toll road device or automatic pay-

ment device on the key ring), restart the

engine using the following procedures:

1. Leave the ignition switch placed in the

ON position for approximately 5 sec-

onds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or

LOCK position, and wait approximately

10 seconds.

3. Repeat Steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the

device (which may have caused the in-

terference) separate from the regis-

tered key.

2-32 Instruments and controls

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN

recommends placing the registered key on

a separate key ring to avoid interference

from other devices.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

Security indicator light

The security indicator light blinks whenever

the ignition switch is placed in the OFF,

LOCK or ACC position.

This function indicates the NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System is operational.

If the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System is

malfunctioning, the light will remain on

while the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position.

If the light still remains on and/or the

engine will not start, seek service for the

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System ser-

vice as soon as possible. Please bring all

registered keys that you have. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

LIC0474

Instruments and controls 2-33

SWITCH OPERATION

WARNING

In freezing temperatures the washer

solution may freeze on the windshield

and obscure your vision which may lead

to an accident. Warm the windshield

with the defroster before you wash the

windshield.

CAUTION

∙ Do not operate the washer continu-

ously for more than 30 seconds.

∙ Do not operate the washer if the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir is

empty.

∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir with windshield-washer

fluid concentrates at full strength.

Some methyl alcohol based

windshield-washer fluid concen-

trates may permanently stain the

grille if spilled while filling the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

∙ Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid con-

centrates with water to the manufac-

turer’s recommended levels before

pouring the fluid into the windshield-

washer fluid reservoir. Do not use the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir to

mix the windshield-washer fluid con-

centrate and water.

NOTE:

If the windshield wiper operation is in-

terrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may

stop moving to protect its motor. If this

occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF

position and remove the snow or ice that

is on and around the wiper arms. In ap-

proximately 1 minute, turn the switch on

again to operate the wiper.

The windshield wiper and washer operates

when the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position.

Push the lever down to operate the wiper

at the following speed:

䊊

1Intermittent (INT) — intermittent op-

eration can be adjusted by turning the

knob toward 䊊

A(slower) or䊊

B(faster).

䊊

2Low (LO) — continuous low speed op-

eration

䊊

3High (HI) — continuous high speed op-

eration

Push the lever up 䊊

4to have one sweep

operation (MIST) of the wiper.

Pull the lever toward you 䊊

5to operate the

washer. The wiper will also operate several

times.

LIC2789

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH

2-34 Instruments and controls

To defrost the rear window glass and out-

side mirrors (if so equipped), start the en-

gine and push the rear window defroster

switch on. The rear window defroster indi-

cator light on the switch comes on. Push

the switch again to turn the defroster off.

The rear window defroster automatically

turns off after approximately 15 minutes.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inner side of the rear

window, be careful not to scratch or

damage the rear window defroster.

NOTE:

The top and bottom few rows of wires on

the rear window are not part of the rear

window defroster system. These wires

make up the antenna for the audio sys-

tem.

HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH

Lighting

䊊

1Rotate the switch to the position,

and the front parking, tail, license plate,

and instrument panel lights will come

on.

䊊

2Rotate the switch to the position,

and the headlights will come on and all

the other lights remain on.

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC2324

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC2325

Type A (if so equipped)

LIC3240

REAR WINDOW AND OUTSIDE

MIRROR (if so equipped)

DEFROSTER SWITCH

HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL

SWITCH

Instruments and controls 2-35

CAUTION

Use the headlights with the engine run-

ning to avoid discharging the vehicle

battery.

Autolight system

The autolight system allows the headlights

to be set so they turn on and off automati-

cally. The autolight system can:

∙ Turn on the headlights, front parking,

tail, license plate and instrument panel

lights automatically when it is dark.

∙ Turn off all the lights when it is light.

∙ Keep all the lights on for a period of time

after you place the ignition in the OFF

position and all doors are closed.

∙ Turn on the headlights if the windshield

wipers make multiple continuous

passes within approximately one min-

ute of the first pass (if so equipped). The

headlights remain on until the wipers

are turned off for a short period of time.

NOTE:

Autolight activation sensitivity and the

time delay for autolight shutoff can be

adjusted. For additional information, re-

fer to “Vehicle information display” in

this section.

To turn on the autolight system:

1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO

position 䊊

2. Place the ignition in the ON position.

3. The autolight system automatically

turns the headlights on and off.

Initially, if the ignition switch is turned OFF

and a door is opened and left open, the

headlights remain ON for a period of time. If

another door is opened while the head-

lights are on, then the timer is reset.

To turn the autolight system off, turn the

switch to the OFF, ,or position.

Type B (if so equipped)

LIC3241 LIC3188

2-36 Instruments and controls

Be sure you do not put anything on top of

the autolight sensor located in the top side

of the instrument panel. The autolight sen-

sor controls the autolight; if it is covered,

the autolight sensor reacts as if it is dark

out and the headlights will illuminate. If this

occurs while parked with the engine off

and the key in the ON position, your vehi-

cle’s battery could become discharged.

Headlight beam select

䊊

1To select the high beam function, en-

sure the low beams are engaged, and

push the lever forward. The high beam

lights come on and the blue indi-

cator light illuminates.

䊊

2Pull the lever back to return to the low

beam.

䊊

3Pulling and releasing the lever flashes

the headlight high beams on and off.

The low beams need not be engaged

for this function.

Battery saver system

If the ignition switch is placed in the OFF

position while the headlight switch is in

the or position, the headlights

will turn off after a period of time.

NOTE:

The Battery Saver system may be dis-

abled. For additional information, refer

to “Vehicle information display” in this

section.

CAUTION

Even though the battery saver feature

automatically turns off the headlights

after a period of time, you should turn

the headlight switch to the OFF position

when the engine is not running to avoid

discharging the vehicle battery.

WHA1170 LIC3192

Instruments and controls 2-37

DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL)

SYSTEM (Type A) (if so equipped)

The Daytime Running Lights (DRL) portion

of the fog light assembly automatically illu-

minates when the engine is started with

the parking brake released. The DRL oper-

ate with the headlight switch in the OFF

position. Turn the headlight switch to

the position for full illumination when

driving at night. (The DRL will turn off.)

If the parking brake is applied before the

engine is started, the DRL do not illuminate.

The DRL illuminate once the parking brake

is released. The DRL will remain on until the

ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.

It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight

switch ON for interior controls and

switches to illuminate, as those remain

OFF while the switch is in the OFF position.

WARNING

When the DRL system is active, tail

lights on your vehicle are not on. It is

necessary at dusk to turn on your head-

lights. Failure to do so could cause an

accident injuring yourself and others.

LED DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS

(DRL) SYSTEM (Type B) (if so

equipped)

The LED portion of the headlights auto-

matically illuminate at 100% intensity when

the engine is started and the parking brake

released. The LED Daytime Running Lights

(DRL) operate with the headlight switch in

the OFF position. When you turn the head-

light switch to the position for full illu-

mination, the LED lights switch from LED

DRL to the park function.

If the parking brake is applied before the

engine is started, the LED DRL do not illumi-

nate. The LED DRL illuminate when the

parking brake is released. The LED DRL will

remain on until the ignition switch is placed

in the OFF position.

It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight

switch ON for interior controls and

switches to illuminate, as those remain

OFF while the switch is in the OFF position.

WARNING

When the LED DRL system is active, tail

lights on your vehicle are not on. It is

necessary at dusk to turn on your head-

lights. Failure to do so could cause an

accident injuring yourself and others.

2-38 Instruments and controls

INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS

CONTROL

Press the “+” button to increase the bright-

ness of instrument panel lights.

Press the “-” button to decrease the bright-

ness of instrument panel lights.

TURN SIGNAL SWITCH

Turn signal

䊊

1Move the lever up or down to signal the

turning direction. When the turn is

completed, the turn signal cancels au-

tomatically.

Lane change signal

䊊

2Move the lever up or down until the

turn signal begins to flash, but the lever

does not latch, to signal a lane change.

Hold the lever until the lane change is

completed.

Move the lever up or down until the

turn signal begins to flash, but the lever

does not latch, and release the lever.

The turn signal will automatically flash

three times.

Choose the appropriate method to signal

a lane change based on road and traffic

conditions.

LIC3176 LIC3252

Instruments and controls 2-39

FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so

equipped)

To turn the fog lights on, rotate the head-

light switch to the position, then ro-

tate the fog light switch to the posi-

tion.

To turn the fog lights on with the headlight

switch in the AUTO position, the headlights

must be on, then rotate the fog light switch

to the position.

To turn the fog lights off, rotate the fog light

switch to the OFF position.

The headlights must be on and the low

beams selected for the fog lights to oper-

ate. The fog lights automatically turn off

when the high beam headlights are se-

lected.

To sound the horn, push near the horn icon

on the steering wheel.

WARNING

Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so

could affect proper operation of the

supplemental front air bag system.

Tampering with the supplemental front

air bag system may result in serious

personal injury.

LIC3256 LIC2319

HORN

2-40 Instruments and controls

WARNING

Do not use or allow occupants to use

the seat heater if you or the occupants

cannot monitor elevated seat tempera-

tures or have an inability to feel pain in

body parts that contact the seat. Use of

the seat heater by such people could

result in serious injury.

CAUTION

∙ The battery could run down if the seat

heater is operated while the engine is

not running.

∙ Do not use the seat heater for ex-

tended periods or when no one is us-

ing the seat.

∙ Do not put anything on the seat which

insulates heat, such as a blanket,

cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise,

the seat may become overheated.

∙ Do not place anything hard or heavy

on the seat or pierce it with a pin or

similar object. This may result in dam-

age to the heater.

∙ Any liquid spilled on the heated seat

should be removed immediately with

a dry cloth.

∙ When cleaning the seat, never use

gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any

similar materials.

∙ If any malfunctions are found or the

heated seat does not operate, turn

the switch off and have the system

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

The front seats are warmed by built-in

heaters.

1. Place the ignition switch in the ON po-

sition.

2. Push the LO or HI position of the switch,

as desired. The indicator light in the

switch will illuminate.

The heater is controlled by a thermo-

stat, automatically turning the heater

on and off. The indicator light will re-

main on as long as the switch is on.

3. When the seat is warmed or before you

leave the vehicle, be sure to push the

switch to turn it off.

LIC3037

HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (if so

equipped)

Instruments and controls 2-41

The heated steering wheel system is de-

signed to operate only when the surface

temperature of the steering wheel is below

68°F (20°C).

Push the heated steering wheel switch to

warm the steering wheel after the engine

starts. The indicator light will come on.

If the surface temperature of the steering

wheel is below 68°F (20°C), the system will

heat the steering wheel and cycle off and

on to maintain a temperature above 68°F

(20°C). The indicator light will remain on as

long as the system is on.

Push the switch again to turn the heated

steering wheel system off manually. The

indicator light will go off.

NOTE:

If the surface temperature of the steer-

ing wheel is above 68°F (20°C) when the

switch is turned on, the system will not

heat the steering wheel. This is not a

malfunction.

The vehicle should be driven with the VDC

system on for most driving conditions.

If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the

VDC system reduces the engine output to

reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will

be reduced even if the accelerator is de-

pressed to the floor. If maximum engine

power is needed to free a stuck vehicle,

turn the VDC system off.

To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC

OFF switch. The indicator and the Au-

tomatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system

warning light will come on.

LIC0421 LIC3344

HEATED STEERING WHEEL SWITCH (if

so equipped) VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

OFF SWITCH

2-42 Instruments and controls

Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart

the engine to turn on the system. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Vehicle Dy-

namic Control (VDC) system” in the “Start-

ing and driving” section of this manual.

The E-call (SOS) switch is used in combina-

tion with a NissanConnect® Services sub-

scription to call for assistance in case of an

emergency.

Pushing the switch will (with a paid sub-

scription) reach a response specialist that

will provide assistance based on the situa-

tion described by the vehicle’s occupant.

For additional information, or to enroll your

vehicle, refer to www.NissanUSA.com/

connect or call 855–426–6628.

The power outlets are for powering electri-

cal accessories such as cellular tele-

phones. They are rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A)

maximum.

The power outlets are powered only when

the ignition switch is in the ACC or ON po-

sition.

Open the lower half of the console box to

access the power outlet. For additional in-

formation, refer to “Console box” in this sec-

tion.

LIC3357

Instrument Panel

LIC3345

E-CALL (SOS) SWITCH (if so

equipped) POWER OUTLETS

Instruments and controls 2-43

CAUTION

∙ The outlet and plug may be hot during

or immediately after use.

∙ Only certain power outlets are de-

signed for use with a cigarette lighter

unit. Do not use any other power out-

let for an accessory lighter. For addi-

tional information, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

∙ Do not use with accessories that ex-

ceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.

∙ Do not use double adapters or more

than one electrical accessory.

∙ Use power outlets with the engine

running to avoid discharging the ve-

hicle battery.

∙ Avoid using power outlets when the

air conditioner, headlights, or rear

window defroster is on.

∙ Before inserting or disconnecting a

plug, be sure the electrical accessory

being used is turned OFF.

∙ Push the plug in as far as it will go. If

good contact is not made, the plug

may overheat or the internal tem-

perature fuse may open.

∙ When not in use, be sure to close the

cap. Do not allow water or any other

liquid to contact the outlet.

Center Console

LIC3752 LDI2758

EXTENDED STORAGE SWITCH

2-44 Instruments and controls

The extended storage switch is used when

shipping the vehicle. It is located in the fuse

panel to the left of the steering wheel on

the instrument panel. If any electrical

equipment does not operate, ensure the

extended storage switch is pushed fully in

place, as shown.

FRONT-DOOR POCKETS

Pulled position

LIC3266

Pushed position

LIC3268 LIC2308

STORAGE

Instruments and controls 2-45

SEATBACK POCKETS

The seatback pockets may be located on

the back of the driver’s and/or passenger’s

seats. The pockets can be used to store

maps.

WARNING

To ensure proper operation of the front

passenger’s NISSAN Advanced Air Bag

System (if so equipped), please observe

the following items:

∙ Do not allow a passenger in the rear

seat to push or pull on the seatback

pocket or head restraint/head rest.

∙ Do not place heavy loads heavier than

9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head

restraint/head rest or in the seatback

pocket.

GLOVE BOX

Open the glove box by pulling the handle.

Use the master key when locking 䊊

1or

unlocking 䊊

2the glove box.

WARNING

Keep glove box lid closed while driving

to help prevent injury in an accident or a

sudden stop.

LIC1328 LIC2300

2-46 Instruments and controls

CONSOLE BOX

Upper half

Pull up on the driver’s side latch to open the

upper half of the console box.

The upper half of the console box may be

used for storage of cellular phones. An ac-

cess hole is provided at the front of the

upper half of the console box for phone

cord routing to the power outlet.

Lower half

Pull up on the passenger’s side latch to

open the lower half of the console box. A

power outlet is located inside the console

box.

OVERHEAD SUNGLASSES

STORAGE

To open the sunglasses holder, push and

release.

Only store one pair of sunglasses in the

holder.

WARNING

Keep the sunglasses holder closed

while driving to avoid obstructing the

driver’s view and to help prevent an

accident.

WIC1120 LIC0702 LIC2312

Instruments and controls 2-47

CAUTION

∙ Do not use for anything other than

sunglasses.

∙ Do not leave sunglasses in the sun-

glasses holder while parking in direct

sunlight. The heat may damage the

sunglasses.

CUP HOLDERS

The rear center cup holders are located in

the rear fold-down armrest.

WARNING

Avoid abrupt starting and braking

when the cup holder is being used to

prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is

hot, it can scald you or your passenger.

CAUTION

Use only soft cups in the cup holder.

Hard objects can injure you in an

accident.

Front

LIC3486

Rear

LIC2297

2-48 Instruments and controls

Soft bottle holder

CAUTION

∙ Do not use bottle holder for any other

objects that could be thrown about in

the vehicle and possibly injure people

during sudden braking or an accident.

∙ Do not use bottle holder for open liq-

uid containers.

POWER WINDOWS

WARNING

∙ Make sure that all passengers have

their hands, etc., inside the vehicle

while it is in motion and before closing

the windows. Use the window lock

switch to prevent unexpected use of

the power windows.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, including

entrapment in windows or inadver-

tent door lock activation, do not leave

children, people who require the as-

sistance of others or pets unattended

in your vehicle. Additionally, the tem-

perature inside a closed vehicle on a

warm day can quickly become high

enough to cause a significant risk of

injury or death to people and pets.

The power windows operate when the ig-

nition switch is placed in the ON position, or

for a period of time after the ignition switch

is placed in the OFF position. If the driver’s

or passenger’s door is opened during this

period of time, the power to the windows is

canceled.

Soft bottle holder (front)

LIC2622

Soft bottle holder (rear)

LIC2296

WINDOWS

Instruments and controls 2-49

1. Window lock button

2. Front passenger side switch

3. Right rear passenger side switch

4. Left rear passenger side switch

5. Driver’s side automatic switch

Driver’s side power window

switch

The driver’s side control panel is equipped

with switches to open or close all of the

windows.

To open a window, push the switch to the

detent and continue to hold down until the

desired window position is reached. To

close a window, pull the switch to the de-

tent and continue to hold up until the de-

sired window position is reached.

Front passenger’s power window

switch

The passenger’s window switch operates

only the corresponding passenger’s win-

dow. To open the window, push the switch

to the first detent 䊊

1and continue to hold it

down until the desired window position is

reached. To close the window, pull the

switch to the first detent 䊊

2and continue

to hold it up until the desired window posi-

tion is reached.

LIC3678 LIC2309

2-50 Instruments and controls

Rear power window switch

The rear power window switches open or

close only the corresponding windows. To

open the window, push the switch and hold

it down 䊊

1. To close the window, pull the

switch up 䊊

Locking passengers’ windows

When the window lock switch is depressed,

only the driver’s side window can be

opened or closed. Push it again to cancel

the window lock function.

Automatic operation

To fully open a window equipped with au-

tomatic operation, push the window

switch down to the second detent and re-

lease it; it need not be held. The window

automatically opens all the way. To stop

the window, lift the switch up while the win-

dow is opening.

To fully close a window equipped with au-

tomatic operation, pull the switch up to the

second detent and release it; it need not be

held. The window automatically closes all

the way. To stop the window, push the

switch down while the window is closing.

Auto-reverse function

If the control unit detects something

caught in the window as it is closing, the

window will be immediately lowered.

The auto-reverse function can be acti-

vated when the window is closed by auto-

matic operation when the ignition switch is

placed in the ON position or for a period of

time after the ignition switch is placed in

the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or driv-

ing conditions, the auto-reverse func-

tion may be activated if an impact or

load similar to something being caught

in the window occurs.

WARNING

There are some small distances imme-

diately before the closed position which

cannot be detected. Make sure that all

passengers have their hands, etc., in-

side the vehicle before closing the

window.

LIC2663 LIC0410

Instruments and controls 2-51

When power window switch does

not operate

If the power window automatic function

(closing only) does not operate properly,

perform the following procedure to initial-

ize the power window system:

Place the ignition switch in the ON position.

2. Open the window more than halfway

by operating the power window switch.

3. Pull the power window switch and hold

it to close the window, and then hold

the switch more than 3 seconds after

the window is closed.

4. Release the power window switch. Op-

erate the window by the automatic

function to confirm the initialization is

complete. The power window auto-

matically opens or closes depending

on if the automatic down or up func-

tion is selected.

5. Perform steps 2 through 4 above for

other windows.

If the power window function does not op-

erate properly after performing the above

procedure have the system checked and

repaired. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

POWER MOONROOF

The moonroof will only operate when the

ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

The power moonroof is operational for a

period of time, even if the ignition switch is

placed in the ACC or OFF position. If the

driver’s door or the front passenger’s door

is opened during this period of time, the

power to the moonroof is canceled.

Sliding the moonroof

To fully open or close the moonroof, push

the switch to the open 䊊

2or close 䊊

1posi-

tion and release it; it need not be held. The

roof will automatically open or close all the

way. To stop the roof, push the switch once

more while it is opening or closing.

Tilting the moonroof

To tilt up, first close the moonroof, then

push the switch to the tilt up position 䊊

and release it; it need not be held. To tilt

down the moonroof, push the switch to the

tilt down position 䊊

Resetting the moonroof switch

If the moonroof does not operate properly,

perform the following procedure to initial-

ize the moonroof operation system.

1. If the moonroof is open, close it fully by

repeatedly pushing the moonroof

switch to the close position 䊊

1to tilt the

moonroof up.

2. Push and hold the switch to the close

position 䊊

3. Release the moonroof switch after the

moonroof moves slightly up and down.

4. Push and hold the switch to the open

position 䊊

2to fully tilt the moonroof

down.

5. Check if the moonroof switch operates

normally.

LIC2313

MOONROOF (if so equipped)

2-52 Instruments and controls

If the moonroof does not operate properly

after performing the procedure above,

have your vehicle serviced. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Auto-reverse function (when

closing or tilting down the

moonroof)

The auto-reverse function can be acti-

vated when the moonroof is closed or

tilted down by automatic operation when

the ignition switch is placed in the ON po-

sition or for a period of time after the igni-

tion switch is placed in the OFF position.

Depending on the environment or driv-

ing conditions, the auto-reverse func-

tion may be activated if an impact or

load similar to something being caught

in the moonroof occurs.

WARNING

There are some small distances imme-

diately before the closed position which

cannot be detected. Make sure that all

passengers have their hands, etc., in-

side the vehicle before closing the

moonroof.

When closing

If the control unit detects something

caught in the moonroof as it moves to the

front, the moonroof will immediately open

backward.

When tilting down

If the control unit detects something

caught in the moonroof as it tilts down, the

moonroof will immediately tilt up.

If the auto-reverse function malfunctions

and repeats opening or tilting up the

moonroof, keep pushing the tilt down

switch within 5 seconds after it happens;

the moonroof will fully close gradually.

Make sure nothing is caught in the moon-

roof.

WARNING

∙ In an accident you could be thrown

from the vehicle through an open

moonroof. Always use seat belts and

child restraints.

∙ Do not allow anyone to stand up or

extend any portion of their body out

of the moonroof opening while the

vehicle is in motion or while the

moonroof is closing.

CAUTION

∙ Remove water drops, snow, ice or

sand from the moonroof before

opening.

∙ Do not place heavy objects on the

moonroof or surrounding area.

Sunshade

Open and close the sunshade by sliding it

forward or backward.

If the moonroof does not close

Have your moonroof checked and re-

paired. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

Instruments and controls 2-53

䊊

1The interior light can be turned ON re-

gardless of door position. The light will

go off after a period of time unless the

ignition switch is placed in the ON po-

sition when any door is opened.

䊊

2The interior lights can be set to operate

when the doors are opened. To turn off

the interior lights when a door open,

push the switch, the interior lights will

not illuminate, regardless of door posi-

tion.

The lights will go off when the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position, or

the driver’s door is closed and locked.

The lights will also go off after a period

of time when the doors are open.

NOTE:

The step lights illuminate when the

driver and passenger doors are opened

regardless of the interior light switch po-

sition. These lights will turn off auto-

matically after a period of time while

doors are open to prevent the battery

from becoming discharged.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could re-

sult in a discharged battery.

CONSOLE LIGHT (if so equipped)

The console light will turn on whenever the

parking lights or headlights are illuminated.

LIC2302 LIC2303

INTERIOR LIGHTS

2-54 Instruments and controls

MAP LIGHTS

To turn the map lights on, push the

switches. To turn them off, push the

switches again.

CAUTION

Do not use for extended periods of time

with the engine stopped. This could re-

sult in a discharged battery.

PERSONAL LIGHTS

To turn the rear personal lights on, push the

switch. To turn them off, push the switch

again.

The light illuminates when the trunk lid is

opened. When the trunk lid is closed, the

light goes off.

The light will go off after a period of time if

the trunk lid is left open, unless the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position.

For additional information, refer to “Exterior

and interior lights” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

LIC2304 LIC1083

TRUNK LIGHT

Instruments and controls 2-55

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver pro-

vides a convenient way to consolidate the

functions of up to three individual hand-

held transmitters into one built-in device.

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver:

∙ Will operate most radio frequency de-

vices such as garage doors, gates,

home and office lighting, entry door

locks and security systems.

∙ Is powered by your vehicle’s battery. No

separate batteries are required. If the

vehicle’s battery is discharged or is dis-

connected, HomeLink® will retain all

programming.

When the HomeLink® Universal Trans-

ceiver is programmed, retain the original

transmitter for future programming pro-

cedures (Example: new vehicle pur-

chases). Upon sale of the vehicle, the

programmed HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver buttons should be erased for

security purposes. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Programming

HomeLink®” in this section.

WARNING

∙ Do not use the HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver with any garage door

opener that lacks safety stop and re-

verse features as required by federal

safety standards. (These standards

became effective for opener models

manufactured after April 1, 1982). A

garage door opener which cannot de-

tect an object in the path of a closing

garage door and then automatically

stop and reverse, does not meet cur-

rent federal safety standards. Using a

garage door opener without these

features increases the risk of serious

injury or death.

∙ During the programming procedure

your garage door or security gate will

open and close (if the transmitter is

within range). Make sure that people

or objects are clear of the garage door,

gate, etc. that you are programming.

∙ Your vehicle’s engine should be

turned off while programming the

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver. Do

not breathe exhaust gases; they con-

tain colorless and odorless carbon

monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dan-

gerous. It can cause unconsciousness

or death.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK®

If you have any questions or are having

difficulty programming your HomeLink®

buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at:

www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

NOTE:

Place the ignition switch in the ACC posi-

tion when programming HomeLink®. It is

also recommended that a new battery

be placed in the hand-held transmitter

of the device being programmed to

HomeLink® for quicker programming

and accurate transmission of the radio

frequency.

HOMELINK® UNIVERSAL

TRANSCEIVER (if so equipped)

2-56 Instruments and controls

1. Position the end of your hand-held

transmitter 1–3 in (2–8 cm) away from

the HomeLink® surface, keeping the

HomeLink® indicator light 䊊

1in view.

2. Using both hands, simultaneously

press and hold the desired HomeLink®

button and hand-held transmitter but-

ton. DO NOT release until the

HomeLink® indicator light 䊊

1flashes

slowly and then rapidly. When the indi-

cator light flashes rapidly, both buttons

may be released. (The rapid flashing

indicates successful programming.)

NOTE:

Some devices may require you to replace

Step 2 with the cycling procedure noted

in “Programming HomeLink® for Cana-

dian customers and gate openers” in this

section.

3. Press and hold the programmed

HomeLink® button and observe the in-

dicator light.

∙ If the indicator light 䊊

1is

solid/continuous, programming is

complete and your device should

activate when the HomeLink® button

is pressed and released.

∙ If the indicator light 䊊

1blinks rapidly

for 2 seconds and then turns to a

solid/continuous light, continue

with Steps 4-6 for a rolling code de-

vice. A second person may make the

following steps easier. Use a ladder or

other device. Do not stand on your

vehicle to perform the next steps.

4. At the receiver located on the garage

door opener motor in the garage, lo-

cate the “learn” or “smart” button (the

name and color of the button may vary

by manufacturer but it is usually lo-

cated near where the hanging an-

LIC2365 LIC2366

Instruments and controls 2-57

tenna wire is attached to the unit). If

there is difficulty locating the button,

reference the garage door opener’s

manual.

5. Press and release the “learn” or “smart”

button.

6. Return to the vehicle and firmly press

and hold the trained HomeLink® but-

ton for 2 seconds and release. Repeat

the “press/hold/release” sequence up

to three times to complete the training

process. HomeLink® should now acti-

vate your rolling code equipped device.

7. If you have any questions or are having

difficulty programming your

HomeLink® buttons, refer to the

HomeLink® web site at:

www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-

3515.

PROGRAMMING HOMELINK® FOR

CANADIAN CUSTOMERS AND GATE

OPENERS

Canadian radio-frequency laws require

transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)

after several seconds of transmission –

which may not be long enough for

HomeLink® to pick up the signal during

training. Similar to this Canadian law, some

U.S. gate operators are designed to “tim-

eout” in the same manner.

If you live in Canada or you are having diffi-

culties training a gate operator or garage

door opener by using the “Training” proce-

dures, replace “Programming HomeLink®”

Step 2 with the following:

NOTE:

When programming a garage door

opener, etc., unplug the device during

the “cycling” process to prevent possible

damage to the garage door opener com-

ponents.

1. For additional information, refer to “Pro-

gramming HomeLink®” step 1 in this

section.

2. Using both hands, simultaneously

press and hold the desired HomeLink®

button and the hand-held transmitter

button. During training, your hand-held

transmitter may automatically stop

transmitting. Continue to press and

hold the desired HomeLink® button

while you press and re-press (“cycle”)

your hand-held transmitter every

2 seconds until the frequency signal

has been learned. The HomeLink® indi-

cator light will flash slowly and then

rapidly after several seconds upon

successful training. DO NOT release un-

til the HomeLink® indicator light flashes

slowly and then rapidly. When the indi-

cator light flashes rapidly, both buttons

may be released. The rapid flashing in-

dicates successful training.

Proceed with “Programming

HomeLink®” step 3 to complete.

If the device was unplugged during the

programming procedure, remember

to plug it back in when programming is

completed.

OPERATING THE HOMELINK®

UNIVERSAL TRANSCEIVER

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver, after

it is programmed, can be used to activate

the programmed device. To operate, sim-

ply press and release the appropriate pro-

grammed HomeLink® Universal Trans-

ceiver button. The amber indicator light will

illuminate while the signal is being trans-

mitted.

For convenience, the hand-held transmit-

ter of the device may also be used at any

time.

2-58 Instruments and controls

PROGRAMMING TROUBLE-

DIAGNOSIS

If the HomeLink® does not quickly learn the

hand-held transmitter information:

∙ Replace the hand-held transmitter bat-

teries with new batteries.

∙ Position the hand-held transmitter with

its battery area facing away from the

HomeLink® surface.

∙ Press and hold both the HomeLink®

and hand-held transmitter buttons

without interruption.

∙ Position the hand-held transmitter 1 -

3 inches (26 - 76 mm) away from the

HomeLink® surface. Hold the transmit-

ter in that position for up to 15 seconds.

If HomeLink® is not programmed within

that time, try holding the transmitter in

another position – keeping the indicator

light in view at all times.

If you have any questions or are having

difficulty programming your HomeLink®

buttons, refer to the HomeLink® web site at:

www.homelink.com or call 1-800-355-3515.

CLEARING THE PROGRAMMED

INFORMATION

The following procedure clears the pro-

grammed information from both buttons.

Individual buttons cannot be cleared. How-

ever, individual buttons can be repro-

grammed. For additional information, refer

to “Reprogramming a single HomeLink®

button” in this section.

To clear all programming:

1. Press and hold the two outer

HomeLink® buttons until the indicator

light begins to flash in approximately

10 seconds. Do not hold for longer than

20 seconds.

2. Release both buttons.

HomeLink® is now in the programming

mode and can be programmed at any

time beginning with “Programming

HomeLink®” - Step 1.

REPROGRAMMING A SINGLE

HOMELINK® BUTTON

To reprogram a HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver button, complete the following:

1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink®

button. DO NOT release the button.

2. The indicator light will begin to flash

after 20 seconds. Without releasing the

HomeLink® button, proceed with “Pro-

gramming HomeLink®” - Step 1.

For questions or comments, contact

HomeLink® at: www.homelink.com or

1–800–355–3515 (except Mexico).

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver but-

ton has now been reprogrammed. The

new device can be activated by pressing

the HomeLink® button that was just pro-

grammed. This procedure will not affect

any other programmed HomeLink® but-

tons.

IF YOUR VEHICLE IS STOLEN

If your vehicle is stolen, you should change

the codes of any non-rolling code device

that has been programmed into

HomeLink®. Consult the Owner’s Manual of

each device or call the manufacturer or

dealer of those devices for additional infor-

mation.

Instruments and controls 2-59

When your vehicle is recovered, you will

need to reprogram the HomeLink® Uni-

versal Transceiver with your new trans-

mitter information.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interference re-

ceived, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

2-60 Instruments and controls

3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Keys.............................................3-2

NISSAN Intelligent Key® .......................3-2

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

keys..........................................3-4

Doors ...........................................3-4

Locking with key..............................3-5

Locking with inside lock knob.................3-5

Locking with power door lock switch .........3-6

Automatic door locks.........................3-6

Child safety rear door lock ....................3-6

NISSAN Intelligent Key® ..........................3-7

Operating range..............................3-8

Door locks/unlocks precaution ...............3-9

NISSAN Intelligent Key® operation............3-10

How to use the remote keyless entry

function .....................................3-13

Warning lights and audible reminders ....... 3-17

Warning signals ............................. 3-17

Troubleshooting guide ......................3-18

Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) ...........3-20

Remote Engine Start operating range .......3-20

Remote starting the vehicle .................3-21

Extending engine run time ..................3-21

Canceling a Remote Engine Start............3-21

Conditions the Remote Engine Start will

notwork....................................3-22

Hood ...........................................3-23

Trunk lid ........................................3-24

Opener operation ...........................3-24

Interior trunk lid release .....................3-25

Interior trunk access ........................3-25

Fuel-filler door ..................................3-26

Opener operation ...........................3-26

Fuel-filler cap ................................3-26

Steering wheel .................................3-28

Tilt operation ................................3-29

Telescopic operation ........................3-29

Sun visors ......................................3-29

Vanity mirrors ...............................3-30

Mirrors .........................................3-30

Manual anti-glare rearview mirror

(if so equipped) ..............................3-30

Automatic anti-glare rearview mirror

(if so equipped) ..............................3-30

Outside mirrors .............................3-32

1. Intelligent Keys (two sets)

2. Mechanical key

3. Key number plate (one plate)

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

Your vehicle can only be driven with the

Intelligent Keys which are registered to

your vehicle’s Intelligent Key system com-

ponents and NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System components.

Never leave these keys in the vehicle.

As many as four Intelligent Keys can be

registered and used with one vehicle. The

new keys must be registered prior to use

with the Intelligent Key system and NISSAN

Vehicle Immobilizer System of your vehicle.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. Since the registra-

tion process requires erasing all memory in

the Intelligent Key components when reg-

istering new keys, be sure to take all Intelli-

gent Keys that you have to the NISSAN

dealer.

A key number plate is supplied with your

keys. Record the key number and keep it in

a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the

vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

duplicates by using the key number.

NISSAN does not record key numbers so it

is very important to keep track of your key

number plate.

A key number is only necessary when you

have lost all keys and do not have one to

duplicate from. If you still have a key, it can

be duplicated without knowing the key

number.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-

rences which will damage the Intelli-

gent Key:

∙ Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which

contains electrical components, to

come into contact with water or salt

water. This could affect the system

function.

∙ Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

∙ Do not strike the Intelligent Key

sharply against another object.

∙ Do not change or modify the Intelli-

gent Key.

Type A (if so equipped)

LPD2076

Type B (if so equipped)

LPD2260

KEYS

3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

∙ Wetting may damage the Intelligent

Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-

mediately wipe until it is completely

dry.

∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key for an

extended period in an area where

temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).

∙ Do not attach the Intelligent Key with

a key holder that contains a magnet.

∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key near

equipment that produces a magnetic

field, such as a TV, audio equipment

and personal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN

recommends erasing the ID code of that

Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may

prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelli-

gent Key to operate the vehicle. For infor-

mation regarding the erasing procedure, it

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer.

Mechanical key

The Intelligent Key contains the mechani-

cal key.

To remove the mechanical key, release the

lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.

To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it

into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob

returns to the lock position.

Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock

the doors and glove box.

For additional information, refer to “Doors”

in this section and “Storage” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this manual.

CAUTION

Always carry the mechanical key in-

stalled in the Intelligent Key slot.

Valet hand-off

When you have to leave a key with a valet,

give them the Intelligent Key itself and keep

the mechanical key with you to protect

your belongings.

To prevent the glove box from being

opened during valet hand-off, follow the

procedures below:

1. Remove the mechanical key from the

Intelligent Key.

2. Lock the glove box with the mechani-

cal key.

3. Hand the Intelligent Key to the valet

and keep the mechanical key with you.

For additional information, refer to “Stor-

age” in the “Instruments and controls” sec-

tion of this manual.

SPA1951

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM KEYS

You can only drive your vehicle using the

Intelligent Keys which are registered to the

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System com-

ponents in your vehicle.

The mechanical key can be used for all the

locks.

Never leave the keys in the vehicle.

Additional or replacement keys:

If you still have a key, the key number is not

necessary when you need extra NISSAN

Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. Your ex-

isting key can be duplicated without know-

ing the key number. As many as four

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys

can be used with one vehicle. You should

bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer Sys-

tem keys that you have to the NISSAN

dealer for registration. This is because the

registration process will erase the memory

of all key codes previously registered into

the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. Af-

ter the registration process, these compo-

nents will only recognize keys coded into

the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

during registration. Any key that is not

given to the dealer at the time of registra-

tion will no longer be able to start your

vehicle.

CAUTION

Do not allow the immobilizer system

key, which contains an electrical tran-

sponder, to come into contact with wa-

ter or salt water. This could affect sys-

tem function.

When the doors are locked using one of the

following methods, the doors cannot be

opened using the inside or outside door

handles. The doors must be unlocked to

open the doors.

WARNING

∙ Always have the doors locked while

driving. Along with the use of seat

belts, this provides greater safety in

the event of an accident by helping to

prevent persons from being thrown

from the vehicle. This also helps keep

children and others from unintention-

ally opening the doors, and will help

keep out intruders.

∙ Before opening any door, always look

for and avoid oncoming traffic.

DOORS

3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, including

entrapment in windows and/or inad-

vertent door lock activation, do not

leave children, people who require the

assistance of others and/or pets un-

attended in your vehicle. Additionally,

the temperature inside a closed ve-

hicle on a warm day can quickly be-

come high enough to cause a signifi-

cant risk of injury or death to people

and/or pets.

LOCKING WITH KEY

To lock or unlock the vehicle, turn the key as

shown.

Manual (if so equipped)

To lock all doors, turn the key toward the

front of the vehicle 䊊

1. To unlock a door,

turn the key toward the rear of the vehicle

䊊

LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB

To lock the door without the key, move the

inside lock knob to the lock position 䊊

then close the door.

To unlock the door without the key, move

the inside lock knob to the unlock position

䊊

Driver’s side

LPD2777

Inside lock

LPD2092

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5

LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR

LOCK SWITCH

To lock all the doors without a key, push the

door lock switch (driver’s or front passen-

ger’s side) to the lock position 䊊

1. When

locking the door this way, be certain not to

leave the key inside the vehicle.

To unlock all the doors without a key, push

the door lock switch (driver’s or front pas-

senger’s side) to the unlock position 䊊

Lockout protection

With the Intelligent Key left in the vehicle

and any door open, all doors will unlock

automatically and a chime will sound after

the door is closed.

These functions help to prevent the Intelli-

gent Key from being accidentally locked

inside the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS

∙ All doors lock automatically when the

vehicle speed reaches 15 mph

(24 km/h).

∙ All doors unlock automatically when the

transmission is placed in the P (Park)

position or when the ignition switch is

placed in the OFF position.

NOTE:

The automatic door unlock function can

be changed using “Vehicle Settings” of

the vehicle information display. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Vehicle in-

formation display” in the “Instruments

and controls” section of this manual.

CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK

Child safety locks help prevent the rear

doors from being opened accidentally, es-

pecially when small children are in the ve-

hicle.

The child safety lock levers are located on

the edge of the rear doors.

When the lever is in the unlock position 䊊

the door can be opened from the outside

or the inside.

When the lever is in the LOCK position 䊊

the door can be opened only from the

outside.

Door lock switch

LPD2093 LPD2570

3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

WARNING

∙ Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should contact

the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

∙ The Intelligent Key transmits radio

waves when the buttons are pressed.

The FAA advises the radio waves may

affect aircraft navigation and com-

munication systems. Do not operate

the Intelligent Key while on an air-

plane. Make sure the buttons are not

operated unintentionally when the

unit is stored for a flight.

The Intelligent Key can operate all the door

locks using the remote control function or

pushing the request switch on the vehicle

without taking the key out from a pocket or

purse. The operating environment and/or

conditions may affect the Intelligent Key

operation.

Be sure to read the following before using

the Intelligent Key.

CAUTION

∙ Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key

with you when operating the vehicle.

∙ Never leave the Intelligent Key in the

vehicle when you leave the vehicle.

The Intelligent Key is always communicat-

ing with the vehicle as it receives radio

waves. The Intelligent Key transmits weak

radio waves. Environmental conditions

may interfere with the operation of the In-

telligent Key under the following operating

conditions:

∙ When operating near a location where

strong radio waves are transmitted,

such as a TV tower, power station and

broadcasting station.

∙ When in possession of wireless equip-

ment, such as a cellular telephone,

transceiver or a CB radio.

∙ When the Intelligent Key is in contact

with or covered by metallic materials.

∙ When any type of radio wave remote

control is used nearby.

∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed near

an electric appliance such as a personal

computer.

∙ When the vehicle is parked near a park-

ing meter.

In such cases, correct the operating condi-

tions before using the Intelligent Key func-

tion or use the mechanical key.

Although the life of the battery varies de-

pending on the operating conditions, the

battery’s life is approximately two years. If

the battery is discharged, replace it with a

new one.

When the Intelligent Key battery is low, an

indicator illuminates in the vehicle informa-

tion display. For additional information, re-

fer to “Vehicle information display” in the

“Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

Since the Intelligent Key is continuously re-

ceiving radio waves, if the key is left near

equipment which transmits strong radio

waves, such as signals from a TV and per-

sonal computer, the battery life may be-

come shorter.

For additional information, refer to “Battery

replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself” section

of this manual.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7

As many as four Intelligent Keys can be

registered and used with one vehicle. For

information about the purchase and use of

additional Intelligent Keys, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

CAUTION

Listed below are conditions or occur-

rences which will damage the Intelli-

gent Key:

∙ Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which

contains electrical components, to

come into contact with water or salt

water. This could affect the system

function.

∙ Do not drop the Intelligent Key.

∙ Do not strike the Intelligent Key

sharply against another object.

∙ Do not change or modify the Intelli-

gent Key.

∙ Wetting may damage the Intelligent

Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, im-

mediately wipe until it is completely

dry.

∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key for an

extended period in an area where

temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).

∙ Do not attach the Intelligent Key with

a key holder that contains a magnet.

∙ Do not place the Intelligent Key near

equipment that produces a magnetic

field, such as a TV, audio equipment

and personal computers.

If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN

recommends erasing the ID code of that

Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may

prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelli-

gent Key to operate the vehicle. For infor-

mation regarding the erasing procedure, it

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer.

OPERATING RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be

used when the Intelligent Key is within the

specified operating range from the request

switch 䊊

LPD2073

3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-

charged or strong radio waves are present

near the operating location, the Intelligent

Key system’s operating range becomes

narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not

function properly.

The operating range is within 31.50 in

(80 cm) from each request switch 䊊

If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door

glass, handle or rear bumper, the request

switches may not function.

When the Intelligent Key is within the oper-

ating range, it is possible for anyone, even

someone who does not carry the Intelli-

gent Key, to push the request switch to

lock/unlock the doors. DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS

PRECAUTION

∙ Do not push the door handle request

switch with the Intelligent Key held in

your hand as illustrated. The close dis-

tance to the door handle will cause the

Intelligent Key system to have difficulty

recognizing that the Intelligent Key is

outside the vehicle.

∙ After locking with the door handle re-

quest switch, verify the doors are se-

curely locked by testing them.

∙ To prevent the Intelligent Key from be-

ing left inside the vehicle, make sure you

carry the Intelligent Key with you and

then lock the doors.

∙ Do not pull the door handle before

pushing the door handle request

switch. The door will be unlocked but

will not open. Release the door handle

once and pull it again to open the door.

LPD2554

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

OPERATION

You can lock or unlock the doors without

taking the key out of your pocket or bag.

When you carry the Intelligent Key with you,

you can lock or unlock all doors by pushing

the door handle request switch within the

range of operation.

Locking doors

1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) posi-

tion, place the ignition switch in the

LOCK position and make sure you carry

the Intelligent Key with you.

2. Close all doors.

3. Push any door handle request switch

䊊

1while carrying the Intelligent Key

with you.

4. All doors and the trunk will lock.

5. The hazard warning lights flash twice

and the outside chime sounds twice.

NOTE:

∙ Request switches for all doors and

trunk can be deactivated when the

I-Key Door Lock setting is switched to

OFF in the vehicle settings of the vehicle

information display. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Vehicle information

display” in the “Instruments and con-

trols” section of this manual.

∙ Doors lock with the door handle re-

quest switch while the ignition switch is

not in the LOCK position.

LPD2074 LPD2622 LPD2165

3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

∙ Doors do not lock by pushing the door

handle request switch while any door is

open. However, doors lock with the me-

chanical key even if any door is open.

∙ Doors do not lock with the door handle

request switch with the Intelligent Key

inside the vehicle and a beep sounds to

warn you. However, when an Intelligent

Key is inside the vehicle, doors can be

locked with another Intelligent Key.

CAUTION

∙ After locking the doors using the re-

quest switch, make sure that the

doors have been securely locked by

operating the door handle or the

trunk opener switch.

∙ When locking the doors using the re-

quest switch, make sure to have the

Intelligent Key in your possession be-

fore operating the request switch to

prevent the Intelligent Key from being

left in the vehicle.

∙ The request switch is operational only

when the Intelligent Key has been de-

tected by the Intelligent Key system.

Lockout protection

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being

accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout

protection is equipped with the Intelligent

Key.

When the driver’s side door is open, the

doors are locked and then the Intelligent

Key is put inside the vehicle and all the

doors are closed; the lock will automati-

cally unlock and the door chime sounds.

NOTE:

The doors may not lock when the Intelli-

gent Key is in the same hand that is op-

erating the request switch to lock the

door. Put the Intelligent Key in a purse,

pocket or your other hand.

CAUTION

The lockout protection may not func-

tion under the following conditions:

∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed on

top of the instrument panel.

∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed on

top of the rear parcel shelf.

∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed in-

side the glove box or a storage bin.

∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed in-

side the door pockets.

∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed on

or under the spare tire area.

∙ When the Intelligent Key is placed in-

side or near metallic materials.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11

Unlocking doors

1. Carry the Intelligent Key.

2. Push the door handle request switch

䊊

3. The hazard warning lights flash once

and the outside chime sounds once.

4. Push the door handle request switch

䊊

1again within 60 seconds to unlock

all doors and trunk. The outside chime

sounds again.

If a door handle is pulled while unlocking

the doors, that door may not be unlocked.

Returning the door handle to its original

position will unlock the door. If the door

does not unlock after returning the door

handle, push the door handle request

switch to unlock the door.

All doors will be locked automatically un-

less one of the following operations is per-

formed within one minute after pushing

the request switch:

∙ Opening any door.

∙ Pushing the ignition switch.

The interior light timer illuminates for a pe-

riod of time when a door is unlocked and

the room light is switched ON when the

door opens.

The interior light can be turned off without

waiting by performing one of the following

operations:

∙ Placing the ignition switch in the ON po-

sition.

∙ Locking the doors with the remote con-

trol.

∙ Switching the room light switch to the

OFF position.

LPD2622 LPD2165

3-12 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Opening the trunk lid

To open the trunk lid, perform the following:

1. Push the trunk opener request switch

䊊

Afor more than 1 second while carry-

ing the Intelligent Key with you.

2. The trunk will unlatch. A chime will

sound four times.

3. Raise the trunk lid to open the trunk.

Lockout protection

To prevent the Intelligent Key from being

accidentally locked in the trunk, lockout

protection is equipped with the Intelligent

Key.

When all doors are locked and the trunk lid

is closed with the Intelligent Key inside the

trunk, the outside buzzer will sound and the

trunk will open.

HOW TO USE THE REMOTE

KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION

The remote keyless entry function can op-

erate all door locks using the remote key-

less function of the Intelligent Key. The re-

mote keyless function can operate at a

distance of 33 ft (10 m) away from the ve-

hicle. The operating distance depends

upon the conditions around the vehicle.

The remote keyless entry function may not

function under the following conditions:

∙ When the Intelligent Key is not within the

operational range.

∙ When the doors or the trunk are open or

not closed securely.

∙ When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-

charged.

CAUTION

When locking the doors using the Intel-

ligent Key, be sure not to leave the key in

the vehicle.

LPD2077

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13

Locking doors

1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK

position.

2. Close all doors.

3. Press the button on the Intelli-

gent Key.

4. The hazard indicator lights flash twice

and the horn beeps once.

5. All doors will be locked.

CAUTION

After locking the doors using the Intel-

ligent Key, be sure that the doors have

been securely locked by operating the

door handles.

Unlocking doors

1. Press the button on the Intelligent

Key.

2. The hazard warning lights flash once,

and the driver’s door will unlock.

3. Press the button again within

60 seconds to unlock all doors and

trunk.

LPD2257 LPD2258

3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

NOTE:

The unlocking operation can be changed

in Selective door unlock in the vehicle

settings of the vehicle information dis-

play. For additional information, refer to

“Vehicle information display” in the “In-

struments and controls” section of this

manual.

All doors will be locked automatically un-

less one of the following operations is per-

formed within one minute after pressing

the button:

∙ Opening any doors.

∙ Pushing the ignition switch.

The interior light illuminates for a period of

time when a door is unlocked and the

room light switch is in the DOOR position.

The light can be turned off without waiting

by performing one of the following opera-

tions:

∙ Placing the ignition switch in the ON po-

sition.

∙ Locking the doors with the Intelligent

Key.

∙ Switching off the room light switch.

∙ Switching the Auto Room Lamp to the

OFF position in vehicle settings of the

vehicle information display. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Vehicle in-

formation display” in the “Instruments

and controls” section of this manual.

Opening windows (if so equipped)

The Intelligent Key allows you to simultane-

ously open windows equipped with auto-

matic operation.

∙ To open the windows, press the

button on the Intelligent Key longer

than 3 seconds after all doors are un-

locked.

The door windows cannot be closed by

using the Intelligent Key.

Releasing the trunk lid

Press the button for longer than

0.5 seconds to open the trunk lid. The trunk

release button will not operate when the

ignition switch is placed in the ON position.

WPD0364

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15

Using the panic alarm

If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-

ened, you may activate the panic alarm to

call attention by pressing and holding

the button on the Intelligent Key for

longer than 0.5 seconds.

The panic alarm and headlights will stay on

for a period of time.

The panic alarm stops when:

∙ It has run for a period of time, or

∙ Any button is pressed on the Intelligent

Key.

∙ The request switch on the driver or pas-

senger door has been pushed and the

Intelligent Key is in range of the door

handle.

Answer back horn feature

If desired, the answer back horn feature

can be deactivated using the Intelligent

Key. When it is deactivated and the

button is pressed, the hazard indicator

lights flash twice. When the button is

pressed, neither the hazard indicator lights

nor the horn operates.

WPD0361 LPD2259

3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

NOTE:

If you change the answer back horn and

light flash feature with the Intelligent

Key, the vehicle information display

screen will show the current mode after

the ignition switch has been cycled from

the OFF to the ON position. The vehicle

information display screen can also be

used to change the answer back horn

mode.

To deactivate: Press and hold the

and buttons for at least 2 seconds.

The hazard indicator lights will flash three

times to confirm that the answer back

horn feature has been deactivated.

To activate: Press and hold the

and buttons for at least 2 seconds

once more.

The hazard indicator lights will flash once

and the horn will sound once to confirm

that the horn beep feature has been reac-

tivated.

Deactivating the horn beep feature does

not silence the horn if the alarm is trig-

gered.

䊊

1P (Park) position selecting warning

䊊

2NISSAN Intelligent Key® warning

WARNING LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE

REMINDERS

The Intelligent Key is equipped with a func-

tion that is designed to minimize improper

operations and to help prevent the vehicle

from being stolen. The warning buzzer

sounds and the warning appears when im-

proper operations are detected.

CAUTION

When the buzzer sounds and the warn-

ing appears, be sure to check both the

vehicle and the Intelligent Key.

WARNING SIGNALS

To help prevent the vehicle from moving

unexpectedly by erroneous operation of

the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the

vehicle from being stolen, a chime or

buzzer sounds from inside and outside the

vehicle and a warning is displayed in the

instrument panel.

When a chime or beep sounds or a warning

is displayed, be sure to check the vehicle

and the Intelligent Key.

For additional information, refer to

“Troubleshooting guide” in this section and

“Vehicle information display” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this manual.

LPD2628

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that

are programmed for the vehicle. If another

Intelligent Key is in range or inside the ve-

hicle, the vehicle system may respond dif-

ferently than expected.

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy

When stopping the engine

The Shift to Park warning appears in

the display and the inside warning

chime sounds continuously.

The shift lever is not in the P (Park)

position.

Move the shift lever to the P (Park)

position.

When opening the driver’s door to get

out of the vehicle

The Door Open warning appears in

the display and the inside warning

chime sounds continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC

position.

Place the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

When closing the door after getting

out of the vehicle

The No Key Detected warning appears

in the display, the outside chime

sounds three times and the inside

warning chime sounds for approxi-

mately 3 seconds.

The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON

position.

Place the ignition switch in the OFF

position.

The Shift to Park warning appears in

the display and the outside chime

sounds continuously.

The ignition switch is in the ACC posi-

tion and the shift lever is not in the P

(Park) position.

Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po-

sition and place the ignition switch in

the OFF position.

When closing the door with the inside

lock knob turned to LOCK

The outside chime sounds for approxi-

mately 3 seconds and all the doors

unlock.

The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pushing the door handle re-

quest switch or the button

on the Intelligent Key to lock the door

The outside chime sounds for approxi-

mately 2 seconds. The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Symptom Possible Cause Remedy

When pushing the ignition switch to

start the engine

The Key Battery Low indicator appears

in the display. The battery charge is low.

Replace the battery with a new one.

For additional information, refer to

“Battery replacement” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

The KEY ID Incorrect warning appears

in the display, the outside chime

sounds three times and the inside

warning chime sounds for approxi-

mately 3 seconds.

The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.

When pressing the ignition switch The Intelligent Key system warning

light in the meter illuminates in yellow.

It warns of a malfunction with the In-

telligent Key system.

It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19

The button will be on the NISSAN In-

telligent Key® if the vehicle has Remote En-

gine Start. This feature allows the engine to

start from outside the vehicle.

The following features may be affected

when Remote Engine Start is used:

∙ Vehicles with a manual climate control

system will default to the last used

heating or cooling mode.

∙ Vehicles with an automatic climate

control system will default to either a

heating or cooling mode depending on

outside and cabin temperatures. For

additional information, refer to “Remote

Engine Start with Intelligent Climate

Control” in the “Monitor, climate, audio,

phone and voice recognition systems”

section of the manual.

Laws in some local communities may re-

strict the use of remote starters. For ex-

ample, some laws require a person using

Remote Engine Start to have the vehicle in

view. Check local regulations for any re-

quirements.

Other conditions may affect the function of

the Remote Engine Start feature. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Conditions the

Remote Engine Start will not work” in this

section.

Other conditions can affect the perfor-

mance of the Intelligent Key transmitter.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN

Intelligent Key®” in this section.

REMOTE ENGINE START

OPERATING RANGE

WARNING

To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, including

entrapment in windows or inadvertent

door lock activation, do not leave chil-

dren,people who require the assistance

of others or pets unattended in your ve-

hicle. Additionally, the temperature in-

side a closed vehicle on a warm day can

quickly become high enough to cause a

significant risk of injury or death to

people and pets.

CAUTION

When the Intelligent Key battery is dis-

charged or other strong radio wave

sources are present near the operating

location, the Intelligent Key operating

range becomes narrower, and the Intel-

ligent Key may not function properly.

The Remote Engine Start function can only

be used when the Intelligent Key is within

the specified operating range from the ve-

hicle.

LPD2078

REMOTE ENGINE START (if so

equipped)

3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

The Remote Engine Start operating range

is approximately 197 ft (60 m) from the ve-

hicle.

REMOTE STARTING THE VEHICLE

To use the Remote Engine Start feature to

start the engine perform the following:

1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.

2. Press the button to lock all

doors.

3. Within 5 seconds press and hold

the button until the turn signal

lights flash and the tail lamps turn on. If

the vehicle is not within view press and

hold the button for at least 2 sec-

onds.

The following events will occur when the

engine starts:

∙ The parking lights will turn on and re-

main on as long as the engine is run-

ning.

∙ The doors will be locked and the climate

control system may come on.

∙ The engine will continue to run for

10 minutes. Repeat the steps to extend

the time for an additional 10 minutes.

For additional information, refer to “Ex-

tending engine run time” in this section.

Depress and hold the brake then push the

push-button ignition switch to the ON po-

sition before driving. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Driving the vehicle” in the

“Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME

The Remote Engine Start feature can be

extended one time by performing the

steps listed in “Remote starting the vehicle”

in this section. Run time will be calculated

as follows:

∙ The first 10 minute run time will start

when the Remote Engine Start function

is performed.

∙ The second 10 minutes will start imme-

diately when the Remote Engine Start

function is performed again. For ex-

ample, if the engine has been running

for 5 minutes, and 10 minutes are

added, the engine will run for a total of

15 minutes.

∙ Extending engine run time will count to-

wards the two Remote Engine Start

limit.

A maximum of two Remote Engine Starts,

or a single Remote Engine Start with an

extension, are allowed between ignition

cycles. The ignition switch must be cycled

to the ON position and then back to the

OFF position before the Remote Engine

Start procedure can be used again.

CANCELING A REMOTE ENGINE

START

To cancel a Remote Engine Start, perform

one of the following:

∙ Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle

and press until the parking lights

turn off.

∙ Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

∙ Cycle the ignition switch ON and then

OFF.

∙ The extended engine run time has ex-

pired.

∙ The first 10 minute timer has expired.

∙ The engine hood has been opened.

∙ The shift lever is moved out of park.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21

∙ The alarm sounds due to illegal entry

into the vehicle.

∙ The ignition switch is pushed without

an Intelligent Key in the vehicle.

∙ The ignition switch is pushed with an

Intelligent Key in the vehicle but the

brake pedal is not depressed.

CONDITIONS THE REMOTE ENGINE

START WILL NOT WORK

The Remote Engine Start will not operate if

any of the following conditions are present:

∙ The ignition switch is placed in the ON

position.

∙ The hood is not securely closed.

∙ The hazard indicator lights are on.

∙ The engine is still running. The engine

must be completely stopped. Wait at

least 6 seconds if the engine goes from

running to off. This is not applicable

when extending engine run time.

∙ The button is not pressed and

held for at least 2 seconds.

∙ The button is not pressed and

held within 5 seconds of pressing the

lock button.

∙ The brake is pressed.

∙ The doors are not closed and locked.

∙ The trunk is open.

∙ The I–Key Indicator Light remains solid

in the vehicle information display.

∙ The alarm sounds due to illegal entry

into the vehicle.

∙ Two Remote Engine Starts, or a single

Remote Engine Start with an extension,

have already been used.

∙ The vehicle is not in P (Park).

∙ There is a detected registered key al-

ready inside of the vehicle.

∙ The Remote Engine Start function has

been switched to the OFF position in

Vehicle Settings of the vehicle informa-

tion display. For additional information,

refer to “Vehicle information display” in

the “Instruments and controls” section

of this manual.

The Remote Engine Start may display a

warning or indicator in the vehicle informa-

tion display. For additional information, re-

fer to “Vehicle information display” in the

“Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

1. Pull the hood lock release handle 䊊

located below the driver’s side instru-

ment panel; the hood springs up

slightly.

2. To open the hood, push the lever 䊊

underneath the front of the hood to the

side with your fingertips as illustrated

and raise the hood.

3. Remove the support rod from the

clamp 䊊

4. Insert the support rod 䊊

4into the slot

on the passenger side of the hood.

5. When closing the hood, return the sup-

port rod to its original position, lower

the hood to approximately 12 in (30 cm)

above the latch and release it. This al-

lows proper engagement of the hood

latch.

WARNING

∙ Make sure the hood is completely

closed and latched before driving. The

vehicle should only ever be operated

with the hood securely closed.

∙ If you see steam or smoke coming

from the engine compartment, to

avoid injury do not open the hood.

LPD2778

HOOD

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23

OPENER OPERATION

WARNING

∙ Do not drive with the trunk lid open.

This could allow dangerous exhaust

gases to be drawn into the vehicle.For

additional information, refer to “Ex-

haust gas (carbon monoxide)” in the

“Starting and driving” section of the

manual.

∙ Closely supervise children when they

are around cars to prevent them from

playing and becoming locked in the

trunk where they could be seriously

injured. Keep the car locked, with the

rear seatback and trunk lid securely

latched when not in use, and prevent

children’s access to car keys.

To open the trunk lid perform one of the

following after unlocking all doors:

∙ Press the button on the instrument

panel.

∙ Press the button on the Intelligent Key.

∙ Push the 䊊

Arelease switch.

To close the trunk lid, lower and push the

trunk lid down securely.

Instrument panel

LPD2707

Intelligent Key

WPD0364

Request switch

LPD2077

TRUNK LID

3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

NOTE:

Request switches for all doors and trunk

can be deactivated when the I-Key Door

Lock setting is switched to OFF in the

“Vehicle Settings” of the vehicle informa-

tion display. For additional information,

refer to “Vehicle information display” in

the “Instruments and controls” section

of the manual.

INTERIOR TRUNK LID RELEASE

WARNING

Closely supervise children when they

are around cars to prevent them from

playing and becoming locked in the

trunk where they could be seriously in-

jured. Keep the car locked, with the rear

seatback and trunk lid securely latched

when not in use, and prevent children’s

access to car keys.

The interior trunk lid release mechanism

provides a means of escape for children

and adults in the event they become

locked inside the trunk.

To open the trunk from the inside, pull the

illuminated release handle until the lock re-

leases and push up on the trunk lid. The

release handle is made of a material that

glows in the dark after a brief exposure to

ambient light.

The handle is located inside the trunk com-

partment on the interior of the trunk lid.

INTERIOR TRUNK ACCESS

The trunk can be accessed from the pas-

senger side of the rear seat.

1. Move the front passenger seat to the

most forward position.

2. Open the access cover on the rear par-

cel shelf.

3. Push down on the button on the rear

parcel shelf.

4. Fold down the passenger’s side seat-

back.

LPD2081

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25

WARNING

∙ Never allow anyone to ride in the

cargo area or on the rear seat when it

is in the fold-down position. Use of

these areas by passengers without

proper restraints could result in seri-

ous injury or death in an accident or

sudden stop.

∙ Properly secure all cargo with ropes or

straps to help prevent it from sliding

or shifting. Do not place cargo higher

than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop

or collision, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

∙ When returning the seatbacks to the

upright position, be certain they are

completely secured in the latched po-

sition. If they are not completely se-

cured, passengers may be injured in

an accident or sudden stop.

∙ Closely supervise children when they

are around cars to prevent them from

playing and becoming locked in the

trunk where they could be seriously

injured. Keep the car locked, with the

rear seatback and trunk lid securely

latched when not in use, and prevent

children’s access to car keys.

OPENER OPERATION

The fuel-filler door release is located below

the instrument panel. To open the fuel-filler

door, pull the release. To lock, close the fuel-

filler door securely.

FUEL-FILLER CAP

WARNING

∙ Gasoline is extremely flammable and

highly explosive under certain condi-

tions. You could be burned or seri-

ously injured if it is misused or mis-

handled. Always stop the engine and

do not smoke or allow open flames or

sparks near the vehicle when

refueling.

∙ Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank

after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off

automatically. Continued refueling

may cause fuel overflow, resulting in

fuel spray and possibly a fire.

∙ Use only an original equipment type

fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has

a built-in safety valve needed for

proper operation of the fuel system

and emission control system. An in-

correct cap can result in a serious mal-

function and possible injury. It could

also cause the Malfunction Indi-

cator Light (MIL) to come on.

∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body

to attempt to start your vehicle.

LPD2647

FUEL-FILLER DOOR

3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

∙ Do not fill a portable fuel container in

the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity

can cause an explosion of flammable

liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or

trailer. To reduce the risk of serious

injury or death when filling portable

fuel containers:

– Always place the container on the

ground when filling.

– Do not use electronic devices when

filling.

– Keep the pump nozzle in contact

with the container while you are

filling it.

– Use only approved portable fuel

containers for flammable liquid.

CAUTION

∙ Do not use a fuel that contains more

than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. For

additional information, refer to “Fuel

recommendation” in the “Technical

and consumer information” section of

this manual.

∙ The Loose Fuel Cap warning message

will be displayed/warning will appear

if the fuel-filler cap is not properly

tightened. It may take a few driving

trips for the message to be displayed.

Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap

properly after the Loose Fuel Cap

warning message is

displayed/warning appears may

cause the Malfunction Indicator

Light (MIL) to illuminate.

∙ Failure to tighten the fuel-filler cap

properly may cause the Mal-

function Indicator Light (MIL) to illumi-

nate. If the light illuminates be-

cause the fuel-filler cap is loose or

missing, tighten or install the cap and

continue to drive the vehicle.

The light should turn off after a

few driving trips. If the light does

not turn off after a few driving trips,

have the vehicle inspected. It is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

∙ For additional information, refer to

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” in

the “Instruments and controls” sec-

tion of this manual.

∙ If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body,

flush it away with water to avoid paint

damage.

NOTE:

Changing ignition switch status during

the refueling process may cause a delay

in fuel gauge response.

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27

To remove the fuel-filler cap:

1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclock-

wise to remove.

2. Put the fuel-filler cap on the cap holder

䊊

1while refueling.

To install the fuel-filler cap:

1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the

fuel-filler tube.

2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a

single click is heard.

Loose Fuel Cap warning

The Loose Fuel Cap warning appears in the

vehicle information display when the fuel-

filler cap is not tightened correctly after the

vehicle has been refueled. It may take a few

driving trips for the message to be dis-

played. To turn off the warning, perform the

following:

1. Remove and install the fuel-filler cap as

soon as possible. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Fuel-filler cap” in this

section.

2. Tighten the fuel-filler cap until it clicks.

WARNING

∙ Do not adjust the steering wheel while

driving. You could lose control of your

vehicle and cause an accident.

∙ Do not adjust the steering wheel any

closer to you than is necessary for

proper steering operation and com-

fort. The driver’s air bag inflates with

great force. If you are unrestrained,

leaning forward, sitting sideways or

out of position in any way, you are at

greater risk of injury or death in a

crash. You may also receive serious or

fatal injuries from the air bag if you

are up against it when it inflates. Al-

ways sit back against the seatback

and as far away as practical from the

steering wheel. Always use the seat

belts.

LPD2082 LPD2619

STEERING WHEEL

3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

TILT OPERATION

Pull the lock lever down 䊊

1and adjust the

steering wheel up or down 䊊

2to the de-

sired position.

Push the lock lever up 䊊

1firmly to lock the

steering wheel in place.

TELESCOPIC OPERATION

Pull the lock lever down 䊊

1and adjust the

steering wheel forward or backward 䊊

3to

the desired position.

Push the lock lever up 䊊

1firmly to lock the

steering wheel in place.

1. To block glare from the front, swing

down the main sun visor 䊊

2. To block glare from the side, remove

the main sun visor 䊊

2from the center

mount and swing the visor to the side.

3. To extend the sun visor, slide in or out

as needed 䊊

CAUTION

∙ Do not store the sun visor before re-

turning the extension to its original

position.

∙ Do not pull the extension sun visor

forcedly downward.

LPD2100

WPD0344

SUN VISORS

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29

VANITY MIRRORS

To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun

visor down and flip open the mirror cover.

Some vanity mirrors are illuminated and

turn on when the mirror cover is open.

MANUAL ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW

MIRROR (if so equipped)

Use the night position 䊊

1to reduce glare

from the headlights of vehicles behind you

at night.

Use the day position 䊊

2when driving in

daylight hours.

WARNING

Use the night position only when neces-

sary, because it reduces rear view

clarity.

AUTOMATIC ANTI-GLARE

REARVIEW MIRROR (if so equipped)

The inside mirror is designed so that it au-

tomatically dims during night time condi-

tions and according to the intensity of the

headlights of the vehicle following you. The

automatic anti-glare feature is activated

when the ignition switch is in the ON posi-

tion.

The indicator light 䊊

2will illuminate when

the automatic anti-glare feature is operat-

ing.

NOTE:

Do not hang any objects over the sen-

sors 䊊

1or apply glass cleaner to the sen-

sors. Doing so will reduce the sensitivity

of the sensors, resulting in improper op-

eration.

LPD2589 WPD0126

MIRRORS

3-30 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

Type A (if so equipped) and Type B

(if so equipped)

The indicator light 䊊

2will illuminate when

the automatic anti-glare feature is operat-

ing.

To turn off the automatic anti-glare feature,

press:

∙ The O button for inside mirrors with-

out compass.

∙ The button for inside mirrors with

compass.

The indicator light will turn off.

To turn on the automatic anti-glare feature

again, press:

∙ The | button for inside mirrors with-

out compass.

∙ The button for inside mirrors with

compass.

The indicator light will turn on.

For additional information on HomeLink®

Universal Transceiver operation (if so

equipped), refer to the “HomeLink® Univer-

sal Transceiver” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual.

For additional information on the compass

display 䊊

3(if so equipped), refer to “Com-

pass display” in the “Instruments and con-

trols” section of this manual.

Type A - Without compass

(if so equipped)

LPD0469

Type B - With compass (if so equipped)

LPD2419

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-31

OUTSIDE MIRRORS

WARNING

∙ Do not adjust the mirrors while driv-

ing. You could lose control of your ve-

hicle and cause an accident.

∙ Objects viewed in the outside mirror

on the passenger side are closer than

they appear. Be careful when moving

to the right. Using only this mirror

could cause an accident. Use the in-

side mirror or glance over your shoul-

der to properly judge distances to

other objects.

The outside mirror remote control only op-

erates when the ignition switch is placed in

the ACC or ON position.

Move the small switch 䊊

1to select the right

or left mirror. Adjust each mirror to the de-

sired position using the large switch 䊊

Move the small switch 䊊

1to the center

(neutral) position to prevent accidentally

moving the mirror.

Manual folding outside mirrors (if

so equipped)

Pull the outside mirror toward the door to

fold it.

Heated mirrors (if so equipped)

Some outside mirrors can be heated to

defrost, defog, or de-ice for improved vis-

ibility. For additional information, refer to

“Rear window and outside mirror (if so

equipped) defroster switch” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this manual.

LPD2452 LPD2084

3-32 Pre-driving checks and adjustments

MEMO

Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-33

4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and

voice recognition systems

NissanConnect® Owner’s Manual................4-2

RearView Monitor ...............................4-3

RearView Monitor system operation ..........4-4

How to read the displayed lines...............4-4

Difference between predicted and

actual distances..............................4-5

How to park with predicted course

lines (if so equipped)..........................4-7

Adjusting the screen .........................4-9

How to turn on and off predictive

course lines (if so equipped) ..................4-9

RearView Monitor system limitations ........4-10

System maintenance.........................4-11

Vents............................................4-11

Heater and air conditioner (manual)

(if so equipped) .................................4-13

Controls .....................................4-14

Heater operation ............................4-14

Air conditioner operation ....................4-16

Air flow charts ...............................4-17

Heater and air conditioner (automatic)

(if so equipped) .................................4-20

Automatic operation ........................4-21

Manual operation ...........................4-22

Operating tips ...............................4-23

Servicing air conditioner........................4-24

Audio system...................................4-24

Radio........................................4-24

FM radio reception ..........................4-25

AM radio reception ..........................4-25

Satellite radio reception (if so equipped) .....4-25

Audio operation precautions ................4-26

FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)

player (if so equipped) .......................4-33

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc

(CD) player (if so equipped) ..................4-37

USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection

port (models without Navigation

System) (if so equipped) .....................4-42

iPod®* player operation without

Navigation System (if so equipped) ..........4-44

Bluetooth® streaming audio without

Navigation System ..........................4-47

CD care and cleaning........................4-48

Steering wheel switch for audio control......4-48

Antenna.....................................4-50

Siri® Eyes Free (if so equipped) ..................4-50

Requirements ...............................4-50

Siri® Activation...............................4-51

Operating Siri® Eyes Free ....................4-51

Changing Siri® Eyes Free Settings............4-52

Troubleshooting guide ......................4-52

Car phone or CB radio ..........................4-54

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System

without Navigation System (if so equipped).....4-54

Regulatory information......................4-56

Using the system............................4-57

Control buttons .............................4-58

Connecting procedure ......................4-59

Voice commands ...........................4-60

Making a call ................................4-61

Receiving a call ..............................4-62

During a call .................................4-62

Ending a call.................................4-62

Text messaging (if so equipped) .............4-63

Bluetooth® settings .........................4-65

Manual control ..............................4-66

Refer to the NissanConnect® Owner’s

Manual that includes the following infor-

mation.

∙ NissanConnect® Services

∙ Navigation system (if so equipped)

∙ Audio system

∙ Apple CarPlay

∙ Android Auto

∙ Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone system

∙ Viewing information

∙ Other settings

∙ Voice recognition

∙ General system information

NISSANCONNECT® OWNER’S

MANUAL

4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

WARNING

∙ Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the Rear-

View Monitor system could result in

serious injury or death.

LHA4459

REARVIEW MONITOR

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3

∙ RearView Monitor is a convenience

feature and is not a substitute for

proper backing. Always turn and look

out the windows and check mirrors to

be sure that it is safe to move before

operating the vehicle. Always back up

slowly.

∙ The system is designed as an aid to

the driver in showing large stationary

objects directly behind the vehicle, to

help avoid damaging the vehicle.

∙ The distance guide line and the ve-

hicle width line should be used as a

reference only when the vehicle is on a

level paved surface. The distance

viewed on the monitor is for reference

only and may be different than the

actual distance between the vehicle

and displayed objects.

CAUTION

Do not scratch the camera lens when

cleaning dirt or snow from the front of

the camera.

The RearView Monitor system automati-

cally shows a rear view of the vehicle when

the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse)

position. The radio can still be heard while

the RearView monitor is active.

To display the rear view, the RearView Moni-

tor system uses a camera located just

above the vehicle’s license plate䊊

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

OPERATION

With the ignition switch in the ON position,

move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) po-

sition to operate the RearView Monitor.

HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED

LINES

Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle

width and distances to objects with refer-

ence to the vehicle body line 䊊

Aare dis-

played on the monitor.

Distance guide lines

Indicate distances from the vehicle body.

∙ Red line 䊊

1: approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m)

∙ Yellow line 䊊

2: approx. 3 ft (1 m)

∙ Green line 䊊

3: approx. 7 ft (2 m)

∙ Green line 䊊

4: approx. 10 ft (3 m)

LHA4643 LHA1196

4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Vehicle width guide lines 䊊

Indicate the vehicle width when backing

up.

Predicted course lines 䊊

6(if so equipped)

Indicate the predicted course when back-

ing up. The predicted course lines will be

displayed on the monitor when the shift

lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the

steering wheel is turned. The predicted

course lines will move depending on how

much the steering wheel is turned and will

not be displayed while the steering wheel is

in the straight-ahead position.

The vehicle width guide lines and the width

of the predicted course lines are wider than

the actual width and course.

DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED

AND ACTUAL DISTANCES

The displayed guidelines and their loca-

tions on the ground are for approximate

reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill

surfaces or projecting objects will be actu-

ally located at distances different from

those displayed in the monitor relative to

the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When

in doubt, turn around and view the objects

as you are backing up, or park and exit the

vehicle to view the positioning of objects

behind the vehicle.

Backing up on a steep uphill

When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the

distance guide lines and the vehicle width

guide lines are shown closer than the actual

distance. Note that any object on the hill is

further than it appears on the monitor.

LHA4011

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5

Backing up on a steep downhill

When backing up the vehicle down a hill,

the distance guide lines and the vehicle

width guide lines are shown farther than

the actual distance. Note that any object

on the hill is closer than it appears on the

monitor.

Backing up near a projecting

object

The predicted course lines 䊊

A(if so

equipped) do not touch the object in the

display. However, the vehicle may hit the

LHA4012 LHA1201

4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

object if it projects over the actual backing

up course.

Backing up behind a projecting

object

The position 䊊

Cis shown farther than the

position 䊊

Bin the display. However, the po-

sition 䊊

Cis actually at the same distance as

the position 䊊

A. The vehicle may hit the

object when backing up to the position 䊊

if the object projects over the actual back-

ing up course.

HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED

COURSE LINES (if so equipped)

WARNING

∙ If the tires are replaced with different

sized tires, the predicted course lines

may be displayed incorrectly.

∙ On a snow-covered or slippery road,

there may be a difference between

the predicted course line and the ac-

tual course line.

∙ If the battery is disconnected or be-

comes discharged, the predicted

course lines may be displayed incor-

rectly. If this occurs, please perform

the following procedures:

– Turn the steering wheel from lock

to lock while the engine is running.

– Drive the vehicle on a straight road

for more than 5 minutes.

∙ When the steering wheel is turned

with the ignition switch in the ACC po-

sition, the predicted course lines may

be displayed incorrectly.

LHA4013

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7

1. Visually check that the parking space is

safe before parking your vehicle.

2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed

on the screen 䊊

Awhen the shift lever is

moved to the R (Reverse) position.

3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting

the steering wheel so that the pre-

dicted course lines 䊊

Benter the park-

ing space 䊊

4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make

the vehicle width guide lines 䊊

Dparallel

to the parking space 䊊

Cwhile referring

to the predicted course lines.

5. When the vehicle is parked in the space

completely, move the shift lever to the

P (Park) position and apply the parking

brake.

LHA1197 LHA1198

4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

ADJUSTING THE SCREEN

Models with navigation system:

1. While on a Rearview Monitor screen,

touch the touch-screen display.

2. Touch the Display Settings key.

3. Touch the “Brightness,” “Contrast,” “Tint,”

“Color,” or “Black Level” key.

4. Adjust the item by touching the + or –

key on the touch-screen display.

NOTE:

Do not adjust any of the display settings

of the RearView Monitor while the ve-

hicle is moving. Make sure the parking

brake is firmly applied.

Models without navigation system:

1. Firmly apply the brake and place the

shift lever in R (reverse).

2. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to highlight

the “Brightness” or “Contrast” option.

4. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

5. Adjust the level using the

TUNE/FOLDER knob and then press

the ENTER/SETTING button to apply

the adjustment.

NOTE:

Do not adjust any of the display settings

of the RearView Monitor while the ve-

hicle is moving. Make sure the parking

brake is firmly applied.

HOW TO TURN ON AND OFF

PREDICTIVE COURSE LINES (if so

equipped)

To toggle ON and OFF the predictive course

lines while in the P (Park) position:

1. Touch the Settings key.

2. Touch the arrow key to tab to the next

screen, then press the Camera key.

3. Touch the Predictive Course Lines key

to turn the feature ON or OFF.

To toggle ON and OFF the predictive course

lines while in the R (Reverse) position:

1. Touch the touch-screen display.

2. Touch the Predictive Course Lines key

to turn the feature ON or OFF.

Models with navigation system

LHA3522

Models without navigation system

LHA3639

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9

REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM

LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for RearView Monitor. Failure to operate

the vehicle in accordance with these

system limitations could result in seri-

ous injury or death.

∙ The system cannot completely elimi-

nate blind spots and may not show

every object.

∙ Underneath the bumper and the cor-

ner areas of the bumper cannot be

viewed on the RearView Monitor be-

cause of its monitoring range limita-

tion. The system will not show small

objects below the bumper, and may

not show objects close to the bumper

or on the ground.

∙ Objects viewed in the RearView Moni-

tor differ from actual distance be-

cause a wide-angle lens is used.

∙ Objects in the RearView Monitor will

appear visually opposite compared to

when viewed in the rearview and out-

side mirrors.

∙ Use the displayed lines as a reference.

The lines are highly affected by the

number of occupants, fuel level, ve-

hicle position, road conditions and

road grade.

∙ Make sure that the trunk is securely

closed when backing up.

∙ Do not put anything on the rearview

camera. The rearview camera is in-

stalled above the license plate.

∙ When washing the vehicle with high

pressure water, be sure not to spray it

around the camera. Otherwise, water

may enter the camera unit causing

water condensation on the lens, a

malfunction, fire or an electric shock.

∙ Do not strike the camera. It is a preci-

sion instrument. Otherwise, it may

malfunction or cause damage result-

ing in a fire or an electric shock.

The following are operating limitations and

do not represent a system malfunction:

∙ When the temperature is extremely

high or low, the screen may not clearly

display objects.

∙ When strong light directly shines on the

camera, objects may not be displayed

clearly.

∙ Vertical lines may be seen in objects on

the screen. This is due to strong re-

flected light from the bumper.

∙ The screen may flicker under fluores-

cent light.

∙ The colors of objects on the RearView

Monitor may differ somewhat from the

actual color of objects.

∙ Objects on the monitor may not be

clear in a dark environment.

∙ There may be a delay when switching

between views.

∙ If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the

camera, the RearView Monitor may not

display objects clearly. Clean the cam-

era.

∙ Do not use wax on the camera lens.

Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth

dampened with a diluted mild cleaning

agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.

4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

CAUTION

∙ Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner

to clean the camera. This will cause

discoloration.

∙ Do not damage the camera as the

monitor screen may be adversely

affected.

If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the

camera 䊊

1, the RearView Monitor may not

display objects clearly. Clean the camera

by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a

diluted mild cleaning agent and then wip-

ing it with a dry cloth.

Adjust air flow direction by moving the vent

slides.

Open or close the vents by using the dial.

Move the dial toward the to open the

vents or toward the to close them.

LHA4643

Side

LHA4129

VENTS

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11

Center

LHA4128

Rear (if so equipped)

LHA1134

4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

1. Fan speed control dial/ A/C

(air conditioner) button

2. Air flow control buttons

3. Temperature control dial / MAX A/C

button

4. Air recirculation button

5. Rear window and outside mir-

ror (if so equipped) defroster

switch

6. Front windshield defroster

button

WARNING

∙ The air conditioner cooling function

operates only when the engine is

running.

∙ Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assis-

tance of others alone in your vehicle.

Pets should also not be left alone.

They could accidentally injure them-

selves or others through inadvertent

operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,

sunny days, temperatures in a closed

vehicle could quickly become high

enough to cause severe or possibly

fatal injuries to people or animals.

∙ Do not use the recirculation mode for

long periods as it may cause the inte-

rior air to become stale and the win-

dows to fog up.

NOTE:

∙ Odors from inside and outside the ve-

hicle can build up in the air conditioner

unit. Odor can enter the passenger

compartment through the vents.

LHA2243

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

(manual) (if so equipped)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13

∙ When parking, set the heater and air

conditioner controls to turn off air recir-

culation to allow fresh air into the pas-

senger compartment. This should help

reduce odors inside the vehicle.

CONTROLS

Fan control dial

The fan control dial turns the fan on

and off, and controls fan speed.

Air flow control buttons

The air flow control buttons allow you to

select the air flow outlets.

MAX

A/C

— Air flows from center and side

vents with maximum cooling.

— Air flows from center and side

vents.

— Air flows from center and side

vents and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot

outlets.

— Air flows from defroster out-

lets and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from de-

froster outlets.

Temperature control dial

The temperature control dial allows you to

adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To

lower the temperature, turn the dial to the

left. To increase the temperature, turn the

dial to the right.

Air recirculation button

On position (Indicator light on):

Interior air is recirculated inside the vehicle.

Press the button to the ON position

when:

∙ driving on a dusty road.

∙ to prevent traffic fumes from entering

passenger compartment.

∙ for maximum cooling when using the

air conditioner.

Off position (Indicator light off):

Outside air is drawn into the passenger

compartment and distributed through the

selected outlet.

Use the off position for normal heater or air

conditioner operation.

Air conditioner button

Start the engine, turn the fan control

dial to the desired position and press

the button to turn on the air condi-

tioner. To turn off the air conditioner, press

the button again.

The air conditioner cooling function op-

erates only when the engine is running.

Rear window and outside mirror

(if so equipped) defroster switch

For additional information, refer to “Rear

window and outside mirror (if so equipped)

defroster switch” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual.

HEATER OPERATION

Heating

This mode is used to direct heated air to

the foot outlets. Some air also flows from

the defrost outlets and the side vent out-

lets.

1. Press the button to the OFF posi-

tion for normal heating.

2. Press the air flow control button.

4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

3. Turn the fan control dial to the

desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position between the

middle and the hot position.

Ventilation

This mode directs outside air to the side

and center vents.

1. Press the button to the OFF posi-

tion.

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the de-

sired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position.

Defrosting or defogging

This mode directs the air to the defrost

outlets to defrost/defog the windows.

1. Press the defrost/defog button .

2. Turn the fan control dial to the

desired position.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position between the

middle and the hot position.

∙ To quickly remove ice or fog from the

windows, turn the fan control dial

to the highest setting and the tempera-

ture control to the full HOT position.

∙ When the position is selected, the

air conditioner automatically turns on if

the outside temperature is more than

36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air

which helps defog the windshield.

The mode automatically turns off,

allowing outside air to be drawn into the

passenger compartment to further im-

prove the defogging performance. The

recirculation mode cannot be activated

in the position.

Bi-level heating

The bi-level mode directs warmed air to

the side and center vents and to the front

and rear floor outlets.

1. Press the button to the OFF posi-

tion.

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the

desired position.

4. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position.

Heating and defogging

This mode heats the interior and defogs

the windshield.

1. Press the air flow control button.

2. Turn the fan control dial to the

desired position.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position between the

middle and the hot position.

∙ When the position is selected, the

air conditioner automatically turns on if

the outside temperature is more than

36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air

which helps defog the windshield.

The mode automatically turns off,

allowing outside air to be drawn into the

passenger compartment to further im-

prove the defogging performance.

Operating tips

Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades

and air inlet in front of the windshield.

This improves heater operation.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15

AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION

Start the engine, turn the fan control

dial to the desired position, and press

the button to activate the air condi-

tioner. When the air conditioner is on, cool-

ing and dehumidifying functions are

added to the heater operation.

The air conditioner cooling function op-

erates only when the engine is running.

Cooling

This mode is used to cool and dehumidify

the air.

1. Press the button to the OFF posi-

tion.

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the

desired position.

4. Press the A/C button. The indicator

light comes on.

5. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position.

∙ For quick cooling when the outside

temperature is high, press the

button to the ON position. Be sure to

return the to the OFF position for

normal cooling. MAX A/C may be used

for quick cooling.

Dehumidified heating

This mode is used to heat and dehumidify

the air.

1. Press the button to the OFF posi-

tion.

2. Press the air flow control button.

3. Turn the fan control dial to the

desired position.

4. Press the A/C button. The indicator

light comes on.

5. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position.

Dehumidified defogging

This mode is used to defog the windows

and dehumidify the air.

1. Press the air flow control button.

2. Turn the fan control dial to the

desired position.

∙ When the or are selected,

the air conditioner automatically turns

on if the outside temperature is more

than 36°F (2°C). This dehumidifies the air

which helps defog the windshield.

The mode automatically turns off,

allowing outside air to be drawn into the

passenger compartment to further im-

prove the defogging performance.

3. Turn the temperature control dial to

the desired position.

Operating tips

∙ Keep the windows closed while the air

conditioner is in operation.

∙ After parking in the sun, drive for 2 or

3 minutes with the windows open to

vent hot air from the passenger com-

partment. Then, close the windows.

This allows the air conditioner to cool

the interior more quickly.

∙The air conditioning system should

be operated for approximately

10 minutes at least once a month.

This helps prevent damage to the

system due to lack of lubrication.

4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

∙ A visible mist may be seen coming from

the ventilators in hot, humid conditions

as the air is cooled rapidly.This does not

indicate a malfunction.

∙If the engine coolant temperature

gauge indicates engine coolant tem-

perature over the normal range, turn

the air conditioner off. For additional

information, refer to “If your vehicle

overheats” in the “In case of emer-

gency” section of this manual.

AIR FLOW CHARTS

The following charts show the button and

dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK

heating, cooling or defrosting. The air re-

circulation button should always be in

the OFF position for heating and defrost-

ing.

LHA3787

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17

LHA3788 LHA3789

4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

LHA3790 LHA4503

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19

1. Front defroster button

2. Temperature control dial (driver’s

side)/AUTO (automatic) climate

control button

3. Display screen

4. Temperature control dial (passen-

ger’s side)/DUAL (passenger’s side

temperature control) button

5. Fresh air intake button

6. Air recirculation button

7. A/C air conditioner button

8. MODE (manual air flow control)

button

9. fan speed control buttons

10. ON-OFF button

11. Rear window and outside mir-

ror (if so equipped) defroster

switch

WARNING

∙ The air conditioner cooling function

operates only when the engine is

running.

∙ Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assis-

tance of others alone in your vehicle.

Pets should also not be left alone.

They could accidentally injure them-

selves or others through inadvertent

operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,

sunny days, temperatures in a closed

vehicle could quickly become high

enough to cause severe or possibly

fatal injuries to people or animals.

∙ Do not use the recirculation mode for

long periods as it may cause the inte-

rior air to become stale and the win-

dows to fog up.

Start the engine and operate the controls

to activate the air conditioner.

LHA2244

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER

(automatic) (if so equipped)

4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

NOTE:

∙ Odors from inside and outside the ve-

hicle can build up in the air conditioner

unit. Odor can enter the passenger

compartment through the vents.

∙ When parking, set the heater and air

conditioner controls to turn off air recir-

culation to allow fresh air into the pas-

senger compartment. This should help

reduce odors inside the vehicle.

AUTOMATIC OPERATION

Cooling and/or dehumidified

heating (AUTO)

This mode may be used all year round as

the system automatically works to keep a

constant temperature. Air flow distribution,

air intake control, and fan speed are also

controlled automatically.

1. Press the AUTO button on.

2. Turn the temperature control dial to

the left or right to set the desired tem-

perature.

∙ Adjust the temperature display to

about 75°F (24°C) for normal operation.

∙ The temperature of the passenger

compartment will be maintained auto-

matically. Air flow distribution, air intake

control and fan speed are also con-

trolled automatically.

∙ A visible mist may be seen coming from

the vents in hot, humid conditions as

the air is cooled rapidly. This does not

indicate a malfunction.

3. You can individually set driver’s and

front passenger’s side temperature us-

ing each temperature control dial. To

turn off the passenger’s side tempera-

ture control, press the DUAL button.

Heating (A/C OFF)

The air conditioner does not activate.When

you need to heat only, use this mode.

1. Press the AUTO button.

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set

the desired temperature.

∙ The temperature of the passenger

compartment will be maintained auto-

matically. Air flow distribution and fan

speed are also controlled automatically.

∙ Do not set the temperature lower than

the outside air temperature. Otherwise,

the system may not work properly.

∙ Not recommended if windows fog up.

Dehumidified defrosting or

defogging

1. Press the front defroster button

on.

2. Turn the temperature control dial to set

the desired temperature.

∙ To quickly remove ice from the outside

of the windows, use the fan speed

control buttons to set the fan speed to

maximum.

∙ As soon as possible after the wind-

shield is clean, press the AUTO button to

return to the automatic mode.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21

∙ When the front defroster button is

pressed, the air conditioner will auto-

matically be turned on at outside tem-

peratures above 36°F (2°C). The air recir-

culate mode automatically turns off,

allowing outside air to be drawn into the

passenger compartment to further im-

prove the defogging performance.

Remote Engine Start with

Intelligent Climate Control (if so

equipped)

Vehicles equipped with automatic climate

controls and Remote Engine Start function

may go into automatic heating or cooling

mode when Remote Engine Start is acti-

vated depending on outside and cabin

temperatures. During this period, the cli-

mate control display and buttons will be

inoperable until the ignition switch is

turned on. In Remote Engine Start defrost-

ing mode, the rear window defroster and

heated steering wheel (if so equipped) may

be activated automatically.

MANUAL OPERATION

Fan speed control

Press the fan speed control buttons

to manually control the fan speed.

Press the AUTO button to return to auto-

matic control of the fan speed.

Temperature control dial

The temperature control dial allows you to

adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To

lower the temperature, turn the dial to the

left. To increase the temperature, turn the

dial to the right. Temperature can be ad-

justed on the driver’s and passenger’s side.

Air recirculation

Press the air recirculation button to

recirculate interior air inside the vehicle.

The indicator light on the button will

come on.

The air recirculation cannot be activated

when the air conditioner is in the

front defrosting mode.

When the outside temperature exceeds 70°F

(21°C), the air conditioning system may de-

fault to air recirculation mode automatically

to reduce overall power consumption.To exit

air recirculation mode, select the fresh air

intake button to enter fresh air mode.

Fresh air intake

Press the fresh air intake button to

draw outside air into the passenger com-

partment.

Air conditioner button

Start the engine, press the fan control

buttons to the desired position and press

the button to turn on the air condi-

tioner. To turn off the air conditioner, press

the button again.

The air conditioner cooling function op-

erates only when the engine is running.

Air flow control

Pressing the MODE button manually con-

trols air flow and selects the air outlet:

— Air flows from center and side

vents.

— Air flows from center and side

vents and foot outlets.

— Air flows mainly from foot

outlets.

— Air flows from defroster and

foot outlets.

4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

To turn system off

Press the ON-OFF button.

Rear window and outside mirror

(if so equipped) defroster switch

For additional information, refer to “Rear

window and outside mirror (if so equipped)

defroster switch” in the “Instruments and

controls” section of this manual.

OPERATING TIPS

The sunload sensor, located on the top

driver’s side of the instrument panel, helps

the system maintain a constant tempera-

ture. Do not put anything on or around this

sensor.

∙ When the climate system is in auto-

matic operation and the engine coolant

temperature and outside air tempera-

ture are low, the air flow outlet may de-

fault to defroster mode for a maximum

of 2 minutes 30 seconds. This is not a

malfunction. After the engine coolant

temperature warms up,the air flow out-

let will return to foot mode and opera-

tion will continue normally.

∙ When the outside and interior cabin

temperatures are moderate to high, the

intake setting may default to turn off air

recirculation to allow fresh air into the

passenger compartment. You may no-

tice air flow from the foot mode, bi-level

mode, or side demist vent outlets for a

maximum of 15 seconds. This may oc-

cur when previous climate setting was

system off. This is not a malfunction.

After the initial warm air is expelled, the

intake will return to automatic control,

air flow outlet will return to previous set-

tings, and operation will continue nor-

mally. To exit, press any climate control

button.

∙ Keep the moonroof (if so equipped)

closed while the air conditioner is in op-

eration.

LHA1136

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23

∙ If you feel that the air flow mode you

have selected and the outlets the air is

coming out do not match, select

the mode.

∙ When you change the air flow mode,

you may feel air flow from the feet vents

for just a moment. This is not a mal-

function.

The air conditioner system in your NISSAN

vehicle is charged with a refrigerant de-

signed with the environment in mind.

This refrigerant does not harm the

earth’s ozone layer.

Special charging equipment and lubricant

is required when servicing your NISSAN air

conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or

lubricants will cause severe damage to

your air conditioner system. For additional

information, refer to “Air conditioner sys-

tem refrigerant and oil recommendations”

in the “Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section of this manual.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer to service your “environmentally

friendly” air conditioner system.

WARNING

The air conditioner system contains re-

frigerant under high pressure. To avoid

personal injury, any air conditioner ser-

vice should be done only by an experi-

enced technician with proper

equipment.

RADIO

With the ignition placed in the ACC or ON

position, press the POWER button to

turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio

with the engine not running, the ignition

should be placed in the ACC position.

Radio reception is affected by station sig-

nal strength, distance from radio transmit-

ter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other

external influences. Intermittent changes

in reception quality normally are caused by

these external influences.

Using a cellular phone in or near the ve-

hicle may influence radio reception qual-

ity.

Radio reception

Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with

state-of-the-art electronic circuits to en-

hance radio reception. These circuits are

designed to extend reception range, and to

enhance the quality of that reception.

However, there are some general charac-

teristics of both FM and AM radio signals

that can affect radio reception quality in a

moving vehicle, even when the finest

equipment is used. These characteristics

are completely normal in a given reception

SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER AUDIO SYSTEM

4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

area and do not indicate any malfunction

in your NISSAN radio system.

Reception conditions will constantly

change because of vehicle movement.

Buildings, terrain, signal distance and inter-

ference from other vehicles can work

against ideal reception. Described below

are some of the factors that can affect your

radio reception.

Some cellular phones or other devices may

cause interference or a buzzing noise to

come from the audio system speakers.

Storing the device in a different location

may reduce or eliminate the noise.

FM RADIO RECEPTION

Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 –

30 mi (40 – 48 km), with monaural (single

channel) FM having slightly more range

than stereo FM. External influences may

sometimes interfere with FM station re-

ception even if the FM station is within 25

mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is

directly related to the distance between

the transmitter and receiver. FM signals fol-

low a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of

the same characteristics as light. For ex-

ample, they will reflect off objects.

Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away

from a station transmitter, the signals will

tend to fade and/or drift.

Static and flutter: During signal interfer-

ence from buildings, large hills or due to

antenna position (usually in conjunction

with increased distance from the station

transmitter), static or flutter can be heard.

This can be reduced by adjusting the treble

control to reduce treble response.

Multipath reception: Because of the reflec-

tive characteristics of FM signals,direct and

reflected signals reach the receiver at the

same time. The signals may cancel each

other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss

of sound.

AM RADIO RECEPTION

AM signals, because of their low frequency,

can bend around objects and skip along

the ground. In addition, the signals can be

bounced off the ionosphere and bent back

to earth. Because of these characteristics,

AM signals are also subject to interference

as they travel from transmitter to receiver.

Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing

through freeway underpasses or in areas

with many tall buildings. It can also occur

for several seconds during ionospheric tur-

bulence even in areas where no obstacles

exist.

Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical

power lines, electric signs and even traffic

lights.

SATELLITE RADIO RECEPTION (if so

equipped)

When the satellite radio is used for the first

time or the battery has been replaced, the

satellite radio may not work properly. This

is not a malfunction. Wait more than

10 minutes with satellite radio ON and the

vehicle outside of any metal or large build-

ing for satellite radio to receive all of the

necessary data.

No satellite radio reception is available and

“NO SAT” is displayed when the SAT band

option is selected unless optional satellite

receiver and antenna are installed and a

SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service subscrip-

tion is active. Satellite radio is not available

in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Satellite radio performance may be af-

fected if cargo carried on the roof blocks

the satellite radio signal.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25

If possible, do not put cargo over the satel-

lite antenna.

A build up of ice on the satellite radio an-

tenna can affect satellite radio perfor-

mance. Remove the ice to restore satellite

radio reception.

AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS

Compact disc (CD) player

CAUTION

∙ Do not force a compact disc into the

CD insert slot. This could damage the

CD and/or CD player.

∙ Trying to load a CD with the CD door

closed could damage the CD and/or

CD player.

∙ Only one CD can be loaded into the CD

player at a time.

∙Only use high quality 4.7 in (12 cm)

round discs that have the “COMPACT

disc DIGITAL AUDIO” logo on the disc

or packaging.

∙During cold weather or rainy days, the

player may malfunction due to the

humidity. If this occurs, remove the

CD and dehumidify or ventilate the

player completely.

∙The player may skip while driving on

rough roads.

∙The CD player sometimes cannot

function when the compartment

temperature is extremely high or low.

Decrease/increase the temperature

before use.

LHA0099

4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

∙Do not expose the CD to direct sun-

light.

∙CDs that are in poor condition or are

dirty, scratched or covered with fin-

gerprints may not work properly.

∙The following CDs may not work

properly:

∙Copy control compact discs (CCCD)

∙Recordable compact discs (CD-R)

∙Rewritable compact discs (CD-RW)

∙Do not use the following CDs as they

may cause the CD player to malfunc-

tion:

∙3.1 in (8 cm) discs with an adapter

∙CDs that are not round

∙CDs with a paper label

∙CDs that are warped, scratched, or

have abnormal edges

∙This audio system can only play pre-

recorded CDs. It has no capability to

record or burn CDs.

∙If the CD cannot be played, one of the

following messages will be displayed.

CHECK DISC

∙Confirm that the CD is inserted cor-

rectly (the label side is facing up,

etc.).

∙Confirm that the CD is not bent or

warped and it is free of scratches.

PRESS EJECT

This is an error due to excessive tem-

perature inside the player. Remove

the CD by pressing the EJECT button.

After a short time, reinsert the CD.

The CD can be played when the tem-

perature of the player returns to nor-

mal.

UNPLAYABLE

The file is unplayable in this audio

system (only MP3 or WMA (if so

equipped) CD).

Compact disc with MP3 or WMA

Terms

∙ MP3 — MP3 is short for Moving Pictures

Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the

most well-known compressed digital

audio file format. This format allows for

near “CD quality” sound, but at a fraction

of the size of normal audio files. MP3

conversion of an audio track from CD-

ROM can reduce the file size by approxi-

mately a 10:1 ratio with virtually no per-

ceptible loss in quality. MP3

compression removes the redundant

and irrelevant parts of a sound signal

that the human ear doesn’t hear.

∙ WMA — Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is

a compressed audio format created by

Microsoft as an alternative to MP3. The

WMA codec offers greater file compres-

sion than the MP3 codec, enabling stor-

age of more digital audio tracks in the

same amount of space when com-

pared to MP3s at the same level of qual-

ity.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27

∙ Bit rate — Bit rate denotes the number

of bits per second used by a digital mu-

sic file. The size and quality of a com-

pressed digital audio file is determined

by the bit rate used when encoding the

file.

∙ Sampling frequency — Sampling fre-

quency is the rate at which the samples

of a signal are converted from analog to

digital (A/D conversion) per second.

∙ Multisession — Multisession is one of

the methods for writing data to media.

Writing data once to the media is called

a single session, and writing more than

once is called a multisession.

∙ ID3/WMA Tag — The ID3/WMA tag is the

part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file

that contains information about the

digital music file such as song title, art-

ist, encoding bit rate, track time dura-

tion, etc.ID3 tag information is displayed

on the Artist/song title line on the dis-

play.

* Windows® and Windows Media® are reg-

istered trademarks and trademarks in the

United States of America and other coun-

tries of Microsoft Corporation of the USA.

Playback order

Music playback order of a CD with MP3 or

WMA files is as illustrated.

∙ The names of folders not containing

MP3 or WMA files are not shown in the

display.

∙ If there is a file in the top level of the disc,

“Root Folder” is displayed.

∙ The playback order is the order in which

the files were written by the writing soft-

ware. Therefore, the files might not play

in the desired order.

Playback order chart

WHA1078

4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Specification chart

Supported media CD, CD-R, CD-RW

Supported file systems ISO9660 LEVEL1, ISO9660 LEVEL2, Apple ISO, Romeo, Joliet * ISO9660 Level 3 (packet writing) is not supported.

Supported

versions*1

MP3

Version MPEG1, MPEG2, MPEG2.5

Sampling fre-

quency

8kHz-48kHz

Bit rate 8 kbps - 320 kbps, VBR

WMA Version WMA7, WMA8, WMA9

Sampling fre-

quency

32 kHz - 48 kHz

Bit rate 48 kbps - 192 kbps, VBR

Tag information ID3 tag VER1.0, VER1.1, VER2.2, VER2.3 (MP3 only)

Folder levels Folder levels: 8, Max folders: 255 (including root folder), Files: 512 (Max. 255 files for one folder)

Text character number limitation 128 characters

Displayable character codes*2 01: ASCII, 02: ISO-8859-1, 03: UNICODE (UTF-16 BOM Big Endian), 04: UNICODE (UTF-16 Non-BOM Big Endian), 05: UNI-

CODE (UTF-8), 06: UNICODE (Non-UTF-16 BOM Little Endian)

*1 Files created with a combination of 48 kHz sampling frequency and 64 kbps bit rate cannot be played.

*2 Available codes depend on what kind of media, versions and information are going to be displayed.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29

Troubleshooting guide

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot play

Check if the disc was inserted correctly.

Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Check if there is condensation inside the player. If there is, wait until the condensation is gone (about 1 hour) before using the player.

If there is a temperature increase error, the CD player will play correctly after it returns to the normal temperature.

If there is a mixture of music CD files (CD-DA data) and MP3/WMA files on a CD, only the music CD files (CD-DA data) will be played.

Files with extensions other than “.MP3”,“.WMA”, “.mp3” or “.wma” cannot be played. In addition, the character codes and number of char-

acters for folder names and file names should be in compliance with the specifications.

Check if the finalization process, such as session close and disc close, is done for the disc.

Check if the disc is protected by copyright.

Poor sound quality Check if the disc is scratched or dirty.

Bit rate may be too low.

It takes a relatively long

time before the music

starts playing.

If there are many folders or file levels on the MP3/WMA disc, or if it is a multisession disc, some time may be required before the music

starts playing.

Music cuts off or skips The writing software and hardware combination might not match, or the writing speed, writing depth, writing width, etc., might not

match the specifications. Try using the slowest writing speed.

Skipping with high bit

rate files

Skipping may occur with large quantities of data, such as for high bit rate data.

Moves immediately to

the next song when play-

ing

When a non-MP3/WMA file has been given an extension of “.MP3”, “.WMA”, .“mp3”or “.wma”, or when play is prohibited by copyright

protection, there will be approximately 5 seconds of no sound and then the player will skip to the next song.

Songs do not play back

in the desired order

The playback order is the order in which the files were written by the writing software. Therefore, the files might not play in the de-

sired order.

4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

USB (Universal Serial Bus)

Connection Port

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate

the USB device while driving. Doing so

can be a distraction. If distracted you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

CAUTION

∙ Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port

may damage the port. Make sure that

the USB device is connected correctly

into the USB port.

∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB de-

vice out of the port. This could dam-

age the port and the cover.

∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the

port.

The vehicle is not equipped with a USB de-

vice. USB devices should be purchased

separately as necessary.

This system cannot be used to format USB

devices. To format a USB device, use a per-

sonal computer.

In some jurisdictions, the USB device for the

front seats plays only sound without im-

ages for regulatory reasons,even when the

vehicle is parked.

This system supports various USB

memory devices, USB hard drives and

iPod® players. Some USB devices may not

be supported by this system.

∙ Partitioned USB devices may not play

correctly.

∙ Some characters used in other lan-

guages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may

not appear properly in the display. Using

English language characters with a USB

device is recommended.

General notes for USB use:

∙ For additional information, refer to your

device manufacturer’s owner informa-

tion regarding the proper use and care

of the device.

Notes for iPod®) use:

iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-

tered in the U.S. and other countries.

∙ Improperly plugging in the iPod® may

cause a checkmark to be displayed on

and off (flickering). Always make sure

that the iPod® is connected properly.

∙ An iPod® nano (1st Generation) may re-

main in fast forward or rewind mode if it

is connected during a seek operation. In

this case, please manually reset the

iPod®.

∙ An iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will

continue to fast-forward or rewind if it is

disconnected during a seek operation.

∙ An incorrect song title may appear

when the Play Mode is changed while

using an iPod® nano (2nd Generation).

∙ Audiobooks may not play in the same

order as they appear on an iPod®.

∙ Large video files cause slow responses

in an iPod®. The vehicle center display

may momentarily black out, but will

soon recover.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31

∙ If an iPod® automatically selects large

video files while in the shuffle mode, the

vehicle center display may momen-

tarily black out, but will soon recover.

Bluetooth® streaming audio

∙ Some Bluetooth® audio devices may

not be recognized by the in-vehicle au-

dio system.

∙ It is necessary to set up the wireless

connection between a compatible

Bluetooth® audio device and the in-

vehicle Bluetooth® module before using

the Bluetooth® audio.

∙ Operating procedure of the Bluetooth®

audio will vary depending on the de-

vices. Make sure how to operate your

audio device before using it with this

system.

∙ The Bluetooth® audio may be stopped

under the following conditions:

∙ Receiving a call on the Hands-Free

Phone System.

∙ Checking the connection to the

hands-free phone.

∙ Do not place the Bluetooth® audio de-

vice in an area surrounded by metal or

far away from the in-vehicle Bluetooth®

module to prevent tone quality degra-

dation and wireless connection disrup-

tion.

∙ While an audio device is connected

through the Bluetooth® wireless con-

nection, the battery power of the device

may discharge quicker than usual.

∙ This system supports the Bluetooth®

Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).

BLUETOOTH® is a

trademark owned

by Bluetooth SIG,

Inc. and licensed

to Visteon.

4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

FM/AM RADIO WITH COMPACT

DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so equipped)

For additional information, refer to “Audio

operation precautions” in this section.

1. CD eject button

2. CD button

3. Display screen

4. CD insert slot

5. SEEK button

6. SCAN button

7. TRACK button

8. BACK button

9. iPod MENU button

10.

ENTER/SETTING button / TUNE/FOLDER

knob

11. Station select (1 - 6) buttons

12. RDM (random) button

13. RPT (repeat) button

14. (power) button / VOL (volume)

control knob

15. DISP (display) button

16. MEDIA button

17. FM•AM button

Audio main operation

(power) button / VOL (volume) con-

trol knob

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position and press the (power) but-

ton while the system is off to call up the

mode (radio, CD, AUX, Bluetooth® audio,

USB or iPod®) that was playing immediately

before the system was turned off.

LHA4290

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33

To turn the system off, press the

(power) button.

Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to ad-

just the volume.

This vehicle is equipped with Speed Sensi-

tive Volume. When this feature is active, the

audio volume changes as the driving

speed changes.

ENTER/SETTING button

Press the ENTER/SETTING button to show

the Settings screen on the display. Turn the

TUNE/FOLDER knob to navigate the op-

tions and then press the ENTER/SETTING

button to make a selection.

Audio

Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.

Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.

Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right

speakers.

Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers.

Brightness Adjust the brightness to adjust the appearance of the display screen.

Contrast Adjust the contrast to adjust the appearance of the display screen.

Clock adjust Press the ENTER/SETTING button to highlight the hours or minutes and then use the TUNE/FOLDER

knob to adjust the value. Press the ENTER/SETTING button again to set the value.

On-Screen Clock Toggles ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen.

RDS Display Toggles ON or OFF the RDS information displayed on the screen while the radio is playing.

Speed Sens Vol. (Speed Sensitive Volume) Adjusts the Speed Sensitive Volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the

speed of the vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the

volume increases in relation to vehicle speed.

AUX Vol. Choose a setting from 0 to +3 to control the boost of incoming auxiliary device volume. A setting of 0

provides no additional boost in volume. A setting of +3 provides the greatest boost in volume.

Language Select Select the desired language for the system from the available options.

Auto Source Change Select ON or OFF for Auto Source Change. With Auto Source Change ON: when the device is plugged

into USB port, the radio will automatically switch to USB source. With Auto Source Change OFF: when

the device is plugged into the USB port, radio will stay on the currently selected source.

Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the ENTER/SETTING button and turning the TUNE/FOLDER knob to select

the item to adjust. When the desired item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the ENTER/SETTING button

until the display returns to the main audio screen. If the button is not pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will

automatically reappear.

4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

iPod MENU button

This button can only be used for iPod® op-

erations.For additional information,refer to

“iPod® player operation (models without

navigation system)” in this section.

DISP (display) button

The DISP (display) button turns the display

screen on or off.

FM/AM radio operation

FM·AM button

Press the FM·AM button to change the

band as follows:

AM →FM1 →FM2 →AM

If another audio source is playing when the

FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source

playing will automatically be turned off and

the last radio station played will begin play-

ing.

TUNE/FOLDER knob tuning

Turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to the left or

right for manual tuning.

SEEK/TRACK tuning

Press the SEEK button or

TRACK button to tune from low to high or

high to low frequencies and to stop at the

next broadcasting station.

SCAN tuning

Press the SCAN button to stop at each

broadcasting station for 5 seconds. SCAN

will appear on the screen while the radio is

scan tuning.

Pressing the button again during this

5 second period will stop SCAN tuning and

the radio will remain tuned to that station. If

the SCAN button is not pressed within

5 seconds, SCAN tuning moves to the next

station.

1 to 6 Station memory operations

Six stations can be set for the AM band.

Twelve stations can be set for the FM band

(6 for FM1, 6 for FM2).

1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2

using the FM·AM select button.

2. Tune to the desired station using

the SEEK button or the

TRACK button. Press and hold any of

the desired station memory buttons (1

– 6) until the preset number is updated

on the display and the sound is briefly

muted.

3. The channel indicator will then come

on and the sound will resume. Pro-

gramming is now complete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same

manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the

fuse opens, the radio memory will be can-

celed. In that case, reset the desired sta-

tions.

Compact disc (CD) player

operation

If the radio is already operating,it automati-

cally turns off and the compact disc begins

to play.

MEDIA button

With a CD loaded, press the MEDIA button

until the CD mode is displayed on the

screen.

CD/MP3 display mode

While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain

text may be displayed on the screen if the

CD has been encoded with text informa-

tion. Depending on how the MP3/WMA CD

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35

is encoded, information such as Artist,

Song and Folder will be displayed.

The track number and the total number of

tracks in the current folder or on the cur-

rent disc are displayed on the screen as

well.

SEEK/TRACK (Reverse or

Fast Forward) button

Press and hold the SEEK button

or TRACK button for 1.5 seconds while

the compact disc is playing to reverse or

fast forward the track being played. The

compact disc plays at an increased speed

while reversing or fast forwarding. When

the button is released, the compact disc

returns to normal play speed.

SEEK/TRACK button

Press the SEEK button while a CD or

MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to the

beginning of the current track. Press

the SEEK button several times to skip

backward several tracks.

Press the TRACK button while a CD or

MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance one

track. Press the TRACK button several

times to skip forward several tracks. If the

last track on a CD is skipped, the first track

on the disc is played. If the last track in a

folder of an MP3/WMA CD is skipped, the

first track of the next folder is played.

TUNE/FOLDER knob (MP3/WMA CD only)

If an MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is

playing, turn the TUNE/FOLDER knob to

change folders. Turn the knob to the left to

skip back a folder. Turn the knob to the right

to skip ahead a folder.

RPT (repeat) button

When the RPT button is pressed while a

compact disc is playing, the play pattern

can be changed as follows:

CD:

1 Track Repeat ←→ OFF

CD with MP3 or WMA:

1 Folder Repeat →1 Track Repeat →OFF

1 Track Repeat: the current track will be

repeated.

1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be

repeated.

OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The

indicator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the CD is dis-

played on the screen unless no pattern is

applied.

RDM (random) button

When the RDM button is pressed while a

compact disc is playing, the play pattern

can be changed as follows:

CD:

1 Disc Random ←→ OFF

CD with MP3 or WMA:

1 Disc Random →1 Folder Random →OFF

1 Disc Random: all tracks on the disc will be

played randomly.

1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current

folder will be played randomly.

OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The

indicator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the CD is dis-

played on the screen unless no pattern is

applied.

4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CD EJECT button

When the CD eject button is pressed

with a compact disc loaded, the compact

disc will eject and the last source will be

played.

When the CD eject button is pressed

twice with a compact disc loaded, the

compact disc will be ejected further for

easier CD removal. If the disc is not re-

moved within 20 seconds, the disc will re-

load.

Additional features

For additional information about the iPod®

player available with this system, refer to

“iPod® player operation without Navigation

System” in this section.

For additional information about the USB

(Universal Serial Bus) connection port avail-

able with this system, refer to “USB (Univer-

sal Serial Bus) Connection Port (models

without Navigation System)” in this section.

For additional information about the

Bluetooth® audio interface available with

this system, refer to “Bluetooth® streaming

audio without Navigation System (Type B)”

in this section.

FM/AM/SAT RADIO WITH

COMPACT DISC (CD) PLAYER (if so

equipped)

For all operation precautions, refer to “Au-

dio operation precautions” in this section.

1. CD eject button

2. XM button*

3. Display screen

4. CD insert slot

LHA4300

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37

5. SEEK button

6. SCAN button

7. CAT button

8. BACK button

9. iPod MENU button

10.

ENTER/SETTING button / TUNE/SCROLL

knob

11. Station select (1 - 6) buttons

12. RDM (random) button

13. RPT (repeat) button

14. (power) button / VOL (volume)

control knob

15. DISP (display) button

16. MEDIA button

17. FM•AM button

*No satellite radio reception is available

when the XM button is pressed to access

satellite radio stations unless optional sat-

ellite receiver and antenna are installed

and an SiriusXM® Satellite Radio service

subscription is active. Satellite radio is not

available in Alaska, Hawaii and Guam.

Audio main operation

(power) button / VOL (volume) con-

trol knob

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position and press the (power) but-

ton while the system is off to call up the

mode (radio, CD, AUX, Bluetooth® audio,

USB or iPod®) that was playing immediately

before the system was turned off.

To turn the system off, press the

(power) button.

Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to ad-

just the volume.

This vehicle may be equipped with Speed

Sensitive Volume. When this feature is ac-

tive, the audio volume changes as the driv-

ing speed changes.

ENTER/SETTING button

Press the ENTER/SETTING button to show

the Settings screen on the display. Turn the

TUNE/SCROLL knob to navigate the op-

tions and then press the ENTER/SETTING

button to make a selection.

4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Audio

Bass Adjusts the bass to the desired level.

Treble Adjusts the treble to the desired level.

Balance Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right

speakers.

Fade Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear

speakers.

Brightness Adjust the brightness to adjust the appearance of the display screen.

Contrast Adjust the contrast to adjust the appearance of the display screen.

Clock adjust Press the ENTER/SETTING button to highlight the hours or minutes and then use the TUNE/

SCROLL knob to adjust the value. Press the ENTER/SETTING button again to set the value.

On-Screen Clock Toggles ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen.

RDS Display Toggles ON or OFF the RDS information displayed on the screen while the radio is playing.

Speed Sens Vol. (Speed Sensitive Volume) Adjusts the Speed Sensitive Volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as

the speed of the vehicle increases. Set to “OFF” to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the

more the volume increases in relation to vehicle speed.

AUX Vol. Choose a setting from 0 to +3 to control the boost of incoming auxiliary device volume. A setting of

0 provides no additional boost in volume. A setting of +3 provides the greatest boost in volume.

Language Select Select the desired language for the system from the available options.

Bass, treble, balance and fade can also be adjusted by pressing the ENTER/SETTING button and turning the TUNE/SCROLL knob to select

the item to adjust. When the desired item is shown on the display, turn the tuning to adjust and then press the ENTER/SETTING button

until the display returns to the main audio screen. If the button is not pressed for approximately 10 seconds, the radio or CD display will

automatically reappear.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39

iPod MENU button

This button can only be used for iPod® op-

erations.For additional information,refer to

“iPod® player operation (models without

navigation system)” in this section.

DISP (display) button

The DISP (display) button turns the display

screen on or off.

FM/AM/SAT radio operation

FM·AM button

Press the FM·AM button to change the

band as follows:

AM →FM1 →FM2 →AM

If another audio source is playing when the

FM·AM button is pressed, the audio source

playing will automatically be turned off and

the last radio station played will begin play-

ing.

XM band select

Press the XM button to change the band as

follows:

XM1* →XM2* →XM3* →XM1 (satellite, if so

equipped)

When the XM button is pressed while the

ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position,

the radio will come on at the station last

played.

The last station played will also come on

when the (power) button is pressed

on.

*When the XM button is pressed, the satel-

lite radio reception will not be available un-

less an optional satellite receiver and an-

tenna are installed and a SiriusXM® Satellite

Radio service subscription is active. Satel-

lite radio is not available in Alaska, Hawaii

and Guam.

If a compact disc is playing when the XM

button is pressed, the compact disc will

automatically be turned off and the last

radio station played will come on.

TUNE/SCROLL knob (Tuning)

Turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to the left or

right for manual tuning.

SEEK/CAT tuning

Press the SEEK button or CAT

button to tune from low to high or high to

low frequencies and to stop at the next

broadcasting station.

SCAN (tuning) button

Press the SCAN button to stop at each

broadcasting station for 5 seconds. SCAN

will illuminate in the display while scan tun-

ing. Pressing the SCAN button again during

this 5 second period will stop the scan tun-

ing and the radio will remain tuned to that

station. If the SCAN button is not pressed

within 5 seconds, scan tuning moves to the

next station.

1 to 6 Station memory operations

Six stations can be set for the AM band.

Twelve stations can be set for the FM band

(6 for FM1, 6 for FM2). Eighteen channels can

be set for the satellite radio (6 for XM1, 6 for

XM2, 6 for XM3).

1. Choose the radio band AM, FM1 or FM2

using the FM·AM select button, or

choose the satellite band XM1, XM2 or

XM3 using the XM button.

2. Tune to the desired station using

manual, SEEK or SCAN tuning. Press

and hold any of the desired station

memory buttons (1 – 6) until the preset

number is updated on the display and

the sound is briefly muted.

4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

3. The channel indicator will then come

on and the sound will resume. Pro-

gramming is now complete.

4. Other buttons can be set in the same

manner.

If the battery cable is disconnected, or if the

fuse opens, the radio memory will be can-

celed. In that case, reset the desired sta-

tions.

Compact disc (CD) player

operation

If the radio is already operating,it automati-

cally turns off and the compact disc begins

to play.

MEDIA button

With a CD loaded, press the MEDIA button

until the CD mode is displayed on the

screen.

CD/MP3 display mode

While listening to an MP3/WMA CD, certain

text may be displayed on the screen if the

CD has been encoded with text informa-

tion. Depending on how the MP3/WMA CD

is encoded, information such as Artist,

Song and Folder will be displayed.

The track number and the total number of

tracks in the current folder or on the cur-

rent disc are displayed on the screen as

well.

SEEK/CAT (Reverse or

Fast Forward) button

Press and hold the SEEK/CAT button

or for 1.5 seconds while the compact

disc is playing to reverse or fast forward the

track being played. The compact disc plays

at an increased speed while reversing or

fast forwarding. When the button is re-

leased, the compact disc returns to normal

play speed.

SEEK/CAT button

Press the SEEK/CAT button while a

CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to return to

the beginning of the current track. Press

the SEEK/CAT button several times to

skip backward several tracks.

Press the SEEK/CAT button while a

CD or MP3/WMA CD is playing to advance

one track. Press the SEEK/CAT button

several times to skip forward several

tracks. If the last track on a CD is skipped,

the first track on the disc is played. If the last

track in a folder of an MP3/WMA CD is

skipped, the first track of the next folder is

played.

TUNE/SCROLL knob (MP3/WMA CD only)

If a MP3/WMA CD with multiple folders is

playing, turn the TUNE/SCROLL knob to

change folders. Turn the knob to the left to

skip back a folder. Turn the knob to the right

to skip ahead a folder.

RPT (repeat) button

When the RPT button is pressed while a

compact disc is playing, the play pattern

can be changed as follows:

CD:

1 Track Repeat ←→ OFF

CD with MP3 or WMA:

1 Folder Repeat →1 Track Repeat →OFF

1 Track Repeat: the current track will be

repeated.

1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be

repeated.

OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The

indicator on the display will turn off.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41

The current play pattern of the CD is dis-

played on the screen unless no pattern is

applied.

RDM (random) button

When the RDM button is pressed while a

compact disc is playing, the play pattern

can be changed as follows:

CD:

1 Disc Random ←→ OFF

CD with MP3 or WMA:

1 Disc Random →1 Folder Random →OFF

1 Disc Random: all tracks on the disc will be

played randomly.

1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current

folder will be played randomly.

OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The

indicator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the CD is dis-

played on the screen unless no pattern is

applied.

CD EJECT button

When the CD eject button is pressed

with a compact disc loaded, the compact

disc will eject and the last source will be

played.

When the CD eject button is pressed

twice with a compact disc loaded, the

compact disc will be ejected further for

easier CD removal. If the disc is not re-

moved within 20 seconds, the disc will re-

load.

Additional features

For additional information about the iPod®

player available with this system, refer to

“iPod® player operation without Navigation

System” in this section.

For additional information about the USB

(Universal Serial Bus) connection port avail-

able with this system, refer to “USB (Univer-

sal Serial Bus) Connection Port (models

without Navigation System)” in this section.

For additional information about the

Bluetooth® audio interface available with

this system, refer to “Bluetooth® streaming

audio without Navigation System (Type B)”

in this section.

USB (Universal Serial Bus)

CONNECTION PORT (models

without Navigation System) (if so

equipped)

Connecting a device to the USB

Connection Port

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect, or operate

the USB device while driving. Doing so

can be a distraction. If distracted you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

LHA3077

4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CAUTION

∙ Do not force the USB device into the

USB connection port. Inserting the

USB device tilted or up-side-down

into the port may damage the port.

Make sure that the USB device is con-

nected correctly into the USB connec-

tion port.

∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB de-

vice out of the port. This could dam-

age the port and the cover.

∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the

port.

For additional information, refer to your de-

vice manufacturer’s owner information re-

garding the proper use and care of the

device.

The USB port is located in the center con-

sole. Insert the USB device into the connec-

tion port.

When a compatible storage device is

plugged into the connection port, compat-

ible audio files on the storage device can be

played through the vehicle’s audio system.

Audio file operation

MEDIA button

Place the ignition switch in the ON or ACC

position and press the MEDIA button to

switch to the USB input mode. If a CD is

playing or another audio source is plugged

in through the AUX IN jack, the MEDIA but-

ton toggles between the three sources.

Play information

Information about the audio files being

played can be displayed on the display

screen of the vehicle’s audio system. De-

pending on how the audio files are en-

coded, information such as Folder, Song

and Artist will be displayed.

The track number and number of total

tracks in the folder are displayed on the

screen as well.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK

(Reverse or Fast For-

ward) buttons

Press and hold the or SEEK/CAT

and TRACK buttons for 1.5 seconds while an

audio file on the USB device is playing to

reverse or fast forward the track being

played. The track plays at an increased

speed while reversing or fast forwarding.

When the button is released, the audio file

returns to normal play speed.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK

buttons

Press the SEEK/CAT and TRACK

buttons while an audio file on the

USB device is playing to return to the begin-

ning of the current track. Press the

SEEK/CAT and TRACK buttons sev-

eral times to skip backward several tracks.

Press the SEEK/CAT and TRACK

buttons while an audio file on the

USB device is playing to advance one track.

Press the SEEK/CAT and TRACK

buttons several times to skip forward

several tracks. If the last track in a folder on

the USB device is skipped, the first track of

the next folder is played.

RDM (random) button

When the RDM button is pressed while an

audio file on the USB device is playing, the

play pattern can be changed as follows:

All Random →1 Folder Random →OFF

All Random: all tracks on the USB device will

be played randomly.

1 Folder Random: all tracks in the current

folder will be played randomly.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43

OFF: No random play pattern is applied. The

indicator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the USB device

is displayed on the screen unless no pat-

tern is applied.

RPT (repeat) button

When the RPT button is pressed while an

audio file on the USB device is playing, the

play pattern can be changed as follows:

1 Folder Repeat →1 Track Repeat →OFF

1 Track Repeat: the current track will be

repeated.

1 Folder Repeat: the current folder will be

repeated.

OFF: No repeat play pattern is applied. The

indicator on the display will turn off.

The current play pattern of the USB device

is displayed on the screen unless no pat-

tern is applied.

TUNE/FOLDER or TUNE/SCROLL knob

If there are multiple folders with audio files

on the USB device, turn the TUNE/FOLDER

or TUNE/SCROLL knob to change folders.

Turn the knob to the left to skip back a

folder. Turn the knob to the right to skip

ahead a folder. If there is only one folder of

audio files on the USB device, turning the

TUNE/FOLDER or TUNE/SCROLL knob in ei-

ther direction will return to the first track on

the USB device.

iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION

WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM (if

so equipped)

Connecting iPod®

WARNING

Do not connect, disconnect or operate

the USB device while driving. Doing so

can be a distraction. If distracted you

could lose control of your vehicle and

cause an accident or serious injury.

LHA3077

4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

CAUTION

∙ Do not force the USB device into the

USB port. Inserting the USB device

tilted or up-side-down into the port

may damage the port. Make sure that

the USB device is connected correctly

into the USB connection port.

∙ Do not grab the USB port cover (if so

equipped) when pulling the USB de-

vice out of the port. This could dam-

age the port and the cover.

∙ Do not leave the USB cable in a place

where it can be pulled unintentionally.

Pulling the cable may damage the

port.

For additional information, refer to your de-

vice manufacturer’s owner information re-

garding the proper use and care of the

device.

To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that

the iPod® can be controlled with the audio

system controls and display screen, use

the USB connection port located in the

center console. Connect the iPod®-specific

end of the cable to the iPod® and the USB

end of the cable to the USB connection

port. on the vehicle. If your iPod® supports

charging via a USB connection, its battery

will be charged while connected to the ve-

hicle with the ignition switch in the ACC or

ON position.

While connected to the vehicle, the iPod®

can only be operated by the vehicle audio

controls.

To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle,

remove the USB end of the cable from the

USB connection port. on the vehicle, then

remove the cable from the iPod®.

* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-

tered in the U.S. and other countries.

Compatibility

The following models are compatible:

∙ iPod® Classic - 5th Generation (firmware

version 1.3.0 or later)

∙ iPod® Classic - 6th Generation (firm-

ware version 2.0.1 or later)

∙ iPod® Classic - 7th Generation (firmware

version 2.0.4 or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware

version 1.3.1 or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware

version 1.1.3 or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware

version 1.1.3 or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware

version 1.0.4 or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 5th generation (firmware

version 1.0.2 or later)

∙ iPod® nano - 6th generation (firmware

version 1.1 or later)

∙ iPod® Touch - 2nd generation (firmware

version 4.2.1 or later)

∙ iPod® Touch - 3rd generation (firmware

version 5.1 or later) (minimum iOS 5.0

required for smartphone integration)

∙ iPod® Touch - 4th generation (firmware

version 5.1 or later) (minimum iOS 5.0

required for smartphone integration)

∙ iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or

later)

∙ iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 5.1 or

later) (minimum iOS 5.0 required for

smartphone integration)

∙ iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later)

(minimum iOS 5.0 required for smart-

phone integration)

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45

∙ iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)

(minimum iOS 5.0 required for smart-

phone integration)

∙ iPhone®5 (firmware version 5.1 or later)

(minimum iOS 5.0 required for smart-

phone integration)

Make sure that your iPod® firmware is up-

dated to the version indicated above.

Audio main operation

Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position. Press the MEDIA button repeat-

edly to switch to the iPod® mode.

If the system has been turned off while the

iPod® was playing, pressing the

ENTER/SETTING or MENU button will start

the iPod®.

iPod MENU button

Press the iPod MENU button while the

iPod® is connected to show the iPod® op-

eration menu on the audio display. Scroll

through the menu list using the

TUNE/FOLDER or TUNE/SCROLL control

dial. Press ENTER/SETTING button to select

a menu item. Items in the iPod® menu ap-

pear on the display in the following order:

∙ Now playing

∙ Playlists

∙ Artists

∙ Albums

∙ Songs

∙ Podcasts

∙ Genres

∙ Composers

∙ Audiobooks

∙ Shuffle songs

For additional information about each

item, refer to the iPod® Owner’s Manual.

SEEK/CAT and TRACK buttons

When the SEEK or CAT/TRACK

button is pressed for less than 1.5 seconds

while the iPod® is playing, the next track or

the beginning of the current track on the

iPod® will be played.

When the SEEK or CAT/TRACK

button is pressed for more than 1.5 sec-

onds while the iPod® is playing, the iPod®

will play while fast forwarding or rewinding.

When the button is released, the iPod® will

return to the normal play speed.

REPEAT (RPT)

When the RPT button is pressed while a

track is being played, the play pattern can

be changed as follows:

Repeat Off →1 Track Repeat →All Repeat →

Repeat Off

1 Track Repeat: the current track will be

repeated.

All Repeat: all songs in the current list are

repeated.

Repeat Off: no repeat play pattern is ap-

plied.

RANDOM (RDM)

When the RDM button is pressed while a

track is being played, the play pattern can

be changed as follows:

Shuffle Off →Track Shuffle →Album Shuffle

→Shuffle Off

Track Shuffle: the tracks in the current list

will be played randomly.

Album Shuffle: the albums in the current list

will be played randomly.

Shuffle Off: no random play pattern is ap-

plied.

4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

BACK button

When the BACK button is pressed, it

returns to the previous menu.

BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO

WITHOUT NAVIGATION SYSTEM

If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio

device that is capable of playing audio files,

the device can be connected to the vehi-

cle’s audio system so that the audio files on

the device play through the vehicle’s

speakers. For additional information, refer

to “FM/AM radio with compact disc (CD)

player” or “FM/AM/SAT radio with compact

disc (CD) player” in this section. Connecting Bluetooth® audio

To connect your Bluetooth® audio device

to the vehicle, follow the procedure below:

1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

2. Select the “Bluetooth” key.

3. Select the “Add Phone or Device” key.

This same screen can be accessed to

remove, replace or select a different

Bluetooth® device.

4. The system acknowledges the com-

mand and asks you to initiate connect-

ing from the phone handset. The con-

necting procedure of the cellular

phone varies according to each cellular

phone model. For additional informa-

tion, refer to the cellular phone Owner’s

Manual. You can also visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for instruc-

tions on connecting NISSAN recom-

mended cellular phones.

Audio main operation

To switch to the Bluetooth® audio mode,

press the MEDIA button repeatedly until the

Bluetooth® audio mode is displayed on the

screen.

The controls for the Bluetooth® audio are

displayed on the screen. Use the Preset 3

button for play and the Preset 4 button for

pause.

LHA2775

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47

CD CARE AND CLEANING

∙ Handle a CD by its edges. Do not bend

the disc. Never touch the surface of the

disc.

∙ Always place the discs in the storage

case when they are not being used.

∙ To clean a disc, wipe the surface from

the center to the outer edge using a

clean, soft cloth. Do not wipe the disc

using a circular motion.

∙ Do not use a conventional record

cleaner or alcohol intended for indus-

trial use.

∙ A new disc may be rough on the inner

and outer edges. Remove the rough

edges by rubbing the inner and outer

edges with the side of a pen or pencil as

illustrated.

STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR

AUDIO CONTROL

1. SOURCE switch

2. Menu control

switch/ENTER button

3. (back) switch

4. Volume control switch

SOURCE switch

With the ignition switch in the ACC or ON

position, push the SOURCE switch to turn

the audio system on.

LHA0049 LHA2266

4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Push the source select switch to change

the mode in the following sequence:

AM →FM1 →FM2 (if so equipped) →XM1 (if

so equipped) →XM2 (if so equipped) →XM3

(if so equipped) →SXM1 (if so equipped) →

SXM2 (if so equipped) →SXM3 (if so

equipped)→CD* →USB/iPod®* (if so

equipped) →Bluetooth® Audio* (if so

equipped) →AUX* →AM.

* These modes are only available when

compatible media storage is inserted into

the device or connected to the system.

Volume control switch

Push the volume control switch to increase

or decrease the volume.

Menu control

switch/ENTER

button

While the display is showing a map or audio

screen,tilt the Menu Control switch upward

or downward to select a station, track, CD

or folder. For most audio sources, tilting the

switch up/down for more than 1.5 seconds

provides a different function than a tilting

up/down for less than 1.5 seconds.

AM and FM:

∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the preset station.

∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds

to seek up or down to the next station.

∙ Press the ENTER button to show the list

of preset stations.

XM/SXM:

∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the preset station.

∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds

to go to the next or previous channel.

∙ Press the ENTER button to show the

XM/SXM Menu.

iPod®:

∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the track number.

∙ Press the ENTER button to show the

iPod Menu.

CD:

∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the track number.

∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds

to increase or decrease the folder num-

ber (if playing compressed audio files).

∙ Press the ENTER button to show the CD

Menu.

USB:

∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to

increase or decrease the track number.

∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds

to increase or decrease the folder num-

ber.

∙ Press the ENTER button to show the

USB Menu.

Bluetooth® Streaming Audio:

∙ Tilt up/down for less than 1.5 seconds to

skip ahead or back to the next song.

∙ Tilt up/down for more than 1.5 seconds

to reverse or fast forward the current

song.

AUX:

∙ Press the ENTER button to show the

AUX Menu.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49

(back) switch

Push the (back) switch to return to

the previous screen or cancel the current

selection.

ANTENNA

The antenna pattern is printed inside the

rear window.

CAUTION

∙ Do not place metalized film near the

rear window glass or attach any metal

parts to it. This may cause poor recep-

tion or noise

∙ When cleaning the inside of the rear

window, be careful not to scratch or

damage the rear window antenna.

Lightly wipe along the antenna with a

dampened soft cloth.

Apple Siri® Eyes Free personal assistant

can be accessed from the vehicle. Siri Eyes

Free can be accessed in Siri Eyes Free

mode to reduce user distraction. In this

mode, Siri Eyes Free is available for interac-

tion by voice control. After connecting a

compatible Apple device by using

Bluetooth®, Siri Eyes Free can be activated

from the TALK switch on the steering

wheel.

Siri® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered

in the U.S. and other countries.

∙ Some Siri Eyes Free functions, such as

displaying pictures or opening apps,

may not be available while driving.

∙ For best results, always update your de-

vice to the latest software version.

∙ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet

as possible. Close the windows to elimi-

nate the surrounding noises (traffic

noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which

may prevent the system from recogniz-

ing the voice commands correctly.

∙ For functions that can be used in Siri

Eyes Free, please refer to the Apple

website.

REQUIREMENTS

Siri is only available on the iPhone® 4S or

later. Devices released before iPhone® 4S

are not supported by the Siri Eyes Free sys-

tem. Visit www.apple.com/ios/siri for de-

tails about device compatibility.

Siri must be enabled on the phone. Please

check phone settings.

If the device has a lock screen, Siri must be

accessible from the lock screen. Please

check phone settings.

For best results, always update your device

to the latest software version.

SIRI® EYES FREE (if so equipped)

4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

SIRI® ACTIVATION

Siri® Eyes Free function can be activated by

pushing TALK switch on the steering

wheel.

1. Connect a Siri Eyes Free enabled

iPhone® to the vehicle. For additional

information, refer to “Initialization” in

this section.

2. After the Bluetooth® connection is es-

tablished, the switch operation select

screen is displayed.

3. Select “Short Press” or “Long Press” for

Siri Eyes Free activation Switch action

can also be changed from the

Bluetooth® settings menu. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Changing

Siri Eyes Free Settings (models without

navigation system)” in this section.

OPERATING SIRI® EYES FREE

1. Push or push and hold the TALK

switch.

2. Speak your command and then listen

to the Siri® Eyes Free reply.

After starting Siri Eyes Free, push the

TALK switch again within 5 seconds of the

end of the Siri Eyes Free announcement to

extend the session.

Example 1 – Playing music

1. Push or push and hold the TALK

switch.

2. Say “Play (artist name, song name,

etc.)”.

3. Your vehicle will automatically change

to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode*

when the music starts playing. Mode

selection is determined by the phone.

* If the iPhone® is also connected with the

USB cable.

If the audio track does not start playing

automatically after Siri Eyes Free ends, try

changing the track or audio source to re-

sume playback.

NOTE:

For best results, use the native music

app. Performance of music control func-

tion while using Podcasts, Audiobook or

other 3rd party music apps may vary and

is controlled by the iPhone®.

Example2–Replying to text messages

1. If a compatible iPhone® is connected

and “Show Notifications” of the iPhone®

settings is enabled, the vehicle will dis-

play a notification for new incoming

text messages.

2. After reading the message, push or

push and hold the TALK switch to

reply using Siri Eyes Free.

3. After a beep sounds, say “Text mes-

sage” or a similar command to reply

using Siri Eyes Free.

LHA2282

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51

CHANGING SIRI® EYES FREE

SETTINGS

Settings for Siri® Eyes Free can be found in

the Bluetooth® settings menu. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Bluetooth® set-

tings” in this section.

1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

2. Use the TUNE/FOLDER or

TUNE/SCROLL knob to select

“Bluetooth” and then press the

ENTER/SETTING button.

3. Use the TUNE/FOLDER or

TUNE/SCROLL knob to select “Siri” and

then press the ENTER/SETTING button.

4. Select “Short Press” or “Long Press” us-

ing the TUNE/FOLDER or

TUNE/SCROLL knob and then press

the ENTER/SETTING button.

TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot access Siri Eyes

Freefromswitchonthe

steering wheel

Check if a Bluetooth® connection is established between the iPhone® and the system.

Check if Siri is enabled on the device. On your phone, go to Siri setting.

Check that Siri can be accessed from the device lock screen. This can be set in the settings menu of your phone.

Models without navigation system:

Check the settings for Siri Eyes Free activation on the vehicle audio system. If the setting is “Long Press”, you must push and hold

the TALK switch on the steering wheel for more than 1.5 seconds to start Siri Eyes Free. If the setting is “Short Press”, a short

push and release of the switch should start Siri Eyes Free.

Audio Source does not

change automatically to

iPod® or Bluetooth® Au-

dio mode

For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party

music apps may vary.

For best results, play media already stored on your device. Streaming music or playback from cloud storage may degrade

performance.

Switch the source manually by pressing the AUX or MEDIA button on the vehicle audio system or the SOURCE select switch on the

steering wheel.

Play, pause, next track,

previous track or play

timer does not work

For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party

music apps may vary and is controlled by the device.

4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Symptom Cause and Countermeasure

Cannot hear any music/

audio being played back

from a connected

iPhone®

Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode. A USB connection is required for iPod® mode.

Cannot hear map turn-

by-turn direction guid-

ance from a connected

iPhone®

Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode. A USB connection is required for iPod® mode.

Cannot receive text mes-

sage notifications on the

vehicle audio system

Check if “Send Notifications” is enabled on your phone. On the phone, go to Bluetooth® settings. Find the device name, like “My Car”.

Press the info button. Turn on “Show Notifications”.

Cannot reply to text

message notifications by

Siri Eyes Free

After receiving an incoming text message, follow on-screen guidance. Push or push and hold the TALK switch on the steering

wheel for Siri Eyes Free. After Siri Eyes Free starts, say “Text Message”.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53

When installing a CB, ham radio or car

phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe

the following precautions; otherwise, the

new equipment may adversely affect the

engine control system and other electronic

parts.

WARNING

∙ A cellular phone should not be used

for any purpose while driving so full

attention may be given to vehicle op-

eration. Some jurisdictions prohibit

the use of cellular phones while

driving.

∙ If you must make a call while your ve-

hicle is in motion, the hands free cellu-

lar phone operational mode is highly

recommended. Exercise extreme cau-

tion at all times so full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-

tion to vehicle operation while talking

on the phone, pull off the road to a

safe location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

∙ Keep the antenna as far away as pos-

sible from the electronic control

modules.

∙ Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in

(20 cm) away from the electronic con-

trol system harnesses. Do not route

the antenna wire next to any harness.

∙ Adjust the antenna standing-wave

ratio as recommended by the

manufacturer.

∙ Connect the ground wire from the CB

radio chassis to the body.

∙ For additional information, it is rec-

ommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for servicing.

WARNING

∙ Use a phone after stopping your ve-

hicle in a safe location. If you have to

use a phone while driving, exercise ex-

treme caution at all times so full at-

tention may be given to vehicle

operation.

∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-

tion to vehicle operation while talking

on the phone, pull off the road to a

safe location and stop your vehicle.

CAUTION

To avoid discharging the vehicle bat-

tery, use a phone after starting the

engine.

CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE

SYSTEM WITHOUT NAVIGATION

SYSTEM (if so equipped)

4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Your NISSAN is equipped with the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. If

you have a compatible Bluetooth® enabled

cellular phone, you can set up the wireless

connection between your cellular phone

and the in-vehicle phone module. With

Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can

make or receive a hands-free telephone

call with your cellular phone in the vehicle.

Once your cellular phone is connected to

the in-vehicle phone module, no other

phone connecting procedure is required.

Your phone is automatically connected

with the in-vehicle phone module when

the ignition switch is placed in the ON po-

sition with the previously connected cellu-

lar phone turned on and carried in the ve-

hicle.

NOTE:

Some devices require the user to accept

connections to other Bluetooth® de-

vices; however some phones do not con-

nect automatically to the system. For

additional information, refer to the

phone’s Owner’s Manual.

You can connect up to five different

Bluetooth® cellular phones to the in-

vehicle phone module. However, you can

talk on only one cellular phone at a time.

Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free

Phone System, refer to the following notes.

∙ Set up the wireless connection be-

tween a compatible cellular phone and

the in-vehicle phone module before us-

ing the hands-free phone system.

LHA4287

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55

∙ Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular

phones may not be recognized or work

properly. Please visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recom-

mended phone list and connecting in-

structions.

∙ You will not be able to use a hands-free

phone under the following conditions:

– Your vehicle is outside of the cellular

service area.

– Your vehicle is in an area where it is

difficult to receive a cellular signal;

such as in a tunnel, in an under-

ground parking garage, near a tall

building or in a mountainous area.

– Your cellular phone is locked to pre-

vent it from being dialed.

∙ When the radio wave condition is not

ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it

may be difficult to hear the other per-

son’s voice during a call.

∙ Do not place the cellular phone in an

area surrounded by metal or far away

from the in-vehicle phone module to

prevent tone quality degradation and

wireless connection disruption.

∙

While a cellular phone is connected

through the Bluetooth® wireless connec-

tion, the battery power of the cellular

phone may discharge quicker than usual.

The Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone Sys-

tem cannot charge cellular phones.

∙ For additional information, please visit

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for trouble-

shooting help.

∙ Some cellular phones or other devices

may cause interference or a buzzing

noise to come from the audio system

speakers. Storing the device in a differ-

ent location may reduce or eliminate

the noise.

∙ For additional information, refer to the

cellular phone Owner’s Manual regard-

ing the telephone charges, cellular

phone antenna and body, etc.

REGULATORY INFORMATION

FCC Regulatory information

– CAUTION: To maintain compliance with

FCC’s RF exposure guidelines, use only

the supplied antenna. Unauthorized an-

tenna, modification, or attachments

could damage the transmitter and may

violate FCC regulations.

– Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference

and

2. this device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

IC Regulatory information

– Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

– This Class B digital apparatus meets all

requirements of the Canadian

Interference-Causing Equipment Regu-

lations.

BLUETOOTH® is a

trademark owned

by Bluetooth SIG,

Inc. and licensed

to Visteon.

4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

USING THE SYSTEM

The system allows hands-free operation of

the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

If the vehicle is in motion, some commands

may not be available so full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

Initialization

When the ignition switch is placed in the ON

position, NISSANVoice Recognition is initial-

ized, which takes a few seconds. If the

button is pressed before the initialization

completes, the system will announce

“Hands-free phone system not ready” and

will not react to voice commands.

Operating tips

To get the best performance out of the

NISSAN Voice Recognition system, observe

the following:

∙ Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet

as possible. Close the windows to elimi-

nate surrounding noises (traffic noises,

vibration sounds, etc.), which may pre-

vent the system from recognizing voice

commands correctly.

∙ Wait until the tone sounds before

speaking a command. Otherwise, the

command will not be received properly.

∙ Start speaking a command within

5 seconds after the tone sounds.

∙ Speak in a natural voice without paus-

ing between words.

Giving voice commands

To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition,

press and release the button located

on the steering wheel. After the tone

sounds, speak a command.

The command given is picked up by the

microphone, and voice feedback is given

when the command is accepted.

∙ If you need to hear the available com-

mands for the current menu again, say

“Help” and the system will repeat them.

∙ If a command is not recognized, the

system announces, “Command not

recognized. Please try again.” Make sure

the command is said exactly as

prompted by the system and repeat

the command in a clear voice.

∙ If you want to go back to the previous

command, you can say “Go back” or

“Correction” any time the system is

waiting for a response.

∙ You can cancel a command when the

system is waiting for a response by say-

ing, “Cancel” or “Quit.” The system an-

nounces “Cancel” and ends the Voice

Recognition session. You can also press

and hold the button on the steer-

ing wheel for 5 seconds at any time to

end the Voice Recognition session.

Whenever the Voice Recognition ses-

sion is canceled, a double beep is

played to indicate you have exited the

system.

∙ If you want to adjust the volume of the

voice feedback, push the volume con-

trol switches (+ or -) on the steering

wheel while being provided with feed-

back. You can also use the radio Volume

control knob.

Voice Prompt Interrupt

In most cases you can interrupt the voice

feedback to speak the next command by

pressing the button on the steering

wheel. After interrupting the system, wait

for a beep before speaking your command.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57

One Shot Call

To use the system faster, you may speak

the second level commands with the main

menu command on the main menu. For

example, press the button and after

the tone say, “Call Redial”.

CONTROL BUTTONS

The control buttons for the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System are located on

the steering wheel.

PHONE/SEND

Press the button to initi-

ate a Voice Recognition ses-

sion or answer an incoming

call.

If the operation of “Siri” is set

to “Short Press” on the

Bluetooth® setting menu,

pressing and holding

the button initiates a

Voice Recognition session for

the Hands-Free Phone

operation. For additional

information, refer to

“Bluetooth® settings” in this

section.

You can also use

the button to interrupt

the system feedback and give

a command at once. For ad-

ditional information, refer to

“Voice Commands” and “Dur-

ing a call” in this section.

PHONE/END

While the voice recognition

system is active, press and

hold the button for

5 seconds to quit the voice

recognition system at any

time.

LHA4349

4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

Tuning switch

While using the voice recogni-

tion system, tilt the tuning

switch up or down to manu-

ally control the phone system.

CONNECTING PROCEDURE

NOTE:

The connecting procedure must be per-

formed when the vehicle is stationary. If

the vehicle starts moving during the pro-

cedure, the procedure will be cancelled.

To connect a phone to the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System:

1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button. 2. Use the TUNE/FOLDER or

TUNE/SCROLL knob to select

“Bluetooth” and then press the

ENTER/SETTING button.

3. Use the TUNE/FOLDER or

TUNE/SCROLL knob to select “Add

Phone or Device” and then press the

ENTER/SETTING button.

4. When a message with a PIN appears

on the screen, operate the Bluetooth®

phone to enter the PIN.

The connecting procedure varies according

to each phone. For additional information,

refer to the phone’s Owner’s Manual. You can

also visit www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth or call the NISSAN

Consumer Affairs Department for instruc-

tions on connecting recommended cellular

phones.

LHA2257 LHA2274

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59

VOICE COMMANDS

Voice commands can be used to operate

the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

Press the button and say “Phone” to

bring up the phone command menu. The

available options are:

∙ Call

∙ Phonebook

∙ Recent Calls

∙ Messaging (if available)

∙ Show Applications (if available)

∙ Select Phone or Device

“Call”

For additional information, refer to “Making

a call” in this section.

“Phonebook”

The following commands are available un-

der “Phonebook”:

∙ (a name)

Say a name in the phonebook to bring

up a list of options for that phonebook

entry. The system will say the name it

interpreted based on the voice com-

mand provided. If the name is incorrect,

say “Correction” to hear another name.

Once the correct phonebook entry is

identified, say “Dial” to dial the number

or “Send Text” to send a text message to

that number. Say “Record Name” to re-

cord a name for the phonebook entry.

Say “Delete Recording” to delete a re-

corded name for the phonebook entry.

∙ List Names

Speak this command to have the sys-

tem list the names in the phonebook

one by one alphabetically. Say “Dial” to

dial the number of the current name or

“Send Text” to send a text message to

that number. Say “Next Entry” or “Previ-

ous Entry” to move through the list al-

phabetically. Say “Record Name” to re-

cord a name for the current phonebook

entry. Say “Delete Recording” to delete a

recorded name for the current phone-

book entry.

∙ Transfer Entry

This command can be used to transfer

multiple contacts at a time. To enable

manual contact transfer capability, set

“Phonebook Download” to “Off” in the

Setting menu. The ability to transfer

contacts via the OPP Bluetooth® profile

depends on your mobile phone. For ad-

ditional information, refer to your

phone’s Owner’s Manual.

∙ Delete Entry

Speak this command to delete an entry

in the phonebook. Choose an entry to

delete by speaking the desired name or

say “List Names”.

4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

“Recent Calls”

The following commands are available un-

der “Recent Calls”:

∙ Incoming Calls

Speak this command to list the last five

incoming calls to the vehicle. If the call is

from an entry in the phonebook, the

name will be displayed. Otherwise, the

phone number of the incoming call will

be displayed.

Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send

Text” to send a text message to that

number. Say “Next Entry” or “Previous

Entry” to move through the list of in-

coming calls.

∙ Missed Calls

Speak this command to list the last five

missed calls to the vehicle. If the call is

from an entry in the phonebook, the

name will be displayed. Otherwise, the

phone number of the missed call will be

displayed.

Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send

Text” to send a text message to that

number. Say “Next Entry” or “Previous

Entry” to move through the list of

missed calls.

∙ Outgoing Calls

Speak this command to list the last five

outgoing calls from the vehicle. If the

call was to an entry in the phonebook,

the name will be displayed. Otherwise,

the phone number of the outgoing call

will be displayed.

Say “Dial” to call the number or “Send

Text” to send a text message to that

number. Say “Next Entry” or “Previous

Entry” to move through the list of out-

going calls.

∙ Redial

Speak this command to call the last

number dialed.

∙ Call Back

Speak this command to call the num-

ber of the last incoming call to the ve-

hicle.

“Messaging” (if so equipped)

Speak this command to access text mes-

saging functions. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Text messaging” in this sec-

tion.

“Select Phone”

Speak this command to select a phone to

use from a list of those phones connected

to the vehicle.

MAKING A CALL

To make a call from a phone connected to

the vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System:

1. Press the button on the steering

wheel.

2. The system will prompt you for a com-

mand. Say “Call”.

3. Select one of the available voice com-

mands to continue:

∙ “(A Name)” — Speak the name of a

phonebook entry to place a call to that

entry. The system will respond with the

name it interpreted from your com-

mand and will prompt you to confirm

that the name is correct. Say “Yes” to

initiate the call or “No” to hear another

name from the phonebook.

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61

∙

“Phone Number” — Speak this command

to place a call by inputting numbers. For

7– to 10–digit phone number, speak the

numbers. Say “Correction” at any time in

the process to correct a misspoken or

misinterpreted number. For phone num-

bers with more digits or special charac-

ters, say “Special Number”,then speak the

digits. Up to 24 digits can be entered.

Available special characters are “start”,

“pound”, “plus”, and “pause”. When finished,

say “Dial” to initiate the call. Say “Correc-

tion” at any time in the process to correct

a misspoken or misinterpreted number

or character.

∙ “Redial” – Speak this command to dial

the number of the last outgoing call.

The system will display “Re-dialing

<name/number>”. The name of the

phonebook entry will be displayed if it

available, otherwise the number being

re-dialed will be displayed.

∙ “Call Back” – Speak this command to

dial the number of the last incoming

call. The system will display “Calling

back <name/number>”. The name of

the phonebook entry will be displayed if

it available, otherwise the number be-

ing called back will be displayed.

RECEIVING A CALL

When a call is received by the phone con-

nected to the vehicle’s Bluetooth® Hands-

Free Phone System, the call information is

displayed on either the vehicle information

display or both the vehicle information dis-

play and the control panel display.

Press the button to accept the call.

Press the button to reject the call.

DURING A CALL

While a call is active, press the button

to access additional options. Speak one of

the following commands:

∙ “Send” – Speak this command followed

by the digits to enter digits during the

phone call.

∙ “Mute On” or “Mute Off” – Speak the

command to mute or unmute the sys-

tem.

∙ “Transfer Call” – Speak this command to

transfer the call to the handset. To

transfer the call back from the handset

to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone

System, press the button and

confirm when prompted.

If supported by the phone, the Bluetooth®

Hands-Free Phone System allows for call

waiting functionality. If a call is received

while another call is already active, a mes-

sage will be displayed on the screen. Press

the button to hold the active call and

switch to the second call. Press the

button to reject the second call.

While the second call is active, pressing

the button will allow the same com-

mands that are available during any call as

well as two additional commands:

∙ “Switch Call” – Speak this command to

hold the second call and switch back to

the original call.

∙ “End Other Call” – Speak this command

to stay with the second call and end the

original call.

Press the button to accept the call.

Press the button to reject the call.

ENDING A CALL

To end an active call, press the but-

ton.

4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

TEXT MESSAGING (if so equipped)

WARNING

∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may re-

strict the use of “Text-to-Speech”.

Check local regulations before using

this feature.

∙ Laws in some jurisdictions may re-

strict the use of some of the applica-

tions and features, such as social net-

working and texting. Check local

regulations for any requirements.

∙ Use the text messaging feature after

stopping your vehicle in a safe loca-

tion. If you have to use the feature

while driving, exercise extreme cau-

tion at all times so full attention may

be given to vehicle operation.

∙ If you are unable to devote full atten-

tion to vehicle operation while using

the text messaging feature, pull off

the road to a safe location and stop

your vehicle.

NOTE:

Many phones may require special per-

mission to enable text messaging. Check

the phone’s screen during Bluetooth®

pairing. For some phones, you may need

to enable ‘Notifications’ in the phone’s

Bluetooth® menu for text messages to

appear on the headunit. For additional

information, refer to your phone’s Own-

er’s manual. Text message integration

requires that the phone support MAP

(Message Access Profile) for both receiv-

ing and sending text messages. Some

phones may not support all text mes-

saging features. For additional informa-

tion, refer to

www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth or

www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compat-

ibility information, as well as your de-

vice’s Owner’s manual.

The system allows for the sending and re-

ceiving of text messages through the ve-

hicle interface.

Sending a text message:

1. Press the button on the steering

wheel.

2. Say “Phone” after the tone.

3. Say “Send Text” after the tone.

4. The system will provide a list of avail-

able commands in order to determine

the recipient of the text message.

Choose from the following:

∙ To (a name)

∙ Enter Number

∙ Missed Calls

∙ Incoming Calls

∙ Outgoing Calls

For additional information about these

options, refer to “Voice commands” in

this section.

5. Once a recipient is chosen, the system

prompts for which message to send.

Nine predefined messages are avail-

able as well as three custom mes-

sages. To choose one of the predefined

messages, speak one of the following

after the tone:

∙ “Driving, can’t text”

∙ “Call me”

∙ “On my way”

∙ “Running late”

∙ “Okay”

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63

∙ “Yes”

∙ “No”

∙ “Where are you?”

∙ “When?”

∙ “Custom Messages”

To send one of the custom messages,

say “Custom Messages”. If more than

one custom message is stored, the

system will prompt for the number of

the desired custom message. For ad-

ditional information on setting and

managing custom text messages, re-

fer to “Bluetooth® settings” in this sec-

tion.

Reading a received text message:

1. Press the button on the steering

wheel.

2. Say “Phone” after the tone.

3. Say “Read Text” after the tone.

The text message, sender and delivery

time are shown on the screen. Use

the tuning switch to scroll through all

text messages if more than one are avail-

able. Press the button to exit the text

message screen. Press the button to

access the following options for replying to

the text message:

∙ Call Back

Speak this command to call the sender

of the text message using the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

∙ Send Text

Speak this command to send a text

message response to the sender of the

text message.

∙ Read Text

Speak this command to read the text

message again.

∙ Previous Text

Speak this command to move to the

previous text message (if available).

∙ Next Text

Speak this command to move to the

next text message (if available).

Siri® Eyes Free (if so equipped)

If a connected phone is equipped with Siri®,

it can also be used to create custom mes-

sages that are sent through the phone. For

additional information, refer to “Siri® Eyes

Free” in this section.

NOTE:

Text messages are only displayed if the

vehicle speed is less than 5 mph

(8 km/h).

NOTE:

For Apple iPhones, text messages can

only be sent through Siri.

4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

BLUETOOTH® SETTINGS

To access and adjust the settings for the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System:

1. Press the ENTER/SETTING button.

2. Use the TUNE/FOLDER or TUNE

SCROLL knob to select “Bluetooth” and

then press the ENTER/SETTING button:

∙ Bluetooth

Select “On” or “Off” to turn the vehicle’s

Bluetooth® system on or off.

∙ Add Phone or Device

For additional information, refer to

“Connecting procedure” in this section.

∙ Delete Phone or Device

Select to delete a phone from the dis-

played list. The system will ask to con-

firm before deleting the phone.

∙ Replace Phone

Select to replace a phone from the dis-

played list. When a selection is made,

the system will ask to confirm before

proceeding. The recorded phonebook

for the phone being deleted will be

saved as long as the new phone’s

phonebook is the same as the old

phone’s phonebook.

∙ Select Phone

Select to connect to a previously con-

nected phone from the displayed list.

∙ Show Incoming Calls

Select “Driver Only” to have incoming

call information displayed only in the

vehicle information display. Select

“Both” to have incoming call information

displayed in both the vehicle informa-

tion display and the center display

screen.

∙ Phonebook Download

Select to turn on or off the automatic

download of a connected phone’s

phonebook.

∙ Text Message (if so equipped)

Select to turn on or off the vehicle’s text

messaging feature.

∙ New Text Sound (if so equipped)

Select to adjust the volume of the

sound that plays when a new text is

received by a phone connected to the

Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.

The setting all the way to the left indi-

cates that the new text sound will be

muted.

∙ Show Incoming Text (if so equipped)

Select “Driver Only” to have incoming

text messages displayed only in the ve-

hicle information display. Select “Both”

to have incoming text messages dis-

played in both the vehicle information

display and the center display screen.

Select “None” to have no display of in-

coming text messages.

LHA2894

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65

∙ Edit Custom Messages (if so equipped)

Select to set a custom message that

will be available with the standard op-

tions when sending a text message. To

set a custom message, send a text

message to your own phone number

while the phone is connected to the

system. Three custom messages can

be set. Custom messages can only be

set while the vehicle is stationary.

∙ Auto Reply (if so equipped)

Select to turn on or off the Auto Reply

function. When enabled, the vehicle will

automatically send a predefined text

message to the sender when a text

message is received while driving.

∙ Auto Reply Message (if so equipped)

Select to choose the message that is

sent when the Auto Reply function is

enabled. Choose from “I’m Driving” or

one of the three custom messages

stored in the system.

∙ Vehicle Signature On/Off (if so

equipped)

Select to choose whether or not the

vehicle signature is added to outgoing

text messages from the vehicle. This

message cannot be changed or cus-

tomized.

MANUAL CONTROL

While using the Voice Recognition system,

it is possible to select menu options by

using the steering wheel controls instead

of speaking voice commands. To activate

manual control mode, press the but-

ton on the steering wheel to access the

phone menu and then push either up or

down on the tuning switch .

The manual control mode does not allow

dialing a phone number by digits. The user

may select an entry from the Phonebook

or Recent Calls lists. To reactivate Voice

Recognition, exit the manual control mode

by pressing and holding the button.

At that time, pressing the button will

start the Hands Free Phone System.

4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems

MEMO

Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67

5 Starting and driving

Precautions when starting and driving ..........5-2

Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) ..............5-2

Three-way catalyst ...........................5-2

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)........................................5-3

Avoiding collision and rollover ................5-7

Off-roadrecovery ............................5-7

Rapid air pressure loss .......................5-7

Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving ...........5-8

Push-Button Ignition Switch .....................5-9

Operating range.............................5-10

Push-button ignition switch positions .......5-10

Emergency engine shut off ...................5-11

NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery

discharge ....................................5-11

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System .........5-12

Before starting the engine......................5-12

Starting the engine .............................5-13

Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) ........5-14

Driving the vehicle ..............................5-14

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) ........................................5-14

Parking brake ..................................5-21

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (if so equipped) .......5-22

BSW system operation ......................5-23

How to enable/disable the BSW system .....5-25

BSW system limitations......................5-25

BSW driving situations .......................5-26

System temporarily unavailable .............5-30

System maintenance........................5-31

Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped) . . 5-32

RCTA system operation......................5-33

How to enable/disable the RCTA

system ......................................5-35

RCTA system limitations .....................5-36

System temporarily unavailable .............5-39

System maintenance........................5-40

Cruise control (if so equipped) ..................5-41

Precautions on cruise control................5-41

Cruise control operations....................5-42

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) (if so equipped) . . 5-43

ICC system operation .......................5-44

The ICC switch ..............................5-46

ICC system limitations.......................5-52

System temporarily unavailable .............5-55

System maintenance........................5-57

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) ...........5-58

AEB system operation.......................5-59

Turning the AEB system on/off ..............5-61

AEB system limitations ......................5-61

System temporarily unavailable .............5-63

System malfunction .........................5-63

System maintenance........................5-64

Intelligent Forward Collision Warning (I-FCW)....5-65

I-FCW system operation .....................5-67

Turning the I-FCW system on/off ............5-68

I-FCW system limitations ....................5-69

System temporarily unavailable .............5-74

System malfunction .........................5-75

System maintenance........................5-75

Break-in schedule ..............................5-76

Fuel efficient driving tips ........................5-77

Increasing fuel economy .......................5-78

Parking/parking on hills ........................5-79

Power steering .................................5-80

Brake system...................................5-81

Brake precautions ...........................5-81

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ..............5-81

Brake assist .................................5-82

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system .........5-83

Brake force distribution......................5-85

Hill start assist system..........................5-86

Front and Rear Sonar System (if so equipped) . .5-86

System operation ...........................5-87

How to enable/disable the sonar

system ......................................5-89

Sonar limitations ............................5-89

System temporarily unavailable .............5-90

System maintenance........................5-90

Cold weather driving ...........................5-91

Freeing a frozen door lock ...................5-91

Antifreeze ...................................5-91

Battery......................................5-91

Draining of coolant water....................5-91

Tire equipment ..............................5-91

Special winter equipment ...................5-92

Driving on snow or ice .......................5-92

Engine block heater (if so equipped) .........5-92

WARNING

∙ Do not leave children or adults who

would normally require the assis-

tance of others alone in your vehicle.

Pets should also not be left alone.

They could accidentally injure them-

selves or others through inadvertent

operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot,

sunny days, temperatures in a closed

vehicle could quickly become high

enough to cause severe or possibly

fatal injuries to people or animals.

∙ Closely supervise children when they

are around cars to prevent them from

playing and becoming locked in the

trunk where they could be seriously

injured. Keep the car locked, with the

rear seatback and trunk lid securely

latched when not in use, and prevent

children’s access to car keys.

EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)

WARNING

∙ Do not breathe exhaust gases; they

contain colorless and odorless carbon

monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dan-

gerous. It can cause unconsciousness

or death.

∙ If you suspect that exhaust fumes are

entering the vehicle, drive with all

windows fully open, and have the ve-

hicle inspected immediately.

∙ Do not run the engine in closed spaces

such as a garage.

∙ Do not park the vehicle with the en-

gine running for any extended length

of time.

∙ Keep the rear vent windows, liftgates,

doors and trunk lids (if so equipped)

closed while driving, otherwise ex-

haust gases could be drawn into the

passenger compartment. If you must

drive with one of these open, follow

these precautions:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the air recirculation but-

ton to off and the fan control dial to

high to circulate the air.

∙ If electrical wiring or other cable con-

nections must pass to a trailer

through the seal on the trunk lid or the

body, follow the manufacturer’s rec-

ommendation to prevent carbon

monoxide entry into the vehicle.

∙ The exhaust system and body should

be inspected by a qualified mechanic

whenever:

a. The vehicle is raised for service.

b. You suspect that exhaust fumes

are entering into the passenger

compartment.

c. You notice a change in the sound of

the exhaust system.

d. You have had an accident involving

damage to the exhaust system,

underbody, or rear of the vehicle.

THREE-WAY CATALYST

The three-way catalyst is an emission con-

trol device installed in the exhaust system.

Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst

are burned at high temperatures to help

reduce pollutants.

WARNING

∙ The exhaust gas and the exhaust sys-

tem are very hot. Keep people, ani-

mals or flammable materials away

from the exhaust system

components.

PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND

DRIVING

5-2 Starting and driving

∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags. They may

ignite and cause a fire.

CAUTION

∙ Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits

from leaded gasoline will seriously re-

duce the three-way catalyst’s ability

to help reduce exhaust pollutants.

∙ Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunc-

tions in the ignition, fuel injection, or

electrical systems can cause overrich

fuel flow into the three-way catalyst,

causing it to overheat. Do not keep

driving if the engine misfires, or if no-

ticeable loss of performance or other

unusual operating conditions are de-

tected. Have the vehicle inspected

promptly. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ Avoid driving with an extremely low

fuel level. Running out of fuel could

cause the engine to misfire, damag-

ing the three-way catalyst.

∙ Do not race the engine while warming

it up.

∙ Do not push or tow your vehicle to

start the engine.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and

inflated to the inflation pressure recom-

mended by the vehicle manufacturer on

the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure

label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different

size than the size indicated on the vehicle

placard or tire inflation pressure label, you

should determine the proper tire inflation

pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle

has been equipped with a Tire Pressure

Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates

a low tire pressure telltale when one or

more of your tires is significantly under-

inflated. Accordingly, when the low tire

pressure telltale illuminates, you should

stop and check all your tires as soon as

possible, and inflate them to the proper

pressure. Driving on a significantly under-

inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and

can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also

reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life,

and may affect the vehicle’s handling and

stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substi-

tute for proper tire maintenance, and it is

the driver’s responsibility to maintain cor-

rect tire pressure, even if under-inflation

has not reached the level to trigger illumi-

nation of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate

when the system is not operating properly.

The TPMS malfunction indicator is com-

bined with the low tire pressure telltale.

When the system detects a malfunction,

the telltale will flash for approximately one

minute and then remain continuously illu-

minated. This sequence will continue upon

subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as

the malfunction exists. When the malfunc-

tion indicator is illuminated, the system

may not be able to detect or signal low tire

pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions

may occur for a variety of reasons, includ-

ing the installation of replacement or alter-

nate tires or wheels on the vehicle that

prevent the TPMS from functioning prop-

erly. Always check the TPMS malfunction

telltale after replacing one or more tires or

wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the

replacement or alternate tires and wheels

allow the TPMS to continue to function

properly.

Starting and driving 5-3

Additional information:

∙ When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS

does not monitor the tire pressure of

the spare tire.

∙ The TPMS will activate only when the

vehicle is driven at speeds above

16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system may

not detect a sudden drop in tire pres-

sure (for example, a flat tire while driv-

ing).

∙ The low tire pressure warning light does

not automatically turn off when the tire

pressure is adjusted on all four tires. Af-

ter all four tires are inflated to the rec-

ommended pressure, the vehicle must

be driven at speeds above 16 mph

(25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn

off the low tire pressure warning light.

Use a tire pressure gauge to check the

tire pressure.

∙ The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warn-

ing appears in the vehicle information

display when the low tire pressure

warning light is illuminated and low tire

pressure is detected. The “Tire Pressure

Low - Add Air” warning turns off when

the low tire pressure warning light turns

off.

∙ The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warn-

ing appears each time the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position as

long as the low tire pressure warning

light remains illuminated.

∙ The “Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warn-

ing does not appear if the low tire pres-

sure warning light illuminates to indi-

cate a TPMS malfunction.

∙ Tire pressure rises and falls depending

on the heat caused by the vehicle’s op-

eration and the outside temperature.

Do not reduce the tire pressure after

driving because the tire pressure rises

after driving. Low outside temperature

can lower the temperature of the air

inside the tire which can cause a lower

tire inflation pressure. This may cause

the low tire pressure warning light to

illuminate. If the warning light illumi-

nates, check the tire pressure for all four

tires.

∙ The Tire and Loading Information label

is located in the driver’s door opening.

∙ You can also check the tire pressure of

all tires (except the spare) on the vehicle

information display screen. The order of

the tire pressure figures displayed on

the screen corresponds with the actual

order of the tire position.

For additional information, refer to “Low tire

pressure warning light” in the “Instruments

and controls” section, “Tire Pressure Moni-

toring System (TPMS)” in the “In case of

emergency” section and “Tire pressure” in

the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

WARNING

∙ Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should contact

the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

5-4 Starting and driving

∙ If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sud-

den steering maneuvers or abrupt

braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off

the road to a safe location and stop

the vehicle as soon as possible. Driv-

ing with underinflated tires may per-

manently damage the tires and in-

crease the likelihood of tire failure.

Serious vehicle damage could occur

and may lead to an accident and could

result in serious personal injury.

Check the tire pressure for all four

tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the

recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label to turn the low tire pres-

sure warning light off. If you have a flat

tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon

as possible. (For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Flat tire” in the “In case of

emergency” section for changing a

flat tire.)

∙ When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS such as the spare tire, when a

spare tire is mounted or a wheel is

replaced, tire pressure will not be indi-

cated, the TPMS will not function and

the low tire pressure warning light will

flash for approximately 1 minute. The

light will remain on after 1 minute. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for tire replacement and/or

system resetting.

∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could affect

the proper operation of the TPMS.

∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pres-

sure sensors.

CAUTION

Do not place metalized film or any

metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the win-

dows. This may cause poor reception of

the signals from the tire pressure sen-

sors, and the TPMS will not function

properly.

Some devices and transmitters may tem-

porarily interfere with the operation of the

TPMS and cause the low tire pressure

warning light to illuminate.

Some examples are:

∙ Facilities or electric devices using simi-

lar radio frequencies are near the ve-

hicle.

∙ If a transmitter set to similar frequen-

cies is being used in or near the vehicle.

∙ If a computer (or similar equipment) or

a DC/AC converter is being used in or

near the vehicle.

The low tire pressure warning light may

illuminate in the following cases:

∙ If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel

and tire without TPMS.

∙ If the TPMS has been replaced and the

ID has not been registered.

∙ If the wheel is not originally specified by

NISSAN.

Starting and driving 5-5

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert

When adding air to an under-inflated tire,

the TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert provides

visual and audible signals outside the ve-

hicle to help you inflate the tires to the rec-

ommended COLD tire pressure.

Vehicle set-up

1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.

2. Apply the parking brake and place the

shift lever in the P (Park) position.

3. Place the ignition switch in the ON po-

sition. Do not start the engine.

Operation

1. Add air to the tire.

2. After a few seconds, the hazard indica-

tors will start flashing.

3. When the designated pressure is

reached, the horn beeps once and the

hazard indicators stop flashing.

4. Perform the above steps for each tire.

∙ If the tire is over-inflated more than

approximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn

beeps and the hazard indicators

flash three times.To correct the pres-

sure, push the core of the valve stem

on the tire briefly to release pressure.

When the pressure reaches the des-

ignated pressure, the horn beeps

once.

∙ If the hazard indicator does not flash

within approximately 15 seconds af-

ter starting to inflate the tire, it indi-

cates that the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is

not operating.

∙ The TPMS will not activate the Easy-

Fill Tire Alert under the following con-

ditions:

– If there is interference from an exter-

nal device or transmitter.

– The air pressure from the inflation

device is not sufficient to inflate the

tire.

– There is a malfunction in the TPMS

system.

– There is a malfunction in the horn or

hazard indicators.

– The identification code of the tire

pressure sensor is not registered to

the system.

– The battery of the tire pressure sen-

sor is low.

∙ If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert does not op-

erate due toTPMS interference, move

the vehicle about 3 ft (1 m) backward

or forward and try again.

5-6 Starting and driving

If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not working, use a

tire pressure gauge.

AVOIDING COLLISION AND

ROLLOVER

WARNING

Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe

and prudent manner may result in loss

of control or an accident.

Be alert and drive defensively at all times.

Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive

speed, high speed cornering, or sudden

steering maneuvers, because these driving

practices could cause you to lose control of

your vehicle.

As with any vehicle, loss of control could

result in a collision with other vehicles or

objects or cause the vehicle to roll over,

particularly if the loss of control causes

the vehicle to slide sideways.

Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving

when tired. Never drive when under the in-

fluence of alcohol or drugs (including pre-

scription or over-the-counter drugs which

may cause drowsiness). Always wear your

seat belt as outlined in the “Safety – Seats,

seat belts and supplemental restraint sys-

tem” section of this manual, and also in-

struct your passengers to do so.

Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in

collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash,

an unbelted or improperly belted person

is significantly more likely to be injured

or killed than a person properly wearing

a seat belt.

OFF-ROAD RECOVERY

While driving, the right side or left side

wheels may unintentionally leave the road

surface. If this occurs, maintain control of

the vehicle by following the procedure be-

low. Please note that this procedure is only

a general guide.The vehicle must be driven

as appropriate based on the conditions of

the vehicle, road and traffic.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Do not apply the brakes.

3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering

wheel with both hands and try to hold a

straight course.

4. When appropriate, slowly release the

accelerator pedal to gradually slow the

vehicle.

5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the

vehicle to follow the road while vehicle

speed is reduced. Do not attempt to

drive the vehicle back onto the road

surface until vehicle speed is reduced.

6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn

the steering wheel until both tires re-

turn to the road surface. When all tires

are on the road surface, steer the ve-

hicle to stay in the appropriate driving

lane.

∙ If you decide that it is not safe to re-

turn the vehicle to the road surface

based on vehicle, road or traffic con-

ditions, gradually slow the vehicle to a

stop in a safe place off the road.

RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS

Rapid air pressure loss or a “blow-out” can

occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged

due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air

pressure loss can also be caused by driving

on under-inflated tires.

Rapid air pressure loss can affect the han-

dling and stability of the vehicle, especially

at highway speeds.

Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by

maintaining the correct air pressure and

visually inspecting the tires for wear and

damage. For additional information, refer

to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”

Starting and driving 5-7

section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses

air pressure or “blows-out” while driving,

maintain control of the vehicle by following

the procedure below. Please note that this

procedure is only a general guide. The ve-

hicle must be driven as appropriate based

on the conditions of the vehicle, road and

traffic.

WARNING

The following actions can increase the

chance of losing control of the vehicle if

there is a sudden loss of tire air pres-

sure. Losing control of the vehicle may

cause a collision and result in personal

injury.

∙ The vehicle generally moves or pulls

in the direction of the flat tire.

∙ Do not rapidly apply the brakes.

∙ Do not rapidly release the accelerator

pedal.

∙ Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.

1. Remain calm and do not overreact.

2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering

wheel with both hands and try to hold a

straight course.

3. When appropriate, slowly release the

accelerator pedal to gradually slow the

vehicle.

4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe

location off the road and away from

traffic if possible.

5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradu-

ally stop the vehicle.

6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers

and contact a roadside emergency

service to change the tire. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Changing a

flat tire” in the “In case of emergency”

section of this manual.

DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND

DRIVING

WARNING

Never drive under the influence of alco-

hol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream

reduces coordination, delays reaction

time and impairs judgement. Driving

after drinking alcohol increases the

likelihood of being involved in an acci-

dent injuring yourself and others. Addi-

tionally, if you are injured in an accident,

alcohol can increase the severity of the

injury.

NISSAN is committed to safe driving. How-

ever, you must choose not to drive under the

influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of

people are injured or killed in alcohol-related

collisions. Although the local laws vary on

what is considered to be legally intoxicated,

the fact is that alcohol affects all people dif-

ferently and most people underestimate the

effects of alcohol.

Remember, drinking and driving don’t mix!

That is true for drugs (over-the-counter,

prescription) and illegal drugs, too. Don’t

drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is

impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other

physical condition.

5-8 Starting and driving

WARNING

Do not operate the push-button igni-

tion switch while driving the vehicle ex-

cept in an emergency. (The engine will

stop when the ignition switch is pushed

three consecutive times in quick suc-

cession or the ignition switch is pushed

and held for more than 2 seconds.) If the

engine stops while the vehicle is being

driven, this could lead to a crash and

serious injury.

When the ignition switch is pushed without

depressing the brake pedal, the ignition

switch will illuminate.

Push the ignition switch center:

∙ Once to change to ACC.

∙ Two times to change to ON.

∙ Three times to return to OFF.

The ignition switch will automatically re-

turn to the LOCK position when any door is

either opened or closed with the switch in

the OFF position.

The ignition lock is designed so that the

ignition switch cannot be placed in the OFF

position until the shift lever is moved to the

P (Park) position.

When the ignition switch cannot be placed

in the OFF position, proceed as follows:

1. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) posi-

tion.

2. Push the ignition switch. The ignition

switch position will change to the ON

position.

3. Push the ignition switch again to the

OFF position.

The shift lever can be moved from the P

(Park) position if the ignition switch is in

the ON position and the brake pedal is

depressed.

If the battery of the vehicle is discharged,

the ignition switch cannot be moved

from the LOCK position.

Some indicators and warnings for opera-

tion are displayed on the vehicle informa-

tion display. For additional information, re-

fer to “Vehicle information display” in the

“Instruments and controls” section of this

manual.

LSD2014

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

Starting and driving 5-9

OPERATING RANGE

The Intelligent Key functions can only be

used when the Intelligent Key is within the

specified operating range.

When the Intelligent Key battery is almost

discharged or strong radio waves are pres-

ent near the operating location, the Intelli-

gent Key system’s operating range be-

comes narrower and may not function

properly.

If the Intelligent Key is within the operating

range, it is possible for anyone, even some-

one who does not carry the Intelligent Key,

to push the ignition switch to start the en-

gine.

The operating range of the engine start

function is inside of the vehicle 䊊

∙ The luggage area is not included in the

operating range, but the Intelligent Key

may function.

∙ If the Intelligent Key is placed on the

instrument panel, inside the glove box,

storage bin or door pocket, the Intelli-

gent Key may not function.

∙ If the Intelligent Key is placed near the

door or window outside the vehicle, the

Intelligent Key may function.

PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH

POSITIONS

LOCK (Normal parking position)

The ignition switch can only be locked in

this position.

The ignition switch will be unlocked when it

is pushed to the ACC position while carry-

ing the Intelligent Key.

The ignition switch will lock when any door

is opened or closed with the ignition

switched off.

ACC (Accessories)

This position activates electrical accesso-

ries, such as the radio, when the engine is

not running.

ACC has a battery saver feature that will

place the ignition switch in the OFF position

after a period of time under the following

conditions:

∙ All doors are closed.

∙ The shift lever is in P (Park).

The battery saver feature will be canceled if

any of the following occur:

∙ Any door is opened.

∙ The shift lever is moved out of P (Park).

∙ The ignition switch changes position.

ON (Normal operating position)

This position turns on the ignition system

and electrical accessories.

ON has a battery saver feature that will

place the ignition switch in the OFF posi-

tion, if the vehicle is not running, after some

time under the following conditions:

∙ All doors are closed.

∙ The shift lever is in P (Park).

LSD2020

5-10 Starting and driving

The battery saver feature will be canceled if

any of the following occur:

∙ Any door is opened.

∙ The shift lever is moved out of the P

(Park) position.

∙ The ignition switch changes position.

CAUTION

Do not leave the vehicle with the igni-

tion switch in ACC or ON positions when

the engine is not running for an ex-

tended period. This can discharge the

battery.

OFF

The ignition switch is in the OFF position

when the engine is turned off using the

ignition switch. No lights will illuminate on

the ignition switch.

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF

To shut off the engine in an emergency

situation while driving, perform the follow-

ing procedure:

∙ Rapidly push the push-button ignition

switch three consecutive times in less

than 1.5 seconds, or

∙ Push and hold the push-button ignition

switch for more than 2 seconds.

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

BATTERY DISCHARGE

If the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key®

is discharged, or environmental conditions

interfere with the Intelligent Key operation,

start the engine according to the following

procedure:

1. Place the shift lever in the P (Park) posi-

tion.

2. Firmly apply the foot brake.

3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intel-

ligent Key as illustrated. (A chime will

sound.)

SSD0860

Starting and driving 5-11

After Step 3 is performed, when the

ignition switch is pushed without de-

pressing the brake pedal, the ignition

switch position will change to the ACC

position.

4. Push the ignition switch while depress-

ing the brake pedal within 10 seconds

after the chime sounds. The engine will

start.

NOTE:

∙When the ignition switch is pushed to

the ACC or ON position or the engine

is started by the above procedure, the

Intelligent Key battery discharge in-

dicator appears in the vehicle infor-

mation display even when the Intelli-

gent Key is inside the vehicle. This is

not a malfunction. To turn off the In-

telligent Key battery discharge indi-

cator, touch the ignition switch with

the Intelligent Key again.

∙If the Intelligent Key battery dis-

charge indicator appears, replace the

battery as soon as possible. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Battery

replacement” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER

SYSTEM

The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

will not allow the engine to start without

the use of the registered key.

If the engine fails to start using a registered

key (for example, when interference is

caused by another registered key, an auto-

mated toll road device or automatic pay-

ment device on the key ring), restart the

engine using the following procedure:

1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON po-

sition for approximately 5 seconds.

2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or

LOCK position, and wait approximately

10 seconds.

3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.

4. Restart the engine while holding the

device (which may have caused the in-

terference) separate from the regis-

tered key.

If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN

recommends placing the registered key on

a separate key ring to avoid interference

from other devices.

∙ Make sure the area around the vehicle is

clear.

∙ Check fluid levels such as engine oil,

coolant, brake fluid, and windshield-

washer fluid as frequently as possible,

or at least whenever you refuel.

∙ Check that all windows and lights are

clean.

∙ Visually inspect tires for their appear-

ance and condition. Also check tires for

proper inflation.

∙ Lock all doors.

∙ Position seat and adjust

headrests/head restraints.

∙ Adjust inside and outside mirrors.

∙ Fasten seat belts and ask all passen-

gers to do likewise.

∙ Check the operation of warning lights

when the ignition switch is pushed to

the ON position. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Warning lights, indicator

lights and audible reminders” in the “In-

struments and controls” section of this

manual.

BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE

5-12 Starting and driving

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N

(Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.

The starter is designed not to oper-

ate if the shift lever is in any of the

driving positions.

3. Push the ignition switch to the ON po-

sition. Depress the brake pedal and

push the ignition switch to start the

engine.

To start the engine immediately, push

and release the ignition switch while

depressing the brake pedal with the

ignition switch in any position.

∙ If the engine is very hard to start in

extremely cold weather or when re-

starting, depress the accelerator

pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the

floor) and while holding, crank the en-

gine. Release the accelerator pedal

when the engine starts.

∙ If the engine is very hard to start be-

cause it is flooded, depress the accel-

erator pedal all the way to the floor

and hold it. Push the ignition switch

to the ON position to start cranking

the engine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stop

cranking by pushing the ignition

switch to the LOCK position. After

cranking the engine, release the ac-

celerator pedal. Crank the engine

with your foot off the accelerator

pedal by depressing the brake pedal

and pushing the ignition switch to

start the engine. If the engine starts,

but fails to run, repeat the above pro-

cedure.

CAUTION

Do not operate the starter for more

than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine

does not start, push the ignition switch

to the OFF position and wait 10 seconds

before cranking again, otherwise the

starter could be damaged.

4. Warm-up:

Allow the engine to idle for at least

30 seconds after starting. Do not race

the engine while warming it up.Drive at

a moderate speed for a short distance

first, especially in cold weather. In cold

weather, keep the engine running for a

minimum of 2 to 3 minutes before

shutting it off. Starting and stopping

the engine over a short period of time

may make the vehicle more difficult to

start.

5. To stop the engine, move the shift lever

to the P (Park) position and push the

ignition switch to the OFF position.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery dis-

charge and potential no-start conditions

such as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume bat-

tery power when the engine is not

running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD

players, etc.).

2. The vehicle is not driven regularly

and/or only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to

be charged to maintain battery health.

STARTING THE ENGINE

Starting and driving 5-13

REMOTE ENGINE START (if so

equipped)

Vehicles started with the Remote Engine

Start require the ignition switch to be

placed in the ON position before the shift

lever can be moved from the P (Park) posi-

tion. To place the ignition switch in the ON

position, follow these steps:

1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is on

you.

2. Apply the brake.

3. Push the ignition switch once to the ON

position.

For additional information, refer to “NISSAN

Intelligent Key®” in the “Pre-driving checks

and adjustments” section of this manual.

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE

TRANSMISSION (CVT)

WARNING

∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-

tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), Ds (Drive

Sport) or manual shift mode (if so

equipped). Always depress the brake

pedal until shifting is completed. Fail-

ure to do so could cause you to lose

control and have an accident.

∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use

caution when shifting into a forward

or reverse gear before the engine has

warmed up.

∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery

roads. This may cause a loss of

control.

∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R

(Reverse) position while the vehicle is

moving forward and P (Park) or D

(Drive) position while the vehicle is re-

versing. This could cause an accident

or damage the transmission.

CAUTION

∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift

to the N (Neutral) position while driv-

ing. Coasting with the transmission in

the N (Neutral) position may cause se-

rious damage to the transmission.

∙ To avoid possible damage to your ve-

hicle, when stopping the vehicle on an

uphill grade,do not hold the vehicle by

depressing the accelerator pedal. The

foot brake should be used for this

purpose.

The CVT in your vehicle is electronically

controlled to produce maximum power

and smooth operation.

The CVT can operate in two different auto-

matic drive modes:

∙ D (Drive) mode - Move the shift lever to D

(Drive). The transmission is in the nor-

mal forward automatic driving mode.

The position indicator in the meter

shows a “D.”

DRIVING THE VEHICLE

5-14 Starting and driving

∙ DS (Drive Sport) mode - Move the shift

lever from D (Drive) to Ds (Drive Sport).

The position indicator in the meter

shows a “Ds.” In DS (Drive Sport) mode,

transmission operation changes to

"Sporty” driving shift operation, creating

a more aggressive acceleration feeling

than the D (Drive) mode and a gear

change sensation when the driver ac-

celerates or uses the paddle shifters (if

so equipped). During DS (Drive Sport)

mode operation, the driver must move

the shift lever from the Ds (Drive Sport)

position to the D (Drive) position and

back again to re-select DS (Drive Sport)

mode.

∙ To cancel the DS mode, return the shift

lever to the D (Drive) position. The trans-

mission returns to the automatic drive

mode.

The CVT can operate in two manual drive

modes:

∙ M (Manual) mode (if so equipped) - With

the shift lever in the Ds (Drive Sport)

position, moving the paddle shifters up

(+) or down (–) produces noticeable up-

shifts and downshifts. The position indi-

cator in the meter shows an “M.”

∙ To cancel DS (Drive Sport) mode return

the shift lever to the D (Drive) mode.

Follow these procedures for maximum ve-

hicle performance and driving enjoyment.

NOTE:

Engine power may be automatically re-

duced to protect the CVT if the engine

speed increases quickly when driving on

slippery roads or while being tested on

some dynamometers.

Starting the vehicle

WARNING

∙ Do not depress the accelerator pedal

while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neu-

tral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive), Ds (Drive

Sport) or manual shift mode (if so

equipped). Always depress the brake

pedal until shifting is completed. Fail-

ure to do so could cause you to lose

control and have an accident.

∙ Cold engine idle speed is high, so use

caution when shifting into a forward

or reverse gear before the engine has

warmed up.

∙ Do not downshift abruptly on slippery

roads. This may cause a loss of

control.

∙ Never shift to either the P (Park) or R

(Reverse) position while the vehicle is

moving forward and P (Park) or D

(Drive) position while the vehicle is re-

versing. This could cause an accident

or damage the transmission.

CAUTION

∙ Except in an emergency, do not shift

to the N (Neutral) position while driv-

ing. Coasting with the transmission in

the N (Neutral) position may cause se-

rious damage to the transmission.

∙ To avoid possible damage to your ve-

hicle, when stopping the vehicle on an

uphill grade,do not hold the vehicle by

depressing the accelerator pedal. The

foot brake should be used for this

purpose.

1. After starting the engine, fully depress

the foot brake pedal before moving the

shift lever out of the P (Park) position.

2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed

and move the shift lever into a driving

gear.

Starting and driving 5-15

3. Release the foot brake, then gradually

start the vehicle in motion.

4. Stop the vehicle completely before

moving the shift lever to the P (Park)

position.

The Continuously Variable Transmission

is designed so the foot brake pedal MUST

be depressed before shifting from P

(Park) to any drive position while the ig-

nition switch is in the ON position.

The shift lever cannot be moved out of P

(Park) and into any of the other gear po-

sitions if the ignition switch is placed in

the LOCK position. To move the shift lever:

Press the button 䊊

Awhile depressing

the brake pedal

Press the button 䊊

Ato shift

Shift without pressing the button 䊊

Shifting

After starting the engine, fully depress the

brake pedal and move the shift lever from P

(Park) to any of the desired shift positions.

WARNING

Apply the parking brake if the shift lever

is in any position while the engine is not

running. Failure to do so could cause

the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll

away and result in serious personal in-

jury or property damage.

P (Park)

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use

the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only

when the vehicle is completely

stopped.

Use the P (Park) shift lever position when

the vehicle is parked or when starting the

engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely

stopped. The brake pedal should be de-

pressed to move the shift lever from N

(Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park).

Apply the parking brake. When parking on a

hill, apply the parking brake first, then move

the shift lever into the P (Park) position.

LSD2085

5-16 Starting and driving

R (Reverse)

CAUTION

To prevent transmission damage, use

the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position only

when the vehicle is completely

stopped.

Use the R (Reverse) position to back up.

Make sure the vehicle is completely

stopped before selecting the R (Reverse)

position. The brake pedal must be de-

pressed to move the shift lever from P

(Park), N (Neutral) or any drive position to

R (Reverse).

N (Neutral)

Neither forward nor reverse gear is en-

gaged. The engine can be started in this

position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and

restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is

moving.

D (Drive)

Use this position for all normal forward

driving.

Ds (Drive Sport)

When the shift lever is moved from the D

(Drive) to Ds (Drive Sport) position, the

transmission enters the DS (Drive Sport)

mode. Moving the shift lever to the Ds

(Drive Sport) position allows you to enjoy

“sporty” driving shift operation on a wind-

ing road and feel smooth acceleration or

deceleration on a hilly road by moving in a

lower gear automatically. When canceling

the DS mode, return the shift lever to the D

(Drive) position. The transmission returns

to the normal driving mode.

Manual shift mode (if so

equipped)

When the shift lever is in the Ds (Drive Sport)

position, the transmission is ready for the

manual shift mode. Shift ranges can be

selected manually by pulling the right-side

or left-side paddle shifter.

When shifting up, pull the right side paddle

shifter (+) 䊊

C. The transmission shifts to the

higher range.

When shifting down, pull the left side

paddle shifter (⫺)䊊

B. The transmission

shifts to the lower range.

LSD2086

Starting and driving 5-17

When canceling the manual shift mode, re-

turn the shift lever to the D (Drive) position.

The transmission returns to the normal

driving mode. When you pull the paddle

shifter while in the D (Drive) position, the

transmission will shift to the upper or lower

range temporarily. The transmission will

automatically return to the D (Drive) posi-

tion after a short period of time. If you want

to return to the D (Drive) position manually,

pull and hold the paddle shifter for about

1.5 seconds.

In the manual shift mode, the shift range is

displayed on the position indicator in the

meter.

Shift ranges up or down one by one as

follows:

1⇔2⇔3⇔4⇔5⇔6⇔7

M7 (7th)

Use this position for all normal forward

driving at highway speeds.

M6 (6th) and M5 (5th)

Use this position when driving up long

slopes, or for engine braking when driving

down long slopes.

M4 (4th), M3 (3rd) and M2 (2nd)

Use for hill climbing or engine braking on

downhill grades.

M1 (1st)

Use this position when climbing steep hills

slowly or driving slowly through deep snow,

sand or mud, or for maximum engine brak-

ing on steep downhill grades.

∙ Remember not to drive at high speeds

for extended periods of time in lower

than 7 range. This reduces fuel

economy.

When shifting up

Move the shift lever to the + (up) side. (Shifts

to higher range.)

When shifting down

Move the shift lever to the ⫺(down) side.

(Shifts to lower range.)

∙ Moving the shift lever rapidly to the

same side twice will shift the ranges in

succession.

When canceling the manual shift mode

Return the shift lever to the D (Drive) posi-

tion to return the transmission to the nor-

mal driving mode.

∙In the manual shift mode, the trans-

mission may not shift to the selected

gear. This helps maintain driving per-

formance and reduces the chance of

vehicle damage or loss of control.

∙In the manual shift mode, the trans-

mission may shift up automatically to

a higher range than selected if the

engine speed is too high. When the

vehicle speed decreases, the trans-

mission automatically shifts down

and shifts to 1st gear before the ve-

hicle comes to a stop.

∙ Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) operation is limited to automatic

drive mode when CVT fluid tempera-

ture is extremely low even if manual

shift mode is selected. This is not a mal-

function. When CVT fluid warms up,

manual mode can be selected.

∙ When the CVT fluid temperature is high,

the shift range may upshift in lower

rpm than usual. This is not a malfunc-

tion.

5-18 Starting and driving

Shift lock release

If the battery charge is low or discharged,

the shift lever may not be moved from the

P (Park) position even with the brake pedal

depressed and the shift lever button

pressed.

It will be necessary to jump start or have

your battery charged. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Jump starting” in the “In

case of emergency” section of this manual.

Contact a NISSAN dealer or a professional

towing service.

To move the shift lever, complete the fol-

lowing procedure:

1. Push the ignition switch to the LOCK

position.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Using a protective cloth on the tip of a

3 mm screwdriver, remove the shift

lock release cover.

∙ If available, a plastic trim tool can also

be used.

4. Insert the small screwdriver in the shift

lock release slot and push down.

5. Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral)

position while holding down the shift

lock release.

If the shift lever cannot be moved out of P

(Park), have the transmission checked as

soon as possible. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

WARNING

If the shift lever cannot be moved from

the P (Park) position while the engine is

running and the brake pedal is de-

pressed, the stop lights may not work.

Malfunctioning stop lights could cause

an accident injuring yourself and

others.

LSD2087

Starting and driving 5-19

Overdrive (O/D) OFF mode switch

(if so equipped)

When the O/D OFF mode switch is pushed

with the shift lever in the D (Drive) position,

the light in the instrument panel illu-

minates. For additional information, refer

to “Overdrive OFF indicator light” in the “In-

struments and controls” section of this

manual.

Use the overdrive OFF mode when you

need improved engine braking.

To turn off the overdrive OFF mode, push

the O/D OFF mode switch again. The

indicator light will turn off.

Each time the engine is started, or when

the shift lever is shifted to any position

other than D (Drive) and Ds (Drive Sport), the

overdrive OFF mode will automatically turn

off.

Accelerator downshift

— in D (Drive) position —

For passing or hill climbing, depress the

accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts

the transmission down into a lower gear,

depending on the vehicle speed.

High fluid temperature protection

mode

This transmission has a high fluid tem-

perature protection mode. If the fluid tem-

perature becomes too high (for example,

when climbing steep grades in high tem-

peratures with heavy loads, such as when

towing a trailer), engine power and, under

some conditions, vehicle speed will be de-

creased automatically to reduce the

chance of transmission damage. Vehicle

speed can be controlled with the accelera-

tor pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed

may be limited.

Fail-safe

If the vehicle is driven under extreme

conditions, such as excessive wheel

spinning and subsequent hard braking,

the fail-safe system may be activated.

The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

may come on to indicate the fail-safe

mode is activated. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Malfunction Indicator

Light (MIL)” in the “Instruments and con-

trols” section of this manual. This will oc-

cur even if all electrical circuits are func-

tioning properly. In this case, place the

ignition switch in the OFF position and

wait for 10 seconds. Then push the

switch back to the ON position. The ve-

hicle should return to its normal operat-

ing condition. If it does not return to its

normal operating condition, have the

transmission checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

Overdrive OFF mode

LSD2090

5-20 Starting and driving

WARNING

When the high fluid temperature pro-

tection mode or fail-safe operation oc-

curs, vehicle speed may be gradually re-

duced.The reduced speed may be lower

than other traffic, which could increase

the chance of a collision. Be especially

careful when driving. If necessary, pull

to the side of the road at a safe place

and allow the transmission to return to

normal operation, or have it repaired if

necessary.

1. To engage, firmly depress the foot

brake.

2. To release:

∙ Move the shift lever to the P (Park)

position.

∙ Firmly depress the parking brake

pedal and it will release.

∙ Before driving, be sure the brake

warning light goes out.

WARNING

∙ Be sure the parking brake is fully re-

leased before driving. Failure to do so

can cause brake failure and lead to an

accident.

∙ Do not release the parking brake from

outside the vehicle.

∙ Do not use the shift lever in place of

the parking brake. When parking, be

sure the parking brake is fully

engaged.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, do not

leave children, people who require the

assistance of others or pets unat-

tended in your vehicle. Additionally,

the temperature inside a closed ve-

hicle on a warm day can quickly be-

come high enough to cause a signifi-

cant risk of injury or death to people

and pets.

LSD2177

PARKING BRAKE

Starting and driving 5-21

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the BSW

system could result in serious injury or

death.

∙ The BSW system is not a replacement

for proper driving procedures and is

not designed to prevent contact with

vehicles or objects. When changing

lanes, always use the side and rear

mirrors and turn and look in the direc-

tion your vehicle will move to ensure it

is safe to change lanes. Never rely

solely on the BSW system.

The BSW system helps alert the driver of

other vehicles in adjacent lanes when

changing lanes.

The BSW system uses radar sensors 䊊

installed near the rear bumper to detect

other vehicles in an adjacent lane.

The radar sensors can detect vehicles on

either side of your vehicle within the detec-

tion zone shown as illustrated. This detec-

tion zone starts from the outside mirror of

your vehicle and extends approximately

10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear bumper, and

approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways.

LSD2475

Detection zone

SSD1030

BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) (if so

equipped)

5-22 Starting and driving

1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light

2. BSW/RCTA Indicator

BSW SYSTEM OPERATION

The BSW system operates above approxi-

mately 20 mph (32 km/h).

If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the

detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indica-

tor light (1) illuminates. If the turn signal is

then activated, the system chimes (twice)

and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light

flashes. The side BSW/RCTA indicator light

continues to flash until the detected ve-

hicle leaves the detection zone.

The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illumi-

nates for a few seconds when the ignition

switch is placed in the ON position.

The brightness of the side BSW/RCTA indi-

cator light is adjusted automatically de-

pending on the brightness of the ambient

light.

If a vehicle comes into the detection zone

after the driver activates the turn signal,

then only the side BSW/RCTA indicator light

flashes and no chime sounds. For addi-

tional information, refer to “BSW driving

situations” in this section.

LSD2476

Starting and driving 5-23

The BSW system automatically turns on

every time the engine is started, as long as

it is activated using the settings menu on

the vehicle information display.

LSD2477

5-24 Starting and driving

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE

BSW SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable the BSW system.

1. Press the button until “Settings”

displays in the vehicle information dis-

play. Use the button to select

“Driver Assistance.” Then press the EN-

TER button.

2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the EN-

TER button.

3. Select “Blind Spot” and press the ENTER

button.

4. Use the ENTER button to turn the sys-

tem on or off.

NOTE:

∙When enabling/disabling the system,

the system will retain current set-

tings even if the engine is restarted.

∙The RCTA system (if so equipped) is

integrated into the BSW system.

There is not a separate selection in

the vehicle information display for

the RCTA system. When the BSW is

disabled, the RCTA system is also dis-

abled.

∙When the BSW system is turned on,

the BSW/RCTA indicator (white) in the

vehicle information display illumi-

nates.

BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for the BSW system. Failure to operate

the vehicle in accordance with these

system limitations could result in seri-

ous injury or death.

∙ The BSW system cannot detect all ve-

hicles under all conditions.

∙ The radar sensors may not be able to

detect and activate BSW when certain

objects are present such as:

– Pedestrian, bicycles, animals.

– Vehicles such as motorcycles, low

height vehicles, or high ground

clearance vehicles.

– Oncoming vehicles.

– Vehicles remaining in the detec-

tion zone when you accelerate

from a stop.

– A vehicle merging into an adjacent

lane at a speed approximately the

same as your vehicle.

– A vehicle approaching rapidly from

behind.

– A vehicle which your vehicle over-

takes rapidly.

– A vehicle that passes through the

detection zone quickly.

– When overtaking several vehicles

in a row, the vehicles after the first

vehicle may not be detected if they

are traveling close together.

∙ The radar sensors’ detection zone is

designed based on a standard lane

width. When driving in a wider lane,

the radar sensors may not detect ve-

hicles in an adjacent lane. When driv-

ing in a narrow lane, the radar sensors

may detect vehicles driving two lanes

away.

∙ The radar sensors are designed to ig-

nore most stationary objects, how-

ever objects such as guardrails, walls,

foliage and parked vehicles may oc-

casionally be detected. This is a nor-

mal operation condition.

Starting and driving 5-25

∙ The following conditions may reduce

the ability of the radar to detect other

vehicles:

– Severe weather

– Road spray

– Ice/frost/dirt build-up on the

vehicle

∙ Do not attach stickers (including

transparent material), install accesso-

ries or apply additional paint near the

radar sensors. These conditions may

reduce the ability of the radar to de-

tect other vehicles.

∙ Excessive noise (for example, audio

system volume, open vehicle window)

will interfere with the chime sound,

and it may not be heard.

BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS

Indicator

off

Indicator

flashing

Another vehicle approaching

from behind

Illustration 1: The side BSW/RCTA indicator

light illuminates if a vehicle enters the de-

tection zone from behind in an adjacent

lane.

Illustration 1 – Approaching from behind

LSD2299

5-26 Starting and driving

Illustration 2: If the driver activates the

turn signal when another vehicle is in the

detection zone, then the system chimes

(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

∙The radar sensors may not detect ve-

hicles which are approaching rapidly

from behind.

∙If the driver activates the turn signal

before a vehicle enters the detection

zone, the side indicator light will flash

but no chime will sound when the

other vehicle is detected.

Overtaking another vehicle

Illustration 3: The side indicator light illu-

minates if you overtake a vehicle and that

vehicle stays in the detection zone for ap-

proximately 2 seconds.

Illustration 2 – Approaching from behind

LSD2300

Illustration3–Overtaking another ve-

hicle

LSD2302

Starting and driving 5-27

Illustration 4: If the driver activates the

turn signal while another vehicle is in the

detection zone, then the system chimes

(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

∙When overtaking several vehicles in a

row, the vehicles after the first vehicle

may not be detected if they are trav-

eling close together.

∙The radar sensors may not detect

slower moving vehicles if they are

passed quickly.

∙If the driver activates the turn signal

before a vehicle enters the detection

zone, the side indicator light will flash

but no chime will sound when the

other vehicle is detected.

Entering from the side

Illustration 5: The side indicator light illu-

minates if a vehicle enters the detection

zone from either side.

Illustration4–Overtaking another ve-

hicle

LSD2303

Illustration 5 – Entering from the side

LSD2305

5-28 Starting and driving

Illustration 6: If the driver activates the

turn signal while another vehicle is in the

detection zone, then the system chimes

(twice) and the side indicator light flashes.

NOTE:

∙If the driver activates the turn signal

before a vehicle enters the detection

zone, the side indicator light will flash

but no chime will sound when the

other vehicle is detected.

∙The radar sensors may not detect a

vehicle which is traveling at about the

same speed as your vehicle when it

enters the detection zone.

Illustration 6 – Entering from the side

LSD2308

Starting and driving 5-29

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

When radar blockage is detected, the sys-

tem will be deactivated automatically. The

“Side Radar Obstruction” warning message

will appear and the BSW/RCTA indicator

(white) will blink 䊊

Ain the vehicle informa-

tion display.

The system is not available until the condi-

tions no longer exist.

The radar sensors may be blocked by tem-

porary ambient conditions such as splash-

ing water, mist or fog. The blocked condi-

tion may also be caused by objects such as

ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sen-

sors.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the

RCTA system (if so equipped) will also

stop working.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer exist,

the system will resume automatically.

LSD2478

5-30 Starting and driving

Malfunction

If the BSW system malfunctions, it will turn

off automatically. The system malfunction

warning message with the BSW/RCTA indi-

cator (orange) will appear in the vehicle in-

formation display.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the

RCTA system (if so equipped) will also

stop working.

Action to take:

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the

vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the en-

gine off and restart the engine. If the mes-

sage continues to appear, have the system

checked.It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The two radar sensors 䊊

1for the BSW and

RCTA systems are located near the rear

bumper. Always keep the area near the ra-

dar sensors clean.

The radar sensors may be blocked by tem-

porary ambient conditions such as splash-

ing water, mist or fog.

The blocked condition may also be caused

by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob-

structing the radar sensors.

Check for and remove objects obstructing

the area around the radar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including transpar-

ent material), install accessories or apply

additional paint near the radar sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area around

the radar sensors. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around

the radar sensors is damaged due to a

collision.

Radio frequency statement

For USA

FCC ID: OAYSRR2B or OAYSRR3B

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC

Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful in-

terference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s authority

to operate the equipment.

LSD2475

Starting and driving 5-31

For Canada

Applicable law: Canada 310

This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation

is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference,

and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

Frequency bands: 24.05 – 24.25GHz

Output power: less than 20 milliwatts

Droit applicable: Canada 310

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR

d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appar-

eils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation

est autorisée aux deux conditions suiv-

antes:

1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de

brouillage, et

2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter

tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,

même si le brouillage est susceptible

d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.

Bandes de fréquences: 24.05 - 24.25GHz

Puissance émise: Moins de 20 milliwatts

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the RCTA

could result in serious injury or death.

∙ The RCTA system is not a replacement

for proper driving procedures and is

not designed to prevent contact with

vehicles or objects. When backing out

of a parking space, always use the

side and rear mirrors and turn and

look in the direction your vehicle will

move. Never rely solely on the RCTA

system.

The RCTA system will assist you when

backing out from a parking space. When

the vehicle is in reverse, the system is de-

signed to detect other vehicles approach-

ing from the right or left of the vehicle. If the

system detects cross traffic, it will alert you.

REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (RCTA)

(if so equipped)

5-32 Starting and driving

1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light

2. BSW/RCTA Indicator

RCTA SYSTEM OPERATION

The RCTA system can help alert the driver

of an approaching vehicle when the driver

is backing out of a parking space.

When the shift position is in R (Reverse) and

the vehicle speed is less than approxi-

mately 5 mph (8 km/h), the RCTA system is

operational.

If the radar detects an approaching vehicle

from either side, the system chimes (once)

and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light

flashes on the side the vehicle is approach-

ing from.

LSD2476

Starting and driving 5-33

The RCTA system uses radar sensors 䊊

installed on both sides near the rear bum-

per to detect an approaching vehicle.

The radar sensors 䊊

1can detect an ap-

proaching vehicle from up to approxi-

mately 66 ft. (20 m) away.

LSD2216 LSD2475

5-34 Starting and driving

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE

RCTA SYSTEM

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable the RCTA system.

1. Press the button until “Settings”

displays in the vehicle information dis-

play. Use the button to select

“Driver Assistance.” Then press the EN-

TER button.

2. Select “Driving Aids” and press the EN-

TER button.

3. Select “Blind Spot” and press the ENTER

button.

4. Use the ENTER button to turn the sys-

tem on or off.

When the RCTA system is turned on, the

BSW/RCTA indicator (white) in the vehicle

information display illuminates.

NOTE:

∙The RCTA system is integrated into

the BSW system. There is not a sepa-

rate selection in the vehicle informa-

tion display for the RCTA system.

When the BSW is disabled, the RCTA

system is also disabled.

LSD2477

Starting and driving 5-35

∙When enabling/disabling the system,

the system setting will be retained

even if the engine is restarted.

RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

LSD2173

5-36 Starting and driving

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for the RCTA system. Failure to operate

the vehicle in accordance with these

system limitations could result in seri-

ous injury or death.

∙ Always check surroundings and turn

to check what is behind you before

backing up. The radar sensors detect

approaching (moving) vehicles. The

radar sensors cannot detect every

object such as:

– Pedestrians, bicycles, motorcycles,

animals or child-operated toy

vehicles

– A vehicle that is passing at speeds

greater than approximately

19 mph (30 km/h)

– A vehicle that is passing at speeds

lower than approximately 5 mph

(8 km/h)

∙ The radar sensors may not detect ap-

proaching vehicles in certain

situations:

– Illustration a: When a vehicle

parked next to you obstructs the

beam of the radar sensor.

– Illustration b: When the vehicle is

parked in an angled parking space.

– Illustration c: When the vehicle is

parked on inclined ground.

– Illustration d: When an approach-

ing vehicle turns into your vehicle’s

parking lot aisle.

– Illustration e: When the angle

formed by your vehicle and ap-

proaching vehicle is small.

∙ The following conditions may reduce

the ability of the radar to detect other

vehicles:

– Severe weather

– Road spray

– Ice/frost/dirt build-up on the

vehicle

∙ Do not attach stickers (including

transparent material), install accesso-

ries or apply additional paint near the

radar sensors. These conditions may

reduce the ability of the radar to de-

tect other vehicles.

∙ Excessive noise (e.g. audio system

volume, open vehicle window) will in-

terfere with the chime sound, and it

may not be heard.

Starting and driving 5-37

NOTE:

In the case of several vehicles approach-

ing in a row (Illustration 1) or in the oppo-

site direction (Illustration 2), a chime may

not be sounded by the RCTA system af-

ter the first vehicle passes the sensors.

Illustration 1

LSD2043

Illustration 2

LSD2044

5-38 Starting and driving

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

When radar blockage is detected, the sys-

tem will be deactivated automatically. The

“Side Radar Obstruction” warning message

will appear and the BSW/RCTA indicator

(white) 䊊

Awill blink in the vehicle informa-

tion display.

The systems are not available until the

conditions no longer exist.

The radar sensors may be blocked by tem-

porary ambient conditions such as splash-

ing water, mist or fog.

The blocked condition may also be caused

by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob-

structing the radar sensors.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the

RCTA system will also stop working.

Action to take

When the above conditions no longer exist,

the system will resume automatically.

LSD2478

Starting and driving 5-39

Malfunction

When the RCTA system malfunctions, it will

turn off automatically. The system mal-

function warning message with the

BSW/RCTA indicator (orange) will appear in

the vehicle information display.

NOTE:

If the BSW system stops working, the

RCTA system (if so equipped) will also

stop working.

Action to take

Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the

vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the en-

gine off and restart the engine. If the mes-

sage continues to appear, have the system

checked.It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The two radar sensors 䊊

1for the BSW and

RCTA systems are located near the rear

bumper. Always keep the area near the ra-

dar sensors clean.

The radar sensors may be blocked by tem-

porary ambient conditions such as splash-

ing water, mist or fog.

The blocked condition may also be caused

by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob-

structing the radar sensors.

Check for and remove objects obstructing

the area around the radar sensors.

Do not attach stickers (including transpar-

ent material), install accessories or apply

additional paint near the radar sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area around

the radar sensors. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around

the radar sensors is damaged due to a

collision.

Radio frequency statement

For USA

FCC ID: OAYSRR2B or OAYSRR3B

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC

Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful in-

terference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s authority

to operate the equipment.

LSD2475

5-40 Starting and driving

For Canada

Applicable law: Canada 310

This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation

is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference,

and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

Frequency bands: 24.05 – 24.25GHz

Output power: less than 20 milliwatts

Droit applicable: Canada 310

Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR

d’Industrie Canada applicables aux appar-

eils radio exempts de licence. L’exploitation

est autorisée aux deux conditions suiv-

antes:

1. L’appareil ne doit pas produire de

brouillage, et

2. L’utilisateur de l’appareil doit accepter

tout brouillage radioélectrique subi,

même si le brouillage est susceptible

d’en compromettre le fonctionnement.

Bandes de fréquences: 24.05 - 24.25GHz

Puissance émise: Moins de 20 milliwatts

PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE

CONTROL

1. CANCEL switch

2. ACCEL/RES switch

3. COAST/SET switch

4. ON/OFF switch

∙ If the cruise control system malfunc-

tions, it cancels automatically. The

light in the instrument panel then blinks

to warn the driver.

LSD2088

CRUISE CONTROL (if so equipped)

Starting and driving 5-41

∙ If the light blinks, turn the cruise

control switch off and have the system

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

∙ The light may blink when the

cruise control switch is turned ON while

pushing the ACCEL/RES, COAST/SET, or

CANCEL switch. To properly set the

cruise control system, use the following

procedures.

WARNING

Do not use the cruise control when driv-

ing under the following conditions:

∙ When it is not possible to keep the

vehicle at a set speed.

∙ In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies

in speed.

∙ On winding or hilly roads.

∙ On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).

∙ In very windy areas.

Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle

control and result in an accident.

CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS

The cruise control allows driving at a speed

between 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) with-

out keeping your foot on the accelerator

pedal.

To turn on the cruise control, push the

ON/OFF switch on. The light in the

instrument panel will illuminate.

To set cruising speed, accelerate the ve-

hicle to the desired speed, push the

COAST/SET switch and release it. Take your

foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle

maintains the set speed.

∙To pass another vehicle, depress the

accelerator pedal.When you release the

pedal, the vehicle returns to the previ-

ously set speed.

∙ The vehicle may not maintain the set

speed when going up or down steep

hills. If this happens, drive without the

cruise control.

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the

following three methods:

∙ Push the CANCEL switch.

∙ Tap the brake pedal.

∙ Push the ON/OFF switch off. The

light in the instrument panel goes out.

The cruise control is automatically can-

celed if:

∙ You depress the brake pedal while

pushing the ACCEL/RES or SET/COAST

switch. The preset speed is deleted

from memory.

∙ The vehicle slows down more than

8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed.

∙ You move the shift lever to N (Neutral).

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use

one of the following three methods:

∙ Depress the accelerator pedal. When

the vehicle attains the desired speed,

push and release the COAST/SET

switch.

∙ Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.

When the vehicle attains the speed you

desire, release the switch.

∙ Push and release the ACCEL/RES

switch. Each time you do this, the set

speed increases by about 1 mph

(1.6 km/h).

5-42 Starting and driving

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use

one of the following three methods:

∙ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push

the COAST/SET switch and release it.

∙ Push and hold the COAST/SET switch.

Release the switch when the vehicle

slows to the desired speed.

∙ Push and release the COAST/SET

switch. Each time you do this, the set

speed decreases by about 1 mph

(1.6 km/h).

To resume the preset speed, push and

release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle

returns to the last set cruising speed when

the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).

To turn off the cruise control, use one of

the following three methods:

∙ Push the CANCEL switch.

∙ Tap the brake pedal.

∙ Push the ON/OFF switch off. The

light in the instrument panel goes out.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the ICC sys-

tem could result in serious injury or

death.

∙ The ICC system is only an aid to assist

the driver and is not a collision warn-

ing or avoidance device. It is the driv-

er’s responsibility to stay alert, drive

safely and be in control of the vehicle

at all time.

∙ Always observe posted speed limits

and do not set the speed over them.

∙ Always drive carefully and attentively

when using the ICC system. Read and

understand the Owner’s Manual thor-

oughly before using the ICC system.

To avoid serious injury or death, do

not rely on the system to prevent ac-

cidents or to control the vehicle’s

speed in emergency situations. Do

not use the ICC system except in ap-

propriate road and traffic conditions.

The ICC system is intended to enhance the

operation of the vehicle when following a

vehicle traveling in the same lane and di-

rection.

The ICC system uses a radar sensor 䊊

located on the front of the vehicle to detect

vehicles traveling ahead.

If the radar sensor detects a slower moving

vehicle ahead, the system will reduce the

vehicle speed so that your vehicle follows

the vehicle in front at the selected distance.

The detection range of the sensor is ap-

proximately 390 ft (120 m) ahead.

LSD2479

INTELLIGENT CRUISE CONTROL (ICC)

(if so equipped)

Starting and driving 5-43

ICC SYSTEM OPERATION

The ICC system maintains a selected dis-

tance from the vehicle in front of you within

the speed range 0 to 90 mph (0 to

144 km/h) up to the set speed. The set

speed can be selected by the driver be-

tween 20 to 90 mph (32 to 144 km/h), based

on road conditions.

The vehicle travels at the set speed when

the road ahead is clear.

The ICC system is designed to maintain a

selected distance from the vehicle in front

of you and can reduce the speed to match

a slower vehicle ahead. The system will de-

celerate the vehicle as necessary and if the

vehicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle

decelerates to a standstill. However, the ICC

system can only apply up to 40% of the

vehicle’s total braking power.

This system should only be used when traf-

fic conditions allow vehicle speeds to re-

main fairly constant or when vehicle

speeds change gradually. If a vehicle

moves into the traveling lane ahead or if a

vehicle traveling ahead rapidly decelerates,

the distance between vehicles may be-

come closer because the ICC system can-

not decelerate the vehicle quickly enough.

If this occurs, the ICC system will sound a

LSD2998

5-44 Starting and driving

warning chime and blink the system dis-

play to notify the driver to take necessary

action.

For additional information, refer to “Ap-

proach warning” in this section.

The following items are controlled in the

ICC system:

∙ When there are no vehicles traveling

ahead, the ICC system maintains the

speed set by the driver. The set speed

range is between approximately 20 and

90 mph (32 and 144 km/h).

∙ When there is a vehicle traveling ahead,

the ICC system adjusts the speed to

maintain the distance, selected by the

driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the ve-

hicle ahead comes to a stop, the vehicle

decelerates to a standstill within the

limitations of the system. The system

will cancel once it judges a standstill

with a warning chime.

∙ When the vehicle traveling ahead has

moved out from its lane of travel, the

ICC system accelerates and maintains

vehicle speed up to the set speed.

The ICC system does not control vehicle

speed or warn you when you approach

stationary and slow moving vehicles. You

must pay attention to vehicle operation to

maintain proper distance from vehicles

ahead when approaching toll gates or traf-

fic congestion.

When driving on the freeway at a set speed

and approaching a slower traveling vehicle

ahead, the ICC system will adjust the speed

to maintain the distance, selected by the

driver, from the vehicle ahead. If the vehicle

ahead changes lanes or exits the freeway,

the ICC system will accelerate and main-

tain the speed up to the set speed. Pay

attention to the driving operation to main-

tain control of the vehicle as it accelerates

to the set speed.

Normally when controlling the distance to

a vehicle ahead, this system automatically

accelerates or decelerates your vehicle ac-

cording to the speed of the vehicle ahead.

SSD0254

Starting and driving 5-45

Depress the accelerator to properly accel-

erate your vehicle when acceleration is re-

quired for a lane change. Depress the brake

pedal when deceleration is required to

maintain a safe distance to the vehicle

ahead due to its sudden braking or if a

vehicle cuts in. Always stay alert when us-

ing the ICC system.

THE ICC SWITCH

The system is operated by the

CRUISE switch and four control

switches, all mounted on the steering

wheel.

1. CANCEL switch:

Deactivates the system without eras-

ing the set speed.

2. ACCEL/RES switch:

Resumes set speed or increases

speed incrementally.

3. COAST/SET switch:

Sets desired cruise speed or reduces

speed incrementally.

4. CRUISE switch:

Master switch to activate the system.

5. DISTANCE switch:

Changes the vehicle’s following dis-

tance:

∙ Long

∙ Middle

∙ Short

LSD2999

5-46 Starting and driving

The ICC system display and

indicators

The display is located between the speed-

ometer and tachometer.

1. CRUISE switch indicator:

∙ICC system ON indicator (white): In-

dicates that the CRUISE switch

is ON.

∙ICC system SET indicator (green):

Indicates that the cruising speed is

set.

∙ICC system warning (orange): Indi-

cates that there is a malfunction in

the ICC system.

2. Set vehicle speed indicator:

Indicates the set vehicle speed.

For Canadian models, the speed is dis-

played in km/h.

3. Set distance indicator:

Displays the selected distance be-

tween vehicles set with the distance

switch.

4. Vehicle ahead detection indicator:

Indicates whether it detects a vehicle

in front of you.

Operating ICC

To turn on the cruise control, quickly push

and release the CRUISE switch 䊊

The ICC system ON indicator (white), set

distance indicator and set vehicle speed

indicator come on in a standby state for

setting.

LSD3000 LSD3001

Starting and driving 5-47

To set cruising speed, accelerate your ve-

hicle to the desired speed, push the

COAST/SET switch and release it. The ICC

system set indicator (green), vehicle ahead

detection indicator, set distance indicator

and set vehicle speed indicator 䊊

Bwill

come on. Take your foot off the accelerator

pedal. Your vehicle will maintain the set

speed.

When the COAST/SET switch is pushed un-

der the following conditions, the system

cannot be set and the ICC indicators will

blink for approximately 2 seconds:

∙ When traveling below 20 mph (32 km/h)

and a vehicle ahead is not detected

∙ When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive)

or Manual mode

∙ When the parking brake is applied

∙ When the brakes are operated by the

driver

When the COAST/SET switch is pushed un-

der the following conditions, the system

cannot be set.

A warning chime will sound and a message

will pop up:

∙ When the VDC system is off (To use the

ICC system, turn on the VDC system.

Push the CRUISE switch to turn off

the ICC system and reset the ICC switch

by pushing the CRUISE switch

again.)

For additional information about the

VDC system, refer to “Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) system” in this section.

∙ When ABS or VDC (including the TCS) is

operating

∙ When a wheel is slipping (To use the ICC

system, make sure the wheels are no

longer slipping. Push the

CRUISE switch to turn off the ICC

system, and reset the ICC system by

pushing the CRUISE switch again.)

䊊

1System set display with vehicle ahead

䊊

2System set display without vehicle

ahead

Vehicle detected ahead

When a vehicle is detected in the lane

ahead, the ICC system decelerates the ve-

hicle by controlling the throttle and apply-

ing the brakes to match the speed of a

slower vehicle ahead. The system then

controls the vehicle speed based on the

speed of the vehicle ahead to maintain the

driver selected distance.

LSD3002 LSD3003

5-48 Starting and driving

NOTE:

∙The stoplights of the vehicle come on

when braking is performed by the ICC

system.

∙When the brake operates,a noise may

be heard. This is not a malfunction.

When a vehicle ahead is detected, the ve-

hicle ahead detection indicator comes on.

The ICC system will also display the set

speed and selected distance.

Vehicle ahead not detected

When a vehicle is no longer detected

ahead, the ICC system gradually acceler-

ates your vehicle to resume the previously

set vehicle speed. The ICC system then

maintains the set speed.

When a vehicle is no longer detected, the

vehicle ahead detection indicator turns off.

If a vehicle ahead appears during accelera-

tion to the set vehicle speed or any time the

ICC system is in operation, the system con-

trols the distance to that vehicle.

When a vehicle is no longer detected under

approximately 15 mph (24 km/h), the sys-

tem will be canceled.

When passing another vehicle, the set

speed indicator 䊊

Bwill flash when the ve-

hicle speed exceeds the set speed. The ve-

hicle detect indicator will turn off when the

area ahead of the vehicle is open. When the

pedal is released, the vehicle will return to

the previously set speed.

Even though your vehicle speed is set in the

ICC system, you can depress the accelera-

tor pedal when it is necessary to accelerate

your vehicle rapidly.

䊊

1System set display with vehicle ahead

䊊

2System set display without vehicle

ahead

How to change the set vehicle

speed

To cancel the preset speed, use one of the

following methods:

∙ Push the CANCEL switch. The set ve-

hicle speed indicator will go out.

∙ Tap the brake pedal. The set vehicle

speed indicator will go out.

LSD2289 LSD3003

Starting and driving 5-49

∙ Turn the CRUISE switch off. The ICC

indicators will go out.

To reset at a faster cruising speed, use

one of the following methods:

∙ Depress the accelerator pedal. When

the vehicle attains the desired speed,

push and release the COAST/SET

switch.

∙ Push and hold the ACCEL/RES switch.

The set vehicle speed will increase by

approximately 5 mph (5 km/h for

Canada).

∙ Push, then quickly release the

ACCEL/RES switch. Each time you do

this, the set speed will increase by ap-

proximately 1 mph (1 km/h for Canada).

To reset at a slower cruising speed, use

one of the following methods:

∙ Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the

vehicle attains the desired speed, push

the COAST/SET switch and release it.

∙ Push and hold the COAST/SET switch.

The set vehicle speed will decrease by

approximately 5 mph (5 km/h for

Canada).

∙ Push, then quickly release the

COAST/SET switch. Each time you do

this, the set speed will decrease by ap-

proximately 1 mph (1 km/h for Canada).

To resume the preset speed, push and

release the ACCEL/RES switch. The vehicle

will resume the last set cruising speed

when the vehicle speed is over 20 mph

(32 km/h).

How to change the set distance

to the vehicle ahead

The distance to the vehicle ahead can be

selected at any time depending on the traf-

fic conditions.

Each time the distance switch 䊊

Ais

pushed, the set distance will change to

long, middle, short and back to long again,

in that sequence.

LSD3004

5-50 Starting and driving

Distance Approximate distance at

60 mph (100 km/h) [ft (m)]

1. Long 200 (60)

2. Middle 150 (45)

3. Short 90 (30)

∙ The distance to the vehicle ahead will

change according to the vehicle speed.

The higher the vehicle speed, the longer

the distance.

∙ If the engine is stopped, the set distance

becomes “long.” (Each time the engine

is started, the initial setting becomes

“long.”)

Approach warning

If your vehicle comes closer to the vehicle

ahead due to rapid deceleration of that ve-

hicle or if another vehicle cuts in, the sys-

tem warns the driver with the chime and

ICC system display. Decelerate by depress-

ing the brake pedal to maintain a safe ve-

hicle distance if:

∙ The chime sounds.

∙ The vehicle ahead detection indicator

blinks.

The warning chime may not sound in

some cases when there is a short distance

between vehicles. Some examples are:

∙ When the vehicles are traveling at the

same speed and the distance between

vehicles is not changing.

∙ When the vehicle ahead is traveling

faster and the distance between ve-

hicles is increasing.

∙ When a vehicle cuts in near your vehicle.

The warning chime will not sound when:

∙ The vehicle approaches other vehicles

that are parked or moving slowly.

∙ The accelerator pedal is depressed,

overriding the system.

NOTE:

The approach warning chime may sound

and the system display may blink when

the ICC sensor detects objects on the

side of the vehicle or on the side of the

road. This may cause the ICC system to

decelerate or accelerate the vehicle. The

ICC sensor may detect these objects

when the vehicle is driven on winding

roads, narrow roads, hilly roads, or when

entering or exiting a curve. In these

cases you will have to manually control

the proper distance ahead of your ve-

hicle.

Also, the sensor sensitivity can be affected

by vehicle operation (steering maneuver or

driving position in the lane) or traffic or ve-

hicle condition (for example, if a vehicle is

being driven with some damage).

LSD2778

Starting and driving 5-51

ICC SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for the ICC system. Failure to operate

the vehicle in accordance with these

system limitations could result in seri-

ous injury or death.

∙ The ICC system is primarily intended

for use on straight, dry, open roads

with light traffic. It is not advisable to

use the ICC system in city traffic or

congested areas.

∙ The ICC system will not adapt auto-

matically to road conditions. This sys-

tem should be used in evenly flowing

traffic. Do not use the system on roads

with sharp curves, or on icy roads, in

heavy rain or in fog.

∙ As there is a performance limit to the

distance control function, never rely

solely on the ICC system. This system

does not correct careless, inattentive

or absentminded driving, or over-

come poor visibility in rain, fog, or

other bad weather. Decelerate the ve-

hicle speed by depressing the brake

pedal, depending on the distance to

the vehicle ahead and the surround-

ing circumstances in order to main-

tain a safe distance between vehicles.

∙ If the vehicle ahead comes to a stop,

the vehicle decelerates to a standstill

within the limitations of the system.

The system will cancel once it judges

that the vehicle has come to a stand-

still and sound a warning chime. To

prevent the vehicle from moving, the

driver must depress the brake pedal.

∙ Always pay attention to the operation

of the vehicle and be ready to manu-

ally control the proper following dis-

tance.The ICC system may not be able

to maintain the selected distance be-

tween vehicles (following distance) or

selected vehicle speed under some

circumstances.

SSD0252

5-52 Starting and driving

∙ The system may not detect the ve-

hicle in front of you in certain road or

weather conditions. To avoid acci-

dents, never use the ICC system under

the following conditions:

– On roads where the traffic is heavy

or there are sharp curves

– On slippery road surfaces such as

on ice or snow, etc.

– During bad weather (rain, fog,

snow, etc.)

– When rain, snow or dirt adhere to

the bumper around the distance

sensor

– On steep downhill roads (the ve-

hicle may go beyond the set ve-

hicle speed and frequent braking

may result in overheating the

brakes)

– On repeated uphill and downhill

roads

– When traffic conditions make it dif-

ficult to keep a proper distance be-

tween vehicles because of fre-

quent acceleration or deceleration

– Interference by other radar

sources.

∙ Do not use the ICC system if you are

towing a trailer. The system may not

detect a vehicle ahead.

∙ In some road or traffic conditions, a

vehicle or object can unexpectedly

come into the sensor detection zone

and cause automatic braking. Always

stay alert and avoid using the ICC sys-

tem where not recommended in this

warning section.

The radar sensor will not detect the follow-

ing objects:

∙ Stationary and slow moving vehicles

∙ Pedestrians or objects in the roadway

∙ Oncoming vehicles in the same lane

∙ Motorcycles traveling offset in the travel

lane

The following are some conditions in which

the sensor cannot properly detect a ve-

hicle ahead and the system may not oper-

ate properly:

∙ When snow or road spray from traveling

vehicles reduces the sensor’s detection.

∙ When excessively heavy baggage is

loaded in the rear seat or the trunk of

your vehicle.

The ICC system is designed to automati-

cally check the sensor’s operation within

the limitations of the system.

The detection zone of the ICC sensor is

limited. A vehicle ahead must be in the de-

tection zone for the vehicle-to-vehicle dis-

tance detection mode to maintain the se-

lected distance from the vehicle ahead.

A vehicle ahead may move outside of the

detection zone due to its position within

the same lane of travel. Motorcycles may

not be detected in the same lane ahead if

they are traveling offset from the centerline

of the lane. A vehicle that is entering the

lane ahead may not be detected until the

vehicle has completely moved into the

lane.

If this occurs, the ICC system may warn

you by blinking the system indicator and

sounding the chime. The driver may

have to manually control the proper dis-

tance away from the vehicle traveling

ahead.

Starting and driving 5-53

When driving on some roads,such as wind-

ing, hilly, curved, narrow roads, or roads

which are under construction, the ICC sen-

sor may detect vehicles in a different lane,

or may temporarily not detect a vehicle

traveling ahead. This may cause the ICC

system to decelerate or accelerate the ve-

hicle.

The detection of vehicles may also be af-

fected by vehicle operation (steering ma-

neuver or traveling position in the lane, etc.)

or vehicle condition.

If this occurs, the ICC system may warn

you by blinking the system indicator and

sounding the chime unexpectedly. You

will have to manually control the proper

distance away from the vehicle traveling

ahead.

SSD0253

5-54 Starting and driving

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

The following are conditions in which the

ICC system may be temporarily unavail-

able. In these instances, the ICC system

may not cancel and may not be able to

maintain the selected following distance

from the vehicle ahead.

Condition A

Under the following conditions, the ICC sys-

tem is automatically canceled. A chime will

sound and the system will not be able to be

set:

∙ When the VDC system is turned off

∙ When the VDC or ABS operates

∙ When a vehicle ahead is not detected

and your vehicle is traveling below the

speed of 15 mph (24 km/h)

∙ When the system judges the vehicle is

at a standstill

∙ When the shift lever is not in the D (Drive)

or Manual mode

∙ When the parking brake is applied

∙ When a wheel slips

LSD2779

Starting and driving 5-55

Action to take

When the conditions listed above are no

longer present, turn the system off using

the ICC CRUISE switch. Turn the ICC

system back on to use the system.

Condition B

When the radar sensor area of the front

bumper is covered with dirt or is ob-

structed, the ICC system will automatically

be canceled. If the sensor area is covered

with ice, a transparent or translucent vinyl

bag, etc., the ICC system may not detect

vehicles ahead. In these instances, the ICC

system may not cancel and may not be

able to maintain the selected following dis-

tance from the vehicle ahead. Be sure to

check and clean the sensor area.

The system warning light (orange) will illu-

minate and the “Unavailable: Front Radar

Obstruction” warning message will appear

in the vehicle information display.

When driving on roads with limited road

structures or buildings (for example, or

long bridges, deserts, snow field, driving

next to long walls), the system may illumi-

nate the system warning light (orange) and

display the “Unavailable: Front Radar Ob-

struction” message.

Action to take

If the warning light (orange) comes on, park

the vehicle in a safe location and turn the

engine off. Check to see if the sensor area

of the front bumper is blocked. If the sensor

area of the front bumper is blocked, re-

move the blocking material. Restart the

engine. If the warning light continues to

illuminate, have the ICC system checked. It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Condition C

When the ICC system is not operating

properly, a chime sounds and the system

warning light (orange) will come on.

Action to take

If the warning light comes on, park the ve-

hicle in a safe place. Turn the engine off,

restart the engine, resume driving and set

the ICC system again.

If it is not possible to set the system or

the indicator stays on, it may indicate

that the system is malfunctioning. Al-

though the vehicle is still drivable under

normal conditions, have the vehicle

checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

LSD2543 LSD2395

5-56 Starting and driving

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The sensor for the ICC system 䊊

1is located

on the front of the vehicle.

To keep the ICC system operating properly,

be sure to observe the following:

∙ Always keep the sensor area clean.

∙ Do not strike or damage the areas

around the sensor. Do not touch or re-

move the screw located on the sensor.

Doing so could cause failure or mal-

function . If the sensor is damaged due

to an accident, it is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer.

∙ Do not attach a sticker (including trans-

parent material) or install an accessory

near the sensor. This could cause failure

or malfunction.

∙ Do not attach metallic objects near the

sensor area (brush guard, etc.) This

could cause failure or malfunction.

∙ Do not alter, remove, or paint the front

bumper. Before customizing or restor-

ing the front bumper, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

Radio frequency statement

FCC Notice

For USA

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful in-

terference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s authority

to operate the equipment.

This equipment has been tested and found

to comply with the limits for a Class A digi-

tal device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC

Rules. These limits are designed to provide

reasonable protection against harmful in-

terference when the equipment is oper-

ated in a commercial environment. This

equipment generates, uses, and can radi-

ate radio frequency energy and, if not in-

stalled and used in accordance with the

instruction manual, may cause harmful in-

terference to radio communications. Op-

eration of this equipment in a residential

area is likely to cause harmful interference

in which case the user will be required to

correct the interference at his own ex-

pense.

Radio frequency radiation exposure infor-

mation:

This equipment complies with FCC radia-

tion exposure limits set forth for an uncon-

trolled environment.

LSD2479

Starting and driving 5-57

This equipment should be installed and

operated with minimum distance of 20 cm

between the radiator and your body.

The transmitter must not be co-located or

operating in conjunction with any other an-

tenna or transmitter.

For Canada

This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation

is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference,

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the AEB

system could result in serious injury or

death.

∙ The AEB system is a supplemental aid

to the driver. It is not a replacement

for the driver’s attention to traffic

conditions or responsibility to drive

safely. It cannot prevent accidents

due to carelessness or dangerous

driving techniques.

∙ The AEB system does not function in

all driving, traffic, weather and road

conditions.

The AEB system can assist the driver when

there is a risk of a forward collision with the

vehicle ahead in the traveling lane.

The AEB system uses a radar sensor 䊊

located on the front of the vehicle to mea-

sure the distance to the vehicle ahead in

the same lane.

LSD2479

AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING

(AEB)

5-58 Starting and driving

1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator

2. AEB system warning light

AEB SYSTEM OPERATION

The AEB system will function when your

vehicle is driven at speeds above approxi-

mately 3 mph (5 km/h).

If a risk of a forward collision is detected,

the AEB system will provide an initial warn-

ing to the driver by both a visual and au-

dible alert.

If the driver applies the brakes quickly and

forcefully after the warning, and the AEB

system detects that there is still the possi-

bility of a forward collision, the system will

automatically increase the braking force. If

the driver does not take action, the AEB

system issues the second visual warning

and audible warning and also applies par-

tial braking.

If the risk of a collision becomes imminent,

the AEB system applies harder braking au-

tomatically.

LSD2706

Starting and driving 5-59

NOTE:

The vehicle’s brake lights come on when

braking is performed by the AEB system.

Depending on vehicle speed and distance

to the vehicle ahead, as well as driving and

roadway conditions, the system may help

the driver avoid a forward collision or may

help mitigate the consequences of a colli-

sion, should one be unavoidable. If the

driver is handling the steering wheel, accel-

erating or braking, the AEB system will

function later or will not function.

The automatic braking will cease under the

following conditions:

∙ When the steering wheel is turned as far

as necessary to avoid a collision.

∙ When the accelerator pedal is de-

pressed.

∙ When there is no longer a vehicle de-

tected ahead.

If the AEB system has stopped the vehicle,

the vehicle will remain at a standstill for

approximately 2 seconds before the

brakes are released.

LSD3005

5-60 Starting and driving

TURNING THE AEB SYSTEM

ON/OFF

Perform the following steps to turn the AEB

system ON or OFF.

1. Press the button until “Settings”

displays in the vehicle information dis-

play. Use the button to select

“Driver Assistance.” Then press the EN-

TER button.

2. Select “Emergency Braking” and press

the ENTER button.

3. Select “System” and press the ENTER

button.

When the AEB system is turned off, the AEB

system warning light illuminates.

NOTE:

∙The AEB system will be automatically

turned on when the engine is re-

started.

∙The I-FCW system (if so equipped) is

integrated into the AEB system There

is not a separate selection in the ve-

hicle information display for the

I-FCW system.When the AEB is turned

off, the I-FCW system is also turned

off.

AEB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for the AEB system. Failure to operate

the vehicle in accordance with these

system limitations could result in seri-

ous injury or death.

∙ The AEB system cannot detect all ve-

hicles under all conditions.

∙ The radar sensor does not detect the

following objects:

– Pedestrians, animals or obstacles

in the roadway.

– Oncoming vehicles.

– Crossing vehicles.

∙ The radar sensor has some perfor-

mance limitations. If a stationary ve-

hicle is in the vehicles’s path, the AEB

system will not function when the ve-

hicle is driven at speeds over approxi-

mately 50 mph (80 km/h).

∙ The radar sensor may not detect a ve-

hicle ahead in the following

conditions:

– Dirt, ice, snow or other material

covering the radar sensor.

– Interference by other radar

sources.

– Snow or road spray from traveling

vehicles.

– If the vehicle ahead is narrow (e.g.

motorcycle).

– When driving on a steep downhill

slope or roads with sharp curves.

∙ In some road or traffic conditions, the

AEB system may unexpectedly apply

partial braking. When acceleration is

necessary, continue to depress the

accelerator pedal to override the

system.

Starting and driving 5-61

∙ Braking distances increase on slip-

pery surfaces.

∙ The system is designed to automati-

cally check the sensor’s functionality,

within certain limitations. The system

may not detect some forms of ob-

structions of the sensor area such as

ice, snow, stickers, etc. In these cases,

the system may not be able to worn

the driver properly. Be sure that you

check, clean and clear the sensor area

regularly.

∙ Excessive noise will interfere with the

warning chime sound, and the chime

may not be heard.

LSD2781

5-62 Starting and driving

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

Condition A

When the radar sensor picks up interfer-

ence from another radar source, making it

impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the

AEB system is automatically turned off.

The AEB system warning light (orange) will

illuminate.

Action to take

When the above conditions no longer exist,

the AEB system will resume automatically.

Condition B

When the sensor area of the front bumper

is covered with dirt or is obstructed, mak-

ing it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead,

the AEB system is automatically turned off.

The AEB system warning light (orange) will

illuminate and the “Unavailable: Front Ra-

dar Obstruction” warning message will ap-

pear in the vehicle information display.

When driving on roads with limited road

structures or buildings (for example, long

bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to

long walls), the system may illuminate the

system warning light (orange) and display

the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction”

message.

Action to take

If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop

the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift

lever in the P (Park) position and turn the

engine off. Clean the radar cover on the

lower grille with a soft cloth, and restart the

engine. If the warning light continues to

illuminate, have the AEB system checked. It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

NOTE:

If the AEB system stops working, the

I-FCW system (if so equipped) will also

stop working.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

If the AEB system malfunctions, it will be

turned off automatically, a chime will

sound, the AEB warning light (orange) will

illuminate and the warning message [Mal-

function] will appear in the vehicle informa-

tion display.

Action to take

If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop

the vehicle in a safe location, turn the en-

gine off and restart the engine. If the warn-

ing light continues to illuminate, have the

AEB system checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice.

Starting and driving 5-63

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The sensor 䊊

1for the AEB is located on the

front of the vehicle.

To keep the system operating properly, be

sure to observe the following:

∙ Always keep the sensor area of the front

bumper clean.

∙ Do not strike or damage the areas

around the sensor.

∙ Do not cover or attach stickers or simi-

lar objects on the front bumper near

the sensor area. This could cause failure

or malfunction.

∙ Do not attach metallic objects near the

sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This

could cause failure or malfunction.

∙ Do not alter, remove or paint the front

bumper. Before customizing or restor-

ing the front bumper, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

FCC Notice

For USA

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful in-

terference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s authority

to operate the equipment.

This equipment has been tested and found

to comply with the limits for a Class A digi-

tal device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC

Rules. These limits are designed to provide

reasonable protection against harmful in-

terference when the equipment is oper-

ated in a commercial environment. This

equipment generates, uses, and can radi-

ate radio frequency energy and, if not in-

stalled and used in accordance with the

instruction manual, may cause harmful in-

terference to radio communications. Op-

eration of this equipment in a residential

area is likely to cause harmful interference

in which case the user will be required to

correct the interference at his own ex-

pense.

Radio frequency radiation exposure infor-

mation:

This equipment complies with FCC radia-

tion exposure limits set forth for an uncon-

trolled environment.

This equipment should be installed and

operated with minimum distance of 20 cm

between the radiator and your body.

The transmitter must not be co-located or

operating in conjunction with any other an-

tenna or transmitter.

LSD2479

5-64 Starting and driving

For Canada

This device complies with Industry Canada

licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation

is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference,

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that may

cause undesired operation of the de-

vice.

WARNING

Failure to follow the warnings and in-

structions for proper use of the I-FCW

system could result in serious injury or

death.

∙ The I-FCW system can help warn the

driver before a collision occurs but will

not avoid a collision. It is the driver’s

responsibility to stay alert, drive

safely and be in control of the vehicle

at all times.

The I-FCW system can help alert the driver

when there is a sudden braking of a second

vehicle traveling in front of the vehicle

ahead in the same lane. The I-FCW system uses a radar sensor 䊊

located on the front of the vehicle to mea-

sure the distance to the vehicle ahead in

the same lane.

LSD2479

INTELLIGENT FORWARD COLLISION

WARNING (I-FCW)

Starting and driving 5-65

1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator

2. AEB system warning light

LSD2782

5-66 Starting and driving

I-FCW SYSTEM OPERATION

The I-FCW system operates at speeds

above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h).

If there is a potential risk of a forward colli-

sion, the I-FCW system will warn the driver

by blinking the vehicle ahead detection in-

dicator, and sounding an audible alert.

LSD2263

Starting and driving 5-67

TURNING THE I-FCW SYSTEM

ON/OFF

Perform the following steps to turn the

I-FCW system ON or OFF.

1. Press the button until “Settings”

displays in the vehicle information dis-

play. Use the button to select

“Driver Assistance.” Then press the EN-

TER button.

2. Select “Emergency Braking” and press

the ENTER button.

3. Select “System” and press the ENTER

button.

When the I-FCW system is turned off, the

AEB system warning light illuminates.

NOTE:

∙The I-FCW system will be automati-

cally turned on when the engine is

restarted.

∙The I-FCW system (if so equipped) is

integrated into the AEB system.There

is not a separate selection in the ve-

hicle information display for the

I-FCW system.When the AEB is turned

off, the I-FCW system is also turned

off.

LSD3005

5-68 Starting and driving

I-FCW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS

Illustration A

LSD2312

Starting and driving 5-69

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for the I-FCW system. Failure to operate

the vehicle in accordance with these

system limitations could result in seri-

ous injury or death.

∙ The I-FCW system cannot detect all

vehicles under all conditions.

∙ The radar sensor does not detect the

following objects:

– Pedestrians, animals or obstacles

in the roadway

– Oncoming vehicles

– Crossing vehicles

∙ (Illustration A) The I-FCW system does

not function when a vehicle ahead is a

narrow vehicle, such as a motorcycle.

∙ The radar sensor may not detect a ve-

hicle ahead in the following

conditions:

– Snow or heavy rain

– Dirt, ice, snow or other material

covering the radar sensor.

– Interference by other radar

sources.

– Snow or road spray from travelling

vehicles.

– Driving in a tunnel

– (Illustration B) When the vehicle

ahead is being towed.

– (Illustration C) When the distance

to the vehicle ahead is too close,

the beam of the radar sensor is

obstructed.

Illustration B

LSD2265

5-70 Starting and driving

– (Illustration D) When driving on a

steep downhill slope or roads with

sharp curves.

∙ The system is designed to automati-

cally check the sensor’s functionality,

within certain limitations. The system

may not detect some forms of ob-

struction of the sensor area such as

ice, snow, stickers, etc. In these cases,

the system may not be able to warn

the driver properly. Be sure that you

check, clean and clear the sensor area

regularly.

∙ Excessive noise will interfere with the

warning chime sound, and the chime

may not be heard.

Starting and driving 5-71

Illustration C

LSD2266

5-72 Starting and driving

Illustration D

LSD2313

Starting and driving 5-73

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

Condition A

When the radar sensor picks up interfer-

ence from another radar source, making it

impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the

I-FCW system is automatically turned off.

The AEB system warning light (orange) will

illuminate.

Action to take

When the above conditions no longer exist,

the I-FCW system will resume automati-

cally.

Condition B

When the sensor area of the front bumper

is covered with dirt or is obstructed, mak-

ing it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead,

the I-FCW system is automatically turned

off.

The AEB system warning light (orange) will

illuminate and the “Unavailable: Front Ra-

dar Obstruction” warning message will ap-

pear in the vehicle information display.

When driving on roads with limited road

structures or buildings (for example, long

bridges, deserts, snow fields, driving next to

LSD2781

5-74 Starting and driving

long walls), the system may illuminate the

system warning light (orange) and display

the “Unavailable: Front Radar Obstruction”

message.

Action to take

If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop

the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift

lever in the P (Park) position and turn the

engine off. Clean the radar cover on the

lower grille with a soft cloth, and restart the

engine. If the warning light continues to

illuminate, have the I-FCW system checked.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

NOTE:

If the AEB system stops working, the

I-FCW system (if so equipped) will also

stop working.

SYSTEM MALFUNCTION

If the I-FCW system malfunctions, it will be

turned off automatically, a chime will

sound, the AEB system warning light (or-

ange) will illuminate and the warning mes-

sage [Malfunction] will appear in the vehicle

information display.

Action to take

If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop

the vehicle in a safe location, turn the en-

gine off and restart the engine. If the warn-

ing light continues to illuminate, have the

I-FCW system checked. It is recommended

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The sensor 䊊

1is located on the front of the

vehicle.

To keep the system operating properly, be

sure to observe the following:

∙ Always keep the sensor area of the front

bumper clean.

∙ Do not strike or damage the areas

around the sensor.

∙ Do not cover or attach stickers or simi-

lar objects on the front bumper near

the sensor area. This could cause failure

or malfunction.

LSD2479

Starting and driving 5-75

∙ Do not attach metallic objects near the

sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This

could cause failure or malfunction.

∙ Do not alter, remove or paint the front

bumper. Before customizing or restor-

ing the front bumper, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.

FCC Notice

For USA

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference, and

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

FCC Warning

Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for

compliance could void the user’s author-

ity to operate the equipment.

For Canada

This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

1. This device may not cause interfer-

ence,

2. This device must accept any interfer-

ence, including interference that

may cause undesired operation of

the device.

CAUTION

During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km),

follow these recommendations to ob-

tain maximum engine performance

and ensure the future reliability and

economy of your new vehicle. Failure to

follow these recommendations may re-

sult in shortened engine life and re-

duced engine performance.

∙ Avoid driving for long periods at con-

stant speed, either fast or slow, and do

not run the engine over 4,000 rpm.

∙ Do not accelerate at full throttle in any

gear.

∙ Avoid quick starts.

∙ Avoid hard braking as much as pos-

sible.

BREAK-IN SCHEDULE

5-76 Starting and driving

Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient

Driving Tips to help you achieve the most

fuel economy from your vehicle.

1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake

Pedal Application

∙ Avoid rapid starts and stops.

∙ Use smooth, gentle accelerator and

brake application whenever possible.

∙ Maintain constant speed while com-

muting and coast whenever pos-

sible.

2. Maintain Constant Speed

∙ Look ahead to try and anticipate and

minimize stops.

∙ Synchronizing your speed with traffic

lights allows you to reduce your num-

ber of stops.

∙ Maintaining a steady speed can mini-

mize red light stops and improve fuel

efficiency.

3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher

Vehicle Speeds

∙ Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more

efficient to open windows to cool the

vehicle due to reduced engine load.

∙ Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more

efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle

due to increased aerodynamic drag.

∙ Recirculating the cool air in the cabin

when the A/C is on reduces cooling

load.

4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Dis-

tances

∙ Observing the speed limit and not

exceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where

legally allowed) can improve fuel effi-

ciency due to reduced aerodynamic

drag.

∙ Maintaining a safe following distance

behind other vehicles reduces un-

necessary braking.

∙ Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate

changes in speed permits reduced

braking and smooth acceleration

changes.

∙ Select a gear range suitable to road

conditions.

5. Use Cruise Control

∙ Using cruise control during highway

driving helps maintain a steady

speed.

∙ Cruise control is particularly effective

in providing fuel savings when driving

on flat terrains.

6. Plan for the Shortest Route

∙ Utilize a map or navigation system to

determine the best route to save

time.

7. Avoid Idling

∙ Shutting off your engine when safe

for stops exceeding 30–60 seconds

saves fuel and reduces emissions.

Buy an Automated Pass for Toll Roads

∙ Automated passes permit drivers to

use special lanes to maintain cruis-

ing speed through the toll and avoid

stopping and starting.

9. Winter Warm Up

∙ Limit idling time to minimize impact

to fuel economy.

∙ Vehicles typically need no more than

30 seconds of idling at start-up to

effectively circulate the engine oil be-

fore driving.

FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS

Starting and driving 5-77

∙ Your vehicle will reach its ideal oper-

ating temperature more quickly

while driving versus idling.

10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool

∙ Park your vehicle in a covered parking

area or in the shade whenever pos-

sible.

∙ When entering a hot vehicle, opening

the windows will help to reduce the

inside temperature faster, resulting in

reduced demand on your A/C sys-

tem.

∙ Keep your engine tuned up.

∙ Follow the recommended scheduled

maintenance.

∙ Keep the tires inflated to the correct

pressure. Low tire pressure increases

tire wear and lowers fuel economy.

∙ Keep the wheels in correct alignment.

Improper alignment increases tire wear

and lowers fuel economy.

∙ Use the recommended viscosity engine

oil. For additional information, refer to

“Recommended fluids/lubricants and

capacities” in the “Technical and con-

sumer information” section of this

manual.

INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY

5-78 Starting and driving

WARNING

∙ Do not stop or park the vehicle over

flammable materials such as dry

grass, waste paper or rags. They may

ignite and cause a fire.

∙ Safe parking procedures require that

both the parking brake be set and the

transmission placed into P (Park).Fail-

ure to do so could cause the vehicle to

move unexpectedly or roll away and

result in an accident. Make sure the

shift lever has been pushed as far for-

ward as it can go and cannot be

moved without depressing the foot

brake pedal.

∙ Never leave the engine running while

the vehicle is unattended.

∙ To help avoid risk of injury or death

through unintended operation of the

vehicle and/or its systems, do not

leave children, people who require the

assistance of others or pets unat-

tended in your vehicle. Additionally,

the temperature inside a closed ve-

hicle on a warm day can quickly be-

come high enough to cause a signifi-

cant risk of injury or death to people

and pets.

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) po-

sition.

3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling

into traffic when parked on an incline, it

is a good practice to turn the wheels as

illustrated.

∙ HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels into the curb and

move the vehicle forward until the curb

side wheel gently touches the curb.

∙ HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels away from the curb

and move the vehicle back until the

curb side wheel gently touches the

curb.

WSD0050

PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS

Starting and driving 5-79

∙ HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO

CURB 䊊

Turn the wheels toward the side of the

road so the vehicle will move away

from the center of the road if it moves.

4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK

position.

WARNING

∙ If the engine is not running or is

turned off while driving, the power as-

sist for the steering will not work.

Steering will be harder to operate.

∙ When the power steering warning

light illuminates with the engine run-

ning, there will be no power assist for

the steering. You will still have control

of the vehicle, but the steering will be

much harder to operate. Have the

power steering system checked. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

The power steering system is designed to

provide power assistance while driving to

operate the steering wheel with light force.

When the steering wheel is operated re-

peatedly or continuously while parking or

driving at a very low speed, the power as-

sist for the steering wheel will be reduced.

This is to prevent overheating of the power

steering system and protect it from getting

damaged. While the power assist is re-

duced, steering wheel operation will be-

come heavy. If the steering wheel opera-

tion is still performed, the power steering

may stop and the power steering warning

light will illuminate. In a safe location, stop

the engine and place the ignition switch in

the OFF position. The temperature of the

power steering system will go down after a

period of time and the power assist level

will return to normal after starting the en-

gine. The power steering warning light will

go off. Avoid repeating such steering wheel

operations that could cause the power

steering system to overheat.

You may hear a noise from the front of the

vehicle when the steering wheel is oper-

ated. This is a normal operational noise

and is not a malfunction.

If the power steering warning light illumi-

nates while the engine is running, it may

indicate the power steering system is not

functioning properly and may need servic-

ing. Have the power steering system

checked.It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

When the power steering warning light illu-

minates with the engine running, the

power assist for the steering will cease op-

eration but you will still have control of the

vehicle. At this time,greater steering efforts

are required to operate the steering wheel,

especially in sharp turns and at low speeds.

POWER STEERING

5-80 Starting and driving

The brake system has two separate hy-

draulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions,

you will still have braking at two wheels.

BRAKE PRECAUTIONS

Vacuum assisted brakes

The brake booster aids braking by using

engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you

can stop the vehicle by depressing the

brake pedal. However, greater foot pres-

sure on the brake pedal will be required to

stop the vehicle and stopping distance will

be longer.

Using the brakes

Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal

while driving. This will overheat the brakes,

wear out the brake pads faster, and reduce

gas mileage.

To help reduce brake wear and to prevent

the brakes from overheating,reduce speed

and downshift to a lower gear before going

down a slope or long grade. Overheated

brakes may reduce braking performance

and could result in loss of vehicle control.

WARNING

∙ While driving on a slippery surface, be

careful when braking, accelerating or

downshifting. Abrupt braking or ac-

celerating could cause the wheels to

skid and result in an accident.

∙ If the engine is not running or is

turned off while driving, the power as-

sist for the brakes will not work. Brak-

ing will be harder.

Wet brakes

When the vehicle is washed or driven

through water, the brakes may get wet. As

a result, your braking distance will be lon-

ger and the vehicle may pull to one side

during braking.

To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe

speed while lightly pressing the brake

pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until

the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving

the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes

function correctly.

Parking brake break-in

Break in the parking brake shoes whenever

the stopping effect of the parking brake is

weakened or whenever the parking brake

shoes and/or drums/rotors are replaced,

in order to assure the best braking perfor-

mance.

This procedure is described in the vehicle

service manual. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)

WARNING

∙ The ABS is a sophisticated device, but

it cannot prevent accidents resulting

from careless or dangerous driving

techniques. It can help maintain ve-

hicle control during braking on slip-

pery surfaces. Remember that stop-

ping distances on slippery surfaces

will be longer than on normal sur-

faces even with ABS. Stopping dis-

tances may also be longer on rough,

gravel or snow covered roads, or if you

are using tire chains. Always maintain

a safe distance from the vehicle in

front of you. Ultimately, the driver is

responsible for safety.

∙ Tire type and condition may also af-

fect braking effectiveness.

BRAKE SYSTEM

Starting and driving 5-81

– When replacing tires, install the

specified size of tires on all four

wheels.

– When installing a spare tire, make

sure that it is the proper size and

type as specified on the Tire and

Loading Information label. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Tire

and Loading Information label” in

the “Technical and consumer infor-

mation” section of this manual.

– For additional information, refer to

“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels

do not lock during hard braking or when

braking on slippery surfaces. The system

detects the rotation speed at each wheel

and varies the brake fluid pressure to pre-

vent each wheel from locking and sliding.

By preventing each wheel from locking, the

system helps the driver maintain steering

control and helps to minimize swerving

and spinning on slippery surfaces.

Using the system

Depress the brake pedal and hold it down.

Depress the brake pedal with firm steady

pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The

Anti-lock Braking System will operate to

prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer

the vehicle to avoid obstacles.

WARNING

Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so

may result in increased stopping

distances.

Self-test feature

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) in-

cludes electronic sensors, electric pumps,

hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The

computer has a built-in diagnostic feature

that tests the system each time you start

the engine and move the vehicle at a low

speed in forward or reverse. When the self-

test occurs, you may hear a “clunk” noise

and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal.

This is normal and does not indicate a mal-

function. If the computer senses a mal-

function, it switches the ABS off and illumi-

nates the ABS warning light on the

instrument panel. The brake system then

operates normally but without anti-lock

assistance.

If the ABS warning light illuminates during

the self-test or while driving, have the ve-

hicle checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Normal operation

The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) oper-

ates at speeds above3-6mph(5-

10 km/h). The speed varies according to

road conditions.

When the ABS senses that one or more

wheels are close to locking up, the actuator

rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pres-

sure. This action is similar to pumping the

brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsa-

tion in the brake pedal and hear a noise

from under the hood or feel a vibration

from the actuator when it is operating. This

is normal and indicates that the ABS is op-

erating properly. However, the pulsation

may indicate that road conditions are haz-

ardous and extra care is required while

driving.

BRAKE ASSIST

When the force applied to the brake pedal

exceeds a certain level, the brake assist is

activated generating greater braking force

than a conventional brake booster even

with light pedal force.

5-82 Starting and driving

WARNING

The brake assist is only an aid to assist

braking operation and is not a collision

warning or avoidance device. It is the

driver’s responsibility to stay alert, drive

safely and be in control of the vehicle at

all times.

The VDC system uses various sensors to

monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion.

Under certain driving conditions, the VDC

system helps to perform the following

functions:

∙ Controls brake pressure to reduce

wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel

so power is transferred to a non-

slipping drive wheel on the same axle.

∙ Controls brake pressure and engine

output to reduce drive wheel slip based

on vehicle speed (traction control func-

tion).

∙ Controls brake pressure at individual

wheels and engine output to help the

driver maintain control of the vehicle in

the following conditions:

– Understeer (vehicle tends to not fol-

low the steered path despite in-

creased steering input)

– Oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due

to certain road or driving conditions)

The VDC system can help the driver to

maintain control of the vehicle, but it can-

not prevent loss of vehicle control in all driv-

ing situations.

When the VDC system operates, the

indicator in the instrument panel flashes to

note the following:

∙ The road may be slippery or the system

may determine some action is required

to help keep the vehicle on the steered

path.

∙ You may feel a pulsation in the brake

pedal and hear a noise or vibration from

under the hood. This is normal and indi-

cates that the VDC system is working

properly.

∙ Adjust your speed and driving to the

road conditions.

For additional information, refer to “Slip in-

dicator light” and “Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) OFF indicator light” in the “Instru-

ments and controls” section of this manual.

If a malfunction occurs in the system,

the indicator light comes on in the

instrument panel. The VDC system auto-

matically turns off when the indicator light

is on.

The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the

VDC system. The indicator and the

AEB system warning light illuminate to in-

dicate the VDC system is off.

VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC)

SYSTEM

Starting and driving 5-83

When the VDC OFF switch is used to turn off

the system, the VDC system still operates

to prevent one drive wheel from slipping by

transferring power to a non-slipping drive

wheel. The indicator flashes if this oc-

curs. All other VDC functions are off and

the indicator will not flash.

The VDC system is automatically reset to

ON when the ignition switch is placed in the

OFF position then back to the ON position.

The computer has a built-in diagnostic fea-

ture that tests the system each time you

start the engine and move the vehicle for-

ward or in reverse at a slow speed. When

the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk

noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake

pedal. This is normal and is not an indica-

tion of a malfunction.

WARNING

∙ The VDC system is designed to help

the driver maintain stability but does

not prevent accidents due to abrupt

steering operation at high speeds or

by careless or dangerous driving

techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and

be especially careful when driving and

cornering on slippery surfaces and al-

ways drive carefully.

∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-

sion. If suspension parts such as

shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-

bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are

not NISSAN recommended for your

vehicle or are extremely deteriorated,

the VDC system may not operate

properly. This could adversely affect

vehicle handling performance, and

the indicator may flash or

the indicator light may

illuminate.

∙ If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, the VDC system

may not operate properly and both

the and indicator lights

may illuminate.

∙ If engine control related parts are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, both the

and the indicator lights may

illuminate.

∙ When driving on extremely inclined

surfaces such as higher banked cor-

ners, the VDC system may not operate

properly and the indicator may

flash or the indicator light may

illuminate. Do not drive on these types

of roads.

∙ When driving on an unstable surface

such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the indicator may flash or

the indicator light may illumi-

nate. This is not a malfunction. Re-

start the engine after driving onto a

stable surface.

∙ If wheels or tires other than the

NISSAN recommended ones are used,

the VDC system may not operate

properly and the indicator may

flash or the indicator light may

illuminate.

∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for

winter tires or tire chains on a snow

covered road.

5-84 Starting and driving

BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION

During braking while driving through turns,

the system optimizes the distribution of

force to each of the front and rear wheels

depending on the radius of the turn.

WARNING

∙ The VDC system is designed to help

the driver maintain stability but does

not prevent accidents due to abrupt

steering operation at high speeds or

by careless or dangerous driving

techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and

be especially careful when driving and

cornering on slippery surfaces and al-

ways drive carefully.

∙ Do not modify the vehicle’s suspen-

sion. If suspension parts such as

shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-

bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are

not NISSAN recommended for your

vehicle or are extremely deteriorated,

the VDC system may not operate

properly. This could adversely affect

vehicle handling performance, and

the indicator may flash or

the indicator light may

illuminate.

∙ If brake related parts such as brake

pads, rotors and calipers are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, the VDC system

may not operate properly and both

the and indicator light

may illuminate.

∙ If engine control related parts are not

NISSAN recommended or are ex-

tremely deteriorated, both the

and the indicator light may

illuminate.

∙ When driving on extremely inclined

surfaces such as higher banked cor-

ners, the VDC system may not operate

properly and the indicator may

flash or the indicator light may

illuminate. Do not drive on these types

of roads.

∙ When driving on an unstable surface

such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or

ramp, the indicator may flash or

the indicator light may illumi-

nate. This is not a malfunction. Re-

start the engine after driving onto a

stable surface.

∙ If wheels or tires other than the

NISSAN recommended ones are used,

the VDC system may not operate

properly and the indicator may

flash or the indicator light may

illuminate.

∙ The VDC system is not a substitute for

winter tires or tire chains on a snow

covered road.

Starting and driving 5-85

WARNING

∙ Never rely solely on the hill start assist

system to prevent the vehicle from

moving backward on a hill. Always

drive carefully and attentively. De-

press the brake pedal when the ve-

hicle is stopped on a steep hill. Be es-

pecially careful when stopped on a hill

on frozen or muddy roads. Failure to

prevent the vehicle from rolling back-

wards may result in a loss of control of

the vehicle and possible serious injury

or death.

∙ The hill start assist system is not de-

signed to hold the vehicle at a stand-

still on a hill. Depress the brake pedal

when the vehicle is stopped on a

steep hill. Failure to do so may cause

the vehicle to roll backwards and may

result in a collision or serious personal

injury.

∙ The hill start assist system may not

prevent the vehicle from rolling back-

wards on a hill under all load or road

conditions. Always be prepared to de-

press the brake pedal to prevent the

vehicle from rolling backwards. Fail-

ure to do so may result in a collision or

serious personal injury.

When the vehicle is stopped on a hill, the hill

start assist system automatically keeps

the brakes applied to help prevent the ve-

hicle from rolling backward in the time it

takes the driver to release the brake pedal

and apply the accelerator.

The hill start assist system will operate au-

tomatically under the following conditions:

∙ The transmission is shifted to a forward

or reverse gear.

∙ The vehicle is stopped completely on a

hill by applying the brake. The maxi-

mum holding time is 2 seconds. After

2 seconds the vehicle will begin to roll

back and the hill start assist system will

stop operating completely.

The hill start assist system will not operate

when the shift lever is placed in the N (Neu-

tral) or P (Park) position or on a flat and level

road.

The sonar (parking sensor) system sounds

a tone to inform the driver of obstacles

near the bumper.

When the “DISPLAY” key is on, the sonar

view will automatically appear in the meter.

WARNING

∙ The sonar (parking sensor) system is

a convenience but it is not a substitute

for proper parking.

LSD2135

HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM FRONT AND REAR SONAR SYSTEM (if

so equipped)

5-86 Starting and driving

∙ The driver is always responsible for

safety during parking and other ma-

neuvers. Always look around and

check that it is safe to do so before

parking.

∙ Read and understand the limitations

of the sonar (parking sensor) system

as contained in this section. The col-

ors of the corner sonar indicator and

the distance guide lines in the

front/rear view indicate different dis-

tances to the object.

∙ Inclement weather or ultrasonic

sources such as an automatic car

wash, a truck’s compressed-air

brakes or a pneumatic drill may affect

the function of the system; this may

include reduced performance or a

false activation.

∙ This function is designed as an aid to

the driver in detecting large station-

ary objects to help avoid damaging

the vehicle.

∙ The system is not designed to prevent

contact with small or moving objects.

Always move slowly. The system will

not detect small objects below the

bumper, and may not detect objects

close to the bumper or on the ground.

∙ The system may not detect the fol-

lowing objects: fluffy objects such as

snow, cloth, cotton, glass, wool, etc.;

thin objects such as rope, wire and

chain, etc.; or wedge-shaped objects.

If your vehicle sustains damage to the

bumper fascia, leaving it misaligned or

bent, the sensing zone may be altered

causing inaccurate measurement of ob-

stacles or false alarms.

CAUTION

∙ Excessive noise (such as audio system

volume or an open vehicle window)

will interfere with the tone and it may

not be heard.

∙ Keep the sonar sensors (located on

the bumper fascia) free from snow, ice

and large accumulations of dirt. Do

not clean the sensors with sharp ob-

jects. If the sensors are covered, the

accuracy of the sonar function will be

diminished.

SYSTEM OPERATION

The system informs with a visual and au-

dible alert of front obstacles when the shift

lever is in the D (Drive) position and both

front and rear obstacles when the shift le-

ver is in the R (Reverse) position.

Sonar Operation Table

FR Sensor RR Sensor

Range Sound Display Sound Display

Px†x†

Rooo o

Nx†x†

Doox †

o – Display/Beep when detect

† – Display on camera view

x – No Display and Beep

The system is deactivated at speeds above

6 mph (10 km/h). It is reactivated at lower

speeds.

Starting and driving 5-87

The intermittent tone will stop after 3 sec-

onds when an obstacle is detected by only

the corner sensor and the distance does

not change. The tone will stop when the

obstacle gets away from the vehicle.

When the object is detected, the indicator

(green) appears and blinks and the tone

sounds intermittently. When the vehicle

moves closer to the object, the color of the

indicator turns yellow and the rate of the

blinking increases. When the vehicle is very

close to the object, the indicator stops

blinking and turns red, and the tone

sounds continuously.

When the corner of the vehicle moves

closer to an object, the corner sonar indi-

cator 䊊

Aappears.

The system indicators 䊊

Awill appear when

the vehicle moves closer to an object.

LSD2815 LSD2137

5-88 Starting and driving

HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE

SONAR SYSTEM

The system is automatically activated

when the ignition is in the ON position and

the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.

Perform the following steps to enable or

disable the sonar system:

1. Press the button until “Settings”

displays in the vehicle information dis-

play. Use the button to select

“Driver Assistance.” Then press the EN-

TER button.

2. Select “Parking Aids” and press the EN-

TER button.

3. Select “Sensor” and press the ENTER

button.

SONAR LIMITATIONS

WARNING

Listed below are the system limitations

for the sonar system. Failure to operate

the vehicle in accordance with these

system limitations could result in seri-

ous injury or death.

LSD2490

Starting and driving 5-89

∙ Read and understand the limitations

of the sonar system as contained in

this section. Inclement weather may

affect the function of the sonar sys-

tem; this may include reduced perfor-

mance or a false activation.

∙ The system is deactivated at speeds

above 6 mph (10 km/h). It is reacti-

vated at lower speeds.

∙ Inclement weather or ultrasonic

sources such as an automatic car

wash, a truck’s compressed-air

brakes or a pneumatic drill may affect

the function of the system; this may

include reduced performance or a

false activation.

∙ The system is not designed to prevent

contact with small or moving objects.

Always move slowly. The system will

not detect small objects below the

bumper or on the ground.

∙ The system may not detect the fol-

lowing objects: fluffy objects such as

snow, cloth, cotton, glass-wool, etc.;

thin objects such as rope, wire and

chain, etc.; or wedge-shaped objects.

∙ The system may not detect objects at

speeds above 3 mph (5 km/h) and

may not detect certain angular or

moving objects.

SYSTEM TEMPORARILY

UNAVAILABLE

When sonar blockage is detected, the sys-

tem will be deactivated automatically.

The system is not available until the condi-

tions no longer exist.

The sonar sensors may be blocked by tem-

porary ambient conditions such as splash-

ing water, mist or fog. The blocked condi-

tion may also be caused by objects such as

ice, frost or dirt obstructing the sonar sen-

sors.

Action to take:

When the above conditions no longer exist,

the system will resume automatically.

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

The sonar sensors are located on the front

and rear bumpers. Always keep the area

near the sonar sensors clean.

The sonar sensors may be blocked by tem-

porary ambient conditions such as splash-

ing water, mist or fog.

The blocked condition may also be caused

by objects such as ice, frost or dirt ob-

structing the sonar sensors.

Check for and remove objects obstructing

the area around the sonar sensors.

LSD2135

5-90 Starting and driving

Do not attach stickers (including transpar-

ent material), install accessories or apply

additional paint near the sonar sensors.

Do not strike or damage the area around

the sonar sensors. It is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around

the sonar sensors is damaged due to a

collision.

FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK

To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply

de-icer through the key hole. If the lock

becomes frozen, heat the key before in-

serting it into the key hole or use the re-

mote keyless entry function on the Intelli-

gent Key.

ANTIFREEZE

In the winter when it is anticipated that the

temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C),

check the antifreeze to assure proper win-

ter protection. For additional information,

refer to “Engine cooling system” in the “Do-

it-yourself” section of this manual.

BATTERY

If the battery is not fully charged during

extremely cold weather conditions, the

battery fluid may freeze and damage the

battery. To maintain maximum efficiency,

the battery should be checked regularly.

For additional information, refer to “Battery”

in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER

If the vehicle is to be left outside without

anti-freeze, drain the cooling system, in-

cluding the engine block. Refill before oper-

ating the vehicle. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Changing engine coolant” in

the “Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

TIRE EQUIPMENT

1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to

provide superior performance on dry

pavement. However, the performance

of these tires will be substantially re-

duced in snowy and icy conditions. If

you operate your vehicle on snowy or

icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use

of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES

on all four wheels. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for the tire

type, size, speed rating and availability

information.

2. For additional traction on icy roads,

studded tires may be used. However,

some U.S. states and Canadian prov-

inces prohibit their use. Check local,

state and provincial laws before install-

ing studded tires.

COLD WEATHER DRIVING

Starting and driving 5-91

Skid and traction capabilities of studded

snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be

poorer than that of non-studded snow

tires.

3. Tire chains may be used. For additional

information, refer to “Tire chains” in the

“Do-it-yourself” section of this manual.

SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT

It is recommended that the following items

be carried in the vehicle during winter:

∙ A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to re-

move ice and snow from the windows

and wiper blades.

∙ A sturdy, flat board to be placed under

the jack to give it firm support.

∙ A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snow-

drifts.

∙ Extra washer fluid to refill the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE

WARNING

∙ Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain),

very cold snow or ice can be slick and

very hard to drive on. The vehicle will

have much less traction or “grip” un-

der these conditions.Try to avoid driv-

ing on wet ice until the road is salted

or sanded.

∙ Whatever the condition, drive with

caution. Accelerate and slow down

with care. If accelerating or down-

shifting too fast, the drive wheels will

lose even more traction.

∙ Allow more stopping distance under

these conditions. Braking should be

started sooner than on dry pavement.

∙ Allow greater following distances on

slippery roads.

∙ Watch for slippery spots (glare ice).

These may appear on an otherwise

clear road in shaded areas. If a patch

of ice is seen ahead, brake before

reaching it. Try not to brake while on

the ice,and avoid any sudden steering

maneuvers.

∙ Do not use the cruise control on slip-

pery roads.

∙ Snow can trap dangerous exhaust

gases under your vehicle. Keep snow

clear of the exhaust pipe and from

around your vehicle.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER (if so

equipped)

Engine block heaters are used to assist

with cold temperature starting.

The engine block heater should be used

when the outside temperature is 20°F (-7°C)

or lower.

WARNING

∙ Do not use your engine block heater

with an ungrounded electrical system

or a 2-pronged adapter. You can be

seriously injured by an electrical

shock if you use an ungrounded

connection.

∙ Disconnect and properly store the en-

gine block heater cord before starting

the engine. Damage to the cord could

result in an electrical shock and can

cause serious injury.

5-92 Starting and driving

∙ Use a heavy-duty 3-wire, 3-pronged

extension cord rated for at least 10 A.

Plug the extension cord into a Ground

Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected,

grounded 110-VAC outlet. Failure to

use the proper extension cord or a

grounded outlet can result in a fire or

electrical shock and cause serious

personal injury.

To use the engine block heater:

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the engine

block heater cord.

3. Plug the engine block heater cord into

a grounded 3-wire, 3-pronged exten-

sion cord.

4. Plug the extension cord into a Ground

Fault Interrupt (GFI) protected,

grounded 110-volt AC (VAC) outlet.

5. The engine block heater must be

plugged in for at least 2–4 hours, de-

pending on outside temperatures, to

properly warm the engine coolant. Use

an appropriate timer to turn the engine

block heater on.

6. Before starting the engine, unplug and

properly store the cord to keep it away

from moving parts.

Starting and driving 5-93

MEMO

5-94 Starting and driving

6 In case of emergency

Hazard warning flasher switch ..................6-2

First aid kit (if so equipped) ......................6-2

Emergency engine shut off ......................6-3

Flat tire ..........................................6-3

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)........................................6-3

Changing a flat tire ...........................6-4

Jump starting ..................................6-10

Push starting ...................................6-12

If your vehicle overheats........................6-12

Towing your vehicle ............................6-13

Towing recommended by NISSAN ...........6-13

Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck

vehicle) ......................................6-14

Push the switch on to warn other drivers

when you must stop or park under emer-

gency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.

WARNING

∙ If stopping for an emergency, be sure

to move the vehicle well off the road.

∙ Do not use the hazard warning flash-

ers while moving on the highway un-

less unusual circumstances force you

to drive so slowly that your vehicle

might become a hazard to other

traffic.

∙ Turn signals do not work when the

hazard warning flasher lights are on.

The flashers will operate with the ignition

switch placed in any position.

Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use

of the hazard warning flasher switch

while driving.

A first aid kit is located in the trunk. To re-

move the first aid kit:

Open the trunk. Lift the luggage floor. The

first aid kit 䊊

1is located in the storage

cover 䊊

LIC0394 LCE2131

HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH FIRST AID KIT (if so equipped)

6-2 In case of emergency

To shut off the engine in an emergency

situation while driving, perform the follow-

ing procedure:

– Rapidly push the push-button ignition

switch three consecutive times in less

than 1.5 seconds, or

– Push and hold the push-button ignition

switch for more than 2 seconds.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING

SYSTEM (TPMS)

This vehicle is equipped with TPMS. It moni-

tors tire pressure of all tires except the

spare. When the low tire pressure warning

light is lit, and the “Tire Pressure Low - Add

Air” warning appears in the vehicle infor-

mation display, one or more of your tires is

significantly under-inflated. If equipped, the

system also displays pressure of all tires

(except the spare tire) on the display screen

by sending a signal from a sensor that is

installed in each wheel. If the vehicle is be-

ing driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS

will activate and warn you of it by the low

tire pressure warning light. This system will

activate only when the vehicle is driven at

speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). For addi-

tional information, refer to “Warning lights,

indicator lights and audible reminders” in

the “Instruments and controls” section and

“Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)” in

the “Starting and driving” section of this

manual.

WARNING

∙ Radio waves could adversely affect

electric medical equipment. Those

who use a pacemaker should contact

the electric medical equipment

manufacturer for the possible influ-

ences before use.

∙ If the low tire pressure warning light

illuminates while driving, avoid sud-

den steering maneuvers or abrupt

braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off

the road to a safe location and stop

the vehicle as soon as possible. Driv-

ing with under-inflated tires may per-

manently damage the tires and in-

crease the likelihood of tire failure.

Serious vehicle damage could occur

and may lead to an accident and could

result in serious personal injury.

Check the tire pressure for all four

tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the

recommended COLD tire pressure

shown on the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label to turn the low tire pres-

sure warning light OFF. If you have a

flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as

soon as possible.

EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF FLAT TIRE

In case of emergency 6-3

∙ When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS such as the spare tire, TPMS will

not function and the low tire pressure

warning light will flash for approxi-

mately one minute. Have your tires re-

placed and/or TPMS system reset as

soon as possible. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

these services.

∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could affect

the proper operation of the TPMS.

∙ Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol

tire sealant into the tires, as this may

cause a malfunction of the tire pres-

sure sensors.

CHANGING A FLAT TIRE

If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions

below:

Stopping the vehicle

1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and

away from traffic.

2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.

3. Park on a level surface and apply the

parking brake. Move the shift lever to P

(Park).

4. Turn off the engine.

5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic

and to signal professional road assis-

tance personnel that you need assis-

tance.

6. Have all passengers get out of the ve-

hicle and stand in a safe place, away

from traffic and clear of the vehicle.

WARNING

∙ Make sure the parking brake is se-

curely applied and the Continuously

Variable Transmission (CVT) is shifted

into P (Park).

∙ Never change tires when the vehicle is

on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is

hazardous.

∙ Never change tires if oncoming traffic

is close to your vehicle. Wait for pro-

fessional road assistance.

A. Blocks

B. Flat tire

Blocking wheels

Place suitable blocks at both the front and

back of the wheel diagonally opposite the

flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving

when it is jacked up.

WARNING

Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle

may move and result in personal injury.

LCE2142

6-4 In case of emergency

Getting the spare tire and tools

Open the trunk. Lift the luggage floor. Re-

move the wheel nut wrench 䊊

1and the

jack 䊊

2from the storage cover 䊊

3. Then

remove the tool storage cover 䊊

3to access

the spare tire.

Type A (if so equipped)

LCE2046

Type B (if so equipped)

LCE2303

Type C (if so equipped)

LCE2379

In case of emergency 6-5

Turn the clamp to remove the spare tire.

Remove the spare tire.

Removing wheel cover (if so

equipped)

CAUTION

Do not use your hands to pry off wheel

caps or wheel covers. Doing so could

result in personal injury.

To remove the wheel cover, use the jack rod

䊊

1as illustrated.

Apply cloth 䊊

2between the wheel and jack

rod to prevent damaging the wheel and

wheel cover.

Type A (if so equipped)

WCE0067

Type B (if so equipped)

LCE0075 SCE0630

6-6 In case of emergency

Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover

or wheel surface.

Jacking up vehicle and removing

the damaged tire

WARNING

∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by the jack. If it is nec-

essary to work under the vehicle, sup-

port it with safety stands.

∙ Use only the jack provided with your

vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use

the jack provided with your vehicle on

other vehicles. The jack is designed

for lifting only your vehicle during a

tire change.

∙ Use the correct jack-up points. Never

use any other part of the vehicle for

jack support.

∙ Never jack up the vehicle more than

necessary.

∙ Never use blocks on or under the jack.

∙ Do not start or run the engine while

vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the

vehicle to move. This is especially true

for vehicles with limited slip

differentials.

∙ Do not allow passengers to stay in the

vehicle while it is on the jack.

∙ Never run the engine with a wheel(s)

off the ground. It may cause the ve-

hicle to move.

Jack-up point

WCE0160

In case of emergency 6-7

Always refer to the illustration for the cor-

rect placement and jack-up points for your

specific vehicle model and jack type.

Carefully read the caution label attached

to the jack body and the following in-

structions.

1. Loosen each wheel nut one or two

turns by turning counterclockwise with

the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove

the wheel nuts until the tire is off the

ground.

2. Place the jack directly under the

jack-up point as illustrated so the top

of the jack contacts the vehicle at the

jack-up point. Align the jack head be-

tween the two notches in the front or

the rear as shown. Also fit the groove of

the jack head between the notches as

shown.

The jack should be used on firm and

level ground.

3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack

lever and rod with both hands.Carefully

raise the vehicle until the tire clears the

ground. Remove the wheel nuts, and

then remove the tire.

Installing the spare tire

The spare tire is designed for emergency

use. For additional information, refer to

“Wheels and tires” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface

between the wheel and hub.

2. Carefully put the spare tire on and

tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.

3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten

wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the

sequence illustrated (䊊

A,䊊

B,䊊

C,䊊

D,䊊

until they are tight.

LCE0020 WCE0056

6-8 In case of emergency

4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire

touches the ground. Then, with the

wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel

nuts securely in the sequence illus-

trated (䊊

A,䊊

B,䊊

C,䊊

D,䊊

E). Lower the ve-

hicle completely.

WARNING

∙ Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly

tightened wheel nuts can cause the

wheel to become loose or come off.

This could cause an accident.

∙ Do not use oil or grease on the wheel

studs or nuts. This could cause the

nuts to become loose.

∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when the

vehicle has been driven for 600 miles

(1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,

etc.)

As soon as possible, tighten the wheel

nuts to the specified torque with a

torque wrench.

Wheel nut tightening torque:

83 ft-lb (113 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tightened

to specification at all times. It is recom-

mended that wheel nuts be tightened to

specifications at each lubrication inter-

val.

Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pres-

sure.

COLD pressure: After vehicle has been

parked for 3 hours or more or driven less

than 1 mile (1.6 km).

COLD tire pressures are shown on the

Tire Load and Information label affixed

to the driver side center pillar.

5. Securely store the flat tire and jacking

equipment in the vehicle.

6. Place the spare tire cover and the trunk

floor carpeting over the damaged tire.

NOTE:

You may need to remove the wheel cap

in order to secure the damaged tire us-

ing the spare tire clamp.

7. Close the trunk.

WARNING

∙ Always make sure that the spare tire

and jacking equipment are properly

secured after use. Such items can be-

come dangerous projectiles in an ac-

cident or sudden stop.

∙ The spare tire is designed for emer-

gency use. For additional information,

refer to “Wheels and tires” in the “Do-

it-yourself” section of this manual.

In case of emergency 6-9

To start your engine with a booster battery,

the instructions and precautions below

must be followed.

WARNING

∙ If done incorrectly, jump starting can

lead to a battery explosion, resulting

in severe injury or death. It could also

damage your vehicle.

∙ Explosive hydrogen gas is always

present in the vicinity of the battery.

Keep all sparks and flames away from

the battery.

∙ Do not allow battery fluid to come into

contact with eyes, skin, clothing or

painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a

corrosive sulfuric acid solution which

can cause severe burns. If the fluid

should come into contact with any-

thing, immediately flush the con-

tacted area with water.

∙ Keep battery out of the reach of

children.

∙ The booster battery must be rated at

12 volts. Use of an improperly rated

battery can damage your vehicle.

∙ Whenever working on or near a bat-

tery, always wear suitable eye protec-

tors (for example, goggles or indus-

trial safety spectacles) and remove

rings, metal bands, or any other jew-

elry. Do not lean over the battery

when jump starting.

∙ Do not attempt to jump start a frozen

battery. It could explode and cause

serious injury.

∙ Your vehicle has an automatic engine

cooling fan. It could come on at any

time. Keep hands and other objects

away from it.

JUMP STARTING

6-10 In case of emergency

WARNING

Always follow the instructions below.

Failure to do so could result in damage

to the charging system and cause per-

sonal injury.

1. If the booster battery is in another ve-

hicle, position the two vehicles to bring

their batteries near each other.

Do not allow the two vehicles to

touch.

2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift

lever to P (Park). Switch off all unneces-

sary electrical systems (lights, heater,

air conditioner, etc.).

3. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK

position.

4. Ensure the vent caps are level and

tight.

5. Connect the jumper cables in the se-

quence illustrated (䊊

A,䊊

B,䊊

C,䊊

D).

CAUTION

∙ Always connect positive (⫹) to posi-

tive (⫹) and negative (⫺) to body

ground (for example, strut mounting

bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) — not to

the battery.

∙ Make sure the jumper cables do not

touch moving parts in the engine

compartment and that the cable

clamps do not contact any other

metal.

6. Start the engine of the booster vehicle

and let it run for a few minutes.

7. Keep the engine speed of the booster

vehicle at about 2,000 rpm and start the

engine of the vehicle being jump

started.

CAUTION

Do not keep the starter motor engaged

for more than 10 seconds. If the engine

does not start right away, place the ig-

nition switch in the OFF position and

wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.

8. After starting the engine, carefully dis-

connect the negative cable and then

the positive cable.

LCE2223

In case of emergency 6-11

CAUTION

∙ Do not push start this vehicle. The

three-way catalyst may be damaged.

∙ Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) models cannot be push-started

or tow-started. Attempting to do so

may cause transmission damage.

If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by

an extremely high temperature gauge

reading), or if you feel a lack of engine

power, detect abnormal noise, etc. take the

following steps.

WARNING

∙ Do not continue to drive if your vehicle

overheats. Doing so could cause en-

gine damage or a vehicle fire.

∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never remove the radiator cap while

the engine is still hot. When the radia-

tor cap is removed, pressurized hot

water will spurt out, possibly causing

serious injury.

∙ Do not open the hood if steam is com-

ing out.

1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, ap-

ply the parking brake and move the

shift lever to P (Park).

Do not stop the engine.

2. Turn off the air conditioner. Open all the

windows, move the heater or air condi-

tioner temperature control to maxi-

mum hot and fan control to high

speed.

3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen

for steam or coolant escaping from the

radiator before opening the hood. (If

steam or coolant is escaping, turn off

the engine.) Do not open the hood fur-

ther until no steam or coolant can be

seen.

4. Open the engine hood.

WARNING

If steam or water is coming from the

engine, stand clear to prevent getting

burned.

5. Visually check drive belts for damage

or looseness. Also check if the cooling

fan is running. The radiator hoses and

radiator should not leak water. If cool-

ant is leaking, the water pump belt is

missing or loose, or the cooling fan

does not run, stop the engine.

WARNING

Be careful not to allow your hands, hair,

jewelry or clothing to come into contact

with, or get caught in, engine belts or

the engine cooling fan.The engine cool-

ing fan can start at any time.

PUSH STARTING IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS

6-12 In case of emergency

6. After the engine cools down, check the

coolant level in the engine coolant res-

ervoir tank with the engine running.

Add coolant to the engine coolant res-

ervoir tank if necessary. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

When towing your vehicle, all State (Provin-

cial in Canada) and local regulations for

towing must be followed. Incorrect towing

equipment could damage your vehicle.

Towing instructions are available from a

NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are

generally familiar with the applicable laws

and procedures for towing. To assure

proper towing and to prevent accidental

damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recom-

mends having a service operator tow your

vehicle. It is advisable to have the service

operator carefully read the following pre-

cautions:

WARNING

∙ Never ride in a vehicle that is being

towed.

∙ Never get under your vehicle after it

has been lifted by a tow truck.

CAUTION

∙ When towing, make sure that the

transmission, axles, steering system

and powertrain are in working condi-

tion. If any of these conditions apply,

dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be

used.

∙ Always attach safety chains before

towing.

For additional information, refer to “Flat

towing” in the “Technical and consumer in-

formation” section of this manual.

TOWING RECOMMENDED BY

NISSAN

NISSAN recommends towing your vehicle

based upon the type of drivetrain. For addi-

tional information, refer to the diagrams in

this section to ensure that your vehicle is

properly towed.

TOWING YOUR VEHICLE

In case of emergency 6-13

2WD models with Continuously

Variable Transmission (CVT)

NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be

towed with the driving (front) wheels off the

ground or place the vehicle on a flatbed

truck as illustrated.

CAUTION

∙ Never tow CVT models with the front

wheels on the ground or four wheels

on the ground (forward or backward),

as this may cause serious and expen-

sive damage to the transmission. If it

is necessary to tow the vehicle with

the rear wheels raised always use

towing dollies under the front wheels.

∙ When towing CVT models with the

rear wheels on the ground or on tow-

ing dollies:

– Place the ignition switch in the OFF

position, and secure the steering

wheel in a straight-ahead position

with a rope or similar device. Never

secure the steering wheel by plac-

ing the ignition switch in the LOCK

position. This may damage the

steering lock mechanism (for

models with a steering lock

mechanism).

VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a

stuck vehicle)

WARNING

To avoid vehicle damage, serious per-

sonal injury or death when recovering a

stuck vehicle:

∙ Contact a professional towing service

to recover the vehicle if you have any

questions regarding the recovery

procedure.

∙ Tow chains or cables must be at-

tached only to main structural mem-

bers of the vehicle.

∙ Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to

tow or free a stuck vehicle.

LCE2369

6-14 In case of emergency

∙ Only use devices specifically designed

for vehicle recovery and follow the

manufacturer’s instructions.

∙ Always pull the recovery device

straight out from the front of the ve-

hicle. Never pull at an angle.

∙ Route recovery devices so they do not

touch any part of the vehicle except

the attachment point.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,

etc., use a tow strap or other device de-

signed specifically for vehicle recovery. Al-

ways follow the manufacturer’s instruc-

tions for the recovery device.

Rocking a stuck vehicle

WARNING

∙ Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.

∙ Do not spin your tires at high speed.

This could cause them to explode and

result in serious injury. Parts of your

vehicle could also overheat and be

damaged.

If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud,

etc., use the following procedure:

1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control

(VDC) system.

2. Make sure the area in front and behind

the vehicle is clear of obstructions.

3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to

clear an area around the front tires.

4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and

backward.

∙ Shift back and forth between R (Re-

verse) and D (Drive).

∙ Apply the accelerator as little as pos-

sible to maintain the rocking motion.

∙ Release the accelerator pedal before

shifting between R (Reverse) and D

(Drive).

∙ Do not spin the tires above 35 mph

(55 km/h).

5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a

few tries, contact a professional towing

service to remove the vehicle.

In case of emergency 6-15

MEMO

6-16 In case of emergency

7 Appearance and care

Cleaning exterior ................................7-2

Washing......................................7-2

Waxing .......................................7-2

Removing spots ..............................7-3

Underbody ...................................7-3

Glass .........................................7-3

Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) .......7-3

Chromeparts................................7-4

Tire dressings ................................7-4

Cleaning interior.................................7-4

Air fresheners ................................7-5

Floor mats (if so equipped) ...................7-5

Seatbelts....................................7-6

Corrosion protection ............................7-7

Most common factors contributing to

vehicle corrosion ............................. 7-7

Environmental factors influence the

rate of corrosion.............................. 7-7

Protect your vehicle from corrosion .......... 7-7

In order to maintain the appearance of

your vehicle, it is important to take proper

care of it.

To protect the paint surfaces, wash your

vehicle as soon as you can:

∙ After a rainfall to prevent possible dam-

age from acid rain.

∙ After driving on coastal roads.

∙ When contaminants such as soot, bird

droppings, tree sap, metal particles or

bugs get on the paint surface.

∙ When dust or mud builds up on the sur-

face.

Whenever possible, store or park your ve-

hicle inside a garage or in a covered area.

When it is necessary to park outside, park in

a shady area or protect the vehicle with a

body cover.

Be careful not to scratch the paint sur-

face when putting on or removing the

body cover.

WASHING

Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty

of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly us-

ing a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or

general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed

with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.

CAUTION

∙ Do not use car washes that use acid in

the detergent. Some car washes, es-

pecially brushless ones, use some

acid for cleaning. The acid may react

with some plastic vehicle compo-

nents, causing them to crack. This

could affect their appearance, and

also could cause them not to function

properly. Always check with your car

wash to confirm that acid is not used.

∙ Do not wash the vehicle with strong

household soap, strong chemical de-

tergents, gasoline or solvents.

∙ Do not wash the vehicle in direct sun-

light or while the vehicle body is hot,

as the surface may become

water-spotted.

∙ Avoid using tight-napped or rough

cloths, such as washing mitts. Care

must be taken when removing

caked-on dirt or other foreign sub-

stances so the paint surface is not

scratched or damaged.

Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of

clean water.

Inside edges, seams and folds on the

doors, hatches and hood are particularly

vulnerable to the effects of road salt.There-

fore, these areas must be cleaned regularly.

Take care that the drain holes in the lower

edge of the door are open. Spray water

under the body and in the wheel wells to

loosen the dirt and wash away road salt.

A damp chamois can be used to dry the

vehicle to avoid water spots.

WAXING

Regular waxing protects the paint surface

and helps retain new vehicle appearance.

Polishing is recommended to remove

built-up wax residue and to avoid a weath-

ered appearance before re-applying wax.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer to assist you in choosing the proper

product.

CLEANING EXTERIOR

7-2 Appearance and care

∙ Wax your vehicle only after a thorough

washing. Follow the instructions sup-

plied with the wax.

∙ Do not use a wax containing any abra-

sives, cutting compounds or cleaners

that may damage the vehicle finish.

Machine compounding or aggressive pol-

ishing on a base coat/clear coat paint fin-

ish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.

REMOVING SPOTS

Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust,

insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible

from the surface of the paint to avoid last-

ing damage or staining. Special cleaning

products are available at a NISSAN dealer

or any automotive accessory store. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for these products.

UNDERBODY

In areas where road salt is used in winter, it

is necessary to clean the underbody regu-

larly in order to prevent dirt and salt from

building up and causing the acceleration of

corrosion on the underbody and suspen-

sion. Before the winter period and again in

the spring, the underseal must be checked

and, if necessary, re-treated.

GLASS

When cleaning the rear window, it may be

easier to clean if the inside high-mounted

stop light (if so equipped) is removed first.

Be careful when removing the high-

mounted stop light to reduce the risk of

damaging the high-mounted stop light

wires.

To remove the high-mounted stop light:

䊊

1Push toward rear of vehicle.

䊊

2Lift to remove.

The high-mounted stop light must be

properly reinstalled before driving your ve-

hicle.

Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and

dust film from the glass surfaces. It is nor-

mal for glass to become coated with a film

after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun.

Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily

remove this film.

CAUTION

When cleaning the inside of the win-

dows, do not use sharp-edged tools,

abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based

disinfectant cleaners. They could dam-

age the electrical conductors, radio an-

tenna elements or rear window de-

froster elements.

ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if so

equipped)

Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge

dampened in a mild soap solution, espe-

cially during winter months in areas where

road salt is used. If not removed, road salt

can discolor the wheels.

WAI0005

Appearance and care 7-3

CAUTION

Follow the directions below to avoid

staining or discoloring the wheels:

∙ Do not use a cleaner that uses strong

acid or alkali contents to clean the

wheels.

∙ Do not apply wheel cleaners to the

wheels when they are hot. The wheel

temperature should be the same as

ambient temperature.

∙ Rinse the wheel to completely remove

the cleaner within 15 minutes after

the cleaner is applied.

CHROME PARTS

Clean all chrome parts regularly with a

non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain

the finish.

TIRE DRESSINGS

NISSAN does not recommend the use of

tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a

coating to the tires to help reduce discolor-

ation of the rubber. If a tire dressing is ap-

plied to the tires, it may react with the coat-

ing and form a compound. This compound

may come off the tire while driving and

stain the vehicle paint.

If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the

following precautions:

∙ Use a water-based tire dressing. The

coating on the tire dissolves more easily

than with an oil-based tire dressing.

∙ Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help

prevent it from entering the tire

tread/grooves (where it would be diffi-

cult to remove).

∙ Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry

towel. Make sure the tire dressing is

completely removed from the tire

tread/grooves.

∙ Allow the tire dressing to dry as recom-

mended by the tire dressing manufac-

turer.

Occasionally remove loose dust from the

interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a

vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe

the vinyl and leather (if so equipped) sur-

faces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in

mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a

dry, soft cloth.

Regular care and cleaning is required in

order to maintain the appearance of the

leather (if so equipped).

Before using any fabric protector, read the

manufacturer’s recommendations. Some

fabric protectors contain chemicals that

may stain or bleach the seat material.

Use a cloth dampened only with water to

clean the meter and gauge lens.

WARNING

Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot

steam cleaners) on the seat. This can

damage the seat or occupant classifi-

cation sensor. This can also affect the

operation of the air bag system and re-

sult in serious personal injury.

CLEANING INTERIOR

7-4 Appearance and care

CAUTION

∙ Never use benzine, thinner or any

similar material.

∙ Small dirt particles can be abrasive

and damaging to leather surfaces

and should be removed promptly. Do

not use saddle soap, car waxes, pol-

ishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents,

detergents or ammonia-based clean-

ers as they may damage the leather’s

natural finish.

∙ Never use fabric protectors unless

recommended by the manufacturer.

∙ Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on

meter or gauge lens covers. It may

damage the lens cover.

AIR FRESHENERS

Most air fresheners use a solvent that

could affect the vehicle interior. If you use

an air freshener, take the following precau-

tions:

∙ Hanging-type air fresheners can cause

permanent discoloration when they

contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place

the air freshener in a location that al-

lows it to hang free and not contact an

interior surface.

∙ Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip

on the vents. These products can cause

immediate damage and discoloration

when spilled on interior surfaces.

Carefully read and follow the manufactur-

er’s instructions before using the air fresh-

eners.

FLOOR MATS (if so equipped)

WARNING

To avoid potential pedal interference

that may result in a collision, injury or

death:

∙ NEVER place a floor mat on top of an-

other floor mat in the driver front po-

sition or install them upside down or

backwards.

LAI0009

Appearance and care 7-5

∙ Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats,

or equivalent floor mats, that are spe-

cifically designed for use in your ve-

hicle model and model year.

∙ Properly position the mats in the

floorwell using the floor mat position-

ing hook. For additional information,

refer to "Floor mat installation" in this

section.

∙ Make sure the floor mat does not in-

terfere with pedal operation.

∙ Periodically check the floor mats to

make sure they are properly installed.

∙ After cleaning the vehicle interior,

check the floor mats to make sure

they are properly installed.

The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can

extend the life of your vehicle carpet and

make it easier to clean the interior. Mats

should be maintained with regular clean-

ing and replaced if they become exces-

sively worn.

Floor mat installation

Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat po-

sitioning hook(s). The number and shape of

the floor mat positioning hooks for each

seating position varies depending on the

vehicle.

When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats,

follow the installation instructions provided

with the mat and the following:

1. With the ignition in the OFF position, the

shift lever in P (Park) position and with

the parking brake fully applied, position

the floor mat in the floorwell so that the

floor mat grommet holes are aligned

with the hook(s).

2. Secure the grommet holes into the

hook(s) and ensure that the floor mat is

properly positioned.

3. Make sure the floor mat does not inter-

fere with pedal operation. With the igni-

tion still in the OFF position, the shift

lever in the P (Park) position and with

the parking brake applied, fully apply

and release all pedals. The floor mat

must not interfere with pedal opera-

tion or prevent the pedal from return-

ing to its normal position.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for details about installing the floor

mats in your vehicle.

The illustration shows the location of the

floor mat positioning hooks.

SEAT BELTS

The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping

them with a sponge dampened in a mild

soap solution. Allow the belts to dry com-

pletely in the shade before using them. For

additional information, refer to “Seat belt

maintenance” in the “Safety—Seats, seat

belts and supplemental restraint system”

section of this manual.

Positioning hooks

LAI2045

7-6 Appearance and care

WARNING

Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in

the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or

chemical solvents to clean the seat

belts, since these materials may se-

verely weaken the seat belt webbing.

MOST COMMON FACTORS

CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE

CORROSION

Most vehicle corrosion is caused by:

∙ The accumulation of moisture-

retaining dirt and debris in body panel

sections, cavities, and other areas.

∙ Damage to paint and other protective

coatings caused by gravel and stone

chips or minor traffic collisions.

ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS

INFLUENCE THE RATE OF

CORROSION

Moisture

Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on

the vehicle body underside can accelerate

corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry

completely inside the vehicle and should

be removed for drying to avoid floor panel

corrosion.

Relative humidity

Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of

high relative humidity, especially those ar-

eas where the temperatures stay above

freezing and where atmospheric pollution

exists and road salt is used.

Temperature

High temperatures accelerate the rate of

corrosion to those parts which are not well

ventilated.

Air pollution

Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in

the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt

use accelerates the corrosion process.

Road salt also accelerates the disintegra-

tion of paint surfaces.

PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM

CORROSION

∙ Wash and wax your vehicle often to

keep the vehicle clean.

∙ Always check for minor damage to the

paint and repair it as soon as possible.

∙ Keep drain holes at the bottom of the

doors open to avoid water accumula-

tion.

∙ Check the underbody for accumulation

of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with

water as soon as possible.

CORROSION PROTECTION

Appearance and care 7-7

CAUTION

∙ NEVER remove dirt, sand or other de-

bris from the passenger compart-

ment by washing it out with a hose.

Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or

broom.

∙ Never allow water or other liquids to

come in contact with electronic com-

ponents inside the vehicle as this may

damage them.

Chemicals used for road surface de-icing

are extremely corrosive. They accelerate

corrosion and deterioration of underbody

components such as the exhaust system,

fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan

and fenders.

In winter, the underbody must be

cleaned periodically.

For additional protection against rust and

corrosion, which may be required in some

areas, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer.

License plate bracket padding

1. License plate

2. Trunk

3. License plate frame

4. Padding

CAUTION

A license plate frame could vibrate and

cause noise or paint damage. To avoid

damage or noise, add a soft adhesive

pad with a maximum thickness of 1/8 in

(4 mm) to the back lower edge of the

license plate frame.

LAI2001

7-8 Appearance and care

8 Do-it-yourself

Maintenance precautions .......................8-2

Engine compartment check locations...........8-3

Engine cooling system ..........................8-5

Checking engine coolant level ................8-6

Changing engine coolant.....................8-6

Engine oil........................................8-7

Checking engine oil level .....................8-7

Changing engine oil ..........................8-8

Changing engine oil filter ....................8-10

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

fluid .............................................8-11

Power Steering Fluid (PSF) .......................8-11

Brake fluid ......................................8-12

Windshield-washer fluid ........................8-13

Windshield-washer fluid reservoir............8-13

Battery.........................................8-14

Jump starting ...............................8-15

Variable voltage control system ................8-16

Drive belt .......................................8-16

Spark plugs ....................................8-17

Replacing spark plugs .......................8-17

Air cleaner......................................8-18

In-cabin microfilter ..........................8-19

Windshield wiper blades ........................8-19

Cleaning ....................................8-19

Replacing ...................................8-20

Brakes..........................................8-21

Fuses...........................................8-21

Engine compartment .......................8-22

Passenger compartment....................8-23

Battery replacement ...........................8-24

NISSAN Intelligent Key® ......................8-25

Lights ..........................................8-26

Headlights...................................8-26

Fog lights (if so equipped) ...................8-26

Exterior and interior lights ...................8-28

Wheels and tires................................8-31

Tire pressure ................................8-31

Tire labeling .................................8-35

Types of tires ................................8-38

Tire chains ..................................8-39

Changing wheels and tires ..................8-40

When performing any inspection or main-

tenance work on your vehicle, always take

care to prevent serious accidental injury to

yourself or damage to the vehicle. The fol-

lowing are general precautions which

should be closely observed.

WARNING

∙ Park the vehicle on a level surface, ap-

ply the parking brake securely and

block the wheels to prevent the ve-

hicle from moving. Move the shift le-

ver to P (Park).

∙ Be sure the ignition key is in the OFF or

LOCK position when performing any

parts replacement or repairs.

∙ If you must work with the engine run-

ning, keep your hands, clothing, hair

and tools away from moving fans,

belts and any other moving parts.

∙ It is advisable to secure or remove any

loose clothing and remove any jew-

elry, such as rings, watches, etc. be-

fore working on your vehicle.

∙ Always wear eye protection whenever

you work on your vehicle.

∙ Your vehicle is equipped with an auto-

matic engine cooling fan. It may come

on at any time without warning, even

if the ignition key is in the OFF position

and the engine is not running. To

avoid injury, always disconnect the

negative battery cable before work-

ing near the fan.

∙ If you must run the engine in an en-

closed space such as a garage, be sure

there is proper ventilation for exhaust

gases to escape.

∙ Never get under the vehicle while it is

supported only by a jack. If it is neces-

sary to work under the vehicle, sup-

port it with safety stands.

∙ Keep smoking materials, flame and

sparks away from the fuel tank and

battery.

∙ On gasoline engine models, the fuel

filter or fuel lines should be serviced. It

is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service because

the fuel lines are under high pressure

even when the engine is off.

CAUTION

∙ Do not work under the hood while the

engine is hot. Turn the engine off and

wait until it cools down.

∙

Avoid contact with used engine oil and

coolant. Improperly disposed engine

oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle

fluids can damage the environment. Al-

ways conform to local regulations for

disposal of vehicle fluid.

∙ Never leave the engine or the trans-

mission related component harness

connector disconnected while the ig-

nition switch is in the ON position.

∙ Never connect or disconnect the bat-

tery or any transistorized component

while the ignition switch is in the ON

position.

This “Do-it-yourself” section gives instruc-

tions regarding only those items which are

relatively easy for an owner to perform.

A Genuine NISSAN service manual is also

available. For additional information, refer

to “Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order

information” in the “Technical and con-

sumer information” section of this manual.

You should be aware that incomplete or

improper servicing may result in operating

difficulties or excessive emissions, and

could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt

about any servicing, it is recommended

that you have it done by a NISSAN dealer.

MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS

8-2 Do-it-yourself

QR25DE engine

1. Power steering fluid reservoir

2. Engine coolant reservoir

3. Engine oil filler cap

4. Brake fluid reservoir

5. Air cleaner

6. Fuse/Fusible link box

7. Battery

8. Engine oil dipstick

9. Radiator cap

10. Drive belt location

11. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

LDI2111

ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK

LOCATIONS

Do-it-yourself 8-3

VQ35DE engine

1. Power steering fluid reservoir

2. Engine coolant reservoir

3. Engine oil filler cap

4. Brake fluid reservoir

5. Air cleaner

6. Fuse/Fusible link box

7. Battery

8. Engine oil dipstick

9. Radiator cap

10. Drive belt location

11. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir

LDI2112

8-4 Do-it-yourself

The engine cooling system is filled at the

factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50%

Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and 50% water to

provide year-round antifreeze and coolant

protection. The antifreeze solution con-

tains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Addi-

tional engine cooling system additives are

not necessary.

WARNING

∙ Never remove the radiator or coolant

reservoir cap when the engine is hot.

Wait until the engine and radiator cool

down. Serious burns could be caused

by high pressure fluid escaping from

the radiator. For additional informa-

tion on precautions, refer to “If your

vehicle overheats” in the “In case of

emergency” section of this manual.

∙ The radiator is equipped with a pres-

sure type radiator cap. To prevent en-

gine damage, use only a Genuine

NISSAN radiator cap.

CAUTION

∙ Never use any cooling system addi-

tives such as radiator sealer. Additives

may clog the cooling system and

cause damage to the engine, trans-

mission and/or cooling system.

∙ When adding or replacing coolant, be

sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or

equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is pre-

diluted to provide antifreeze protec-

tion to -34° F (-37° C). If additional

freeze protection is needed due to

weather where you operate your ve-

hicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) concen-

trate following the directions on the

container. If an equivalent coolant

other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, fol-

low the coolant manufacturer’s in-

structions to maintain minimum anti-

freeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The

use of other types of coolant solu-

tions other than Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or

equivalent may damage the engine

cooling system.

∙ The life expectancy of the factory-fill

coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

or 7 years. Mixing any other type of

coolant other than Genuine NISSAN

Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue),

including Genuine NISSAN Long Life

Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use

of non-distilled water will reduce the

life expectancy of the factory-fill cool-

ant. For additional information, refer

to the "Maintenance and schedules"

section of this manual.

ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM

Do-it-yourself 8-5

CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT

LEVEL

Check the coolant level in the reservoir

when the engine is cold. If the coolant

level is below the MIN level 䊊

B, add coolant

to the MAX level 䊊

A. If the reservoir is empty,

check the coolant level in the radiator

when the engine is cold. If there is insuffi-

cient coolant in the radiator, fill the radiator

with coolant up to the filler opening and

also add it to the reservoir up to the MAX

level 䊊

This vehicle contains Genuine NISSAN Long

Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue). The life ex-

pectancy of the factory-fill coolant is

105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing

any other type of coolant or the use of

non-distilled water will reduce the life ex-

pectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For ad-

ditional information, refer to the "Mainte-

nance and schedules" section of this

manual.

For additional information on the location

of the engine coolant reservoir, refer to “En-

gine compartment check locations” in this

section.

If the cooling system frequently requires

coolant, have it checked. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT

A NISSAN dealer can change the engine

coolant. The service procedure can be

found in the NISSAN Service Manual.

Improper servicing can result in reduced

heater performance and engine over-

heating.

WARNING

∙ To avoid the danger of being scalded,

never change the coolant when the

engine is hot.

∙ Never remove the radiator cap when

the engine is hot. Serious burns could

be caused by high pressure fluid es-

caping from the radiator.

∙ Avoid direct skin contact with used

coolant. If skin contact is made, wash

thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner

as soon as possible.

∙ Keep coolant out of the reach of chil-

dren and pets.

Engine coolant must be disposed of prop-

erly. Check your local regulations.

LDI2750

8-6 Do-it-yourself

CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it

reaches operating temperature.

3. Turn off the engine. Wait more than

10 minutes for the oil to drain back

into the oil pan.

4. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.

Reinsert it all the way.

5. Remove the dipstick again and check

the oil level. It should be between the H

(High) and L (Low) marks 䊊

B. This is the

normal operating oil level range. If the

oil level is below the L (Low) mark 䊊

remove the oil filler cap and pour rec-

ommended oil through the opening.

Do not overfill 䊊

6. Recheck oil level with the dipstick.

It is normal to add some oil between oil

maintenance intervals or during the

break-in period, depending on the sever-

ity of operating conditions.

QR25DE engine

LDI2120

VQ35DE engine

LDI2121

QR25DE engine

LDI2812

ENGINE OIL

Do-it-yourself 8-7

CAUTION

∙ Oil level should be checked regularly.

Operating the engine with an insuffi-

cient amount of oil can damage the

engine, and such damage is not cov-

ered by warranty.

∙ It is normal to add some oil between

oil maintenance intervals or during

the break-in period, depending on the

severity of operating conditions.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Start the engine and let it idle until it

reaches operating temperature, then

turn it off.

3. Remove the oil filler cap 䊊

Aby turning it

counterclockwise.

4. Remove the pins 䊊

Bfrom the under-

cover. Gently pull the undercover to

gain access to the drain plug. (VQ35DE

engine only)

VQ35DE engine

WDI0214 LDI2866

VQ35DE engine only

LDI2558

8-8 Do-it-yourself

5. Place a large drain pan under the drain

plug 䊊

6. Remove the drain plug 䊊

Cwith a

wrench by turning it counterclockwise

and completely drain the oil.

If the oil filter is to be changed, remove

and replace it at this time. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Changing

engine oil filter” in this section.

∙Waste oil must be disposed of prop-

erly.

∙Check your local regulations.

WARNING

∙ Prolonged and repeated contact with

used engine oil may cause skin

cancer.

∙ Try to avoid direct skin contact with

used oil. If skin contact is made, wash

thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner

as soon as possible.

∙ Keep used engine oil out of reach of

children.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The en-

gine oil may be hot.

7. Clean and reinstall the drain plug 䊊

and a new washer. Securely tighten the

drain plug with a wrench. Do not use

excessive force.

Drain plug tightening torque:

25 ft-lb (34 N·m)

8. Refill engine with recommended oil

through the oil filler opening, then in-

stall the oil filler cap securely.

For additional information on drain

and refill capacity, refer to “Recom-

mended fluids/lubricants and capaci-

ties” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

The drain and refill capacity depends

on the oil temperature and drain time.

Use these specifications for reference

only. Always use the dipstick to deter-

mine when the proper amount of oil is

in the engine.

9. Start the engine. Check for leakage

around the drain plug and oil filter. Cor-

rect as required.

QR25DE

LDI2927

VQ35DE

LDI2634

Do-it-yourself 8-9

10. Turn the engine off and wait more than

10 minutes. Check the oil level with the

dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.

CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and

apply the parking brake.

2. Turn the engine off.

3. Place a large drain pan under the oil

filter 䊊

4. Remove pins 䊊

Afrom the right engine

protector located inside right wheel

well, remove protector. Remove oil filter

䊊

Bwith an oil filter wrench by turning it

counterclockwise. Then remove the oil

filter by turning it by hand.

CAUTION

Be careful not to burn yourself. The en-

gine oil may be hot.

5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface

with a clean rag.

CAUTION

∙ Be sure to remove any old gasket

material remaining on the sealing

surface of the engine. Failure to do

so could lead to an oil leak and en-

gine damage.

∙ The dipstick must be inserted in

place to prevent oil spillage from

the dipstick hole when filling the

engine with oil.

6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with

clean engine oil.

LDI2814

8-10 Do-it-yourself

7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resis-

tance is felt, then tighten an additional

2/3 turn.

8. Start the engine and check for leakage

around the oil filter. Correct as required.

9. Turn the engine off and wait more than

10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add en-

gine oil if necessary.

CAUTION

∙ NISSAN recommends using Genuine

NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent)

ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with

other fluids.

∙ Do not use Automatic Transmission

Fluid (ATF) or manual transmission

fluid in a NISSAN CVT, as it may dam-

age the CVT. Damage caused by the

use of fluids other than as recom-

mended is not covered under

NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

∙ Using fluids that are not equivalent to

Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may

also damage the CVT. Damage caused

by the use of fluids other than as rec-

ommended is not covered under

NISSAN’s New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

When checking or replacement of CVT fluid

is required, it is recommended that you visit

a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir.

The fluid level should be checked when the

fluid is cold at fluid temperatures of 32 to

86F (0 to 30C). The fluid level can be

checked with the level gauge which is at-

tached to the cap. To check the fluid level,

remove the cap. The fluid level should be

between the MAX 䊊

Aand MIN 䊊

Blines.

If the fluid is below the MIN 䊊

Bline, add

Genuine NISSAN E-PSF or equivalent. Re-

move the cap and fill through the opening.

LDI2752

CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE

TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID POWER STEERING FLUID (PSF)

Do-it-yourself 8-11

WARNING

Power steering fluid is poisonous and

should be stored carefully in marked

containers out of the reach of children.

CAUTION

∙ DO NOT OVERFILL.

∙ Use of a power steering fluid other

than Genuine NISSAN E-PSF or

equivalent will prevent the power

steering system from operating

properly.

For additional information on brake fluid

specification, refer to “Recommended

fluids/lubricants and capacities” in the

“Technical and consumer information” sec-

tion of this manual.

WARNING

∙ Use only new fluid from a sealed con-

tainer. Old, inferior or contaminated

fluid may damage the brake system.

The use of improper fluids can dam-

age the brake system and affect the

vehicle’s stopping ability.

∙ Clean the filler cap before removing.

∙ Brake fluid is poisonous and should

be stored carefully in marked contain-

ers out of reach of children.

CAUTION

Do not spill the fluid on any painted sur-

faces. This will damage the paint. If fluid

is spilled, immediately wash the surface

with water.

Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the

brake fluid is below the MIN line 䊊

B, the

brake warning light will illuminate. Add

brake fluid up to the MAX line 䊊

A. For addi-

tional information on recommended type

of brake fluid, refer to “Recommended

fluids/lubricants and capacities" in the “

Technical and consumer information” sec-

tion of this manual.

If the brake fluid must be added frequently,

the brake system should be thoroughly

checked.It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

LDI2753

BRAKE FLUID

8-12 Do-it-yourself

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

RESERVOIR

Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir

periodically. Add windshield-washer fluid

when the “Low Washer Fluid” warning ap-

pears in the vehicle information display.

To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir,

lift the cap off the reservoir and pour the

windshield-washer fluid into the reservoir

opening.

Add a washer solvent to the washer for

better cleaning. In the winter season, add a

windshield washer antifreeze. Follow the

manufacturer’s instructions for the mix-

ture ratio.

Refill the reservoir more frequently when

driving conditions require an increased

amount of windshield-washer fluid.

Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN

Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner &

Antifreeze or equivalent.

WARNING

Antifreeze is poisonous and should be

stored carefully in marked containers

out of the reach of children.

CAUTION

∙ Do not substitute engine antifreeze

coolant for windshield-washer fluid.

This may result in damage to the

paint.

∙ Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir with washer fluid concen-

trates at full strength. Some methyl

alcohol based washer fluid concen-

trates may permanently stain the

grille if spilled while filling the

windshield-washer fluid reservoir.

∙ Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates

with water to the manufacturer’s rec-

ommended levels before pouring the

fluid into the windshield-washer fluid

reservoir. Do not use the windshield-

washer fluid reservoir to mix the

washer fluid concentrate and water.

LDI2754

WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID

Do-it-yourself 8-13

∙ Keep the battery surface clean and dry.

Any corrosion should be washed off

with a solution of baking soda and wa-

ter.

∙ Make certain the terminal connections

are clean and securely tightened.

∙ If the vehicle is not to be used for

30 days or longer, disconnect the nega-

tive (-) battery terminal cable to prevent

discharge.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery dis-

charge and potential no-start conditions

such as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume bat-

tery power when the engine is not

running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD

players, etc.)

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or

only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to

be charged to maintain battery health.

WARNING

∙ Do not operate the vehicle if the fluid

in the battery is low. Low battery fluid

can cause a higher load on the battery

which can generate heat, reduce bat-

tery life, and in some cases lead to an

explosion.

∙ When working on or near a battery,

always wear suitable eye protection

and remove all jewelry.

∙ Do not tip the battery. Keep the vent

caps tight and the battery level.

∙ Battery posts, terminals and related

accessories contain lead and lead

compounds. Wash hands after

handling.

∙ Keep battery out of the reach of

children.

∙ Do not expose the battery to flames,

an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hy-

drogen gas generated by the battery

is explosive. Explosive gases can

cause blindness or injury.Do not allow

battery fluid to contact your skin,

eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sul-

furic acid can cause blindness or in-

jury. After touching a battery or bat-

tery cap, do not touch or rub your

eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If

the acid contacts your eyes, skin or

clothing, immediately flush with wa-

ter for at least 15 minutes and seek

medical attention.

BATTERY

8-14 Do-it-yourself

1. Remove the vent caps with a screw-

driver as shown. Use a cloth to protect

the battery case.

2. Check the fluid level in each cell. If it is

necessary to add fluid, add only dis-

tilled water to bring the level up to the

bottom of the filler opening. Do not

overfill. Reinstall the vent caps.

Vehicles operated in high temperatures or

under severe conditions require frequent

checks of the battery fluid level.

JUMP STARTING

If jump starting is necessary, refer to “Jump

starting” in the “In case of emergency” sec-

tion of this manual. If the engine does not

start by jump starting, the battery may

have to be replaced. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice.

WDI0224

WDI0529

Do-it-yourself 8-15

CAUTION

∙ Do not ground accessories directly to

the battery terminal. Doing so will by-

pass the variable voltage control sys-

tem and the vehicle battery may not

charge completely.

∙ Use electrical accessories with the en-

gine running to avoid discharging the

vehicle battery.

Your vehicle is equipped with a variable

voltage control system. This system mea-

sures the amount of electrical discharge

from the battery and controls voltage gen-

erated by the generator.

The current sensor is located near the bat-

tery along the negative battery cable. If you

add electrical accessories to your vehicle,

be sure to ground them to a suitable body

ground such as the frame or engine block

area.

1. Crankshaft pulley

2. Drive belt automatic tensioner pul-

ley

3. Water pump pulley

4. Generator pulley

5. Air compressor pulley

LDI2132

QR25DE engine

LDI2130

VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL

SYSTEM DRIVE BELT

8-16 Do-it-yourself

1. Crankshaft pulley

2. Drive belt automatic tensioner pul-

ley

3. Generator pulley

4. Air compressor pulley

WARNING

Be sure the ignition switch is placed in

the OFF or LOCK position before servic-

ing drive belt. The engine could rotate

unexpectedly.

1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of un-

usual wear, cuts, fraying or looseness. If

the belt is in poor condition or is loose,

have it replaced or adjusted. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

2. Have the belt checked regularly for

condition and tension in accordance

with the maintenance schedule found

in the "Maintenance and schedules"

section of this manual.

REPLACING SPARK PLUGS

Iridium-tipped spark plugs

It is not necessary to replace iridium-

tipped 䊊

Aspark plugs as frequently as con-

ventional type spark plugs because they

last much longer. Follow the maintenance

log shown in the “Maintenance and sched-

ules” section of this manual. Do not service

iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or

regapping.

∙Always replace spark plugs with rec-

ommended or equivalent ones.

VQ35DE engine

LDI2131 SDI1895

SPARK PLUGS

Do-it-yourself 8-17

WARNING

Be sure the engine and ignition switch

are off and that the parking brake is

engaged securely.

CAUTION

Be sure to use the correct socket to re-

move the spark plugs. An incorrect

socket can damage the spark plugs.

If replacement is required, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

NOTE:

The air cleaner filter should not be

cleaned and reused.

Replace the air cleaner filter according to

the maintenance log shown in the ”Mainte-

nance and schedules” section of this

manual.

To remove the air cleaner filter:

∙ Unlatch the clips and move the air

cleaner cover upward.

∙ Remove the air cleaner filter.

∙ Wipe the inside of the air cleaner filter

housing and the cover with a damp

cloth.

QR25DE

LDI2117

VQ35DE

LDI2118

AIR CLEANER

8-18 Do-it-yourself

NOTE:

After installing a new air cleaner filter,

make sure the air cleaner cover is seated

in the housing and latch the clips.

WARNING

∙ Operating the engine with the air

cleaner removed can cause you or

others to be burned. The air cleaner

not only cleans the air, it stops the

flame if the engine backfires. If it isn’t

there, and the engine backfires, you

could be burned. Do not drive with the

air cleaner removed, and be careful

when working on the engine with the

air cleaner removed.

∙ Never pour fuel into the throttle body

or attempt to start the engine with

the air cleaner removed. Doing so

could result in serious injury.

IN-CABIN MICROFILTER

The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry

of airborne dust and pollen particles and

reduces some objectionable outside

odors. The filter is located behind the glove

box. For additional information, refer to the

"Maintenance and schedules" section of

this manual for change intervals.

If replacement is required, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

CLEANING

If your windshield is not clear after using

the windshield–washer or if a wiper blade

chatters when running, wax or other mate-

rial may be on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with a

washer fluid or a mild detergent.Your wind-

shield is clean if beads do not form when

rinsing with clear water.

Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth

soaked in a washer fluid or a mild deter-

gent. Then rinse the blades with clear wa-

ter. If your windshield is still not clear after

cleaning the blades and using the wiper,

install new windshield wiper blades.

CAUTION

Worn windshield wiper blades can

damage the windshield and impair

driver vision.

WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES

Do-it-yourself 8-19

REPLACING

Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.

To replace the windshield wiper blades, fol-

low the procedure below:

1. Lift the wiper arm away from the wind-

shield.

2. Push the release tab 䊊

3. Move the wiper blade 䊊

Adown and re-

move.

4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the

wiper arm until it clicks into place.

5. Push wiper on to windshield.

CAUTION

∙ After wiper blade replacement, return

the wiper arm to its original position;

otherwise it may be damaged when

the hood is opened.

∙ Make sure the wiper blades contact

the glass; otherwise the arms may be

damaged from wind pressure.

If you wax the surface of the hood, be care-

ful not to let wax get into the washer nozzle

䊊

D. This may cause clogging or improper

windshield-washer operation. If wax gets

into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or

small pin 䊊

LDI2757

LDI2731

8-20 Do-it-yourself

If the brakes do not operate properly, have

the brakes checked. It is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice.

Self-adjusting brakes

Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting

brakes.

The front and rear disc-type brakes self-

adjust every time the brake pedal is ap-

plied.

WARNING

Have your brake system checked if the

brake pedal height does not return to

normal. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

Brake pad wear indicators

The disc brake pads on your vehicle have

audible wear indicators. When a brake pad

requires replacement, a high pitched

scraping or screeching sound will be heard

when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will

be heard whether or not the brake pedal is

depressed. Have the brakes checked as

soon as possible if the wear indicator

sound is heard.

Under some driving or climate conditions,

occasional brake squeak, squeal or other

noise may be heard. Occasional brake

noise during light to moderate stops is nor-

mal and does not affect the function or

performance of the brake system.

Proper brake inspection intervals should

be followed. For additional information re-

garding brake inspections, refer to the ap-

propriate maintenance schedule informa-

tion in the "Maintenance and schedules"

section of this manual.

If any electrical equipment does not oper-

ate, check for an open fuse.

Fuses are used in the passenger and en-

gine compartment. Spare fuses are pro-

vided and can be found in the passenger

compartment fuse box.

When installing a fuse make sure the fuse is

installed in the fuse box securely.

LDI2385

BRAKES FUSES

Do-it-yourself 8-21

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

WARNING

Never use a fuse of a higher or lower

amperage rating than that specified on

the fuse box cover. This could damage

the electrical system or electronic con-

trol units or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not come

on, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the

headlight switch are OFF.

2. Open the engine hood.

3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing

the tab and lifting the cover up.

4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller.

The fuse puller is located in the center

of the fuse block in the passenger

compartment.

5. If the fuse is open 䊊

A, replace it with a

new fuse 䊊

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the elec-

trical system checked and repaired.It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Fusible links

If the electrical equipment does not oper-

ate and fuses are in good condition, check

the fusible links. If any of these fusible links

are melted, replace with only Genuine

NISSAN parts.

LDI2133 LDI0456

8-22 Do-it-yourself

PASSENGER COMPARTMENT

WARNING

Never use a fuse of higher or lower am-

perage rating than that specified on the

fuse box cover. This could damage the

electrical system or electronic control

units or cause a fire.

If any electrical equipment does not oper-

ate, check for an open fuse.

1. Be sure the ignition switch and the

headlight switch are in the OFF posi-

tion.

2. Pull the fuse box cover to remove.

3. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller

䊊

LDI2869 LDI2827

Do-it-yourself 8-23

4. If the fuse is open 䊊

B, replace it with an

equivalent good fuse 䊊

5. Push the fuse box cover to install.

6. If a new fuse also opens, have the elec-

trical system checked and repaired.It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

CAUTION

Be careful not to allow children to swal-

low the battery or removed parts.

LDI2760

LDI2001

BATTERY REPLACEMENT

8-24 Do-it-yourself

NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®

Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as

follows:

1. Remove the mechanical key from the

Intelligent Key.

2. Insert a small screwdriver 䊊

Ainto the

slit 䊊

Bof the corner and twist it to sepa-

rate the upper part from the lower part.

Use a cloth to protect the casing.

3. Replace the battery with a new one.

Recommended battery: CR2032 or

equivalent.

∙ Do not touch the internal circuit and

electric terminals as doing so could

cause a malfunction.

∙ Hold the battery by the edges. Hold-

ing the battery across the contact

points will seriously deplete the stor-

age capacity.

∙ Make sure that the + side faces the

bottom of the case.

4. Close the lid securely as illustrated with

䊊

Cand 䊊

5. Operate the buttons to check the op-

eration.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service if you need assis-

tance for replacement.

FCC Notice:

For USA:

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the fol-

lowing two conditions: (1) This device

may not cause harmful interference, and

(2) this device must accept any interfer-

ence received, including interference

that may cause undesired operation.

Note: Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party respon-

sible for compliance could void the user’s

authority to operate the equipment.

For Canada:

This device complies with Industry

Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause

interference, and (2) this device must ac-

cept any interference, including interfer-

ence that may cause undesired opera-

tion of the device.

WDI0568

Do-it-yourself 8-25

HEADLIGHTS

For additional information on headlight

bulb replacement, refer to the instructions

outlined in this section.

Replacing the halogen headlight

bulb (if so equipped)

The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type

which uses a replaceable headlight (halo-

gen) bulb. They can be replaced from inside

the engine compartment without remov-

ing the headlight assembly.

If headlight bulb replacement is required, it

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

CAUTION

∙ Aiming is not necessary after replac-

ing the bulb.When aiming adjustment

is necessary, it is recommended that

you visit a NISSAN dealer for this

service.

∙ Do not leave the headlight assembly

open without a bulb installed for a

long period of time. Dust, moisture,

smoke, etc. entering the headlight

body may affect bulb performance.

Remove the bulb from the headlight

assembly just before a replacement

bulb is installed.

∙ Only touch the base when handling

the bulb. Never touch the glass enve-

lope. Touching the glass could signifi-

cantly affect bulb life and/or head-

light performance.

∙ High pressure halogen gas is sealed

inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may

break if the glass envelope is

scratched or the bulb is dropped.

∙ Use the same number and wattage as

shown in the chart.

Fog may temporarily form inside the lens

of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car

wash. A temperature difference between

the inside and the outside of the lens

causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If

large drops of water collect inside the lens,

it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

Replacing the LED headlight bulb

(if so equipped)

If LED headlight bulb replacement is re-

quired, it is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service.

FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)

For additional information on fog light bulb

replacement, refer to the instructions out-

lined in this section.

LIGHTS

8-26 Do-it-yourself

Replacing the fog light bulb

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.

2. Remove the fasteners 䊊

A; carefully pull

back the front fender protector.

3. Rotate the bulb 䊊

Bcounterclockwise

and pull out to remove.

Reverse steps to install.

LDI2940

Do-it-yourself 8-27

EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS

Item Wattage (W) Bulb No.*

Headlight assembly (Type A) (if so equipped)*

Low (Halogen) 55 H11

High (Halogen) 65 H9

Turn/Park 28/8 7444NA

Side marker 5 W5W

Headlight assembly (Type B) (if so equipped)*

Low — —

High (Halogen) 65 H9

Daytime running — —

Turn/Park 28/8 7444NA

Side marker 5 W5W

Fog light assembly (Type A) (if so equipped)

Fog 55 H11

Daytime running* 19 PS19W

Fog light assembly (Type B) (if so equipped) 55 H11

Door mirror turn signal light (if so equipped)* — —

Map light* — —

Courtesy light — —

Vanity mirror light* 1.8 —

Glove box light* 1.4 —

Step light (if so equipped) 3.8 194

Personal light* 8 —

Trunk light 3.4 158

High-mounted stop light*

Inside (if so equipped) — —

Spoiler (if so equipped) — —

Rear combination light*

Stop/Tail 21/5 W21/5W

Turn 21 WY21W

Tail 5 W5W

Side marker 5 W5W

Backup (reversing)* 18 921

License plate light* 5 W5W

* Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts informa-

tion.

* It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for assistance.

8-28 Do-it-yourself

1. Door mirror turn signal light (if so

equipped)

2. Headlamp assembly

3. Front map light

4. Fog light assembly (if so equipped)

5. High-mount stop light (spoiler)

(if so equipped)

6. High-mount stop light (inside)

(if so equipped)

7. Personal light

8. Step light (if so equipped)

9. Rear combination light

10. Backup (reverse) light

11. License plate light

LDI2906

Do-it-yourself 8-29

Replacement procedures

All other lights are either type A, B, C or D.

When replacing a bulb, first remove the

lens, light and/or cover.

Indicates bulb removal

Indicates bulb installation

Use a cloth 䊊

1to protect the housing.

Rear combination light

Bulb replacement requires the removal of

the rear combination light assembly. If re-

placement is required, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-

vice.

WDI0306

Step light (if so equipped)

LDI0341

Trunk light

LDI2135

8-30 Do-it-yourself

If you have a flat tire, refer to “Flat tire” in

the “In case of emergency” section of

this manual.

TIRE PRESSURE

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)

WARNING

Radio waves could adversely af-

fect electric medical equipment.

Those who use a pacemaker

should contact the electric medi-

cal equipment manufacturer for

the possible influences before

use.

This vehicle is equipped with the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS).

It monitors tire pressure of all tires

except the spare. When the low tire

pressure warning light is lit and the

“Tire Pressure Low - Add Air” warning

appears in the vehicle information

display, one or more of your tires is

significantly under-inflated.

The TPMS will activate only when the

vehicle is driven at speeds above

16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system

may not detect a sudden drop in tire

pressure (for example a flat tire while

driving).

For additional information, refer to

“Low tire pressure warning light” in the

“Instruments and controls” section,

“Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)” in the “Starting and driving”

section, and “Flat tire” in the “In case of

emergency” section of this manual.

Tire inflation pressure

Check the tire pressures (including

the spare) often and always prior to

long distance trips. The recom-

mended tire pressure specifications

are shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.

certification label or the Tire and

Loading Information label under the

"Cold Tire Pressure" heading. The

Tire and Loading Information label is

affixed to the driver side center pillar.

Tire pressures should be checked

regularly because:

∙ Most tires naturally lose air over

time.

∙ Tires can lose air suddenly when

driven over potholes or other ob-

jects or if the vehicle strikes a

curb while parking.

The tire pressures should be

checked when the tires are cold. The

tires are considered COLD after the

vehicle has been parked for 3 or

more hours, or driven less than 1 mile

(1.6 km) at moderate speeds.

The TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert

provides visual and audible signals

outside the vehicle for inflating the

tires to the recommended COLD tire

pressure. For additional information,

refer to “TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire

Alert” in the “Starting and driving”

section of this manual.

If the tires are used at speeds above

100 mph (162 km/h) where it is legal

to do so (on a race track for ex-

ample), the cold tire inflation pres-

sure must be increased. For addi-

WHEELS AND TIRES

Do-it-yourself 8-31

tional information, refer to “Checking

tire pressure” in this section.

Set the tire pressure to the normal

cold tire inflation pressure when the

vehicle speed or load is reduced.

Incorrect tire pressure, including

under inflation, may adversely af-

fect tire life and vehicle handling.

WARNING

∙ Improperly inflated tires can fail

suddenly and cause an

accident.

∙ The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

(GVWR) is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certifica-

tion label. The vehicle weight

capacity is indicated on the Tire

and Loading Information label.

Do not load your vehicle beyond

this capacity. Overloading your

vehicle may result in reduced

tire life, unsafe operating condi-

tions due to premature tire fail-

ure, or unfavorable handling

characteristics and could also

lead to a serious accident. Load-

ing beyond the specified capac-

ity may also result in failure of

other vehicle components.

∙ Before taking a long trip, or

whenever you heavily load your

vehicle, use a tire pressure

gauge to ensure that the tire

pressures are at the specified

level.

∙ Increase the cold tire inflation

pressure as indicated in "Check-

ing tire pressure" in this section

when using the tires specified

by NISSAN above 100 mph

(162 km/h) where it is legal to do

so (on a race track for example).

Failure to increase the cold tire

inflation pressure may result in

tire failure, loss of control and

possible injury. After such use,

readjust tire pressure.

∙ For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Impor-

tant Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

8-32 Do-it-yourself

Tire and Loading Information

label

䊊

1Seating capacity: The maximum

number of occupants that can

be seated in the vehicle.

䊊

2Tire size – refer to “Tire labeling” in

this section.

䊊

3Cold tire pressure: Inflate the

tires to this pressure when the

tires are cold. Tires are consid-

ered COLD after the vehicle has

been parked for 3 or more hours,

or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km)

at moderate speeds. The rec-

ommended cold tire inflation is

set by the manufacturer to pro-

vide the best balance of tire

wear, vehicle handling, driveabil-

ity, tire noise, etc., up to the vehi-

cle’s GVWR.

䊊

4Original tire size: The size of the

tires originally installed on the

vehicle at the factory.

䊊

5Spare tire size.

䊊

6Vehicle load limit: Refer to “Ve-

hicle loading information” in the

“Technical and consumer infor-

mation” section of this manual.

LDI2737

Do-it-yourself 8-33

Checking tire pressure

1. Remove the valve stem cap from

the tire.

2. Press the pressure gauge

squarely onto the valve stem. Do

not press too hard or force the

valve stem sideways, or air will

escape.If the hissing sound of air

escaping from the tire is heard

while checking the pressure, re-

position the gauge to eliminate

this leakage.

3. Remove the gauge.

4. Read the tire pressure on the

gauge stem and compare to the

specification shown on the Tire

and Loading Information label.

5. Add air to the tire as needed. If

too much air is added, press the

core of the valve stem briefly

with the tip of the gauge stem to

release pressure. Recheck the

pressure and add or release air

as needed.

6. Install the valve stem cap.

7. Check the pressure of all other

tires, including the spare.

LDI0393

8-34 Do-it-yourself

Size Cold Tire Inflation

Pressure

Front Original Tire P215/60R16 220 kPa, 32 PSI

P215/55R17 230 kPa, 33 PSI

P235/45R18

Rear Original Tire P215/60R16 220 kPa, 32 PSI

P215/55R17 230 kPa, 33 PSI

P235/45R18

Spare Tire T135/70D16 420 kPa, 60 PSI

TIRE LABELING

Federal law requires tire manufac-

turers to place standardized infor-

mation on the sidewall of all tires.

This information identifies and de-

scribes the fundamental character-

istics of the tire and also provides

the Tire Identification Number (TIN)

for safety standard certification. The

TIN can be used to identify the tire in

case of a recall.

Example

WDI0394

Do-it-yourself 8-35

䊊

1Tire size (example: P215/65R15

95H)

1. P: The “P” indicates the tire is de-

signed for passenger vehicles

(not all tires have this informa-

tion).

2. Three-digit number (215): This

number gives the width in milli-

meters of the tire from sidewall

edge to sidewall edge.

3. Two-digit number (65): This

number, known as the aspect

ratio, gives the tire’s ratio of

height to width.

4. R: The “R” stands for radial.

5. Two-digit number (15):This num-

ber is the wheel or rim diameter

in inches.

6. Two- or three-digit number (95):

This number is the tire’s load in-

dex. It is a measurement of how

much weight each tire can sup-

port. You may not find this infor-

mation on all tires because it is

not required by law.

7. H: Tire speed rating. You should

not drive the vehicle faster than

the tire speed rating.

Example

WDI0395

8-36 Do-it-yourself

䊊

2TIN (Tire Identification Number)

for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX

XXX XXXX)

1. DOT: Abbreviation for the “De-

partment Of Transportation”.

The symbol can be placed

above, below or to the left or

right of the Tire Identification

Number.

2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer’s

identification mark.

3. Two-digit code: Tire size.

4. Three-digit code: Tire type code

(Optional).

5. Four numbers represent the

week and year the tire was built.

For example, the numbers 3103

means the 31st week of 2003. If

these numbers are missing then

look on the other sidewall of the

tire.

䊊

3Tire ply composition and material

The number of layers or plies of

rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire

manufacturers also must indicate

the materials in the tire, which in-

clude steel, nylon, polyester and oth-

ers.

䊊

4Maximum permissible inflation

pressure

This number is the greatest amount

of air pressure that should be put in

the tire.Do not exceed the maximum

permissible inflation pressure.

䊊

5Maximum load rating

This number indicates the maxi-

mum load in kilograms and pounds

that can be carried by the tire. When

replacing the tires on the vehicle, al-

ways use a tire that has the same

load rating as the factory installed

tire.

Example

LDI2786

Do-it-yourself 8-37

䊊

6Term of “tubeless” or “tube type”

Indicates whether the tire requires

an inner tube (“tube type”) or not

(“tubeless”).

䊊

7The word “radial”

The word “radial” is shown if the tire

has radial structure.

䊊

8Manufacturer or brand name

Manufacturer or brand name is

shown.

Other Tire-related Terminology

In addition to the many terms that

are defined throughout this section,

Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the

sidewall that contains a whitewall,

bears white lettering or bears

manufacturer, brand, and/or model

name molding that is higher or

deeper than the same molding on

the other sidewall of the tire, or (2)

the outward facing sidewall of an

asymmetrical tire that has a particu-

lar side that must always face out-

ward when mounted on a vehicle.

TYPES OF TIRES

WARNING

∙ When changing or replacing tires, be

sure all four tires are of the same type

(i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and

construction. A NISSAN dealer may be

able to help you with information

about tire type, size, speed rating and

availability.

∙ Replacement tires may have a lower

speed rating than the factory

equipped tires, and may not match

the potential maximum vehicle

speed. Never exceed the maximum

speed rating of the tire.

∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could affect

the proper operation of the low tire

pressure warning system.

∙ Always use tires of the same type,

size, brand, construction and tread

pattern on all four wheels. Failure to

do so may result in a circumference

difference between tires on the front

and rear axles which can cause the

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system

to malfunction resulting in personal

injury or death, excessive tire wear

and may damage the transmission

and differential gears.

∙ For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-

mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-

formation Booklet.

All season tires

NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some

models to provide good performance all

year, including snowy and icy road condi-

tions. All Season tires are identified by ALL

SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall.

Snow tires have better snow traction than

All Season tires and may be more appropri-

ate in some areas.

Summer tires

NISSAN specifies summer tires on some

models to provide superior performance

8-38 Do-it-yourself

on dry roads. Summer tire performance is

substantially reduced in snow and ice.

Summer tires do not have the tire traction

rating “M&S” on the tire sidewall.

If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy

or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the

use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all

four wheels.

Snow tires

If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to

select tires equivalent in size and load rat-

ing to the original equipment tires. If you do

not, it can adversely affect the safety and

handling of your vehicle.

Generally, snow tires have lower speed rat-

ings than factory equipped tires and may

not match the potential maximum vehicle

speed. Never exceed the maximum speed

rating of the tire.

If you install snow tires, they must be the

same size, brand, construction and tread

pattern on all four wheels.

For additional traction on icy roads, stud-

ded tires may be used. However, some U.S.

states and Canadian provinces prohibit

their use. Check local, state and provincial

laws before installing studded tires. Skid

and traction capabilities of studded snow

tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer

than that of non-studded snow tires.

TIRE CHAINS

CAUTION

Only certain SAE class “S” tire chains can

be used on this vehicle. Using the wrong

Class “S” chains on this vehicle will

cause damage to the vehicle. If you plan

to use tire chains/cables, you should

use a tire chain that meets the mini-

mum clearances for your vehicle.

Use of tire chains may be prohibited ac-

cording to location. Check the local laws

before installing tire chains. When installing

tire chains, make sure they are the proper

size for the tires on your vehicle and are

installed according to the chain manufac-

turer’s suggestions. Use a tire chain that is

designed to provide the specified space 䊊

between the installed tire chain 䊊

1and

where the tire meets the rim 䊊

2as shown

on the chart.

LDI0574

Do-it-yourself 8-39

NOTE:

Tire chains are not permitted for use

with 18 in wheels.

Wheel size Minimum space re-

quired

16 in .7 in (17 mm)

17 in .2 in (4 mm)

A tire chain that provides the specified

amount of space will provide the neces-

sary clearance between the tire and the

closest vehicle suspension or body com-

ponent. The minimum clearances are de-

termined using the factory-equipped tires.

Other types may damage your vehicle. Use

chain tensioners when recommended by

the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a

tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain

must be secured or removed to prevent

the possibility of whipping action damage

to the fenders or underbody. If possible,

avoid fully loading your vehicle when using

tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced

speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be

damaged and/or vehicle handling and

performance may be adversely affected.

Tire chains must be installed only on the

front wheels and not on the rear wheels.

Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY

USE ONLY spare tire.

Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving

with tire chains in such conditions can

cause damage to the various mechanisms

of the vehicle due to some overstress.

CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES

Tire rotation

NISSAN recommends rotating the

tires every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).

For additional information on tire re-

placing procedures, refer to “Flat tire”

in the “In case of emergency” section

of this manual.

As soon as possible, tighten the

wheel nuts to the specified torque

with a torque wrench.

WDI0258

8-40 Do-it-yourself

Wheel nut tightening torque:

83 ft-lb (113 N·m)

The wheel nuts must be kept tight-

ened to specifications at all times.

It is recommended that wheel nuts

be tightened to specification at

each tire rotation interval.

WARNING

∙ After rotating the tires, check

and adjust the tire pressure.

∙ Retighten the wheel nuts when

the vehicle has been driven for

600 miles (1,000 km) (also in

cases of a flat tire, etc.).

∙ Do not include the spare tire in

the tire rotation.

∙ For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Impor-

tant Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

Tire wear and damage

1. Wear indicator

2. Location mark

WARNING

∙ Tires should be periodically in-

spected for wear, cracking,

bulging or objects caught in the

tread. If excessive wear, cracks,

bulging or deep cuts are found,

the tire(s) should be replaced.

∙ The original tires have built-in

tread wear indicators. When the

wear indicators are visible, the

tire(s) should be replaced.

∙ Tires degrade with age and use.

Have tires, including the spare,

over 6 years old checked by a

qualified technician because

some tire damage may not be

obvious. Replace the tires as

necessary to prevent tire failure

and possible personal injury.

∙ Improper service of the spare

tire may result in serious per-

sonal injury. If it is necessary to

repair the spare tire, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service.

∙ For additional information re-

garding tires, refer to “Impor-

tant Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information”

(Canada) in the Warranty Infor-

mation Booklet.

WDI0259

Do-it-yourself 8-41

Replacing wheels and tires

When replacing a tire, use the same size,

tread design, speed rating and load carry-

ing capacity as originally equipped. For ad-

ditional information, refer to “Wheels and

tires” in the “Technical and consumer infor-

mation” section of this manual.

WARNING

∙ The use of tires other than those rec-

ommended or the mixed use of tires

of different brands, construction

(bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread

patterns can adversely affect the ride,

braking, handling, Vehicle Dynamic

Control (VDC) system, ground clear-

ance, body-to-tire clearance, tire

chain clearance, speedometer cali-

bration, headlight aim and bumper

height. Some of these effects may

lead to accidents and could result in

serious personal injury.

∙ If your vehicle was originally

equipped with four tires that were the

same size and you are only replacing

two of the four tires, install the new

tires on the rear axle. Placing new tires

on the front axle may cause loss of

vehicle control in some driving condi-

tions and cause an accident and per-

sonal injury

∙ If the wheels are changed for any rea-

son, always replace with wheels

which have the same off-set dimen-

sion. Wheels of a different off-set

could cause premature tire wear, de-

grade vehicle handling characteris-

tics, affect the VDC system and/or in-

terference with the brake discs. Such

interference can lead to decreased

braking efficiency and/or early brake

pad wear. For additional information

on wheel off-set dimensions, refer to

“Wheels and tires” in the “Technical

and consumer information” section of

this manual.

∙ When replacing a wheel without the

TPMS, such as the spare tire, the TPMS

will not function and the low tire pres-

sure warning light will flash for ap-

proximately 1 minute. The light will re-

main on after 1 minute. Have your

tires replaced and/or TPMS system

reset as soon as possible. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer

for this service.

∙ Replacing tires with those not origi-

nally specified by NISSAN could affect

the proper operation of the TPMS.

∙ The TPMS sensor may be damaged if

it is not handled correctly. Be careful

when handling the TPMS sensor.

∙ When replacing the TPMS sensor, the

ID registration may be required. It is

recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for ID registration.

∙ Do not use a valve stem cap that is not

specified by NISSAN. The valve stem

cap may become stuck.

∙ Be sure that the valve stem caps are

correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve

may be clogged up with dirt and

cause a malfunction or loss of

pressure.

8-42 Do-it-yourself

∙ Do not install a damaged or deformed

wheel or tire even if it has been re-

paired. Such wheels or tires could

have structural damage and could fail

without warning.

∙ The use of retread tires is not

recommended.

∙ For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety Infor-

mation” (Canada) in the Warranty In-

formation Booklet.

Wheel balance

Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle

handling and tire life. Even with regular use,

wheels can get out of balance. Therefore,

they should be balanced as required.

Wheel balance service should be per-

formed with the wheels off the vehicle.

Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle

could lead to mechanical damage.

∙For additional information regarding

tires, refer to “Important Tire Safety

Information” (US) or “Tire Safety In-

formation” (Canada) in the Warranty

Information Booklet.

Care of wheels

∙ Wash the wheels when washing the ve-

hicle to maintain their appearance.

∙ Clean the inner side of the wheels when

the wheel is changed or the underside

of the vehicle is washed.

∙ Do not use abrasive cleaners when

washing the wheels.

∙ Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents

or corrosion. Such damage may cause

loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire

bead.

∙ NISSAN recommends waxing the road

wheels to protect against road salt in

areas where it is used during winter.

Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY

spare tire)

When replacing a wheel without the TPMS

such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not

function.

Observe the following precautions if the

TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be

used. Otherwise, your vehicle could be

damaged or involved in an accident:

WARNING

∙ The spare tire should be used for

emergency use only. It should be re-

placed with the standard tire at the

first opportunity to avoid possible tire

or differential damage.

∙ Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY

USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid

sharp turns and abrupt braking while

driving.

∙ Periodically check spare tire inflation

pressure. Always keep the pressure of

the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire

at 420 kPa, 4.2 bar (60 psi).

∙ With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare

tire installed do not drive the vehicle

at speeds faster than 50 mph

(80 km/h).

∙ When driving on roads covered with

snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire should be used on the

rear wheels and the original tire used

on the front wheels (drive wheels).

Do-it-yourself 8-43

∙ Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE

ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster

rate than the standard tire. Replace

the spare tire as soon as the tread

wear indicators appear.

∙ Do not use the spare tire on other

vehicles.

∙ Do not use more than one spare tire at

the same time.

∙ Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPO-

RARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.

CAUTION

∙ Do not use tire chains on a TEMPO-

RARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains

will not fit properly and may cause

damage to the vehicle.

∙ Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY

spare tire is smaller than the original

tire, ground clearance is reduced. To

avoid damage to the vehicle, do not

drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive

the vehicle through an automatic car

wash since it may get caught.

8-44 Do-it-yourself

9 Maintenance and schedules

Maintenance requirements......................9-2

General maintenance ........................9-2

Scheduled maintenance .....................9-2

Where to go for service .......................9-2

General maintenance ...........................9-2

Explanation of general maintenance

items.........................................9-2

Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 9-5

Emission control system maintenance:.......9-5

Chassis and body maintenance:..............9-6

Maintenance schedules .........................9-7

Additional maintenance items for

severe operating conditions ..................9-7

Standard maintenance..........................9-7

Emission control system maintenance .......9-8

Chassis & body maintenance................9-10

Maintenance under severe operating

conditions......................................9-12

Severe driving conditions ....................9-12

Maintenance log ...............................9-13

Some day-to-day and regular mainte-

nance is essential to maintain your vehicle

good mechanical condition, as well as its

emissions and engine performance.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure

that the scheduled maintenance,as well as

general maintenance, is performed.

As the vehicle owner, you are the only one

who can ensure that your vehicle receives

proper maintenance. You are a vital link in

the maintenance chain.

GENERAL MAINTENANCE

General maintenance includes those items

which should be checked during normal

day-to-day operation. They are essential

for proper vehicle operation. It is your re-

sponsibility to perform these procedures

regularly as prescribed.

Performing general maintenance checks

requires minimal mechanical skill and only

a few general automotive tools.

These checks or inspections can be done

by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you

prefer, a NISSAN dealer.

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

The maintenance items listed in this sec-

tion are required to be serviced at regular

intervals. However under severe driving

conditions, additional or more frequent

maintenance will be required.

WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE

If maintenance service is required or your

vehicle appears to malfunction, have the

systems checked and serviced. It is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

NISSAN technicians are well-trained spe-

cialists and are kept up-to-date with the

latest service information through techni-

cal bulletins, service tips and training pro-

grams. They are completely qualified to

work on NISSAN vehicles before work be-

gins.

You can be confident that a NISSAN deal-

er’s service department can perform the

service needed to meet the maintenance

requirements on your vehicle.

During the normal day-to-day operation of

the vehicle, general maintenance should

be performed regularly as prescribed in

this section. If you detect any unusual

sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to

check for the cause or have it checked

promptly. In addition, it is recommended

that you visit a NISSAN dealer if you think

that repairs are required.

When performing any checks or mainte-

nance work, closely observe the “Mainte-

nance precautions” in the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this manual.

EXPLANATION OF GENERAL

MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Additional information on the following

items with“*”isfound in the “Do-it-

yourself” section of this manual.

Outside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should

be performed from time to time, unless

otherwise specified.

Doors and engine hood: Check that the

doors and engine hood operate properly.

Also ensure that all latches lock securely.

Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers

and links if necessary. Make sure that the

MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS GENERAL MAINTENANCE

9-2 Maintenance and schedules

secondary latch keeps the hood from

opening when the primary latch is re-

leased.

When driving in areas using road salt or

other corrosive materials, check lubrica-

tion frequently.

Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular

basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop

lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other

lights are all operating properly and in-

stalled securely. Also check headlight aim.

Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When check-

ing the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are

missing, and check for any loose wheel

nuts. Tighten if necessary.

Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated ev-

ery 5,000 miles (8,000 km).

Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge

often and always prior to long distance

trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all

tires, including the spare, to the pressure

specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts

or excessive wear.

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

transmitter components: Replace the

TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve core

and cap when the tires are replaced due to

wear or age.

Wheel alignment and balance: If the ve-

hicle should pull to either side while driving

on a straight and level road, or if you detect

uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may

be a need for wheel alignment. If the steer-

ing wheel or seat vibrates at normal high-

way speeds, wheel balancing may be

needed.

For additional information regarding tires,

refer to “Important Tire Safety Information”

(US) or “Tire Safety Information” (Canada) in

the Warranty Information Booklet.

Windshield: Clean the windshield on a

regular basis. Check the windshield at least

every six months for cracks or other dam-

age. Have a damaged windshield repaired

by a qualified repair facility.

Windshield wiper blades*: Check for

cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.

Inside the vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should

be checked on a regular basis, such as

when performing scheduled maintenance,

cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for

smooth operation and make sure the

pedal does not catch or require uneven

effort. Keep the floor mat away from the

pedal.

Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth

operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes

down further than normal, the pedal feels

spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer

to stop, have your vehicle checked imme-

diately. It is recommended that you visit a

NISSAN dealer for this service. Keep the

floor mat away from the pedal.

Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull

the vehicle to one side when applied.

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) P (Park) position mechanism: On a

fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held

securely with the shift lever in the P (Park)

position without applying any brakes.

Parking brake: Check the parking brake

operation regularly. The vehicle should be

securely held on a fairly steep hill with only

the parking brake applied. If the parking

brake needs adjustment, it is recom-

mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for

this service.

Maintenance and schedules 9-3

Seats: Check seat position controls such

as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to

ensure they operate smoothly and all

latches lock securely in every position.

Check that the head restraints/headrests

move up and down smoothly and the locks

(if so equipped) hold securely in all latched

positions.

Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat

belt system (for example, buckles, anchors,

adjusters and retractors) operate properly

and smoothly, and are installed securely.

Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying,

wear or damage.

Steering wheel: Check for changes in the

steering system, such as excessive free

play, hard steering or strange noises.

Warning lights and chimes: Make sure all

warning lights and chimes are operating

properly.

Windshield defroster: Check that the air

comes out of the defroster outlets properly

and in sufficient quantity when operating

the heater or air conditioner.

Windshield wiper and washer*: Check

that the wipers and washer operate prop-

erly and that the wipers do not streak.

Under the hood and vehicle

The maintenance items listed here should

be checked periodically (for example, each

time you check the engine oil or refuel).

Battery* (for serviceable batteries):

Check the fluid level in each cell. The fluid

should be at the bottom of the filler open-

ing. Vehicles operated in high tempera-

tures or under severe conditions require

frequent checks of the battery fluid level.

NOTE:

Care should be taken to avoid situations

that can lead to potential battery dis-

charge and potential no-start conditions

such as:

1. Installation or extended use of elec-

tronic accessories that consume bat-

tery power when the engine is not

running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD

players, etc.).

2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or

only driven short distances.

In these cases, the battery may need to

be charged to maintain battery health.

Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake

fluid level is between the MAX and MIN lines

on the reservoir.

Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant

level when the engine is cold.

Engine drive belts*: Make sure the drive

belts are not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.

Engine oil level*: Check the level after

parking the vehicle on a level spot and

turning off the engine. Wait more than

15 minutes for the oil to drain back into the

oil pan.

Exhaust system: Make sure there are no

loose supports, cracks or holes. If the

sound of the exhaust seems unusual or

there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immedi-

ately have the exhaust system inspected. It

is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer for this service. For additional infor-

mation, refer to “Exhaust gas (carbon mon-

oxide)” in the “Starting and driving” section

of this manual.

Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for

fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the

vehicle has been parked for a while. Water

dripping from the air conditioner after use

is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if

9-4 Maintenance and schedules

fuel fumes are evident, check for the cause

and have it corrected immediately.

Power steering fluid level* and lines:

Check the level when the fluid is cold, with

the engine off. Check the lines for proper

attachment, leaks, cracks, etc.

Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the

radiator and clean off any dirt, insects,

leaves, etc., that may have accumulated.

Make sure the hoses have no cracks, defor-

mation, rot or loose connections.

Underbody: The underbody is frequently

exposed to corrosive substances such as

those used on icy roads or to control dust. It

is very important to remove these sub-

stances, otherwise rust may form on the

floor pan, frame, fuel lines and around the

exhaust system. At the end of winter, the

underbody should be thoroughly flushed

with plain water, being careful to clean

those areas where mud and dirt may accu-

mulate. For additional information, refer to

the “Appearance and care” section of this

manual.

Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that

there is adequate fluid in the reservoir.

The following descriptions are provided to

give you a better understanding of the

scheduled maintenance items that should

be regularly checked or replaced. The

maintenance schedule indicates at which

mileage/time intervals each item requires

service.

In addition to scheduled maintenance,

your vehicle requires that some items be

checked during normal day-to-day opera-

tion. For additional information, refer to

“General maintenance” in this section.

Items marked with “*” are recommended

by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation.

You are not required to perform mainte-

nance on these items in order to maintain

the warranties which come with your

NISSAN. Other maintenance items and in-

tervals are required.

When applicable, additional information

can be found in the “Do-it-yourself” section

of this manual.

NOTE:

NISSAN does not advocate the use of

non-OEM approved aftermarket flush-

ing systems and strongly advises

against performing these services on a

NISSAN product. Many of the aftermar-

ket flushing systems use non-OEM ap-

proved chemicals or solvents, the use of

which has not been validated by NISSAN.

For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids,

grease, and refrigerant, refer to “Recom-

mended fluids/lubricants and capaci-

ties” in the “Technical and consumer in-

formation” section of this manual.

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

MAINTENANCE:

Drive belts*: Check engine drive belts for

wear, fraying or cracking and for proper

tension. Replace any damaged drive belts.

Engine air filter: Replace at specified inter-

vals. When driving for prolonged periods in

dusty conditions, check/replace the filter

more frequently.

EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED

MAINTENANCE ITEMS

Maintenance and schedules 9-5

Engine coolant*: Replace coolant at the

specified interval. When adding or replac-

ing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine

NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)

or equivalent with the proper mixture. (For

additional information on the proper mix-

ture for your area, refer to “Engine cooling

system” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of

this manual.)

NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolant

or the use of non-distilled water may re-

duce the recommended service interval

of the coolant.

Engine oil and oil filter: Replace engine oil

and oil filter at the specified intervals. For

recommended oil grade and viscosity refer

to “Recommended fluids/lubricants and

capacities” in the “Technical and consumer

information” section of this manual.

Engine valve clearance*: Inspect only if

valve noise increases. Adjust valve clear-

ance if necessary.

Evaporative emissions control vapor

lines*: Check vapor lines for leaks or loose-

ness. Tighten connections or replace parts

as necessary.

Fuel filter: Periodic maintenance is not re-

quired. (in-tank type filter)

Fuel lines*: Check the fuel hoses, piping

and connections for leaks, looseness, or

deterioration. Tighten connections or re-

place parts as necessary.

Spark plugs: Replace at specified intervals.

Install new plugs of the type as originally

equipped.

CHASSIS AND BODY

MAINTENANCE:

Brake lines and cables: Visually inspect for

proper installation. Check for chafing,

cracks, deterioration, and signs of leaking.

Replace any deteriorated or damaged

parts immediately.

Brake pads and rotors: Check for wear,

deterioration and fluid leaks. Replace any

deteriorated or damaged parts immedi-

ately.

Exhaust system: Visually inspect the ex-

haust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks,

cracks, deterioration, and damage. Tighten

connections or replace parts as necessary.

In-cabin microfilter: Replace at specified

intervals. When driving for prolonged peri-

ods in dusty conditions, replace the filter

more frequently.

Steering gear and linkage, axle and sus-

pension parts, drive shaft boots: Check

for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil

or grease. Under severe driving conditions,

inspect more frequently.

Tire rotation: Tires should be rotated every

5,000 miles (8,000 km) according to the in-

structions under “General maintenance” in

this section. When rotating tires, check for

damage and uneven wear. Replace if nec-

essary.

Transmission fluid/oil: Visually inspect for

signs of leakage at specified intervals.

If using a car-top carrier or driving on rough

or muddy roads:

∙ Replace the CVT fluid every 60,000 miles

(96,000 km) or request the dealer to in-

spect the fluid deterioration data using

a CONSULT. If the deterioration data is

more than 210000, replace the CVT fluid.

9-6 Maintenance and schedules

To help ensure smooth, safe and economi-

cal driving, NISSAN provides two mainte-

nance schedules that may be used, de-

pending upon the conditions in which you

usually drive. These schedules contain

both distance and time intervals, up to

120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 months. For

most people, the odometer reading will in-

dicate when service is needed. However, if

you drive very little, your vehicle should be

serviced at the regular time intervals

shown in the schedule.

After 120,000 miles

(192,000 km)/144 months, continue

maintenance at the same mileage/time

intervals.

ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS

FOR SEVERE OPERATING

CONDITIONS

Additional maintenance items for severe

operating conditions should be per-

formed on vehicles that are driven under

especially demanding conditions. Addi-

tional maintenance items should be per-

formed if you primarily operate your vehicle

under the following conditions:

∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles

(8 km).

∙ Repeated short trips of less than

10 miles (16 km) with outside tempera-

tures remaining below freezing.

∙ Operating in hot weather in stop-

and-go “rush hour” traffic.

∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driv-

ing for long distances, such as police,

taxi or door-to-door delivery use.

∙ Driving in dusty conditions.

∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread

roads.

∙ Using a car-top carrier.

NOTE:

For vehicles operated in Canada, both

standard and severe maintenance items

should be performed at every interval.

The following tables show the standard

maintenance schedule. Depending upon

weather and atmospheric conditions,

varying road surfaces, individual driving

habits and vehicle usage, additional or

more frequent maintenance may be re-

quired. After 120,000 miles

(192,000 km)/144 months, continue

maintenance at the same mileage/time

interval.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES STANDARD MAINTENANCE

Maintenance and schedules 9-7

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or

months, whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(8)

(16)

(24)

(32)

(40)

(48)

(56)

(64)

(72)

(80)

(88)

(96)

Drive belts See NOTE (1) I* I* I*

Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R

Engine oil RRRRRRRRRRRR

Engine oil filter RRRRRRRRRRRR

Engine coolant* See NOTE (4)(5)

EVAP vapor lines I* I* I*

Fuel lines I* I* I*

Fuel filter See NOTE (3)

Spark plugs (Iridium - tipped type) See NOTE (6) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

Intake and exhaust valve clearances* See NOTE (7)

9-8 Maintenance and schedules

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or

months, whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(104)

(112)

(120)

(128)

(136)

102

(144)

108

(152)

114

100

(160)

120

105

(168)

126

110

(176)

132

115

(184)

138

120

(192)

144

Drive belts See NOTE (1) I* I* I* I* I* I*

Air cleaner filter See NOTE (2) R R

Engine oil RRRRRRRRRRRR

Engine oil filter RRRRRRRRRRRR

Engine coolant* See NOTE (4)(5)

EVAP vapor lines I* I* I*

Fuel lines I* I* I*

Fuel filter See NOTE (3)

Spark plugs (Iridium - tipped type) See NOTE (6) Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)

Intake and exhaust valve clearances* See NOTE (7)

NOTE:

(1) After 40,000 miles (64,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belts if

found damaged.

(2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required.

(3) Periodic maintenance is not required.

(4) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles

(120,000 km) or 60 months.

(5) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50%

demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy

of the factory fill coolant.

(6) Replace spark plug when the plug gap exceeds 1.25 mm (0.049 in) even within specified periodic replacement mileage.

(7) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increased, inspect valve clearance.

* Maintenance items and intervals with “*” are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform

such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and

intervals are required.

Maintenance and schedules 9-9

CHASSIS & BODY MAINTENANCE

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace,

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months,

whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(8)

(16)

(24)

(32)

(40)

(48)

(56)

(64)

(72)

(80)

(88)

(96)

Brake lines and cables I I I I I I

Brake pads and rotors 夝II I II I

Brake fluid 夝RRR

CVT fluid See NOTE (1) I I I I I I

Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts

夝

III

Tire rotation See NOTE (2)

Front drive shaft boots 夝II I II I

Exhaust system 夝III

In-cabin microfilter RRRR

NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery I R R R

9-10 Maintenance and schedules

Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace,

MAINTENANCE OPERATION

Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months,

whichever comes first. miles x 1,000

(km x 1,000)

Months

MAINTENANCE INTERVAL

(104)

(112)

(120)

(128)

(136)

102

(144)

108

(152)

114

100

(160)

120

105

(168)

126

110

(176)

132

115

(184)

138

120

(192)

144

Brake lines and cables I I I I I I

Brake pads and rotors 夝II I II I

Brake fluid 夝RRR

CVT fluid See NOTE (1) I I I I I I

Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts

夝

III

Tire rotation See NOTE (2)

Front drive shaft boots 夝II I II I

Exhaust system 夝III

In-cabin microfilter RRRR

NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery R R R R

NOTE:

Maintenance items with “夝” should be performed more frequently according to “Maintenance under severe driving conditions”.

(1) If using a car-top carrier or driving on rough or muddy roads, inspect CVT fluid deterioration every 60,000 miles (96,000 km),

then change CVT fluid if necessary. And if the inspection is not performed, change (not just inspect) CVT fluid every 60,000 miles

(96,000 km). It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.

(2) For additional information, refer to “General maintenance” in this section.

Maintenance and schedules 9-11

The maintenance intervals shown on the

preceding pages are for normal operating

conditions. If the vehicle is mainly operated

under severe driving conditions as shown

below, more frequent maintenance must

be performed on the following items as

shown in the table.

SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS

∙ Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles

(8 km).

∙ Repeated short trips of less than

10 miles (16 km) with outside tempera-

tures remaining below freezing.

∙ Operating in hot weather in stop-

and-go “rush hour” traffic.

∙ Extensive idling and/or low speed driv-

ing for long distance, such as police, taxi

or door-to-door delivery use.

∙ Driving in dusty conditions.

∙ Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread

roads.

∙ Using a car-top carrier.

Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.

Maintenance item Maintenance operation Maintenance interval

Brake fluid Replace Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months

Brake pads and rotors Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Front drive shaft boots Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

Exhaust system Inspect Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months

MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE

OPERATING CONDITIONS

9-12 Maintenance and schedules

5,000 Miles (8,000 km) or 6

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

10,000 Miles (16,000 km) or 12

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 18

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

20,000 Miles (32,000 km) or 24

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

25,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 30

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or 36

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

35,000 Miles (56,000 km) or 42

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

40,000 Miles (64,000 km) or 48

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or 54

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

MAINTENANCE LOG

Maintenance and schedules 9-13

50,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 60

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

55,000 Miles (88,000 km) or 66

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or 72

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

65,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 78

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

70,000 Miles (112,000 km) or 84

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 90

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

80,000 Miles (128,000 km) or 96

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

85,000 Miles (136,000 km) or 102

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or 108

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

9-14 Maintenance and schedules

95,000 Miles (152,000 km) or 114

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

100,000 Miles (160,000 km) or

120 Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

105,000 Miles (168,000 km) or 126

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

110,000 Miles (176,000 km) or 132

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

115,000 Miles (184,000 km) or 138

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

120,000 Miles (192,000 km) or 144

Months

Dealer Name:

Date:

Mileage:

Dealer

Stamp:

Maintenance and schedules 9-15

MEMO

9-16 Maintenance and schedules

10 Technical and consumer information

Recommended fluids/lubricants and

capacities ......................................10-2

Fuel recommendation.......................10-3

Engine oil and oil filter

recommendations ..........................10-6

Air conditioner system refrigerant and

oil recommendations .......................10-7

Specifications ..................................10-8

Engine ......................................10-8

Wheels and tires.............................10-9

Dimensions and weights ....................10-9

When traveling or registering in another

country........................................10-10

Vehicle identification ..........................10-10

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

plate .......................................10-10

Vehicle identification number

(chassis number) ...........................10-10

Engine serial number........................10-11

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label .........10-11

Emission control information label .........10-12

Tire and Loading Information label .........10-12

Air conditioner specification label...........10-12

Installing front license plate....................10-13

Vehicle loading information ...................10-13

Terms ...................................... 10-13

Vehicle load capacity .......................10-14

Loading tips ................................10-16

Measurement of weights ...................10-16

Towing a trailer ................................ 10-17

Flat towing ................................. 10-17

Uniform tire quality grading.................... 10-17

Emission control system warranty.............10-18

Reporting safety defects ......................10-19

Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M)

test............................................10-20

Event Data Recorders (EDR)....................10-20

Owner’s Manual/Service Manual order

information ...................................10-21

The following are approximate capacities.The actual refill capacities may be slightly different. When refilling, follow the procedure

described in the “Do-it-yourself” section to determine the proper refill capacity.

Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

Metric

Measure

Imperial

Measure

Fuel 68 L 18 gal 15 gal • For additional information, refer to “Fuel recommendation” in

this section.

Engine oil*1

Drain and refill

*1: For additional

information, refer

to “Engine oil” in

the “Do-it-yourself”

section of this

manual.

QR25DE

With oil filter

change 4.6 L 4-7/8 qt 4 qt

• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN” is recommended.

• If the above motor oil is not available, use an equivalent motor

oil that matches the above grade and viscosity. For additional

information, refer to “Engine oil and oil filter recommendations”

in this section.

Without oil

filter change 4.3 L 4-1/2 qt 3-3/4 qt

VQ35DE

With oil filter

change 4.8 L 5-1/8 qt 4-1/4 qt

Without oil

filter change 4.5 L 4-3/4 qt 4 qt

Engine coolant

with reservoir

QR25DE 7.9 L 2-1/8 gal 1-3/4 gal • Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)

or equivalent

VQ35DE 9.2 L 2-3/8 gal 2 gal

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid — — —

• Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3

• NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or

equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids.

Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid

NS-3 may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids

other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN’s New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Power Steering Fluid (PSF)

Refill to the proper level according to the

instructions in the “Do-it-yourself” section

of this manual.

• Genuine NISSAN E-PSF or equivalent.

• Use of a power steering fluid other than Genuine NISSAN E-PSF

may prevent the power steering system from operating

properly.

Brake fluid

Refill to the proper level according to the

instructions in the “Do-it-yourself” section

of this manual.

• Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid*3 or equivalent

DOT 3.

*3 Available in mainland USA through a NISSAN dealer

RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/

LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES

10-2 Technical and consumer information

Fluid type Capacity (approximate) Recommended Fluids/Lubricants

Metric

Measure

Imperial

Measure

Multi-purpose grease — — — • NLGI No. 2 (Lithium Soap base)

Air conditioning system refrigerant — — —

• HFC-134a (R-134a)

• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system re-

frigerant and oil recommendations” in this section.

Air conditioning system oil — — —

• Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type S (DH-PS) or equivalent

• For additional information, refer to “Air conditioner system re-

frigerant and oil recommendations” in this section.

Windshield-washer fluid 4.2 L 1-1/8 gal 7/8 gal • Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & An-

tifreeze fluid or equivalent.

FUEL RECOMMENDATION

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-

tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock

Index) number (Research octane number

91).

CAUTION

∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door

label can operate on E-85. Fuel system

or other damage can occur if E-85 is

used in vehicles that are not designed

to run on E-85.

∙ Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission

control system, and may also affect

the warranty coverage.

∙ Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because this

will damage the three-way catalyst.

∙ Do not use a fuel containing more

than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your

vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel

containing more than 15% ethanol.

Using a fuel containing more than 15%

ethanol in a vehicle not specifically

designed for a fuel containing more

than 15% ethanol can adversely affect

the emission control devices and sys-

tems of the vehicle. Damage caused

by such fuel is not covered by the

NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

∙ Do not use fuel that contains the oc-

tane booster methylcyclopentadienyl

manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using

fuel containing MMT may adversely

affect vehicle performance and ve-

hicle emissions. Not all fuel dispens-

ers are labeled to indicate MMT con-

tent, so you may have to consult your

gasoline retailer for more details.

Note that Federal and California laws

prohibit the use of MMT in reformu-

lated gasoline.

Technical and consumer information 10-3

∙ U.S. government regulations require

ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-

tified by a small, square, orange and

black label with the common abbre-

viation or the appropriate percentage

for that region.

Gasoline specifications

NISSAN recommends using gasoline that

meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC)

specifications where it is available. Many of

the automobile manufacturers developed

this specification to improve emission con-

trol system and vehicle performance. Ask

your service station manager if the gaso-

line meets the WWFC specifications.

Reformulated gasoline

Some fuel suppliers are now producing re-

formulated gasolines. These gasolines are

specially designed to reduce vehicle emis-

sions. NISSAN supports efforts towards

cleaner air and suggests that you use re-

formulated gasoline when available.

Gasoline containing oxygenates

Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline contain-

ing oxygenates such as ethanol, Methyl

Tert-butyl Ether (MTBE) and methanol with

or without advertising their presence.

NISSAN does not recommend the use of

fuels of which the oxygenate content and

the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN can-

not be readily determined. If in doubt, ask

your service station manager.

If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please

take the following precautions as the usage of

such fuels may cause vehicle performance

problems and/or fuel system damage.

∙The fuel should be unleaded and have

an octane rating no lower than that

recommended for unleaded gasoline.

∙If an oxygenate-blend other than

methanol blend is used, it should

contain no more than 15% oxygenate.

∙If a methanol blend is used, it should

contain no more than 5% methanol

(methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It

should also contain a suitable

amount of appropriate cosolvents

and corrosion inhibitors. If not prop-

erly formulated with appropriate co-

solvents and corrosion inhibitors,

such methanol blends may cause fuel

system damage and/or vehicle per-

formance problems. At this time, suf-

ficient data is not available to ensure

that all methanol blends are suitable

for use in NISSAN vehicles.

If any driveability problems such as engine

stalling and difficult hot-starting are expe-

rienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels,

immediately change to a non-oxygenate

fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.

Take care not to spill gasoline during re-

fueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates

can cause paint damage.

E–15 fuel

E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15%

fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline.

E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed

to run on E-15 fuel. U.S. government regula-

tions require fuel ethanol dispensing

pumps to be identified with small, square,

orange and black label with the common

abbreviation or the appropriate percent-

age for that region.

E–85 fuel

E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85%

fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline.

E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel

Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your ve-

hicle. U.S. government regulations require

fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-

tified by a small, square, orange and black

label with the common abbreviation or the

appropriate percentage for that region.

10-4 Technical and consumer information

Fuel containing MMT

MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manga-

nese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting ad-

ditive. NISSAN does not recommend the

use of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel may

adversely affect vehicle performance, in-

cluding the emissions control system. Note

that while some fuel pumps label MMT

content, not all do, so you may have to

consult your gasoline retailer for more de-

tails.

Aftermarket fuel additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of

any aftermarket fuel additives (for ex-

ample, fuel injector cleaner, octane

booster, intake valve deposit removers,

etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of

these additives intended for gum, varnish

or deposit removal may contain active sol-

vents or similar ingredients that can be

harmful to the fuel system and engine.

Octane rating tips

Using unleaded gasoline with an octane

rating lower than recommended can

cause persistent, heavy “spark knock.”

(“Spark knock” is a metallic rapping

noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine

damage. If you detect a persistent heavy

spark knock even when using gasoline

of the stated octane rating, or if you hear

steady spark knock while holding a

steady speed on level roads, it is recom-

mended that you have a NISSAN dealer

correct the condition. Failure to correct

the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for

which NISSAN is not responsible.

Incorrect ignition timing may result in

spark knock, after-run and/or overheating,

which may cause excessive fuel consump-

tion or engine damage. If any of the above

symptoms are encountered, have your ve-

hicle checked. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.

However, now and then you may notice

light spark knock for a short time while

accelerating or driving up hills.This is not

a cause for concern, because you get the

greatest fuel benefit when there is light

spark knock for a short time under heavy

engine load.

Technical and consumer information 10-5

ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER

RECOMMENDATIONS

Selecting the correct oil

It is essential to choose the correct grade,

quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure

satisfactory engine life and performance.

For additional information, refer to “Recom-

mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”

in this section. NISSAN recommends the

use of an energy conserving oil in order to

improve fuel economy.

Select only engine oils that meet the

American Petroleum Institute (API) certifi-

cation or International Lubricant Standard-

ization and Approval Committee (ILSAC)

certification and SAE viscosity standard.

These oils have the API certification mark

on the front of the container. Oils which do

not have the specified quality label should

not be used as they could cause engine

damage.

Oil additives

NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil

additives. The use of an oil additive is not

necessary when the proper oil type is used

and maintenance intervals are followed.

Oil which may contain foreign matter or

has been previously used should not be

used.

Oil viscosity

The engine oil viscosity or thickness

changes with temperature. Because of

this, it is important to select the engine oil

viscosity based on the temperatures at

which the vehicle will be operated before

the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscos-

ity other than that recommended could

cause serious engine damage.

Selecting the correct oil filter

Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a

high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When

replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or

its equivalent for the reason described in

“Change intervals.”

Change intervals

The oil and oil filter change intervals for

your engine are based on the use of the

specified quality oils and filters. Using en-

gine oil and filters that are not of the speci-

fied quality, or exceeding recommended oil

and filter change intervals could reduce

engine life. Damage to the engine caused

by improper maintenance or use of incor-

LTI2051

10-6 Technical and consumer information

rect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is

not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle

Limited Warranty.

Your engine was filled with a high-quality

engine oil when it was built.You do not have

to change the oil before the first recom-

mended change interval. Oil and filter

change intervals depend upon how you

use your vehicle.

Operation under the following conditions

may require more frequent oil and filter

changes:

∙ repeated short distance driving at cold

outside temperatures

∙ driving in dusty conditions

∙ extensive idling

∙ stop and go commuting

For additional information, refer to the

“Maintenance and schedules” section of

this manual.

AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM

REFRIGERANT AND OIL

RECOMMENDATIONS

The air conditioner system in your

NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the

refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) and

NISSAN A/C system oil Type S (DH-PS) or

the exact equivalents.

CAUTION

The use of any other refrigerant or oil

will cause severe damage to the air con-

ditioning system and will require the re-

placement of all air conditioner system

components.

The refrigerant HFC-134a (R-134a) in your

NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth’s

ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does

not affect the earth’s atmosphere, certain

government regulations require the recov-

ery and recycling of any refrigerant during

automotive air conditioner system service.

A NISSAN dealer has the trained techni-

cians and equipment needed to recover

and recycle your air conditioner system re-

frigerant.

It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN

dealer when servicing your air conditioner

system.

Technical and consumer information 10-7

ENGINE

Model QR25DE VQ35DE

Type Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC

Cylinder arrangement 4-cylinder in-line 6-cylinder, V-block, Slanted at 60°

Bore x Stroke in (mm) 3.504 x 3.937 (89.0 x 100.0) 3.760 x 3.205 (95.5 x 81.4)

Displacement cu in (cm

) 151.82 (2,488) 213.45 (3,498)

Firing order 1–3–4–2 1–2–3–4–5–6

Idle speed

No adjustment is necessary.

CVT (in “N” position)

Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle

speed)

CO%atidle

Spark plug FXE20HE-11C FXE22HR-11

Spark plug gap (Nominal) in (mm) 0.043 (1.1) 0.043 (1.1)

Camshaft operation Timing chain Timing chain

This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.

SPECIFICATIONS

10-8 Technical and consumer information

WHEELS AND TIRES

Wheel type Size Offset in

(mm)

Steel 16 x 7.0J 1.97 (50)

Aluminum 16 x 7.0J 1.97 (50)

Aluminum 17 x 7.5J 1.97 (50)

Aluminum 18 x 7.5J 2.17 (55)

T-type (Steel spare) 16 x 4T 1.18 (30)

T-type (Aluminum spare) 16 x 4T 1.18 (30)

Tire size

2.5 S model P215/60R16

2.5 SV/SL and 3.5 SL models P215/55R17

2.5 SR and 3.5 SL models P235/45R18

Spare tire T135/90D16

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

Overall length in (mm) 191.9 (4,874)

Overall width in (mm) 72.0 (1,830)

Overall height

2.5 L S model in (mm) 57.8 (1,467)

SV and SL models in (mm) 57.8 (1,469)

SR model in (mm) 58 (1,474)

3.5 L SL model in (mm) 57.9 (1,473)

Front and Rear track

2.5 L S, SV and SL models in (mm) 62.4 (1,585)

2.5 L SR model in (mm) 62.0 (1,575)

3.5 L SL model 62.0 (1,575)

Wheelbase in (mm) 109.3 (2,775)

Gross vehicle weight rating lbs. (kg) Refer to the

“F.M.V.S.S./C.M.

V.S.S. certifica-

tion label” on

the center pil-

lar between

the driver’s

side front and

rear doors.

Gross axle weight rating

Front lbs. (kg)

Rear lbs. (kg)

Technical and consumer information 10-9

When planning to drive your NISSAN ve-

hicle in another country, you should first

find out if the fuel available is suitable for

your vehicle's engine.

Using fuel with an octane rating that is too

low may cause engine damage. All gaso-

line vehicles must be operated with un-

leaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking

your vehicle to areas where appropriate

fuel is not available.

When transferring the registration of

your vehicle to another country, state,

province or district, it may be necessary

to modify the vehicle to meet local laws

and regulations.

The laws and regulations for motor vehicle

emission control and safety standards

vary according to the country, state, prov-

ince or district; therefore, vehicle specifica-

tions may differ.

When any vehicle is to be taken into an-

other country, state, province or district

and registered, its modifications, trans-

portation and registration are the re-

sponsibility of the user. NISSAN is not re-

sponsible for any inconvenience that

may result.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(VIN) PLATE

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

plate is attached as shown. This number is

the identification for your vehicle and is

used in the vehicle registration.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

(chassis number)

The vehicle identification number is lo-

cated as shown.

TI1050M WTI0037

WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING

IN ANOTHER COUNTRY VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

10-10 Technical and consumer information

ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER

The number is stamped on the engine as

shown.

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION

LABEL

The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certifi-

cation label is affixed as shown. This label

contains valuable vehicle information, such

as: (GVWR), (GAWR), month and year of

manufacture, (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.

QR25DE

WTI0096

VQ35DE

LTI2133 WTI0172

Technical and consumer information 10-11

EMISSION CONTROL

INFORMATION LABEL

The emission control information label is

attached to the underside of the hood as

shown.

TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION

LABEL

The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire

and Loading Information label. The label is

located as shown.

AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION

LABEL

The air conditioner specification label is af-

fixed to the underside of the hood as

shown.

LTI2269 LTI0224 LTI2268

10-12 Technical and consumer information

To mount the front license plate, attach the

license plate bracket to the bumper fascia

at the location marks (small dimples) using

the two provided screws 䊊

WARNING

∙ It is extremely dangerous to

ride in a cargo area inside a ve-

hicle. In a collision, people riding

in these areas are more likely to

be seriously injured or killed.

∙ Do not allow people to ride in

any area of your vehicle that is

not equipped with seats and

seat belts.

∙ Be sure everyone in your vehicle

is in a seat and using a seat belt

properly.

TERMS

It is important to familiarize yourself

with the following terms before

loading your vehicle:

∙ Curb Weight (actual weight of

your vehicle) - vehicle weight in-

cluding: standard and optional

equipment, fluids, emergency

tools, and spare tire assembly.

This weight does not include

passengers and cargo.

∙ GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb

weight plus the combined weight

of passengers and cargo.

∙ GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rat-

ing) - maximum total combined

weight of the unloaded vehicle,

passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer

tongue load and any other op-

tional equipment. This informa-

tion is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label.

∙ GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) -

maximum weight (load) limit

specified for the front or rear axle.

This information is located on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label.

∙ GCWR (Gross Combined Weight

rating) - The maximum total

weight rating of the vehicle, pas-

sengers, cargo, and trailer.

LTI2244

INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION

Technical and consumer information 10-13

∙ Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load

limit, Total load capacity - maxi-

mum total weight limit specified

of the load (passengers and

cargo) for the vehicle. This is the

maximum combined weight of

occupants and cargo that can be

loaded into the vehicle. If the ve-

hicle is used to tow a trailer, the

trailer tongue weight must be in-

cluded as part of the cargo load.

This information is located on the

Tire and Loading Information la-

bel.

∙ Cargo capacity - permissible

weight of cargo, the subtracted

weight of occupants from the

load limit.

VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY

Do not exceed the load limit of your

vehicle shown as “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo” on

the Tire and Loading Information la-

bel. Do not exceed the number of

occupants shown as “Seating Ca-

pacity” on the Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label.

To get “the combined weight of oc-

cupants and cargo”, add the weight

of all occupants, then add the total

luggage weight. Examples are

shown in the following illustration.

10-14 Technical and consumer information

Steps for determining correct

load limit

1. Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX

lbs. or XXX kg” on your vehicle’s

Tire and Loading Information la-

bel.

2. Determine the combined weight

of the driver and passengers

that will be riding in your vehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight

of the driver and passengers

from XXX lbs. or XXX kg.

4. The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and

luggage load capacity. For ex-

ample, if the XXX amount equals

1,400 lbs. and there will be five

150 lbs. passengers in your ve-

hicle, the amount of available

cargo and luggage load capac-

ity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150) =

650 lbs.) or (640-340 (5 X 70) =

300 kg.)

Example

LTI2335

Technical and consumer information 10-15

Determine the combined weight

of luggage and cargo being

loaded on the vehicle. That

weight may not safely exceed the

available cargo and luggage load

capacity calculated in step 4.

Before driving a loaded vehicle, con-

firm that you do not exceed the

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

or the Gross Axle Weight Rating

(GAWR) for your vehicle. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Measure-

ment of weights” in this section.

Also check tires for proper inflation

pressures. For additional informa-

tion, refer to “Tire and Loading Infor-

mation label” in this section.

LOADING TIPS

∙ The GVW must not exceed GVWR

or GAWR as specified on the

F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification

label.

∙ Do not load the front and rear

axle to the GAWR. Doing so will

exceed the GVWR.

WARNING

∙ Properly secure all cargo with

ropes or straps to help prevent

it from sliding or shifting. Do not

place cargo higher than the

seatbacks. In a sudden stop or

collision, unsecured cargo could

cause personal injury.

∙ Do not load your vehicle any

heavier than the GVWR or the

maximum front and rear

GAWRs. If you do, parts of your

vehicle can break, tire damage

could occur, or it can change the

way your vehicle handles. This

could result in loss of control

and cause personal injury.

∙ Overloading not only can

shorten the life of your vehicle

and the tire, but can also cause

unsafe vehicle handling and

longer braking distances. This

may cause a premature tire fail-

ure which could result in a seri-

ous accident and personal in-

jury. Failures caused by

overloading are not covered by

the vehicle’s warranty.

MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS

Secure loose items to prevent

weight shifts that could affect the

balance of your vehicle.When the ve-

hicle is loaded, drive to a scale and

weigh the front and the rear wheels

separately to determine axle loads.

Individual axle loads should not ex-

ceed either of the gross axle weight

ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle

loads should not exceed the gross

vehicle weight rating (GVWR). These

ratings are given on the vehicle cer-

tification label. If weight ratings are

exceeded, move or remove items to

bring all weights below the ratings.

10-16 Technical and consumer information

Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle.

FLAT TOWING

Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on

the ground is sometimes called flat towing.

This method is sometimes used when

towing a vehicle behind a recreational ve-

hicle, such as a motor home.

CAUTION

∙ Failure to follow these guidelines can

result in severe transmission damage.

∙ Whenever flat towing your vehicle, al-

ways tow forward, never backward.

∙ Never tow your front wheel drive ve-

hicle with the front tires on the

ground. Doing so may cause serious

and expensive damage to the

powertrain.

∙ DO NOT tow any continuously variable

transmission vehicle with all four

wheels on the ground (flat towing).

Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal trans-

mission parts due to lack of transmis-

sion lubrication.

∙ For emergency towing procedures re-

fer to “Towing recommended by

NISSAN” in the “In case of emergency”

section of this manual.

Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT)

To tow a vehicle equipped with a CVT, an

appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed

under the towed vehicle’s drive wheels. Al-

ways follow the dolly manufacturer’s rec-

ommendations when using their product.

DOT (Department of Transportation) Qual-

ity Grades: All passenger car tires must

conform to federal safety requirements in

addition to these grades.

Quality grades can be found where appli-

cable on the tire sidewall between tread

shoulder and maximum section width. For

example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature

Treadwear

The treadwear grade is a comparative rat-

ing based on the wear rate of the tire when

tested under controlled conditions on a

specified government test course. For ex-

ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one

and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the

government course as a tire graded 100.

The relative performance of tires depends

upon the actual conditions of their use,

however, and may depart significantly from

the norm due to variations in driving habits,

service practices and differences in road

characteristics and climate.

TOWING A TRAILER UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING

Technical and consumer information 10-17

Traction AA, A, B and C

The traction grades, from highest to low-

est, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades repre-

sent the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-

ment as measured under controlled

conditions on specified government test

surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire

marked C may have poor traction perfor-

mance.

WARNING

The traction grade assigned to this tire

is based on straight-ahead braking

traction tests, and does not include ac-

celeration, cornering, hydroplaning, or

peak traction characteristics.

Temperature A, B and C

The temperature grades are A (the high-

est), B, and C, representing the tire’s resis-

tance to the generation of heat, and its

ability to dissipate heat when tested under

controlled conditions on a specified indoor

laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tem-

perature can cause the material of the tire

to degenerate and reduce tire life, and ex-

cessive temperature can lead to sudden

tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a

level of performance which all passenger

car tires must meet under the Federal Mo-

tor Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A

represent higher levels of performance on

the laboratory test wheel than the mini-

mum required by law.

WARNING

The temperature grade for this tire is

established for a tire that is properly in-

flated and not overloaded. Excessive

speed, under-inflation, or excessive

loading, either separately or in combi-

nation, can cause heat build-up and

possible tire failure.

Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the fol-

lowing emission warranties:

For USA

1. Emission Defects Warranty

2. Emissions Performance Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with

other vehicle warranties in your Warranty In-

formation Booklet which comes with your

NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a War-

ranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you

may obtain a replacement by writing to:

∙ Nissan North America, Inc.

Consumer Affairs Department

P.O. Box 685003

Franklin, TN 37068-5003

For Canada

Emission Control System Warranty

Details of this warranty may be found with

other vehicle warranties in your Warranty In-

formation Booklet which comes with your

NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a War-

ranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you

may obtain a replacement by writing to:

∙ Nissan Canada Inc.

5290 Orbitor Drive

Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5

EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM

WARRANTY

10-18 Technical and consumer information

For USA

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform the Na-

tional Highway Traffic Safety Admin-

istration (NHTSA) in addition to noti-

fying NISSAN.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints,

it may open an investigation, and if it

finds that a safety defect exists in a

group of vehicles, it may order a re-

call and remedy campaign. However,

NHTSA cannot become involved in

individual problems between you,

your dealer, or NISSAN.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the

Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at

1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153);

go to http://www.safercar.gov; or

write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400

Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C.

20590. You can also obtain other in-

formation about motor vehicle safety

from http://www.safercar.gov.

You may notify NISSAN by contact-

ing our Consumer Affairs Depart-

ment, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1.

For Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a

defect which could cause a crash or

could cause injury or death, you

should immediately inform Trans-

port Canada in addition to notifying

NISSAN.

If Transport Canada receives com-

plaints, it may open an investigation,

and if it finds that a safety defect

exists in a group of vehicles, it may

request that NISSAN conduct a recall

campaign. However, Transport

Canada cannot become involved in

individual problems between you,

your dealer, or NISSAN.

You may contact Transport Canada’s

Defect Investigations and Recalls Divi-

sion toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You

may also report safety defects online

at: https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-

Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-

cp.aspx?lang=eng (English speakers)

or https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/Saf-

Sec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-

cp.aspx?lang=fra (French speakers)

Additional information concerning

motor vehicle safety may be obtained

from Transport Canada’s Road Safety

Information Centre at 1-800-333-0371

or online at www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety

(English speakers) or

www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere

(French speakers).

To notify NISSAN of any safety con-

cerns please contact our Consumer

Information Centre toll free at 1-800-

387-0122.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

Technical and consumer information 10-19

Due to legal requirements in some states

and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may

be required to be in what is called the

“ready condition” for an

Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the

emission control system.

The vehicle is set to the “ready condition”

when it is driven through certain driving

patterns. Usually, the ready condition can

be obtained by ordinary usage of the ve-

hicle.

If a powertrain system component is re-

paired or the battery is disconnected, the

vehicle may be reset to a “not ready” condi-

tion. Before taking the I/M test, check the

vehicle’s inspection/maintenance test

readiness condition. Place the ignition

switch in the ON position without starting

the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator

Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds

and then blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test

condition is “not ready”. If the MIL does not

blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condi-

tion is “ready”. It is recommended that you

visit a NISSAN dealer to set the “ready con-

dition” or to prepare the vehicle for testing.

This vehicle is equipped with an EDR. The

main purpose of an EDR is to record, in

certain collision or near collision-like situa-

tions, such as an air bag deployment or

hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist

in understanding how a vehicle’s systems

performed. The EDR is designed to record

data related to vehicle dynamics and

safety systems for a short period of time,

typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this

vehicle is designed to record such data as:

∙ How various systems in your vehicle

were operating;

∙ Whether or not the driver and passen-

ger safety belts were buckled/fastened;

∙ How far (if at all) the driver was depress-

ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal;

and,

∙ How fast the vehicle was traveling.

∙ Sounds are not recorded.

These data can help provide a better un-

derstanding of the circumstances in which

collisions and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR

data are recorded by your vehicle only if a

nontrivial collision situation occurs; no data

are recorded by the EDR under normal driv-

ing conditions and no personal data (e.g.

name, gender, age and collision location)

are recorded. However, other parties, such

as law enforcement, could combine the

EDR data with the type of personally iden-

tifying data routinely acquired during a col-

lision investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special

equipment is required and access to the

vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to

the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN

dealer, other parties, such as law enforce-

ment, that have the special equipment,can

read the information if they have access to

the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only be

accessed with the consent of the vehicle

owner or lessee or as otherwise required or

permitted by law.

READINESS FOR INSPECTION/

MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)

10-20 Technical and consumer information

Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this

model year and prior can be purchased. A

Genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best

source of service and repair information for

your vehicle. This manual is the same one

used by the factory-trained technicians

working at NISSAN dealerships. Genuine

NISSAN Owner’s Manuals can also be pur-

chased.

For USA

For current pricing and availability of Genu-

ine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:

www.nissan-techinfo.com

For current pricing and availability of Genu-

ine NISSAN Owner’s Manuals, contact:

1-800-247-5321

For Canada

To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN

Service Manual or Owner’s Manual, for this

model year and prior, please contact your

nearest NISSAN dealer.For the phone num-

ber and location of a NISSAN dealer in your

area, call the NISSAN Information Center at

1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN rep-

resentative will assist you.

OWNER’S MANUAL/SERVICE

MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION

Technical and consumer information 10-21

MEMO

10-22 Technical and consumer information

11 Index

Air bag (See supplemental restraint

system) .....................1-44

Air bag system

Front (See supplemental front impact air

bagsystem)................1-51

Airbagwarninglight..........1-62, 2-15

Air bag warning light,

supplemental ..............1-62, 2-15

Air cleaner housing filter ..........8-18

Air conditioner

Air conditioner operation .....4-16,4-21

Air conditioner specification label . .10-12

Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil

recommendations ............10-7

Air conditioner system refrigerant

recommendations ............10-7

Heater and air conditioner

controls................4-13,4-21

Servicing air conditioner ........4-24

Air flow charts .................4-17

Alarm system

(See vehicle security system)........2-31

Anchor point locations............1-27

Antenna ....................4-50

Antifreeze....................5-91

Anti-lock brake warning light ........2-11

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) ......5-81

Armrests.....................1-7

Audible reminders ..............2-17

Audio system .................4-24

AMradioreception............4-25

Bluetooth® audio .............4-47

Compact disc (CD) player . . . .4-35, 4-41

FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD)

player....................4-33

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)

player....................4-37

FMradioreception............4-25

iPod®Player................4-44

iPod® player operation .........4-44

Radio ....................4-24

USBinterface...............4-42

USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection

Port.....................4-42

Autolightswitch...............2-36

Automatic

Automatic power window switch . . .2-51

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror ....3-30

Automatic door locks .............3-6

Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) . . .2-11,

5-58

Battery..................5-91,8-14

Charge warning light...........2-12

Battery replacement ............8-24

Keyfob...................8-24

NISSAN Intelligent Key® .........8-25

Before starting the engine .........5-12

Belt(Seedrivebelt)..............8-16

Blind Spot Warning (BSW) ..........5-22

Bluetooth® audio ...............4-47

Bluetooth® hands-free phone system. .4-54

Booster seats .................1-40

Brake

Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . .5-81

Brakefluid.................8-12

Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . .8-28

Brakesystem...............5-81

Brakewarninglight............2-11

Brakewearindicators.......2-17,8-21

Parking brake operation.........5-21

Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . .8-21

Brakeassist..................5-82

Brakefluid...................8-12

Brakes......................8-21

Brakesystem.................5-81

Break-in schedule ..............5-76

Brightness control

Instrument panel.............2-39

Bulb check/instrument panel .......2-10

Bulb replacement ..............8-28

Capacities and recommended fuel/

lubricants....................10-2

Cargo

(See vehicle loading information).....10-13

Car phone or CB radio ...........4-54

CDcareandcleaning............4-48

CD player (See audio system) . . . .4-35, 4-41

Check tire pressure .............2-29

Childrestraints........1-20, 1-21, 1-23, 1-25

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren)System..............1-25

Precautions on child

restraints.........1-23, 1-29, 1-36, 1-41

Top tether strap anchor point

locations...................1-27

Child safety rear door lock ..........3-6

Chimes, audible reminders..........2-17

Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . .7-2, 7-4

Clock setting (models without Navigation

System)..................4-34,4-38

C.M.V.S.S. certification label .........10-11

Coldweatherdriving.............5-91

Compact disc (CD) player .......4-35,4-41

Compass .....................2-7

Console box ..................2-47

Console light ..................2-54

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) .......................5-14

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) fluid ..................8-11

Driving with Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) ............5-14

Controls

Heater and air conditioner

controls................4-13,4-21

Coolant

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants...............10-2

Changing engine coolant .........8-6

Checking engine coolant level ......8-6

Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-5

Corrosionprotection..............7-7

Cruisecontrol..................5-41

Cupholders...............2-48,2-49

Daytime Running Light System ......2-38

Defroster switch

Rear window and outside mirror

defrosterswitch..............2-35

Dimensions and weights...........10-9

Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . .2-39

Door locks ..................3-4,3-5

Drivebelt ....................8-16

Driving

Cold weather driving ...........5-91

Driving with Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) ............5-14

Precautions when starting and

driving.....................5-2

Drivingthevehicle...............5-14

E-CALL (SOS) SWITCH .............2-43

Economy - fuel.................5-78

Emergency engine shutoff .......5-11, 6-3

Emission control information label . . . .10-12

Emission control system warranty . . . .10-18

Engine

Before starting the engine ........5-12

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants...............10-2

Changing engine coolant .........8-6

Changing engine oil ............8-8

Changing engine oil filter.........8-10

Checking engine coolant level ......8-6

Checking engine oil level .........8-7

Engine compartment check

locations...................8-3

Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-5

Engine cooling system ..........8-5

Engine oil ...................8-7

Engine oil and oil filter

recommendation .............10-6

Engine oil viscosity.............10-6

Engine serial number...........10-11

Engine specifications ...........10-8

Starting the engine ............5-13

Engine Block Heater .............5-92

Engine coolant temperature gauge ....2-5

EventDatarecorders............10-20

Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide).......5-2

Explanation of maintenance items .....9-2

Explanation of scheduled maintenance

tems.......................9-5

Extended storage switch ..........2-44

Eyeglasscase.................2-47

Firstaidkit....................6-2

Flashers

(See hazard warning flasher switch) . . . .6-2

Flattire....................6-3,6-4

Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . .7-6

Fluid

Brakefluid..................8-12

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants...............10-2

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

fluid......................8-11

Engine coolant ...............8-5

11-2

Engine oil ...................8-7

Powersteeringfluid............8-11

Windshield-washer fluid .........8-13

F.M.V.S.S. certification label..........10-11

Foglightswitch................2-40

Front air bag system

(See supplemental restraint system). . . .1-51

Front and rear sonar system ........5-86

Front-door pocket ..............2-45

Front power seat adjustment ........1-4

Frontseats....................1-2

Fuel

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants...............10-2

Fuel economy ...............5-78

Fuel-filler door and cap..........3-26

Fuel-filler door lock opener lever ....3-26

Fuel gauge ..................2-6

Fueloctanerating.............10-5

Fuel recommendation ..........10-3

Loose fuel cap warning .........2-28

Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . . .5-77

Fuel-filler door .................3-26

Fuel gauge ....................2-6

Fuses .......................8-21

Fusiblelinks...................8-22

Garage door opener, HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver ............2-56,2-58,2-59

Gascap.....................3-26

Gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-5

Fuel gauge ..................2-6

Odometer ..................2-4

Speedometer ................2-4

Tachometer .................2-5

Trip odometer ................2-4

General maintenance .............9-2

Glovebox....................2-46

Gloveboxlock.................2-46

Hands-free phone system, Bluetooth® . .4-54

Hazard warning flasher switch........6-2

Headlight and turn signal switch......2-35

Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . .2-35

Headlights...................8-26

Headrestraints.................1-8

Heated seat switches.............2-41

Heated steering wheel switch .......2-42

Heater

Heater and air conditioner

controls................4-13,4-21

Heater operation ..........4-14,4-22

Hill start assist system ............5-86

HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver ............2-56,2-58,2-59

Hood .......................3-23

Horn.......................2-40

Ignition switch

Push-button ignition switch .......5-9

Immobilizer system...........2-32,5-12

Important vehicle information label. . . .10-11

In-cabinmicrofilter..............8-19

Increasing fuel economy...........5-78

Indicator

NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge

indicator...................5-11

Indicator lights and audible reminders

(See warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders).................2-15,3-17

Inside automatic anti-glare mirror.....3-30

Instrument brightness control .......2-39

Instrument panel .............0-6,2-2

Instrument panel dimmer switch .....2-39

Intelligent Cruise Control (ICC) .......5-43

Intelligent Forward Collision Warning

(I-FCW)......................5-65

Intelligent Key system

Key operating range ............3-8

Key operation ................3-10

Mechanical key ...............3-3

Remote keyless entry operation ....3-13

Troubleshooting guide ..........3-18

Warning signals ..............3-18

Interiorlight...................2-54

Interior trunk lid release . . . . . . . . . . .3-25

iPod®Player ..................4-44

ISOFIX child restraints .............1-25

Jumpstarting..............6-10,8-15

Key.........................3-2

11-3

Key fob battery replacement ........8-24

Keyless entry

With Intelligent Key system

(See Intelligent Key system) .......3-13

Keys

NISSAN Intelligent Key® ..........3-2

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System

keys......................3-4

Label

Tire and Loading Information label . .10-12

Labels

Air conditioner specification label . . .10-12

C.M.V.S.S. certification label .......10-11

Emission control information label . .10-12

Engine serial number...........10-11

F.M.V.S.S. certification label........10-11

Tire and Loading Information label . .10-12

Vehicle identification number (VIN) . .10-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

plate.....................10-10

Warning labels (for SRS) ..........1-61

LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for

CHildren)System................1-25

License plate

Installing the license plate .......10-13

Light

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-62, 2-15

Brake light (See stop light). . . . . . . .8-28

Bulb check/instrument panel ......2-10

Bulb replacement .............8-28

Charge warning light ...........2-12

Console light ................2-54

Exterior and Interior lights. . . . . . . .8-28

Foglights..................8-26

Foglightswitch..............2-40

Headlight and turn signal switch....2-35

Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-35

Headlights.................8-26

Interiorlight.................2-54

Lightbulbs.................8-26

Low tire pressure warning light .....2-12

Low windshield-washer fluid warning

light......................2-29

Passenger air bag and status light. . .1-53

Personal lights ...............2-55

Security indicator light ..........2-17

Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . .2-55

Trunklight..................2-55

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders ...............2-15,3-17

Lights......................8-26

Maplights..................2-55

Lock

Child safety rear door lock ........3-6

Door locks ................3-4,3-5

Fuel-filler door lock opener lever . . . .3-26

Gloveboxlock...............2-46

Power door locks ...........3-5, 3-6

Trunk lid lock opener lever........3-24

Loose fuel cap warning ...........2-28

Low fuel warning light . . . . . . . . .2-14, 2-28

Low tire pressure warning light .......2-12

Low windshield-washer fluid warning

light........................2-29

Luggage

(See vehicle loading information) .....10-13

Maintenance

General maintenance ...........9-2

Insidethevehicle..............9-3

Maintenance precautions.........8-2

Outsidethevehicle.............9-2

Seat belt maintenance ..........1-19

Under the hood and vehicle .......9-4

Maintenance log ................9-13

Maintenance requirements..........9-2

Maintenance schedules ............9-7

Maintenance under severe operation

conditions....................9-12

Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . .2-16

Manual front seat adjustment ........1-3

Maplights....................2-55

Meters and gauges...............2-3

Instrument brightness control .....2-39

Mirror

Automatic anti-glare inside mirror. . .3-30

Outsidemirrors..............3-32

Rearview ..................3-30

Vanitymirror................3-30

Mirrors......................3-30

Moonroof ....................2-52

NissanConnect® Owner's Manual ......4-2

NISSAN Intelligent Key® ............3-2

NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge

indicator.....................5-11

NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System..................2-32,5-12

11-4

Octane rating (See fuel octane rating). . .10-5

Odometer ....................2-4

Oil

Capacities and recommended

fuel/lubricants...............10-2

Changing engine oil ............8-8

Changing engine oil filter.........8-10

Checking engine oil level .........8-7

Engine oil ...................8-7

Engine oil and oil filter

recommendation .............10-6

Engine oil viscosity.............10-6

One shot call...............4-57,4-58

Outsidemirrors................3-32

Overhead sunglasses holder ........2-47

Overheat

Ifyourvehicleoverheats.........6-12

Owner's manual order form ........10-21

Owner's manual/service manual order

information ..................10-21

Parking

Parking brake operation .........5-21

Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . .5-80

Personal lights .................2-55

Phone, Bluetooth® hands-free system . .4-54

Power

Power door locks ...........3-5,3-6

Powerrearwindows ...........2-51

Powersteeringfluid............8-11

Power steering system .........5-80

Powerwindows..............2-49

Rearpowerwindows...........2-51

Powersteering.................5-80

Powersteeringfluid..............8-11

Precautions

Maintenance precautions.........8-2

Precautions on booster

seats............1-23, 1-29, 1-36, 1-41

Precautions on child

restraints.........1-23, 1-29, 1-36, 1-41

Precautions on seat belt usage .....1-12

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system ....................1-44

Precautions when starting and

driving.....................5-2

Push starting ..................6-12

Radio

Car phone or CB radio ..........4-54

FM-AM radio with compact disc (CD)

player ....................4-33

FM/AM/SAT radio with compact disc (CD)

player ....................4-37

Readiness for inspection maintenance

(I/M) test ....................10-20

RearCrossTrafficAlert(RCTA) .......5-32

Rearpowerwindows.............2-51

Rearseat.....................1-6

Rearviewmirror................3-30

RearViewMonitor................4-3

Rear window and outside mirror defroster

switch......................2-35

Recommended Fluids ............10-2

Recorders

EventData.................10-20

Refrigerant recommendation ........10-7

Registering a vehicle in another

country .....................10-10

Remote Engine Start ..........3-20,5-14

Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-19

Safety

Child safety rear door lock ........3-6

Childseatbelts......1-23, 1-29, 1-36, 1-41

Reporting safety defects (US only) . .10-19

Seat adjustment

Front manual seat adjustment ......1-3

Front power seat adjustment ......1-4

Rear seat adjustment ...........1-6

Seatback pockets ...............2-46

Seat belt

Childsafety.................1-20

Infants and small children ........1-21

InjuredPerson................1-15

Largerchildren...............1-21

Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-12

Pregnant women..............1-15

Seat belt extenders ............1-19

Seat belt maintenance ..........1-19

Seatbelts................1-12, 7-6

Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . .1-19

Three-point type with retractor . . . . .1-15

Seat belt extenders ..............1-19

Seatbeltwarninglight.........1-14, 2-15

Seats

Adjustment ..................1-2

11-5

Armrests ...................1-7

Frontseats..................1-2

Manual front seat adjustment ......1-3

Rearseat...................1-6

Security indicator light ............2-17

Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer

System), engine start ..........2-32,5-12

Security systems

Vehicle security system..........2-31

Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21

Service manual order form .........10-21

Servicing air conditioner ...........4-24

Shifting

Continuously Variable Transmission

(CVT) .....................5-16

Shiftleverlockrelease............5-19

Shoulder belt height adjustment ......1-19

Siri® Eyes-Free .................4-50

Spark plug replacement ...........8-17

Spark plugs ...................8-17

Specifications .................10-8

Speedometer ..................2-4

Speedometer and odometer ........2-4

Spotlights (See map light) . . . . . . . . . .2-55

SRS warning label ...............1-61

Stability control ................5-83

Standard maintenance ............9-7

Starting

Before starting the engine ........5-12

Jumpstarting............6-10,8-15

Precautions when starting and

driving .....................5-2

Push starting ................6-12

Starting the engine ............5-13

Starting the engine ..............5-13

Steering

Powersteeringfluid............8-11

Power steering system . . . . . . . . .5-80

Steering wheel .................3-28

Stoplight....................8-28

Storage.....................2-45

Sunglasses case................2-47

Sunglasses holder...............2-47

Sunroof (see Moonroof) ...........2-52

Sunvisors....................3-29

Supplemental air bag warning

light.....................1-62, 2-15

Supplemental front impact air bag

system ......................1-51

Supplemental restraint system

Information and warning labels.....1-61

Precautions on supplemental restraint

system ....................1-44

Supplemental restraint system

(Supplemental air bag system) .......1-44

Switch

Autolightswitch..............2-36

Automatic power window switch . . .2-51

Foglightswitch..............2-40

Hazard warning flasher switch......6-2

Headlight and turn signal switch....2-35

Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-35

Instrument brightness control .....2-39

Power door lock switch........3-5,3-6

Rear window and outside mirror

defrosterswitch..............2-35

Turn signal switch .............2-39

Tachometer ...................2-5

Temperature gauge

Engine coolant temperature gauge . .2-5

Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System),

engine start ...............2-32,5-12

Three-waycatalyst...............5-2

Tilt

Telescopic steering . . . . . . . . . . . .3-29

Tire

lattire..................6-3,6-4

Spare tire................6-5,8-43

Tire and Loading Information label . .10-12

Tire chains .................8-39

Tire pressure ................8-31

Tirerotation................8-40

Types of tires ................8-38

Uniform tire quality grading.......10-17

Wheels and tires ..............8-31

Wheel/tire size ...............10-9

Tire pressure

Low tire pressure warning light .....2-12

Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS)....................5-3,6-3

Towing

4-wheel drive models...........6-14

Flattowing.................10-17

Trailertowing ...............10-17

Towingatrailer................10-17

Towingyourvehicle..............6-13

Transceiver

HomeLink® Universal

Transceiver ..........2-56,2-58,2-59

11-6

Transmission

Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)

fluid......................8-11

Driving with Continuously Variable

Transmission (CVT) ............5-14

Transmission shift lever lock release . . .5-19

Travel (See registering a vehicle in another

country).....................10-10

Trip odometer ..................2-4

Trunk access through the rear

seat.....................1-6, 3-25

Trunklid.....................3-24

Trunk lid lock opener lever..........3-24

Trunklight....................2-55

Turn signal switch ...............2-39

Uniform tire quality grading.........10-17

USBinterface..................4-42

Audio file operation ............4-43

Vanitymirror..................3-30

Variable voltage control system ......8-16

Vehicle dimensions and weights ......10-9

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF

switch......................2-42

Vehicle dynamic control (VDC) system . .5-83

Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . .5-83

Vehicle identification .............10-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . .10-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

(Chassis number)...............10-10

Vehicle identification number (VIN)

plate.......................10-10

Vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . .2-32, 5-12

Vehicle loading information ........10-13

Vehiclerecovery................6-14

Vehicle security system............2-31

Vehicle security system (NISSAN Vehicle

Immobilizer System), engine start . .2-32, 5-12

Ventilators ....................4-11

Visors......................3-29

Voice Prompt Interrupt............4-57

Warning

Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-62, 2-15

Anti-lock brake warning light ......2-11

Battery charge warning light ......2-12

Brakewarninglight............2-11

Hazard warning flasher switch......6-2

Loose fuel cap warning .........2-28

Low fuel warning light . . . . . . .2-14, 2-28

Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-12

Low windshield-washer fluid warning

light......................2-29

Passenger air bag and status light. . .1-53

Seatbeltwarninglight.......1-14, 2-15

Supplemental air bag warning

light...................1-62, 2-15

TPMS......................2-4

Vehicle security system..........2-31

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders ...............2-15,3-17

Warning labels (for SRS) ..........1-61

Warning/indicator lights and audible

reminders .................2-15,3-17

Audible reminders ..........2-15,3-17

Indicatorlights............2-15, 3-17

Warninglights............2-15,3-17

Warninglights..............2-15, 3-17

Warning lights, indicator lights and audible

reminders ....................2-10

Weights (See dimensions and weights) . .10-9

Wheels and tires ................8-31

Wheel/tire size .................10-9

When traveling or registering in another

country .....................10-10

Windows ....................2-49

Locking passengers' windows .....2-51

Powerrearwindows ...........2-51

Powerwindows..............2-49

Rearpowerwindows...........2-51

Windshield-washer fluid ...........8-13

Windshield wiper blades ...........8-19

Wiper

Wiper blades ................8-19

Wiper and washer switch ..........2-34

11-7

MEMO

FUEL RECOMMENDATION:

Use unleaded regular gasoline with an oc-

tane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock

Index) number (Research octane number

91).

CAUTION

∙ Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door

label can operate on E-85. Fuel system

or other damage can occur if E-85 is

used in vehicles that are not designed

to run on E-85.

∙ Using a fuel other than that specified

could adversely affect the emission

control system, and may also affect

the warranty coverage.

∙ Under no circumstances should a

leaded gasoline be used, because this

will damage the three-way catalyst.

∙ Do not use a fuel containing more

than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your

vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel

containing more than 15% ethanol.

Using a fuel containing more than 15%

ethanol in a vehicle not specifically

designed for a fuel containing more

than 15% ethanol can adversely affect

the emission control devices and sys-

tems of the vehicle. Damage caused

by such fuel is not covered by the

NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

∙ Do not use fuel that contains the oc-

tane booster methylcyclopentadienyl

manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using

fuel containing MMT may adversely

affect vehicle performance and ve-

hicle emissions. Not all fuel dispens-

ers are labeled to indicate MMT con-

tent, so you may have to consult your

gasoline retailer for more details.

Note that Federal and California laws

prohibit the use of MMT in reformu-

lated gasoline.

∙ U.S. government regulations require

ethanol dispensing pumps to be iden-

tified by a small, square, orange and

black label with the common abbre-

viation or the appropriate percentage

for that region.

For additional information, refer to “Recom-

mended fluids/lubricants and capacities”

in the “Technical and consumer informa-

tion” section of this manual.

ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:

• Genuine “Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN”

For additional information, refer to “Engine

oil and oil filter recommendations” in the

“Technical and consumer information” sec-

tion of this manual.

COLD TIRE PRESSURE:

For additional information, refer to “Tire and

Loading Information label” in the “Technical

and consumer information” section of this

manual.

The label is typically located on the driver

side center pillar or on the driver’s door. For

additional information, refer to “Wheels and

tires” in the “Do-it-yourself” section of this

manual.

GAS STATION INFORMATION

2018 Nissan Altima Sedan | Owner's Manual And Maintenance Information USA Owner

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation